+++ /dev/null
-\r
-IEEEabrv.bib\r
-V1.12 (2007/01/11)\r
-Copyright (c) 2002-2007 by Michael Shell\r
-See: http://www.michaelshell.org/\r
-for current contact information.\r
-\r
-BibTeX bibliography string definitions of the ABBREVIATED titles of\r
-IEEE journals and magazines and online publications.\r
-\r
-This file is designed for bibliography styles that require \r
-abbreviated titles and is not for use in bibliographies that\r
-require full-length titles.\r
-\r
-Support sites:\r
-http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/\r
-http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/\r
-and/or\r
-http://www.ieee.org/\r
-\r
-Special thanks to Laura Hyslop and ken Rawson of IEEE for their help\r
-in obtaining the information needed to compile this file. Also,\r
-Volker Kuhlmann and Moritz Borgmann kindly provided some corrections\r
-and additions.\r
-\r
-*************************************************************************\r
-Legal Notice:\r
-This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or\r
-implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or\r
-FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE! \r
-User assumes all risk.\r
-In no event shall IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for\r
-any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental,\r
-consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse\r
-of any information contained here.\r
-\r
-All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not\r
-necessarily endorsed by the IEEE.\r
-\r
-This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL)\r
-( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used,\r
-distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included\r
-in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released\r
-2003/12/01 or later.\r
-Retain all contribution notices and credits.\r
-** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including **\r
-** renaming them and changing author support contact information. **\r
-\r
-File list of work: IEEEabrv.bib, IEEEfull.bib, IEEEexample.bib,\r
- IEEEtran.bst, IEEEtranS.bst, IEEEtranSA.bst,\r
- IEEEtranN.bst, IEEEtranSN.bst, IEEEtran_bst_HOWTO.pdf\r
-*************************************************************************\r
-\r
-\r
-USAGE:\r
-\r
-\bibliographystyle{mybstfile}\r
-\bibliography{IEEEabrv,mybibfile}\r
-\r
-where the IEEE titles in the .bib database entries use the strings\r
-defined here. e.g.,\r
-\r
-\r
- journal = IEEE_J_AC,\r
-\r
-\r
-to yield "{IEEE} Trans. Automat. Contr."\r
-\r
-\r
-IEEE uses abbreviated journal titles in their bibliographies -\r
-this file is suitable for work that is to be submitted to the IEEE.\r
-\r
-\r
-For work that requires full-length titles, you should use the full\r
-titles provided in the companion file, IEEEfull.bib.\r
-\r
-\r
-** NOTES **\r
-\r
- 1. Journals have been grouped according to subject in order to make it\r
- easier to locate and extract the definitions for related journals - \r
- as most works use references that are confined to a single topic.\r
- Magazines are listed in straight alphabetical order.\r
-\r
- 2. String names are closely based on IEEE's own internal acronyms.\r
- \r
- 3. Abbreviations follow IEEE's style.\r
-\r
- 4. Older, out-of-print IEEE titles are included (but not including titles\r
- dating prior to IEEE's formation from the IRE and AIEE in 1963).\r
-\r
- 5. The following NEW/current journal definitions have been disabled because\r
- their abbreviations have not yet been verified:\r
- \r
- STRING{IEEE_J_CBB = "{IEEE/ACM} Trans. Comput. Biology Bioinformatics"}\r
- STRING{IEEE_J_CJECE = "Canadian J. Elect. Comput. Eng."}\r
- STRING{IEEE_J_DSC = "{IEEE} Trans. Dependable Secure Comput."}\r
- STRING{IEEE_O_DSO = "{IEEE} Distrib. Syst. Online"}\r
- \r
- 6. The following OLD journal definitions have been disabled because\r
- their abbreviations have not yet been found/verified:\r
-\r
- STRING{IEEE_J_BCTV = "{IEEE} Trans. Broadcast Television Receivers"}\r
- STRING{IEEE_J_EWS = "{IEEE} Trans. Eng. Writing Speech"}\r
-\r
-If you know what the proper abbreviation is for a string in #5 or #6 above,\r
-email me and I will correct them in the next release.\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-IEEE Journals \r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-aerospace and military\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_AES = "{IEEE} Trans. Aerosp. Electron. Syst."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_ANE = "{IEEE} Trans. Aerosp. Navig. Electron."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_ANNE = "{IEEE} Trans. Aeronaut. Navig. Electron."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_AS = "{IEEE} Trans. Aerosp."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_AIRE = "{IEEE} Trans. Airborne Electron."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_MIL = "{IEEE} Trans. Mil. Electron."}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-autos, transportation and vehicles (non-aerospace)\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_ITS = "{IEEE} Trans. Intell. Transp. Syst."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_VT = "{IEEE} Trans. Veh. Technol."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_VC = "{IEEE} Trans. Veh. Commun."}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-circuits, signals, systems, audio and controls\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_SPL = "{IEEE} Signal Process. Lett."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_ASSP = "{IEEE} Trans. Acoust., Speech, Signal Process."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_AU = "{IEEE} Trans. Audio"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_AUEA = "{IEEE} Trans. Audio Electroacoust."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_AC = "{IEEE} Trans. Autom. Control"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CAS = "{IEEE} Trans. Circuits Syst."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CASVT = "{IEEE} Trans. Circuits Syst. Video Technol."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CASI = "{IEEE} Trans. Circuits Syst. {I}"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CASII = "{IEEE} Trans. Circuits Syst. {II}"}\r
-in 2004 CASI and CASII renamed part title to CASI_RP and CASII_EB, respectively.\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CASI_RP = "{IEEE} Trans. Circuits Syst. {I}"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CASII_EB = "{IEEE} Trans. Circuits Syst. {II}"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CT = "{IEEE} Trans. Circuit Theory"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CST = "{IEEE} Trans. Control Syst. Technol."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_SP = "{IEEE} Trans. Signal Process."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_SU = "{IEEE} Trans. Sonics Ultrason."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_SAP = "{IEEE} Trans. Speech Audio Process."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_UE = "{IEEE} Trans. Ultrason. Eng."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_UFFC = "{IEEE} Trans. Ultrason., Ferroelectr., Freq. Control"}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-communications\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_COML = "{IEEE} Commun. Lett."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_JSAC = "{IEEE} J. Sel. Areas Commun."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_COM = "{IEEE} Trans. Commun."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_COMT = "{IEEE} Trans. Commun. Technol."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_WCOM = "{IEEE} Trans. Wireless Commun."}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-components, packaging and manufacturing\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_ADVP = "{IEEE} Trans. Adv. Packag."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CHMT = "{IEEE} Trans. Compon., Hybrids, Manuf. Technol."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CPMTA = "{IEEE} Trans. Compon., Packag., Manuf. Technol. {A}"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CPMTB = "{IEEE} Trans. Compon., Packag., Manuf. Technol. {B}"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CPMTC = "{IEEE} Trans. Compon., Packag., Manuf. Technol. {C}"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CAPT = "{IEEE} Trans. Compon. Packag. Technol."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CAPTS = "{IEEE} Trans. Compon. Packag. Technol."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CPART = "{IEEE} Trans. Compon. Parts"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_EPM = "{IEEE} Trans. Electron. Packag. Manuf."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_MFT = "{IEEE} Trans. Manuf. Technol."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_PHP = "{IEEE} Trans. Parts, Hybrids, Packag."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_PMP = "{IEEE} Trans. Parts, Mater., Packag."}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-CAD\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_TCAD = "{IEEE} J. Technol. Comput. Aided Design"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CAD = "{IEEE} Trans. Comput.-Aided Design Integr. Circuits Syst."}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-coding, data, information, knowledge\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_IT = "{IEEE} Trans. Inf. Theory"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_KDE = "{IEEE} Trans. Knowl. Data Eng."}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-computers, computation, networking and software\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_C = "{IEEE} Trans. Comput."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CAL = "{IEEE} Comput. Archit. Lett."}\r
-disabled till definition is verified\r
-STRING{IEEE_J_DSC = "{IEEE} Trans. Dependable Secure Comput."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_ECOMP = "{IEEE} Trans. Electron. Comput."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_EVC = "{IEEE} Trans. Evol. Comput."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_FUZZ = "{IEEE} Trans. Fuzzy Syst."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_IFS = "{IEEE} Trans. Inf. Forensics Security"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_MC = "{IEEE} Trans. Mobile Comput."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_NET = "{IEEE/ACM} Trans. Netw."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_NN = "{IEEE} Trans. Neural Netw."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_PDS = "{IEEE} Trans. Parallel Distrib. Syst."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_SE = "{IEEE} Trans. Softw. Eng."}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-computer graphics, imaging, and multimedia\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_JDT = "{IEEE/OSA} J. Display Technol."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_IP = "{IEEE} Trans. Image Process."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_MM = "{IEEE} Trans. Multimedia"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_VCG = "{IEEE} Trans. Vis. Comput. Graphics"}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-cybernetics, ergonomics, robots, man-machine, and automation\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_ASE = "{IEEE} Trans. Autom. Sci. Eng."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_JRA = "{IEEE} J. Robot. Autom."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_HFE = "{IEEE} Trans. Hum. Factors Electron."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_MMS = "{IEEE} Trans. Man-Mach. Syst."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_PAMI = "{IEEE} Trans. Pattern Anal. Mach. Intell."}\r
-in 1989 JRA became RA\r
-in August 2004, RA split into ASE and RO\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_RA = "{IEEE} Trans. Robot. Autom."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_RO = "{IEEE} Trans. Robot."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_SMC = "{IEEE} Trans. Syst., Man, Cybern."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_SMCA = "{IEEE} Trans. Syst., Man, Cybern. {A}"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_SMCB = "{IEEE} Trans. Syst., Man, Cybern. {B}"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_SMCC = "{IEEE} Trans. Syst., Man, Cybern. {C}"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_SSC = "{IEEE} Trans. Syst. Sci. Cybern."}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-earth, wind, fire and water\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_GE = "{IEEE} Trans. Geosci. Electron."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_GRS = "{IEEE} Trans. Geosci. Remote Sens."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_GRSL = "{IEEE} Geosci. Remote Sens. Lett."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_OE = "{IEEE} J. Ocean. Eng."}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-education, engineering, history, IEEE, professional\r
-disabled till definition is verified\r
-STRING{IEEE_J_CJECE = "Canadian J. Elect. Comput. Eng."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_PROC = "Proc. {IEEE}"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_EDU = "{IEEE} Trans. Educ."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_EM = "{IEEE} Trans. Eng. Manag."}\r
-disabled till definition is verified\r
-STRING{IEEE_J_EWS = "{IEEE} Trans. Eng. Writing Speech"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_PC = "{IEEE} Trans. Prof. Commun."}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-electromagnetics, antennas, EMI, magnetics and microwave\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_AWPL = "{IEEE} Antennas Wireless Propag. Lett."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_MGWL = "{IEEE} Microw. Guided Wave Lett."}\r
-IEEE seems to want "Compon." here, not "Comp."\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_MWCL = "{IEEE} Microw. Wireless Compon. Lett."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_AP = "{IEEE} Trans. Antennas Propag."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_EMC = "{IEEE} Trans. Electromagn. Compat."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_MAG = "{IEEE} Trans. Magn."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_MTT = "{IEEE} Trans. Microw. Theory Tech."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_RFI = "{IEEE} Trans. Radio Freq. Interference"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_TJMJ = "{IEEE} Transl. J. Magn. Jpn."}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-energy and power\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_EC = "{IEEE} Trans. Energy Convers."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_PEL = "{IEEE} Power Electron. Lett."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_PWRAS = "{IEEE} Trans. Power App. Syst."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_PWRD = "{IEEE} Trans. Power Del."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_PWRE = "{IEEE} Trans. Power Electron."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_PWRS = "{IEEE} Trans. Power Syst."}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-industrial, commercial and consumer\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_APPIND = "{IEEE} Trans. Appl. Ind."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_BC = "{IEEE} Trans. Broadcast."}\r
-disabled till definition is verified\r
-STRING{IEEE_J_BCTV = "{IEEE} Trans. Broadcast Television Receivers"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CE = "{IEEE} Trans. Consum. Electron."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_IE = "{IEEE} Trans. Ind. Electron."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_IECI = "{IEEE} Trans. Ind. Electron. Contr. Instrum."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_IA = "{IEEE} Trans. Ind. Appl."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_IGA = "{IEEE} Trans. Ind. Gen. Appl."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_IINF = "{IEEE} Trans. Ind. Informat."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_PSE = "{IEEE} J. Product Safety Eng."}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-instrumentation and measurement\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_IM = "{IEEE} Trans. Instrum. Meas."}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-insulation and materials\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_JEM = "{IEEE/TMS} J. Electron. Mater."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_DEI = "{IEEE} Trans. Dielectr. Electr. Insul."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_EI = "{IEEE} Trans. Electr. Insul."}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-mechanical\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_MECH = "{IEEE/ASME} Trans. Mechatronics"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_MEMS = "J. Microelectromech. Syst."}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-medical and biological\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_BME = "{IEEE} Trans. Biomed. Eng."}\r
-Note: The B-ME journal later dropped the hyphen and became the BME.\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_B-ME = "{IEEE} Trans. Bio-Med. Eng."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_BMELC = "{IEEE} Trans. Bio-Med. Electron."}\r
-disabled till definition is verified\r
-STRING{IEEE_J_CBB = "{IEEE/ACM} Trans. Comput. Biology Bioinformatics"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_ITBM = "{IEEE} Trans. Inf. Technol. Biomed."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_ME = "{IEEE} Trans. Med. Electron."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_MI = "{IEEE} Trans. Med. Imag."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_NB = "{IEEE} Trans. Nanobiosci."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_NSRE = "{IEEE} Trans. Neural Syst. Rehabil. Eng."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_RE = "{IEEE} Trans. Rehabil. Eng."}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
- optics, lightwave and photonics\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_PTL = "{IEEE} Photon. Technol. Lett."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_JLT = "J. Lightw. Technol."}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-physics, electrons, nanotechnology, nuclear and quantum electronics\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_EDL = "{IEEE} Electron Device Lett."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_JQE = "{IEEE} J. Quantum Electron."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_JSTQE = "{IEEE} J. Sel. Topics Quantum Electron."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_ED = "{IEEE} Trans. Electron Devices"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_NANO = "{IEEE} Trans. Nanotechnol."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_NS = "{IEEE} Trans. Nucl. Sci."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_PS = "{IEEE} Trans. Plasma Sci."}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-reliability\r
-IEEE seems to want "Mat." here, not "Mater."\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_DMR = "{IEEE} Trans. Device Mater. Rel."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_R = "{IEEE} Trans. Rel."}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-semiconductors, superconductors, electrochemical and solid state\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_ESSL = "{IEEE/ECS} Electrochem. Solid-State Lett."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_JSSC = "{IEEE} J. Solid-State Circuits"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_ASC = "{IEEE} Trans. Appl. Supercond."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_SM = "{IEEE} Trans. Semicond. Manuf."}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-sensors\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_SENSOR = "{IEEE} Sensors J."}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-VLSI\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_VLSI = "{IEEE} Trans. {VLSI} Syst."}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-IEEE Magazines \r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_AES = "{IEEE} Aerosp. Electron. Syst. Mag."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_HIST = "{IEEE} Ann. Hist. Comput."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_AP = "{IEEE} Antennas Propag. Mag."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_ASSP = "{IEEE} {ASSP} Mag."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_CD = "{IEEE} Circuits Devices Mag."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_CAS = "{IEEE} Circuits Syst. Mag."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_COM = "{IEEE} Commun. Mag."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_COMSOC = "{IEEE} Commun. Soc. Mag."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_CIM = "{IEEE} Comput. Intell. Mag."}\r
-CSEM changed to CSE in 1999\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_CSE = "{IEEE} Comput. Sci. Eng."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_CSEM = "{IEEE} Comput. Sci. Eng. Mag."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_C = "{IEEE} Computer"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_CAP = "{IEEE} Comput. Appl. Power"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_CGA = "{IEEE} Comput. Graph. Appl."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_CONC = "{IEEE} Concurrency"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_CS = "{IEEE} Control Syst. Mag."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_DTC = "{IEEE} Des. Test. Comput."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_EI = "{IEEE} Electr. Insul. Mag."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_ETR = "{IEEE} ElectroTechnol. Rev."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_EMB = "{IEEE} Eng. Med. Biol. Mag."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_EMR = "{IEEE} Eng. Manag. Rev."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_EXP = "{IEEE} Expert"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_IA = "{IEEE} Ind. Appl. Mag."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_IM = "{IEEE} Instrum. Meas. Mag."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_IS = "{IEEE} Intell. Syst."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_IC = "{IEEE} Internet Comput."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_ITP = "{IEEE} {IT} Prof."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_MICRO = "{IEEE} Micro"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_MW = "{IEEE} Microw. Mag."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_MM = "{IEEE} Multimedia"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_NET = "{IEEE} Netw."}\r
-IEEE's editorial manual lists "Pers. Commun.", \r
-but "Personal Commun. Mag." seems to be what is used in the journals\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_PCOM = "{IEEE} Personal Commun. Mag."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_POT = "{IEEE} Potentials"}\r
-CAP and PER merged to form PE in 2003\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_PE = "{IEEE} Power Energy Mag."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_PER = "{IEEE} Power Eng. Rev."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_PVC = "{IEEE} Pervasive Comput."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_RA = "{IEEE} Robot. Autom. Mag."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_SAP = "{IEEE} Security Privacy"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_SP = "{IEEE} Signal Process. Mag."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_S = "{IEEE} Softw."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_SPECT = "{IEEE} Spectr."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_TS = "{IEEE} Technol. Soc. Mag."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_VT = "{IEEE} Veh. Technol. Mag."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_WC = "{IEEE} Wireless Commun. Mag."}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_TODAY = "Today's Engineer"}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-IEEE Online Publications \r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-@STRING{IEEE_O_CSTO = "{IEEE} Commun. Surveys Tuts."}\r
-disabled till definition is verified\r
-STRING{IEEE_O_DSO = "{IEEE} Distrib. Syst. Online"}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
---\r
-EOF\r
+++ /dev/null
-\r
-IEEEfull.bib\r
-V1.12 (2007/01/11)\r
-Copyright (c) 2002-2007 by Michael Shell\r
-See: http://www.michaelshell.org/\r
-for current contact information.\r
-\r
-BibTeX bibliography string definitions of the FULL titles of\r
-IEEE journals and magazines and online publications.\r
-\r
-This file is designed for bibliography styles that require \r
-full-length titles and is not for use in bibliographies that\r
-abbreviate titles.\r
-\r
-Support sites:\r
-http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/\r
-http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/\r
-and/or\r
-http://www.ieee.org/\r
-\r
-Special thanks to Laura Hyslop and ken Rawson of IEEE for their help\r
-in obtaining the information needed to compile this file. Also,\r
-Volker Kuhlmann and Moritz Borgmann kindly provided some corrections\r
-and additions.\r
-\r
-*************************************************************************\r
-Legal Notice:\r
-This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or\r
-implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or\r
-FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE! \r
-User assumes all risk.\r
-In no event shall IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for\r
-any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental,\r
-consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse\r
-of any information contained here.\r
-\r
-All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not\r
-necessarily endorsed by the IEEE.\r
-\r
-This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL)\r
-( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used,\r
-distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included\r
-in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released\r
-2003/12/01 or later.\r
-Retain all contribution notices and credits.\r
-** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including **\r
-** renaming them and changing author support contact information. **\r
-\r
-File list of work: IEEEabrv.bib, IEEEfull.bib, IEEEexample.bib,\r
- IEEEtran.bst, IEEEtranS.bst, IEEEtranSA.bst,\r
- IEEEtranN.bst, IEEEtranSN.bst, IEEEtran_bst_HOWTO.pdf\r
-*************************************************************************\r
-\r
-\r
-USAGE:\r
-\r
-\bibliographystyle{mybstfile}\r
-\bibliography{IEEEfull,mybibfile}\r
-\r
-where the IEEE titles in the .bib database entries use the strings\r
-defined here. e.g.,\r
-\r
-\r
- journal = IEEE_J_AC,\r
-\r
-\r
-to yield "{IEEE} Transactions on Automatic Control"\r
-\r
-\r
-WARNING: IEEE uses abbreviated journal titles in their bibliographies!\r
-Because this file provides the full titles, you should NOT use this file\r
-for work that is to be submitted to the IEEE.\r
-\r
-For IEEE work, you should use the abbreviated titles provided in the\r
-companion file, IEEEabrv.bib.\r
-\r
-\r
-** NOTES **\r
-\r
- 1. Journals have been grouped according to subject in order to make it\r
- easier to locate and extract the definitions for related journals - \r
- as most works use references that are confined to a single topic.\r
- Magazines are listed in straight alphabetical order.\r
-\r
- 2. String names are closely based on IEEE's own internal acronyms.\r
-\r
- 3. Older, out-of-print IEEE titles are included (but not including titles\r
- dating prior to IEEE's formation from the IRE and AIEE in 1963).\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-IEEE Journals \r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-aerospace and military\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_AES = "{IEEE} Transactions on Aerospace and Electronic Systems"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_ANE = "{IEEE} Transactions on Aerospace and Navigational Electronics"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_ANNE = "{IEEE} Transactions on Aeronautical and Navigational Electronics"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_AS = "{IEEE} Transactions on Aerospace"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_AIRE = "{IEEE} Transactions on Airborne Electronics"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_MIL = "{IEEE} Transactions on Military Electronics"}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-autos, transportation and vehicles (non-aerospace)\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_ITS = "{IEEE} Transactions on Intelligent Transportation Systems"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_VT = "{IEEE} Transactions on Vehicular Technology"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_VC = "{IEEE} Transactions on Vehicular Communications"}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-circuits, signals, systems, audio and controls\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_SPL = "{IEEE} Signal Processing Letters"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_ASSP = "{IEEE} Transactions on Acoustics, Speech, and Signal Processing"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_AU = "{IEEE} Transactions on Audio"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_AUEA = "{IEEE} Transactions on Audio and Electroacoustics"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_AC = "{IEEE} Transactions on Automatic Control"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CAS = "{IEEE} Transactions on Circuits and Systems"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CASVT = "{IEEE} Transactions on Circuits and Systems for Video Technology"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CASI = "{IEEE} Transactions on Circuits and Systems---Part {I}: Fundamental Theory and Applications"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CASII = "{IEEE} Transactions on Circuits and Systems---Part {II}: Analog and Digital Signal Processing"}\r
-in 2004 CASI and CASII renamed part title to CASI_RP and CASII_EB, respectively.\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CASI_RP = "{IEEE} Transactions on Circuits and Systems---Part {I}: Regular Papers"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CASII_EB = "{IEEE} Transactions on Circuits and Systems---Part {II}: Express Briefs"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CT = "{IEEE} Transactions on Circuit Theory"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CST = "{IEEE} Transactions on Control Systems Technology"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_SP = "{IEEE} Transactions on Signal Processing"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_SU = "{IEEE} Transactions on Sonics and Ultrasonics"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_SAP = "{IEEE} Transactions on Speech and Audio Processing"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_UE = "{IEEE} Transactions on Ultrasonics Engineering"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_UFFC = "{IEEE} Transactions on Ultrasonics, Ferroelectrics, and Frequency Control"}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-communications\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_COML = "{IEEE} Communications Letters"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_JSAC = "{IEEE} Journal on Selected Areas in Communications"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_COM = "{IEEE} Transactions on Communications"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_COMT = "{IEEE} Transactions on Communication Technology"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_WCOM = "{IEEE} Transactions on Wireless Communications"}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-components, packaging and manufacturing\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_ADVP = "{IEEE} Transactions on Advanced Packaging"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CHMT = "{IEEE} Transactions on Components, Hybrids and Manufacturing Technology"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CPMTA = "{IEEE} Transactions on Components, Packaging and Manufacturing Technology---Part {A}"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CPMTB = "{IEEE} Transactions on Components, Packaging and Manufacturing Technology---Part {B}: Advanced Packaging"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CPMTC = "{IEEE} Transactions on Components, Packaging and Manufacturing Technology---Part {C}: Manufacturing"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CAPT = "{IEEE} Transactions on Components and Packaging Technology"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CAPTS = "{IEEE} Transactions on Components and Packaging Technologies"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CPART = "{IEEE} Transactions on Component Parts"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_EPM = "{IEEE} Transactions on Electronics Packaging Manufacturing"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_MFT = "{IEEE} Transactions on Manufacturing Technology"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_PHP = "{IEEE} Transactions on Parts, Hybrids and Packaging"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_PMP = "{IEEE} Transactions on Parts, Materials and Packaging"}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-CAD\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_TCAD = "{IEEE} Journal on Technology in Computer Aided Design"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CAD = "{IEEE} Transactions on Computer-Aided Design of Integrated Circuits and Systems"}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-coding, data, information, knowledge\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_IT = "{IEEE} Transactions on Information Theory"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_KDE = "{IEEE} Transactions on Knowledge and Data Engineering"}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-computers, computation, networking and software\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_C = "{IEEE} Transactions on Computers"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CAL = "{IEEE} Computer Architecture Letters"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_DSC = "{IEEE} Transactions on Dependable and Secure Computing"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_ECOMP = "{IEEE} Transactions on Electronic Computers"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_EVC = "{IEEE} Transactions on Evolutionary Computation"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_FUZZ = "{IEEE} Transactions on Fuzzy Systems"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_IFS = "{IEEE} Transactions on Information Forensics and Security"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_MC = "{IEEE} Transactions on Mobile Computing"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_NET = "{IEEE/ACM} Transactions on Networking"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_NN = "{IEEE} Transactions on Neural Networks"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_PDS = "{IEEE} Transactions on Parallel and Distributed Systems"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_SE = "{IEEE} Transactions on Software Engineering"}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-computer graphics, imaging, and multimedia\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_JDT = "{IEEE/OSA} Journal of Display Technology"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_IP = "{IEEE} Transactions on Image Processing"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_MM = "{IEEE} Transactions on Multimedia"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_VCG = "{IEEE} Transactions on Visualization and Computer Graphics"}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-cybernetics, ergonomics, robots, man-machine, and automation\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_ASE = "{IEEE} Transactions on Automation Science and Engineering"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_JRA = "{IEEE} Journal of Robotics and Automation"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_HFE = "{IEEE} Transactions on Human Factors in Electronics"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_MMS = "{IEEE} Transactions on Man-Machine Systems"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_PAMI = "{IEEE} Transactions on Pattern Analysis and Machine Intelligence"}\r
-in 1989 JRA became RA\r
-in August 2004, RA split into ASE and RO\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_RA = "{IEEE} Transactions on Robotics and Automation"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_RO = "{IEEE} Transactions on Robotics"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_SMC = "{IEEE} Transactions on Systems, Man, and Cybernetics"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_SMCA = "{IEEE} Transactions on Systems, Man, and Cybernetics---Part {A}: Systems and Humans"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_SMCB = "{IEEE} Transactions on Systems, Man, and Cybernetics---Part {B}: Cybernetics"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_SMCC = "{IEEE} Transactions on Systems, Man, and Cybernetics---Part {C}: Applications and Reviews"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_SSC = "{IEEE} Transactions on Systems Science and Cybernetics"}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-earth, wind, fire and water\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_GE = "{IEEE} Transactions on Geoscience Electronics"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_GRS = "{IEEE} Transactions on Geoscience and Remote Sensing"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_GRSL = "{IEEE} Geoscience and Remote Sensing Letters"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_OE = "{IEEE} Journal of Oceanic Engineering"}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-education, engineering, history, IEEE, professional\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CJECE = "Canadian Journal of Electrical and Computer Engineering"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_PROC = "Proceedings of the {IEEE}"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_EDU = "{IEEE} Transactions on Education"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_EM = "{IEEE} Transactions on Engineering Management"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_EWS = "{IEEE} Transactions on Engineering Writing and Speech"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_PC = "{IEEE} Transactions on Professional Communication"}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-electromagnetics, antennas, EMI, magnetics and microwave\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_AWPL = "{IEEE} Antennas and Wireless Propagation Letters"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_MGWL = "{IEEE} Microwave and Guided Wave Letters"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_MWCL = "{IEEE} Microwave and Wireless Components Letters"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_AP = "{IEEE} Transactions on Antennas and Propagation"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_EMC = "{IEEE} Transactions on Electromagnetic Compatibility"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_MAG = "{IEEE} Transactions on Magnetics"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_MTT = "{IEEE} Transactions on Microwave Theory and Techniques"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_RFI = "{IEEE} Transactions on Radio Frequency Interference"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_TJMJ = "{IEEE} Translation Journal on Magnetics in Japan"}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-energy and power\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_EC = "{IEEE} Transactions on Energy Conversion"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_PEL = "{IEEE} Power Electronics Letters"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_PWRAS = "{IEEE} Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_PWRD = "{IEEE} Transactions on Power Delivery"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_PWRE = "{IEEE} Transactions on Power Electronics"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_PWRS = "{IEEE} Transactions on Power Systems"}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-industrial, commercial and consumer\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_APPIND = "{IEEE} Transactions on Applications and Industry"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_BC = "{IEEE} Transactions on Broadcasting"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_BCTV = "{IEEE} Transactions on Broadcast and Television Receivers"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CE = "{IEEE} Transactions on Consumer Electronics"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_IE = "{IEEE} Transactions on Industrial Electronics"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_IECI = "{IEEE} Transactions on Industrial Electronics and Control Instrumentation"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_IA = "{IEEE} Transactions on Industry Applications"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_IGA = "{IEEE} Transactions on Industry and General Applications"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_IINF = "{IEEE} Transactions on Industrial Informatics"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_PSE = "{IEEE} Journal of Product Safety Engineering"}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-instrumentation and measurement\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_IM = "{IEEE} Transactions on Instrumentation and Measurement"}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-insulation and materials\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_JEM = "{IEEE/TMS} Journal of Electronic Materials"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_DEI = "{IEEE} Transactions on Dielectrics and Electrical Insulation"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_EI = "{IEEE} Transactions on Electrical Insulation"}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-mechanical\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_MECH = "{IEEE/ASME} Transactions on Mechatronics"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_MEMS = "{IEEE/ASME} Journal of Microelectromechanical Systems"}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-medical and biological\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_BME = "{IEEE} Transactions on Biomedical Engineering"}\r
-Note: The B-ME journal later dropped the hyphen and became the BME.\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_B-ME = "{IEEE} Transactions on Bio-Medical Engineering"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_BMELC = "{IEEE} Transactions on Bio-Medical Electronics"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_CBB = "{IEEE/ACM} Transactions on Computational Biology and Bioinformatics"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_ITBM = "{IEEE} Transactions on Information Technology in Biomedicine"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_ME = "{IEEE} Transactions on Medical Electronics"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_MI = "{IEEE} Transactions on Medical Imaging"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_NB = "{IEEE} Transactions on NanoBioscience"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_NSRE = "{IEEE} Transactions on Neural Systems and Rehabilitation Engineering"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_RE = "{IEEE} Transactions on Rehabilitation Engineering"}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-optics, lightwave and photonics\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_PTL = "{IEEE} Photonics Technology Letters"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_JLT = "{IEEE/OSA} Journal of Lightwave Technology"}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-physics, electrons, nanotechnology, nuclear and quantum electronics\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_EDL = "{IEEE} Electron Device Letters"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_JQE = "{IEEE} Journal of Quantum Electronics"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_JSTQE = "{IEEE} Journal of Selected Topics in Quantum Electronics"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_ED = "{IEEE} Transactions on Electron Devices"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_NANO = "{IEEE} Transactions on Nanotechnology"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_NS = "{IEEE} Transactions on Nuclear Science"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_PS = "{IEEE} Transactions on Plasma Science"}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-reliability\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_DMR = "{IEEE} Transactions on Device and Materials Reliability"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_R = "{IEEE} Transactions on Reliability"}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-semiconductors, superconductors, electrochemical and solid state\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_ESSL = "{IEEE/ECS} Electrochemical and Solid-State Letters"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_JSSC = "{IEEE} Journal of Solid-State Circuits"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_ASC = "{IEEE} Transactions on Applied Superconductivity"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_SM = "{IEEE} Transactions on Semiconductor Manufacturing"}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-sensors\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_SENSOR = "{IEEE} Sensors Journal"}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-VLSI\r
-@STRING{IEEE_J_VLSI = "{IEEE} Transactions on Very Large Scale Integration ({VLSI}) Systems"}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-IEEE Magazines\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_AES = "{IEEE} Aerospace and Electronics Systems Magazine"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_HIST = "{IEEE} Annals of the History of Computing"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_AP = "{IEEE} Antennas and Propagation Magazine"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_ASSP = "{IEEE} {ASSP} Magazine"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_CD = "{IEEE} Circuits and Devices Magazine"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_CAS = "{IEEE} Circuits and Systems Magazine"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_COM = "{IEEE} Communications Magazine"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_COMSOC = "{IEEE} Communications Society Magazine"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_CIM = "{IEEE} Computational Intelligence Magazine"}\r
-CSEM changed to CSE in 1999\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_CSE = "{IEEE} Computing in Science and Engineering"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_CSEM = "{IEEE} Computational Science and Engineering Magazine"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_C = "{IEEE} Computer"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_CAP = "{IEEE} Computer Applications in Power"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_CGA = "{IEEE} Computer Graphics and Applications"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_CONC = "{IEEE} Concurrency"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_CS = "{IEEE} Control Systems Magazine"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_DTC = "{IEEE} Design and Test of Computers"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_EI = "{IEEE} Electrical Insulation Magazine"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_ETR = "{IEEE} ElectroTechnology Review"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_EMB = "{IEEE} Engineering in Medicine and Biology Magazine"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_EMR = "{IEEE} Engineering Management Review"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_EXP = "{IEEE} Expert"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_IA = "{IEEE} Industry Applications Magazine"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_IM = "{IEEE} Instrumentation and Measurement Magazine"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_IS = "{IEEE} Intelligent Systems"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_IC = "{IEEE} Internet Computing"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_ITP = "{IEEE} {IT} Professional"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_MICRO = "{IEEE} Micro"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_MW = "{IEEE} Microwave Magazine"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_MM = "{IEEE} Multimedia"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_NET = "{IEEE} Network"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_PCOM = "{IEEE} Personal Communications Magazine"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_POT = "{IEEE} Potentials"}\r
-CAP and PER merged to form PE in 2003\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_PE = "{IEEE} Power and Energy Magazine"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_PER = "{IEEE} Power Engineering Review"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_PVC = "{IEEE} Pervasive Computing"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_RA = "{IEEE} Robotics and Automation Magazine"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_SAP = "{IEEE} Security and Privacy"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_SP = "{IEEE} Signal Processing Magazine"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_S = "{IEEE} Software"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_SPECT = "{IEEE} Spectrum"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_TS = "{IEEE} Technology and Society Magazine"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_VT = "{IEEE} Vehicular Technology Magazine"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_WC = "{IEEE} Wireless Communications Magazine"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_M_TODAY = "Today's Engineer"}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-IEEE Online Publications \r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-@STRING{IEEE_O_CSTO = "{IEEE} Communications Surveys and Tutorials"}\r
-@STRING{IEEE_O_DSO = "{IEEE} Distributed Systems Online"}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
---\r
-EOF\r
+++ /dev/null
-%%\r
-%% IEEEtran.bst\r
-%% BibTeX Bibliography Style file for IEEE Journals and Conferences (unsorted)\r
-%% Version 1.12 (2007/01/11)\r
-%% \r
-%% Copyright (c) 2003-2007 Michael Shell\r
-%% \r
-%% Original starting code base and algorithms obtained from the output of\r
-%% Patrick W. Daly's makebst package as well as from prior versions of\r
-%% IEEE BibTeX styles:\r
-%% \r
-%% 1. Howard Trickey and Oren Patashnik's ieeetr.bst (1985/1988)\r
-%% 2. Silvano Balemi and Richard H. Roy's IEEEbib.bst (1993)\r
-%% \r
-%% Support sites:\r
-%% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/\r
-%% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/\r
-%% and/or\r
-%% http://www.ieee.org/\r
-%% \r
-%% For use with BibTeX version 0.99a or later\r
-%%\r
-%% This is a numerical citation style.\r
-%% \r
-%%*************************************************************************\r
-%% Legal Notice:\r
-%% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or\r
-%% implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or\r
-%% FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE! \r
-%% User assumes all risk.\r
-%% In no event shall IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for\r
-%% any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental,\r
-%% consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse\r
-%% of any information contained here.\r
-%%\r
-%% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not\r
-%% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE.\r
-%%\r
-%% This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL)\r
-%% ( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used,\r
-%% distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included\r
-%% in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released\r
-%% 2003/12/01 or later.\r
-%% Retain all contribution notices and credits.\r
-%% ** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including **\r
-%% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. **\r
-%%\r
-%% File list of work: IEEEabrv.bib, IEEEfull.bib, IEEEexample.bib,\r
-%% IEEEtran.bst, IEEEtranS.bst, IEEEtranSA.bst,\r
-%% IEEEtranN.bst, IEEEtranSN.bst, IEEEtran_bst_HOWTO.pdf\r
-%%*************************************************************************\r
-%\r
-%\r
-% Changelog:\r
-%\r
-% 1.00 (2002/08/13) Initial release\r
-%\r
-% 1.10 (2002/09/27)\r
-% 1. Corrected minor bug for improperly formed warning message when a\r
-% book was not given a title. Thanks to Ming Kin Lai for reporting this.\r
-% 2. Added support for CTLname_format_string and CTLname_latex_cmd fields\r
-% in the BST control entry type.\r
-%\r
-% 1.11 (2003/04/02)\r
-% 1. Fixed bug with URLs containing underscores when using url.sty. Thanks\r
-% to Ming Kin Lai for reporting this.\r
-%\r
-% 1.12 (2007/01/11)\r
-% 1. Fixed bug with unwanted comma before "et al." when an entry contained\r
-% more than two author names. Thanks to Pallav Gupta for reporting this.\r
-% 2. Fixed bug with anomalous closing quote in tech reports that have a\r
-% type, but without a number or address. Thanks to Mehrdad Mirreza for\r
-% reporting this.\r
-% 3. Use braces in \providecommand in begin.bib to better support\r
-% latex2html. TeX style length assignments OK with recent versions\r
-% of latex2html - 1.71 (2002/2/1) or later is strongly recommended.\r
-% Use of the language field still causes trouble with latex2html.\r
-% Thanks to Federico Beffa for reporting this.\r
-% 4. Added IEEEtran.bst ID and version comment string to .bbl output.\r
-% 5. Provide a \BIBdecl hook that allows the user to execute commands\r
-% just prior to the first entry.\r
-% 6. Use default urlstyle (is using url.sty) of "same" rather than rm to\r
-% better work with a wider variety of bibliography styles.\r
-% 7. Changed month abbreviations from Sept., July and June to Sep., Jul.,\r
-% and Jun., respectively, as IEEE now does. Thanks to Moritz Borgmann\r
-% for reporting this.\r
-% 8. Control entry types should not be considered when calculating longest\r
-% label width.\r
-% 9. Added alias www for electronic/online.\r
-% 10. Added CTLname_url_prefix control entry type.\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% DEFAULTS FOR THE CONTROLS OF THE BST STYLE %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-% These are the defaults for the user adjustable controls. The values used\r
-% here can be overridden by the user via IEEEtranBSTCTL entry type.\r
-\r
-% NOTE: The recommended LaTeX command to invoke a control entry type is:\r
-% \r
-%\makeatletter\r
-%\def\bstctlcite{\@ifnextchar[{\@bstctlcite}{\@bstctlcite[@auxout]}}\r
-%\def\@bstctlcite[#1]#2{\@bsphack\r
-% \@for\@citeb:=#2\do{%\r
-% \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%\r
-% \if@filesw\immediate\write\csname #1\endcsname{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi}%\r
-% \@esphack}\r
-%\makeatother\r
-%\r
-% It is called at the start of the document, before the first \cite, like:\r
-% \bstctlcite{IEEEexample:BSTcontrol}\r
-%\r
-% IEEEtran.cls V1.6 and later does provide this command.\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% #0 turns off the display of the number for articles.\r
-% #1 enables\r
-FUNCTION {default.is.use.number.for.article} { #1 }\r
-\r
-\r
-% #0 turns off the display of the paper and type fields in @inproceedings.\r
-% #1 enables\r
-FUNCTION {default.is.use.paper} { #1 }\r
-\r
-\r
-% #0 turns off the forced use of "et al."\r
-% #1 enables\r
-FUNCTION {default.is.forced.et.al} { #0 }\r
-\r
-% The maximum number of names that can be present beyond which an "et al."\r
-% usage is forced. Be sure that num.names.shown.with.forced.et.al (below)\r
-% is not greater than this value!\r
-% Note: There are many instances of references in IEEE journals which have\r
-% a very large number of authors as well as instances in which "et al." is\r
-% used profusely.\r
-FUNCTION {default.max.num.names.before.forced.et.al} { #10 }\r
-\r
-% The number of names that will be shown with a forced "et al.".\r
-% Must be less than or equal to max.num.names.before.forced.et.al\r
-FUNCTION {default.num.names.shown.with.forced.et.al} { #1 }\r
-\r
-\r
-% #0 turns off the alternate interword spacing for entries with URLs.\r
-% #1 enables\r
-FUNCTION {default.is.use.alt.interword.spacing} { #1 }\r
-\r
-% If alternate interword spacing for entries with URLs is enabled, this is\r
-% the interword spacing stretch factor that will be used. For example, the\r
-% default "4" here means that the interword spacing in entries with URLs can\r
-% stretch to four times normal. Does not have to be an integer. Note that\r
-% the value specified here can be overridden by the user in their LaTeX\r
-% code via a command such as: \r
-% "\providecommand\BIBentryALTinterwordstretchfactor{1.5}" in addition to\r
-% that via the IEEEtranBSTCTL entry type.\r
-FUNCTION {default.ALTinterwordstretchfactor} { "4" }\r
-\r
-\r
-% #0 turns off the "dashification" of repeated (i.e., identical to those\r
-% of the previous entry) names. IEEE normally does this.\r
-% #1 enables\r
-FUNCTION {default.is.dash.repeated.names} { #1 }\r
-\r
-\r
-% The default name format control string.\r
-FUNCTION {default.name.format.string}{ "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" }\r
-\r
-\r
-% The default LaTeX font command for the names.\r
-FUNCTION {default.name.latex.cmd}{ "" }\r
-\r
-\r
-% The default URL prefix.\r
-FUNCTION {default.name.url.prefix}{ "[Online]. Available:" }\r
-\r
-\r
-% Other controls that cannot be accessed via IEEEtranBSTCTL entry type.\r
-\r
-% #0 turns off the terminal startup banner/completed message so as to\r
-% operate more quietly.\r
-% #1 enables\r
-FUNCTION {is.print.banners.to.terminal} { #1 }\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% FILE VERSION AND BANNER %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-FUNCTION{bst.file.version} { "1.12" }\r
-FUNCTION{bst.file.date} { "2007/01/11" }\r
-FUNCTION{bst.file.website} { "http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/bibtex/" }\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {banner.message}\r
-{ is.print.banners.to.terminal\r
- { "-- IEEEtran.bst version" " " * bst.file.version *\r
- " (" * bst.file.date * ") " * "by Michael Shell." *\r
- top$\r
- "-- " bst.file.website *\r
- top$\r
- "-- See the " quote$ * "IEEEtran_bst_HOWTO.pdf" * quote$ * " manual for usage information." *\r
- top$\r
- }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {completed.message}\r
-{ is.print.banners.to.terminal\r
- { ""\r
- top$\r
- "Done."\r
- top$\r
- }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% STRING CONSTANTS %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.and}{ "and" }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.etal}{ "et~al." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.editors}{ "eds." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.editor}{ "ed." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.edition}{ "ed." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.volume}{ "vol." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.of}{ "of" }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.number}{ "no." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.in}{ "in" }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.pages}{ "pp." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.page}{ "p." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}{ "ch." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.paper}{ "paper" }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.part}{ "pt." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.patent}{ "Patent" }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.patentUS}{ "U.S." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.revision}{ "Rev." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.series}{ "ser." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.standard}{ "Std." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}{ "Tech. Rep." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}{ "Master's thesis" }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}{ "Ph.D. dissertation" }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.st}{ "st" }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.nd}{ "nd" }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.rd}{ "rd" }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.th}{ "th" }\r
-\r
-\r
-% This is the LaTeX spacer that is used when a larger than normal space\r
-% is called for (such as just before the address:publisher).\r
-FUNCTION {large.space} { "\hskip 1em plus 0.5em minus 0.4em\relax " }\r
-\r
-% The LaTeX code for dashes that are used to represent repeated names.\r
-% Note: Some older IEEE journals used something like\r
-% "\rule{0.275in}{0.5pt}\," which is fairly thick and runs right along\r
-% the baseline. However, IEEE now uses a thinner, above baseline,\r
-% six dash long sequence.\r
-FUNCTION {repeated.name.dashes} { "------" }\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% PREDEFINED STRING MACROS %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-MACRO {jan} {"Jan."}\r
-MACRO {feb} {"Feb."}\r
-MACRO {mar} {"Mar."}\r
-MACRO {apr} {"Apr."}\r
-MACRO {may} {"May"}\r
-MACRO {jun} {"Jun."}\r
-MACRO {jul} {"Jul."}\r
-MACRO {aug} {"Aug."}\r
-MACRO {sep} {"Sep."}\r
-MACRO {oct} {"Oct."}\r
-MACRO {nov} {"Nov."}\r
-MACRO {dec} {"Dec."}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% ENTRY FIELDS %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-ENTRY\r
- { address\r
- assignee\r
- author\r
- booktitle\r
- chapter\r
- day\r
- dayfiled\r
- edition\r
- editor\r
- howpublished\r
- institution\r
- intype\r
- journal\r
- key\r
- language\r
- month\r
- monthfiled\r
- nationality\r
- note\r
- number\r
- organization\r
- pages\r
- paper\r
- publisher\r
- school\r
- series\r
- revision\r
- title\r
- type\r
- url\r
- volume\r
- year\r
- yearfiled\r
- CTLuse_article_number\r
- CTLuse_paper\r
- CTLuse_forced_etal\r
- CTLmax_names_forced_etal\r
- CTLnames_show_etal\r
- CTLuse_alt_spacing\r
- CTLalt_stretch_factor\r
- CTLdash_repeated_names\r
- CTLname_format_string\r
- CTLname_latex_cmd\r
- CTLname_url_prefix\r
- }\r
- {}\r
- { label }\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% INTEGER VARIABLES %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-INTEGERS { prev.status.punct this.status.punct punct.std\r
- punct.no punct.comma punct.period \r
- prev.status.space this.status.space space.std\r
- space.no space.normal space.large\r
- prev.status.quote this.status.quote quote.std\r
- quote.no quote.close\r
- prev.status.nline this.status.nline nline.std\r
- nline.no nline.newblock \r
- status.cap cap.std\r
- cap.no cap.yes}\r
-\r
-INTEGERS { longest.label.width multiresult nameptr namesleft number.label numnames }\r
-\r
-INTEGERS { is.use.number.for.article\r
- is.use.paper\r
- is.forced.et.al\r
- max.num.names.before.forced.et.al\r
- num.names.shown.with.forced.et.al\r
- is.use.alt.interword.spacing\r
- is.dash.repeated.names}\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% STRING VARIABLES %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-STRINGS { bibinfo\r
- longest.label\r
- oldname\r
- s\r
- t\r
- ALTinterwordstretchfactor\r
- name.format.string\r
- name.latex.cmd\r
- name.url.prefix}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% LOW LEVEL FUNCTIONS %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {initialize.controls}\r
-{ default.is.use.number.for.article 'is.use.number.for.article :=\r
- default.is.use.paper 'is.use.paper :=\r
- default.is.forced.et.al 'is.forced.et.al :=\r
- default.max.num.names.before.forced.et.al 'max.num.names.before.forced.et.al :=\r
- default.num.names.shown.with.forced.et.al 'num.names.shown.with.forced.et.al :=\r
- default.is.use.alt.interword.spacing 'is.use.alt.interword.spacing :=\r
- default.is.dash.repeated.names 'is.dash.repeated.names :=\r
- default.ALTinterwordstretchfactor 'ALTinterwordstretchfactor :=\r
- default.name.format.string 'name.format.string :=\r
- default.name.latex.cmd 'name.latex.cmd :=\r
- default.name.url.prefix 'name.url.prefix :=\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-% This IEEEtran.bst features a very powerful and flexible mechanism for\r
-% controlling the capitalization, punctuation, spacing, quotation, and\r
-% newlines of the formatted entry fields. (Note: IEEEtran.bst does not need\r
-% or use the newline/newblock feature, but it has been implemented for\r
-% possible future use.) The output states of IEEEtran.bst consist of\r
-% multiple independent attributes and, as such, can be thought of as being\r
-% vectors, rather than the simple scalar values ("before.all", \r
-% "mid.sentence", etc.) used in most other .bst files.\r
-% \r
-% The more flexible and complex design used here was motivated in part by\r
-% IEEE's rather unusual bibliography style. For example, IEEE ends the\r
-% previous field item with a period and large space prior to the publisher\r
-% address; the @electronic entry types use periods as inter-item punctuation\r
-% rather than the commas used by the other entry types; and URLs are never\r
-% followed by periods even though they are the last item in the entry.\r
-% Although it is possible to accommodate these features with the conventional\r
-% output state system, the seemingly endless exceptions make for convoluted,\r
-% unreliable and difficult to maintain code.\r
-%\r
-% IEEEtran.bst's output state system can be easily understood via a simple\r
-% illustration of two most recently formatted entry fields (on the stack):\r
-%\r
-% CURRENT_ITEM\r
-% "PREVIOUS_ITEM\r
-%\r
-% which, in this example, is to eventually appear in the bibliography as:\r
-% \r
-% "PREVIOUS_ITEM," CURRENT_ITEM\r
-%\r
-% It is the job of the output routine to take the previous item off of the\r
-% stack (while leaving the current item at the top of the stack), apply its\r
-% trailing punctuation (including closing quote marks) and spacing, and then\r
-% to write the result to BibTeX's output buffer:\r
-% \r
-% "PREVIOUS_ITEM," \r
-% \r
-% Punctuation (and spacing) between items is often determined by both of the\r
-% items rather than just the first one. The presence of quotation marks\r
-% further complicates the situation because, in standard English, trailing\r
-% punctuation marks are supposed to be contained within the quotes.\r
-% \r
-% IEEEtran.bst maintains two output state (aka "status") vectors which\r
-% correspond to the previous and current (aka "this") items. Each vector\r
-% consists of several independent attributes which track punctuation,\r
-% spacing, quotation, and newlines. Capitalization status is handled by a\r
-% separate scalar because the format routines, not the output routine,\r
-% handle capitalization and, therefore, there is no need to maintain the\r
-% capitalization attribute for both the "previous" and "this" items.\r
-% \r
-% When a format routine adds a new item, it copies the current output status\r
-% vector to the previous output status vector and (usually) resets the\r
-% current (this) output status vector to a "standard status" vector. Using a\r
-% "standard status" vector in this way allows us to redefine what we mean by\r
-% "standard status" at the start of each entry handler and reuse the same\r
-% format routines under the various inter-item separation schemes. For\r
-% example, the standard status vector for the @book entry type may use\r
-% commas for item separators, while the @electronic type may use periods,\r
-% yet both entry handlers exploit many of the exact same format routines.\r
-% \r
-% Because format routines have write access to the output status vector of\r
-% the previous item, they can override the punctuation choices of the\r
-% previous format routine! Therefore, it becomes trivial to implement rules\r
-% such as "Always use a period and a large space before the publisher." By\r
-% pushing the generation of the closing quote mark to the output routine, we\r
-% avoid all the problems caused by having to close a quote before having all\r
-% the information required to determine what the punctuation should be.\r
-%\r
-% The IEEEtran.bst output state system can easily be expanded if needed.\r
-% For instance, it is easy to add a "space.tie" attribute value if the\r
-% bibliography rules mandate that two items have to be joined with an\r
-% unbreakable space. \r
-\r
-FUNCTION {initialize.status.constants}\r
-{ #0 'punct.no :=\r
- #1 'punct.comma :=\r
- #2 'punct.period :=\r
- #0 'space.no := \r
- #1 'space.normal :=\r
- #2 'space.large :=\r
- #0 'quote.no :=\r
- #1 'quote.close :=\r
- #0 'cap.no :=\r
- #1 'cap.yes :=\r
- #0 'nline.no :=\r
- #1 'nline.newblock :=\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {std.status.using.comma}\r
-{ punct.comma 'punct.std :=\r
- space.normal 'space.std :=\r
- quote.no 'quote.std :=\r
- nline.no 'nline.std :=\r
- cap.no 'cap.std :=\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {std.status.using.period}\r
-{ punct.period 'punct.std :=\r
- space.normal 'space.std :=\r
- quote.no 'quote.std :=\r
- nline.no 'nline.std :=\r
- cap.yes 'cap.std :=\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {initialize.prev.this.status}\r
-{ punct.no 'prev.status.punct :=\r
- space.no 'prev.status.space :=\r
- quote.no 'prev.status.quote :=\r
- nline.no 'prev.status.nline :=\r
- punct.no 'this.status.punct :=\r
- space.no 'this.status.space :=\r
- quote.no 'this.status.quote :=\r
- nline.no 'this.status.nline :=\r
- cap.yes 'status.cap :=\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {this.status.std}\r
-{ punct.std 'this.status.punct :=\r
- space.std 'this.status.space :=\r
- quote.std 'this.status.quote :=\r
- nline.std 'this.status.nline :=\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {cap.status.std}{ cap.std 'status.cap := }\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {this.to.prev.status}\r
-{ this.status.punct 'prev.status.punct :=\r
- this.status.space 'prev.status.space :=\r
- this.status.quote 'prev.status.quote :=\r
- this.status.nline 'prev.status.nline :=\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {not}\r
-{ { #0 }\r
- { #1 }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {and}\r
-{ { skip$ }\r
- { pop$ #0 }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {or}\r
-{ { pop$ #1 }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-% convert the strings "yes" or "no" to #1 or #0 respectively\r
-FUNCTION {yes.no.to.int}\r
-{ "l" change.case$ duplicate$\r
- "yes" =\r
- { pop$ #1 }\r
- { duplicate$ "no" =\r
- { pop$ #0 }\r
- { "unknown boolean " quote$ * swap$ * quote$ *\r
- " in " * cite$ * warning$\r
- #0\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-% pushes true if the single char string on the stack is in the\r
-% range of "0" to "9"\r
-FUNCTION {is.num}\r
-{ chr.to.int$\r
- duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ < not\r
- swap$ "9" chr.to.int$ > not and\r
-}\r
-\r
-% multiplies the integer on the stack by a factor of 10\r
-FUNCTION {bump.int.mag}\r
-{ #0 'multiresult :=\r
- { duplicate$ #0 > }\r
- { #1 -\r
- multiresult #10 +\r
- 'multiresult :=\r
- }\r
- while$\r
-pop$\r
-multiresult\r
-}\r
-\r
-% converts a single character string on the stack to an integer\r
-FUNCTION {char.to.integer}\r
-{ duplicate$ \r
- is.num\r
- { chr.to.int$ "0" chr.to.int$ - }\r
- {"noninteger character " quote$ * swap$ * quote$ *\r
- " in integer field of " * cite$ * warning$\r
- #0\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-% converts a string on the stack to an integer\r
-FUNCTION {string.to.integer}\r
-{ duplicate$ text.length$ 'namesleft :=\r
- #1 'nameptr :=\r
- #0 'numnames :=\r
- { nameptr namesleft > not }\r
- { duplicate$ nameptr #1 substring$\r
- char.to.integer numnames bump.int.mag +\r
- 'numnames :=\r
- nameptr #1 +\r
- 'nameptr :=\r
- }\r
- while$\r
-pop$\r
-numnames\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% The output routines write out the *next* to the top (previous) item on the\r
-% stack, adding punctuation and such as needed. Since IEEEtran.bst maintains\r
-% the output status for the top two items on the stack, these output\r
-% routines have to consider the previous output status (which corresponds to\r
-% the item that is being output). Full independent control of punctuation,\r
-% closing quote marks, spacing, and newblock is provided.\r
-% \r
-% "output.nonnull" does not check for the presence of a previous empty\r
-% item.\r
-% \r
-% "output" does check for the presence of a previous empty item and will\r
-% remove an empty item rather than outputing it.\r
-% \r
-% "output.warn" is like "output", but will issue a warning if it detects\r
-% an empty item.\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {output.nonnull}\r
-{ swap$\r
- prev.status.punct punct.comma =\r
- { "," * }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- prev.status.punct punct.period =\r
- { add.period$ }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$ \r
- prev.status.quote quote.close =\r
- { "''" * }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- prev.status.space space.normal =\r
- { " " * }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- prev.status.space space.large =\r
- { large.space * }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- write$\r
- prev.status.nline nline.newblock =\r
- { newline$ "\newblock " write$ }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {output}\r
-{ duplicate$ empty$\r
- 'pop$\r
- 'output.nonnull\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {output.warn}\r
-{ 't :=\r
- duplicate$ empty$\r
- { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ }\r
- 'output.nonnull\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-% "fin.entry" is the output routine that handles the last item of the entry\r
-% (which will be on the top of the stack when "fin.entry" is called).\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {fin.entry}\r
-{ this.status.punct punct.no =\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { add.period$ }\r
- if$\r
- this.status.quote quote.close =\r
- { "''" * }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
-write$\r
-newline$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {is.last.char.not.punct}\r
-{ duplicate$\r
- "}" * add.period$\r
- #-1 #1 substring$ "." =\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {is.multiple.pages}\r
-{ 't :=\r
- #0 'multiresult :=\r
- { multiresult not\r
- t empty$ not\r
- and\r
- }\r
- { t #1 #1 substring$\r
- duplicate$ "-" =\r
- swap$ duplicate$ "," =\r
- swap$ "+" =\r
- or or\r
- { #1 'multiresult := }\r
- { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- while$\r
- multiresult\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {capitalize}{ "u" change.case$ "t" change.case$ }\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {emphasize}\r
-{ duplicate$ empty$\r
- { pop$ "" }\r
- { "\emph{" swap$ * "}" * }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {do.name.latex.cmd}\r
-{ name.latex.cmd\r
- empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { name.latex.cmd "{" * swap$ * "}" * }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-% IEEEtran.bst uses its own \BIBforeignlanguage command which directly\r
-% invokes the TeX hyphenation patterns without the need of the Babel\r
-% package. Babel does a lot more than switch hyphenation patterns and\r
-% its loading can cause unintended effects in many class files (such as\r
-% IEEEtran.cls).\r
-FUNCTION {select.language}\r
-{ duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$\r
- { language empty$ 'skip$\r
- { "\BIBforeignlanguage{" language * "}{" * swap$ * "}" * }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {tie.or.space.prefix}\r
-{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 <\r
- { "~" }\r
- { " " }\r
- if$\r
- swap$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {get.bbl.editor}\r
-{ editor num.names$ #1 > 'bbl.editors 'bbl.editor if$ }\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {space.word}{ " " swap$ * " " * }\r
-\r
-\r
-% Field Conditioners, Converters, Checkers and External Interfaces\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {empty.field.to.null.string}\r
-{ duplicate$ empty$\r
- { pop$ "" }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {either.or.check}\r
-{ empty$\r
- { pop$ }\r
- { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {empty.entry.warn}\r
-{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$\r
- month empty$ year empty$ note empty$ url empty$\r
- and and and and and and\r
- { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ }\r
- 'skip$\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-% The bibinfo system provides a way for the electronic parsing/acquisition\r
-% of a bibliography's contents as is done by ReVTeX. For example, a field\r
-% could be entered into the bibliography as:\r
-% \bibinfo{volume}{2}\r
-% Only the "2" would show up in the document, but the LaTeX \bibinfo command\r
-% could do additional things with the information. IEEEtran.bst does provide\r
-% a \bibinfo command via "\providecommand{\bibinfo}[2]{#2}". However, it is\r
-% currently not used as the bogus bibinfo functions defined here output the\r
-% entry values directly without the \bibinfo wrapper. The bibinfo functions\r
-% themselves (and the calls to them) are retained for possible future use.\r
-% \r
-% bibinfo.check avoids acting on missing fields while bibinfo.warn will\r
-% issue a warning message if a missing field is detected. Prior to calling\r
-% the bibinfo functions, the user should push the field value and then its\r
-% name string, in that order.\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {bibinfo.check}\r
-{ swap$ duplicate$ missing$\r
- { pop$ pop$ "" }\r
- { duplicate$ empty$\r
- { swap$ pop$ }\r
- { swap$ pop$ }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {bibinfo.warn}\r
-{ swap$ duplicate$ missing$\r
- { swap$ "missing " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ pop$ "" }\r
- { duplicate$ empty$\r
- { swap$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ }\r
- { swap$ pop$ }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-% IEEE separates large numbers with more than 4 digits into groups of\r
-% three. IEEE uses a small space to separate these number groups. \r
-% Typical applications include patent and page numbers.\r
-\r
-% number of consecutive digits required to trigger the group separation.\r
-FUNCTION {large.number.trigger}{ #5 }\r
-\r
-% For numbers longer than the trigger, this is the blocksize of the groups.\r
-% The blocksize must be less than the trigger threshold, and 2 * blocksize\r
-% must be greater than the trigger threshold (can't do more than one\r
-% separation on the initial trigger).\r
-FUNCTION {large.number.blocksize}{ #3 }\r
-\r
-% What is actually inserted between the number groups.\r
-FUNCTION {large.number.separator}{ "\," }\r
-\r
-% So as to save on integer variables by reusing existing ones, numnames\r
-% holds the current number of consecutive digits read and nameptr holds\r
-% the number that will trigger an inserted space.\r
-FUNCTION {large.number.separate}\r
-{ 't :=\r
- ""\r
- #0 'numnames :=\r
- large.number.trigger 'nameptr :=\r
- { t empty$ not }\r
- { t #-1 #1 substring$ is.num\r
- { numnames #1 + 'numnames := }\r
- { #0 'numnames := \r
- large.number.trigger 'nameptr :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- t #-1 #1 substring$ swap$ *\r
- t #-2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=\r
- numnames nameptr =\r
- { duplicate$ #1 nameptr large.number.blocksize - substring$ swap$\r
- nameptr large.number.blocksize - #1 + global.max$ substring$\r
- large.number.separator swap$ * *\r
- nameptr large.number.blocksize - 'numnames :=\r
- large.number.blocksize #1 + 'nameptr :=\r
- }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- while$\r
-}\r
-\r
-% Converts all single dashes "-" to double dashes "--".\r
-FUNCTION {n.dashify}\r
-{ large.number.separate\r
- 't :=\r
- ""\r
- { t empty$ not }\r
- { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" =\r
- { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not\r
- { "--" *\r
- t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=\r
- }\r
- { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = }\r
- { "-" *\r
- t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=\r
- }\r
- while$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { t #1 #1 substring$ *\r
- t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- while$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-% This function detects entries with names that are identical to that of\r
-% the previous entry and replaces the repeated names with dashes (if the\r
-% "is.dash.repeated.names" user control is nonzero).\r
-FUNCTION {name.or.dash}\r
-{ 's :=\r
- oldname empty$\r
- { s 'oldname := s }\r
- { s oldname =\r
- { is.dash.repeated.names\r
- { repeated.name.dashes }\r
- { s 'oldname := s }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { s 'oldname := s }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-% Converts the number string on the top of the stack to\r
-% "numerical ordinal form" (e.g., "7" to "7th"). There is\r
-% no artificial limit to the upper bound of the numbers as the\r
-% least significant digit always determines the ordinal form.\r
-FUNCTION {num.to.ordinal}\r
-{ duplicate$ #-1 #1 substring$ "1" =\r
- { bbl.st * }\r
- { duplicate$ #-1 #1 substring$ "2" =\r
- { bbl.nd * }\r
- { duplicate$ #-1 #1 substring$ "3" =\r
- { bbl.rd * }\r
- { bbl.th * }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-% If the string on the top of the stack begins with a number,\r
-% (e.g., 11th) then replace the string with the leading number\r
-% it contains. Otherwise retain the string as-is. s holds the\r
-% extracted number, t holds the part of the string that remains\r
-% to be scanned.\r
-FUNCTION {extract.num}\r
-{ duplicate$ 't :=\r
- "" 's :=\r
- { t empty$ not }\r
- { t #1 #1 substring$\r
- t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=\r
- duplicate$ is.num\r
- { s swap$ * 's := }\r
- { pop$ "" 't := }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- while$\r
- s empty$\r
- 'skip$\r
- { pop$ s }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-% Converts the word number string on the top of the stack to\r
-% Arabic string form. Will be successful up to "tenth".\r
-FUNCTION {word.to.num}\r
-{ duplicate$ "l" change.case$ 's :=\r
- s "first" =\r
- { pop$ "1" }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- s "second" =\r
- { pop$ "2" }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- s "third" =\r
- { pop$ "3" }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- s "fourth" =\r
- { pop$ "4" }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- s "fifth" =\r
- { pop$ "5" }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- s "sixth" =\r
- { pop$ "6" }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- s "seventh" =\r
- { pop$ "7" }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- s "eighth" =\r
- { pop$ "8" }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- s "ninth" =\r
- { pop$ "9" }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- s "tenth" =\r
- { pop$ "10" }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-% Converts the string on the top of the stack to numerical\r
-% ordinal (e.g., "11th") form.\r
-FUNCTION {convert.edition}\r
-{ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { duplicate$ #1 #1 substring$ is.num\r
- { extract.num\r
- num.to.ordinal\r
- }\r
- { word.to.num\r
- duplicate$ #1 #1 substring$ is.num\r
- { num.to.ordinal }\r
- { "edition ordinal word " quote$ * edition * quote$ *\r
- " may be too high (or improper) for conversion" * " in " * cite$ * warning$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% LATEX BIBLIOGRAPHY CODE %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {start.entry}\r
-{ newline$\r
- "\bibitem{" write$\r
- cite$ write$\r
- "}" write$\r
- newline$\r
- ""\r
- initialize.prev.this.status\r
-}\r
-\r
-% Here we write out all the LaTeX code that we will need. The most involved\r
-% code sequences are those that control the alternate interword spacing and\r
-% foreign language hyphenation patterns. The heavy use of \providecommand\r
-% gives users a way to override the defaults. Special thanks to Javier Bezos,\r
-% Johannes Braams, Robin Fairbairns, Heiko Oberdiek, Donald Arseneau and all\r
-% the other gurus on comp.text.tex for their help and advice on the topic of\r
-% \selectlanguage, Babel and BibTeX.\r
-FUNCTION {begin.bib}\r
-{ "% Generated by IEEEtran.bst, version: " bst.file.version * " (" * bst.file.date * ")" *\r
- write$ newline$\r
- preamble$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { preamble$ write$ newline$ }\r
- if$\r
- "\begin{thebibliography}{" longest.label * "}" *\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\providecommand{\url}[1]{#1}"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\csname url@samestyle\endcsname"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\providecommand{\newblock}{\relax}"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\providecommand{\bibinfo}[2]{#2}"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\providecommand{\BIBentrySTDinterwordspacing}{\spaceskip=0pt\relax}"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\providecommand{\BIBentryALTinterwordstretchfactor}{"\r
- ALTinterwordstretchfactor * "}" *\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\providecommand{\BIBentryALTinterwordspacing}{\spaceskip=\fontdimen2\font plus "\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\BIBentryALTinterwordstretchfactor\fontdimen3\font minus \fontdimen4\font\relax}"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\providecommand{\BIBforeignlanguage}[2]{{%"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1\endcsname\relax"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\typeout{** WARNING: IEEEtran.bst: No hyphenation pattern has been}%"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\typeout{** loaded for the language `#1'. Using the pattern for}%"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\typeout{** the default language instead.}%"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\else"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\language=\csname l@#1\endcsname"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\fi"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "#2}}"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\providecommand{\BIBdecl}{\relax}"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\BIBdecl"\r
- write$ newline$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {end.bib}\r
-{ newline$ "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ }\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {if.url.alt.interword.spacing}\r
-{ is.use.alt.interword.spacing \r
- {url empty$ 'skip$ {"\BIBentryALTinterwordspacing" write$ newline$} if$}\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {if.url.std.interword.spacing}\r
-{ is.use.alt.interword.spacing \r
- {url empty$ 'skip$ {"\BIBentrySTDinterwordspacing" write$ newline$} if$}\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% LONGEST LABEL PASS %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label}\r
-{ "" 'longest.label :=\r
- #1 'number.label :=\r
- #0 'longest.label.width :=\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {longest.label.pass}\r
-{ type$ "ieeetranbstctl" =\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { number.label int.to.str$ 'label :=\r
- number.label #1 + 'number.label :=\r
- label width$ longest.label.width >\r
- { label 'longest.label :=\r
- label width$ 'longest.label.width :=\r
- }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% FORMAT HANDLERS %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-%% Lower Level Formats (used by higher level formats)\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.address.org.or.pub.date}\r
-{ 't :=\r
- ""\r
- year empty$\r
- { "empty year in " cite$ * warning$ }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- address empty$ t empty$ and\r
- year empty$ and month empty$ and\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.status.std\r
- address "address" bibinfo.check *\r
- t empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { punct.period 'prev.status.punct :=\r
- space.large 'prev.status.space :=\r
- address empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { ": " * }\r
- if$\r
- t *\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- year empty$ month empty$ and\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { t empty$ address empty$ and\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { ", " * }\r
- if$\r
- month empty$\r
- { year empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { year "year" bibinfo.check * }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { month "month" bibinfo.check *\r
- year empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { " " * year "year" bibinfo.check * }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.names}\r
-{ 'bibinfo :=\r
- duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {\r
- this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- 's :=\r
- "" 't :=\r
- #1 'nameptr :=\r
- s num.names$ 'numnames :=\r
- numnames 'namesleft :=\r
- { namesleft #0 > }\r
- { s nameptr\r
- name.format.string\r
- format.name$\r
- bibinfo bibinfo.check\r
- 't :=\r
- nameptr #1 >\r
- { nameptr num.names.shown.with.forced.et.al #1 + =\r
- numnames max.num.names.before.forced.et.al >\r
- is.forced.et.al and and\r
- { "others" 't :=\r
- #1 'namesleft :=\r
- }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- namesleft #1 >\r
- { ", " * t do.name.latex.cmd * }\r
- { s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =\r
- { 't := }\r
- { pop$ }\r
- if$\r
- t "others" =\r
- { " " * bbl.etal emphasize * }\r
- { numnames #2 >\r
- { "," * }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- bbl.and\r
- space.word * t do.name.latex.cmd *\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { t do.name.latex.cmd }\r
- if$\r
- nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=\r
- namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=\r
- }\r
- while$\r
- cap.status.std\r
- } if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% Higher Level Formats\r
-\r
-%% addresses/locations\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.address}\r
-{ address duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% author/editor names\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.authors}{ author "author" format.names }\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.editors}\r
-{ editor "editor" format.names duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { ", " *\r
- get.bbl.editor\r
- capitalize\r
- *\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% date\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.date}\r
-{\r
- month "month" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$\r
- year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$\r
- { swap$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.status.std\r
- "there's a month but no year in " cite$ * warning$ }\r
- if$\r
- *\r
- }\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.status.std\r
- swap$ 'skip$\r
- {\r
- swap$\r
- " " * swap$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- *\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.date.electronic}\r
-{ month "month" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$\r
- year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$\r
- { swap$ \r
- { pop$ }\r
- { "there's a month but no year in " cite$ * warning$\r
- pop$ ")" * "(" swap$ *\r
- this.to.prev.status\r
- punct.no 'this.status.punct :=\r
- space.normal 'this.status.space :=\r
- quote.no 'this.status.quote :=\r
- cap.yes 'status.cap :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { swap$ \r
- { swap$ pop$ ")" * "(" swap$ * }\r
- { "(" swap$ * ", " * swap$ * ")" * }\r
- if$\r
- this.to.prev.status\r
- punct.no 'this.status.punct :=\r
- space.normal 'this.status.space :=\r
- quote.no 'this.status.quote :=\r
- cap.yes 'status.cap :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% edition/title\r
-\r
-% Note: IEEE considers the edition to be closely associated with\r
-% the title of a book. So, in IEEEtran.bst the edition is normally handled \r
-% within the formatting of the title. The format.edition function is \r
-% retained here for possible future use.\r
-FUNCTION {format.edition}\r
-{ edition duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- convert.edition\r
- status.cap\r
- { "t" }\r
- { "l" }\r
- if$ change.case$\r
- "edition" bibinfo.check\r
- "~" * bbl.edition *\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-% This is used to format the booktitle of a conference proceedings.\r
-% Here we use the "intype" field to provide the user a way to \r
-% override the word "in" (e.g., with things like "presented at")\r
-% Use of intype stops the emphasis of the booktitle to indicate that\r
-% we no longer mean the written conference proceedings, but the\r
-% conference itself.\r
-FUNCTION {format.in.booktitle}\r
-{ booktitle "booktitle" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- select.language\r
- intype missing$\r
- { emphasize\r
- bbl.in " " *\r
- }\r
- { intype " " * }\r
- if$\r
- swap$ *\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-% This is used to format the booktitle of collection.\r
-% Here the "intype" field is not supported, but "edition" is.\r
-FUNCTION {format.in.booktitle.edition}\r
-{ booktitle "booktitle" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- select.language\r
- emphasize\r
- edition empty$ 'skip$\r
- { ", " *\r
- edition\r
- convert.edition\r
- "l" change.case$\r
- * "~" * bbl.edition *\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- bbl.in " " * swap$ *\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.article.title}\r
-{ title duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- "t" change.case$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- "title" bibinfo.check\r
- duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { quote.close 'this.status.quote :=\r
- is.last.char.not.punct\r
- { punct.std 'this.status.punct := }\r
- { punct.no 'this.status.punct := }\r
- if$\r
- select.language\r
- "``" swap$ *\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.article.title.electronic}\r
-{ title duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.status.std\r
- "t" change.case$ \r
- }\r
- if$\r
- "title" bibinfo.check\r
- duplicate$ empty$ \r
- { skip$ } \r
- { select.language }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.book.title.edition}\r
-{ title "title" bibinfo.check\r
- duplicate$ empty$\r
- { "empty title in " cite$ * warning$ }\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- select.language\r
- emphasize\r
- edition empty$ 'skip$\r
- { ", " *\r
- edition\r
- convert.edition\r
- status.cap\r
- { "t" }\r
- { "l" }\r
- if$\r
- change.case$\r
- * "~" * bbl.edition *\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.book.title}\r
-{ title "title" bibinfo.check\r
- duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.status.std\r
- select.language\r
- emphasize\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% journal\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.journal}\r
-{ journal duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.status.std\r
- select.language\r
- emphasize\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% how published\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.howpublished}\r
-{ howpublished duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% institutions/organization/publishers/school\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.institution}\r
-{ institution duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.organization}\r
-{ organization duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.address.publisher.date}\r
-{ publisher "publisher" bibinfo.warn format.address.org.or.pub.date }\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.address.publisher.date.nowarn}\r
-{ publisher "publisher" bibinfo.check format.address.org.or.pub.date }\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.address.organization.date}\r
-{ organization "organization" bibinfo.check format.address.org.or.pub.date }\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.school}\r
-{ school duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% volume/number/series/chapter/pages\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.volume}\r
-{ volume empty.field.to.null.string\r
- duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- bbl.volume \r
- status.cap\r
- { capitalize }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- swap$ tie.or.space.prefix\r
- "volume" bibinfo.check\r
- * *\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.number}\r
-{ number empty.field.to.null.string\r
- duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- status.cap\r
- { bbl.number capitalize }\r
- { bbl.number }\r
- if$\r
- swap$ tie.or.space.prefix\r
- "number" bibinfo.check\r
- * *\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.number.if.use.for.article}\r
-{ is.use.number.for.article \r
- { format.number }\r
- { "" }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-% IEEE does not seem to tie the series so closely with the volume\r
-% and number as is done in other bibliography styles. Instead the\r
-% series is treated somewhat like an extension of the title.\r
-FUNCTION {format.series}\r
-{ series empty$ \r
- { "" }\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- bbl.series " " *\r
- series "series" bibinfo.check *\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.chapter}\r
-{ chapter empty$\r
- { "" }\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- type empty$\r
- { bbl.chapter }\r
- { type "l" change.case$\r
- "type" bibinfo.check\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- chapter tie.or.space.prefix\r
- "chapter" bibinfo.check\r
- * *\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-% The intended use of format.paper is for paper numbers of inproceedings.\r
-% The paper type can be overridden via the type field.\r
-% We allow the type to be displayed even if the paper number is absent\r
-% for things like "postdeadline paper"\r
-FUNCTION {format.paper}\r
-{ is.use.paper\r
- { paper empty$\r
- { type empty$\r
- { "" }\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- type "type" bibinfo.check\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- type empty$\r
- { bbl.paper }\r
- { type "type" bibinfo.check }\r
- if$\r
- " " * paper\r
- "paper" bibinfo.check\r
- *\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { "" } \r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.pages}\r
-{ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- duplicate$ is.multiple.pages\r
- {\r
- bbl.pages swap$\r
- n.dashify\r
- }\r
- {\r
- bbl.page swap$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- tie.or.space.prefix\r
- "pages" bibinfo.check\r
- * *\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% technical report number\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.tech.report.number}\r
-{ number "number" bibinfo.check\r
- this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.status.std\r
- type duplicate$ empty$\r
- { pop$ \r
- bbl.techrep\r
- }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- "type" bibinfo.check \r
- swap$ duplicate$ empty$\r
- { pop$ }\r
- { tie.or.space.prefix * * }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% note\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.note}\r
-{ note empty$\r
- { "" }\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- punct.period 'this.status.punct :=\r
- note #1 #1 substring$\r
- duplicate$ "{" =\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { status.cap\r
- { "u" }\r
- { "l" }\r
- if$\r
- change.case$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- note #2 global.max$ substring$ * "note" bibinfo.check\r
- cap.yes 'status.cap :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% patent\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.patent.date}\r
-{ this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- year empty$\r
- { monthfiled duplicate$ empty$\r
- { "monthfiled" bibinfo.check pop$ "" }\r
- { "monthfiled" bibinfo.check }\r
- if$\r
- dayfiled duplicate$ empty$\r
- { "dayfiled" bibinfo.check pop$ "" * }\r
- { "dayfiled" bibinfo.check \r
- monthfiled empty$ \r
- { "dayfiled without a monthfiled in " cite$ * warning$\r
- * \r
- }\r
- { " " swap$ * * }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- yearfiled empty$\r
- { "no year or yearfiled in " cite$ * warning$ }\r
- { yearfiled "yearfiled" bibinfo.check \r
- swap$\r
- duplicate$ empty$\r
- { pop$ }\r
- { ", " * swap$ * }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { month duplicate$ empty$\r
- { "month" bibinfo.check pop$ "" }\r
- { "month" bibinfo.check }\r
- if$\r
- day duplicate$ empty$\r
- { "day" bibinfo.check pop$ "" * }\r
- { "day" bibinfo.check \r
- month empty$ \r
- { "day without a month in " cite$ * warning$\r
- * \r
- }\r
- { " " swap$ * * }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- year "year" bibinfo.check \r
- swap$\r
- duplicate$ empty$\r
- { pop$ }\r
- { ", " * swap$ * }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- cap.status.std\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.patent.nationality.type.number}\r
-{ this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- nationality duplicate$ empty$\r
- { "nationality" bibinfo.warn pop$ "" }\r
- { "nationality" bibinfo.check\r
- duplicate$ "l" change.case$ "united states" =\r
- { pop$ bbl.patentUS }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- " " *\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- type empty$\r
- { bbl.patent "type" bibinfo.check }\r
- { type "type" bibinfo.check }\r
- if$ \r
- *\r
- number duplicate$ empty$\r
- { "number" bibinfo.warn pop$ }\r
- { "number" bibinfo.check\r
- large.number.separate\r
- swap$ " " * swap$ *\r
- }\r
- if$ \r
- cap.status.std\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% standard\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.organization.institution.standard.type.number}\r
-{ this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- organization duplicate$ empty$\r
- { pop$ \r
- institution duplicate$ empty$\r
- { "institution" bibinfo.warn }\r
- { "institution" bibinfo.warn " " * }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { "organization" bibinfo.warn " " * }\r
- if$\r
- type empty$\r
- { bbl.standard "type" bibinfo.check }\r
- { type "type" bibinfo.check }\r
- if$ \r
- *\r
- number duplicate$ empty$\r
- { "number" bibinfo.check pop$ }\r
- { "number" bibinfo.check\r
- large.number.separate\r
- swap$ " " * swap$ *\r
- }\r
- if$ \r
- cap.status.std\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.revision}\r
-{ revision empty$\r
- { "" }\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- bbl.revision\r
- revision tie.or.space.prefix\r
- "revision" bibinfo.check\r
- * *\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-%% thesis\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.master.thesis.type}\r
-{ this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- type empty$\r
- {\r
- bbl.mthesis\r
- }\r
- { \r
- type "type" bibinfo.check\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-cap.status.std\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.phd.thesis.type}\r
-{ this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- type empty$\r
- {\r
- bbl.phdthesis\r
- }\r
- { \r
- type "type" bibinfo.check\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-cap.status.std\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% URL\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.url}\r
-{ url empty$\r
- { "" }\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.yes 'status.cap :=\r
- name.url.prefix " " *\r
- "\url{" * url * "}" *\r
- punct.no 'this.status.punct :=\r
- punct.period 'prev.status.punct :=\r
- space.normal 'this.status.space :=\r
- space.normal 'prev.status.space :=\r
- quote.no 'this.status.quote :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% ENTRY HANDLERS %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-\r
-% Note: In many journals, IEEE (or the authors) tend not to show the number\r
-% for articles, so the display of the number is controlled here by the\r
-% switch "is.use.number.for.article"\r
-FUNCTION {article}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors "author" output.warn\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.article.title "title" output.warn\r
- format.journal "journal" bibinfo.check "journal" output.warn\r
- format.volume output\r
- format.number.if.use.for.article output\r
- format.pages output\r
- format.date "year" output.warn\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {book}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- author empty$\r
- { format.editors "author and editor" output.warn }\r
- { format.authors output.nonnull }\r
- if$\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.book.title.edition output\r
- format.series output\r
- author empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { format.editors output }\r
- if$\r
- format.address.publisher.date output\r
- format.volume output\r
- format.number output\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {booklet}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors output\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.article.title "title" output.warn\r
- format.howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.organization "organization" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.address "address" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.date output\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {electronic}\r
-{ std.status.using.period\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors output\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.date.electronic output\r
- format.article.title.electronic output\r
- format.howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.organization "organization" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.address "address" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- empty.entry.warn\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {inbook}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- author empty$\r
- { format.editors "author and editor" output.warn }\r
- { format.authors output.nonnull }\r
- if$\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.book.title.edition output\r
- format.series output\r
- format.address.publisher.date output\r
- format.volume output\r
- format.number output\r
- format.chapter output\r
- format.pages output\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {incollection}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors "author" output.warn\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.article.title "title" output.warn\r
- format.in.booktitle.edition "booktitle" output.warn\r
- format.series output\r
- format.editors output\r
- format.address.publisher.date.nowarn output\r
- format.volume output\r
- format.number output\r
- format.chapter output\r
- format.pages output\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {inproceedings}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors "author" output.warn\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.article.title "title" output.warn\r
- format.in.booktitle "booktitle" output.warn\r
- format.series output\r
- format.editors output\r
- format.volume output\r
- format.number output\r
- publisher empty$\r
- { format.address.organization.date output }\r
- { format.organization "organization" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.address.publisher.date output\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- format.paper output\r
- format.pages output\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {manual}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors output\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.book.title.edition "title" output.warn\r
- format.howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output \r
- format.organization "organization" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.address "address" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.date output\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {mastersthesis}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors "author" output.warn\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.article.title "title" output.warn\r
- format.master.thesis.type output.nonnull\r
- format.school "school" bibinfo.warn output\r
- format.address "address" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.date "year" output.warn\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {misc}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors output\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.article.title output\r
- format.howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output \r
- format.organization "organization" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.address "address" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.pages output\r
- format.date output\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- empty.entry.warn\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {patent}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors output\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.article.title output\r
- format.patent.nationality.type.number output\r
- format.patent.date output\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- empty.entry.warn\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {periodical}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.editors output\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.book.title "title" output.warn\r
- format.series output\r
- format.volume output\r
- format.number output\r
- format.organization "organization" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.date "year" output.warn\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {phdthesis}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors "author" output.warn\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.article.title "title" output.warn\r
- format.phd.thesis.type output.nonnull\r
- format.school "school" bibinfo.warn output\r
- format.address "address" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.date "year" output.warn\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {proceedings}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.editors output\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.book.title "title" output.warn\r
- format.series output\r
- format.volume output\r
- format.number output\r
- publisher empty$\r
- { format.address.organization.date output }\r
- { format.organization "organization" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.address.publisher.date output\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {standard}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors output\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.book.title "title" output.warn\r
- format.howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output \r
- format.organization.institution.standard.type.number output\r
- format.revision output\r
- format.date output\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {techreport}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors "author" output.warn\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.article.title "title" output.warn\r
- format.howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output \r
- format.institution "institution" bibinfo.warn output\r
- format.address "address" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.tech.report.number output.nonnull\r
- format.date "year" output.warn\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {unpublished}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors "author" output.warn\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.article.title "title" output.warn\r
- format.date output\r
- format.note "note" output.warn\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-% The special entry type which provides the user interface to the\r
-% BST controls\r
-FUNCTION {IEEEtranBSTCTL}\r
-{ is.print.banners.to.terminal\r
- { "** IEEEtran BST control entry " quote$ * cite$ * quote$ * " detected." *\r
- top$\r
- }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- CTLuse_article_number\r
- empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { CTLuse_article_number\r
- yes.no.to.int\r
- 'is.use.number.for.article :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- CTLuse_paper\r
- empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { CTLuse_paper\r
- yes.no.to.int\r
- 'is.use.paper :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- CTLuse_forced_etal\r
- empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { CTLuse_forced_etal\r
- yes.no.to.int\r
- 'is.forced.et.al :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- CTLmax_names_forced_etal\r
- empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { CTLmax_names_forced_etal\r
- string.to.integer\r
- 'max.num.names.before.forced.et.al :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- CTLnames_show_etal\r
- empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { CTLnames_show_etal\r
- string.to.integer\r
- 'num.names.shown.with.forced.et.al :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- CTLuse_alt_spacing\r
- empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { CTLuse_alt_spacing\r
- yes.no.to.int\r
- 'is.use.alt.interword.spacing :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- CTLalt_stretch_factor\r
- empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { CTLalt_stretch_factor\r
- 'ALTinterwordstretchfactor :=\r
- "\renewcommand{\BIBentryALTinterwordstretchfactor}{"\r
- ALTinterwordstretchfactor * "}" *\r
- write$ newline$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- CTLdash_repeated_names\r
- empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { CTLdash_repeated_names\r
- yes.no.to.int\r
- 'is.dash.repeated.names :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- CTLname_format_string\r
- empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { CTLname_format_string\r
- 'name.format.string :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- CTLname_latex_cmd\r
- empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { CTLname_latex_cmd\r
- 'name.latex.cmd :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- CTLname_url_prefix\r
- missing$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { CTLname_url_prefix\r
- 'name.url.prefix :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-\r
-\r
- num.names.shown.with.forced.et.al max.num.names.before.forced.et.al >\r
- { "CTLnames_show_etal cannot be greater than CTLmax_names_forced_etal in " cite$ * warning$ \r
- max.num.names.before.forced.et.al 'num.names.shown.with.forced.et.al :=\r
- }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% ENTRY ALIASES %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-FUNCTION {conference}{inproceedings}\r
-FUNCTION {online}{electronic}\r
-FUNCTION {internet}{electronic}\r
-FUNCTION {webpage}{electronic}\r
-FUNCTION {www}{electronic}\r
-FUNCTION {default.type}{misc}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% MAIN PROGRAM %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-READ\r
-\r
-EXECUTE {initialize.controls}\r
-EXECUTE {initialize.status.constants}\r
-EXECUTE {banner.message}\r
-\r
-EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label}\r
-ITERATE {longest.label.pass}\r
-\r
-EXECUTE {begin.bib}\r
-ITERATE {call.type$}\r
-EXECUTE {end.bib}\r
-\r
-EXECUTE{completed.message}\r
-\r
-\r
-%% That's all folks, mds.\r
+++ /dev/null
-%%
-%% IEEEtran.cls 2007/03/05 version V1.7a
-%%
-%%
-%% This is the official IEEE LaTeX class for authors of the Institute of
-%% Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Transactions journals and
-%% conferences.
-%%
-%% Support sites:
-%% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/
-%% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/
-%% and
-%% http://www.ieee.org/
-%%
-%% Based on the original 1993 IEEEtran.cls, but with many bug fixes
-%% and enhancements (from both JVH and MDS) over the 1996/7 version.
-%%
-%%
-%% Contributors:
-%% Gerry Murray (1993), Silvano Balemi (1993),
-%% Jon Dixon (1996), Peter N"uchter (1996),
-%% Juergen von Hagen (2000), and Michael Shell (2001-2007)
-%%
-%%
-%% Copyright (c) 1993-2000 by Gerry Murray, Silvano Balemi,
-%% Jon Dixon, Peter N"uchter,
-%% Juergen von Hagen
-%% and
-%% Copyright (c) 2001-2007 by Michael Shell
-%%
-%% Current maintainer (V1.3 to V1.7): Michael Shell
-%% See:
-%% http://www.michaelshell.org/
-%% for current contact information.
-%%
-%% Special thanks to Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau
-%% for allowing the inclusion of the \@ifmtarg command
-%% from their ifmtarg LaTeX package.
-%%
-%%*************************************************************************
-%% Legal Notice:
-%% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or
-%% implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
-%% FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE!
-%% User assumes all risk.
-%% In no event shall IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for
-%% any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental,
-%% consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse
-%% of any information contained here.
-%%
-%% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not
-%% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE.
-%%
-%% This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL)
-%% ( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used,
-%% distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included
-%% in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released
-%% 2003/12/01 or later.
-%% Retain all contribution notices and credits.
-%% ** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including **
-%% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. **
-%%
-%% File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex,
-%% bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex
-%%
-%% Major changes to the user interface should be indicated by an
-%% increase in the version numbers. If a version is a beta, it will
-%% be indicated with a BETA suffix, i.e., 1.4 BETA.
-%% Small changes can be indicated by appending letters to the version
-%% such as "IEEEtran_v14a.cls".
-%% In all cases, \Providesclass, any \typeout messages to the user,
-%% \IEEEtransversionmajor and \IEEEtransversionminor must reflect the
-%% correct version information.
-%% The changes should also be documented via source comments.
-%%*************************************************************************
-%%
-%
-% Available class options
-% e.g., \documentclass[10pt,conference]{IEEEtran}
-%
-% *** choose only one from each category ***
-%
-% 9pt, 10pt, 11pt, 12pt
-% Sets normal font size. The default is 10pt.
-%
-% conference, journal, technote, peerreview, peerreviewca
-% determines format mode - conference papers, journal papers,
-% correspondence papers (technotes), or peer review papers. The user
-% should also select 9pt when using technote. peerreview is like
-% journal mode, but provides for a single-column "cover" title page for
-% anonymous peer review. The paper title (without the author names) is
-% repeated at the top of the page after the cover page. For peer review
-% papers, the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle command must be executed (will
-% automatically be ignored for non-peerreview modes) at the place the
-% cover page is to end, usually just after the abstract (keywords are
-% not normally used with peer review papers). peerreviewca is like
-% peerreview, but allows the author names to be entered and formatted
-% as with conference mode so that author affiliation and contact
-% information can be easily seen on the cover page.
-% The default is journal.
-%
-% draft, draftcls, draftclsnofoot, final
-% determines if paper is formatted as a widely spaced draft (for
-% handwritten editor comments) or as a properly typeset final version.
-% draftcls restricts draft mode to the class file while all other LaTeX
-% packages (i.e., \usepackage{graphicx}) will behave as final - allows
-% for a draft paper with visible figures, etc. draftclsnofoot is like
-% draftcls, but does not display the date and the word "DRAFT" at the foot
-% of the pages. If using one of the draft modes, the user will probably
-% also want to select onecolumn.
-% The default is final.
-%
-% letterpaper, a4paper
-% determines paper size: 8.5in X 11in or 210mm X 297mm. CHANGING THE PAPER
-% SIZE WILL NOT ALTER THE TYPESETTING OF THE DOCUMENT - ONLY THE MARGINS
-% WILL BE AFFECTED. In particular, documents using the a4paper option will
-% have reduced side margins (A4 is narrower than US letter) and a longer
-% bottom margin (A4 is longer than US letter). For both cases, the top
-% margins will be the same and the text will be horizontally centered.
-% For final submission to IEEE, authors should use US letter (8.5 X 11in)
-% paper. Note that authors should ensure that all post-processing
-% (ps, pdf, etc.) uses the same paper specificiation as the .tex document.
-% Problems here are by far the number one reason for incorrect margins.
-% IEEEtran will automatically set the default paper size under pdflatex
-% (without requiring a change to pdftex.cfg), so this issue is more
-% important to dvips users. Fix config.ps, config.pdf, or ~/.dvipsrc for
-% dvips, or use the dvips -t papersize option instead as needed. See the
-% testflow documentation
-% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/testflow
-% for more details on dvips paper size configuration.
-% The default is letterpaper.
-%
-% oneside, twoside
-% determines if layout follows single sided or two sided (duplex)
-% printing. The only notable change is with the headings at the top of
-% the pages.
-% The default is oneside.
-%
-% onecolumn, twocolumn
-% determines if text is organized into one or two columns per page. One
-% column mode is usually used only with draft papers.
-% The default is twocolumn.
-%
-% compsoc
-% Use the format of the IEEE Computer Society.
-%
-% romanappendices
-% Use the "Appendix I" convention when numbering appendices. IEEEtran.cls
-% now defaults to Alpha "Appendix A" convention - the opposite of what
-% v1.6b and earlier did.
-%
-% captionsoff
-% disables the display of the figure/table captions. Some IEEE journals
-% request that captions be removed and figures/tables be put on pages
-% of their own at the end of an initial paper submission. The endfloat
-% package can be used with this class option to achieve this format.
-%
-% nofonttune
-% turns off tuning of the font interword spacing. Maybe useful to those
-% not using the standard Times fonts or for those who have already "tuned"
-% their fonts.
-% The default is to enable IEEEtran to tune font parameters.
-%
-%
-%----------
-% Available CLASSINPUTs provided (all are macros unless otherwise noted):
-% \CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch
-% \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin
-% \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin
-% \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin
-% \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin
-%
-% Available CLASSINFOs provided:
-% \ifCLASSINFOpdf (TeX if conditional)
-% \CLASSINFOpaperwidth (macro)
-% \CLASSINFOpaperheight (macro)
-% \CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip (length)
-% \CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip (length)
-%
-% Available CLASSOPTIONs provided:
-% all class option flags (TeX if conditionals) unless otherwise noted,
-% e.g., \ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff
-% point size options provided as a single macro:
-% \CLASSOPTIONpt
-% which will be defined as 9, 10, 11, or 12 depending on the document's
-% normalsize point size.
-% also, class option peerreviewca implies the use of class option peerreview
-% and classoption draft implies the use of class option draftcls
-
-
-
-
-
-\ProvidesClass{IEEEtran}[2007/03/05 V1.7a by Michael Shell]
-\typeout{-- See the "IEEEtran_HOWTO" manual for usage information.}
-\typeout{-- http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/}
-\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
-
-% IEEEtran.cls version numbers, provided as of V1.3
-% These values serve as a way a .tex file can
-% determine if the new features are provided.
-% The version number of this IEEEtrans.cls can be obtained from
-% these values. i.e., V1.4
-% KEEP THESE AS INTEGERS! i.e., NO {4a} or anything like that-
-% (no need to enumerate "a" minor changes here)
-\def\IEEEtransversionmajor{1}
-\def\IEEEtransversionminor{7}
-
-% These do nothing, but provide them like in article.cls
-\newif\if@restonecol
-\newif\if@titlepage
-
-
-% class option conditionals
-\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONonecolumn \CLASSOPTIONonecolumnfalse
-\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn \CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue
-
-\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONoneside \CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue
-\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside \CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse
-
-\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONfinal \CLASSOPTIONfinaltrue
-\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraft \CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse
-\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse
-\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse
-
-\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse
-\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
-
-\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONjournal \CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue
-\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONconference \CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse
-\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote \CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse
-
-\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune \CLASSOPTIONnofonttunefalse
-
-\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff \CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofffalse
-
-\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc \CLASSOPTIONcompsocfalse
-
-\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices \CLASSOPTIONromanappendicesfalse
-
-
-% class info conditionals
-
-% indicates if pdf (via pdflatex) output
-\newif\ifCLASSINFOpdf \CLASSINFOpdffalse
-
-
-% V1.6b internal flag to show if using a4paper
-\newif\if@IEEEusingAfourpaper \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse
-
-
-
-% IEEEtran class scratch pad registers
-% dimen
-\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
-\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
-% count
-\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountA
-\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountB
-% token list
-\newtoks\@IEEEtrantmptoksA
-
-% we use \CLASSOPTIONpt so that we can ID the point size (even for 9pt docs)
-% as well as LaTeX's \@ptsize to retain some compatability with some
-% external packages
-\def\@ptsize{0}
-% LaTeX does not support 9pt, so we set \@ptsize to 0 - same as that of 10pt
-\DeclareOption{9pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{9}\def\@ptsize{0}}
-\DeclareOption{10pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{10}\def\@ptsize{0}}
-\DeclareOption{11pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{11}\def\@ptsize{1}}
-\DeclareOption{12pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{12}\def\@ptsize{2}}
-
-
-
-\DeclareOption{letterpaper}{\setlength{\paperheight}{11in}%
- \setlength{\paperwidth}{8.5in}%
- \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse
- \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{letter}%
- \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{8.5in}%
- \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{11in}}
-
-
-\DeclareOption{a4paper}{\setlength{\paperheight}{297mm}%
- \setlength{\paperwidth}{210mm}%
- \@IEEEusingAfourpapertrue
- \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{a4}%
- \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{210mm}%
- \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{297mm}}
-
-\DeclareOption{oneside}{\@twosidefalse\@mparswitchfalse
- \CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue\CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse}
-\DeclareOption{twoside}{\@twosidetrue\@mparswitchtrue
- \CLASSOPTIONtwosidetrue\CLASSOPTIONonesidefalse}
-
-\DeclareOption{onecolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONonecolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumnfalse}
-\DeclareOption{twocolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONonecolumnfalse}
-
-% If the user selects draft, then this class AND any packages
-% will go into draft mode.
-\DeclareOption{draft}{\CLASSOPTIONdrafttrue\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue
- \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse}
-% draftcls is for a draft mode which will not affect any packages
-% used by the document.
-\DeclareOption{draftcls}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue
- \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse}
-% draftclsnofoot is like draftcls, but without the footer.
-\DeclareOption{draftclsnofoot}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue
- \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoottrue}
-\DeclareOption{final}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse
- \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse}
-
-\DeclareOption{journal}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
- \CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}
-
-\DeclareOption{conference}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
- \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencetrue\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}
-
-\DeclareOption{technote}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
- \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotetrue}
-
-\DeclareOption{peerreview}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
- \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}
-
-\DeclareOption{peerreviewca}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcatrue
- \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}
-
-\DeclareOption{nofonttune}{\CLASSOPTIONnofonttunetrue}
-
-\DeclareOption{captionsoff}{\CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofftrue}
-
-\DeclareOption{compsoc}{\CLASSOPTIONcompsoctrue}
-
-\DeclareOption{romanappendices}{\CLASSOPTIONromanappendicestrue}
-
-
-% default to US letter paper, 10pt, twocolumn, one sided, final, journal
-\ExecuteOptions{letterpaper,10pt,twocolumn,oneside,final,journal}
-% overrride these defaults per user requests
-\ProcessOptions
-
-
-
-% Computer Society conditional execution command
-\long\def\@IEEEcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\relax#1\relax\fi\relax}
-% inverse
-\long\def\@IEEEnotcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\relax#1\relax\fi\relax}
-% compsoc conference
-\long\def\@IEEEcompsocconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax}
-% compsoc not conference
-\long\def\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax}
-
-
-% IEEE uses Times Roman font, so we'll default to Times.
-% These three commands make up the entire times.sty package.
-\renewcommand{\sfdefault}{phv}
-\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ptm}
-\renewcommand{\ttdefault}{pcr}
-
-\@IEEEcompsoconly{\typeout{-- Using IEEE Computer Society mode.}}
-
-% V1.7 compsoc nonconference papers, use Palatino/Palladio as the main text font,
-% not Times Roman.
-\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ppl}}
-
-% enable Times/Palatino main text font
-\normalfont\selectfont
-
-
-
-
-
-% V1.7 conference notice message hook
-\def\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference{\typeout{}%
-\typeout{** Conference Paper **}%
-\typeout{Before submitting the final camera ready copy, remember to:}%
-\typeout{}%
-\typeout{ 1. Manually equalize the lengths of two columns on the last page}%
-\typeout{ of your paper;}%
-\typeout{}%
-\typeout{ 2. Ensure that any PostScript and/or PDF output post-processing}%
-\typeout{ uses only Type 1 fonts and that every step in the generation}%
-\typeout{ process uses the appropriate paper size.}%
-\typeout{}}
-
-
-% we can send console reminder messages to the user here
-\AtEndDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference\fi}
-
-
-% warn about the use of single column other than for draft mode
-\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn\else%
- \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls\else%
- \typeout{** ATTENTION: Single column mode is not typically used with IEEE publications.}%
- \fi%
-\fi
-
-
-% V1.7 improved paper size setting code.
-% Set pdfpage and dvips paper sizes. Conditional tests are similar to that
-% of ifpdf.sty. Retain within {} to ensure tested macros are never altered,
-% even if only effect is to set them to \relax.
-% if \pdfoutput is undefined or equal to relax, output a dvips special
-{\@ifundefined{pdfoutput}{\AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}}{%
-% pdfoutput is defined and not equal to \relax
-% check for pdfpageheight existence just in case someone sets pdfoutput
-% under non-pdflatex. If exists, set them regardless of value of \pdfoutput.
-\@ifundefined{pdfpageheight}{\relax}{\global\pdfpagewidth\paperwidth
-\global\pdfpageheight\paperheight}%
-% if using \pdfoutput=0 under pdflatex, send dvips papersize special
-\ifcase\pdfoutput
-\AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}%
-\else
-% we are using pdf output, set CLASSINFOpdf flag
-\global\CLASSINFOpdftrue
-\fi}}
-
-% let the user know the selected papersize
-\typeout{-- Using \CLASSINFOpaperwidth\space x \CLASSINFOpaperheight\space
-(\CLASSOPTIONpaper)\space paper.}
-
-\ifCLASSINFOpdf
-\typeout{-- Using PDF output.}
-\else
-\typeout{-- Using DVI output.}
-\fi
-
-
-% The idea hinted here is for LaTeX to generate markleft{} and markright{}
-% automatically for you after you enter \author{}, \journal{},
-% \journaldate{}, journalvol{}, \journalnum{}, etc.
-% However, there may be some backward compatibility issues here as
-% well as some special applications for IEEEtran.cls and special issues
-% that may require the flexible \markleft{}, \markright{} and/or \markboth{}.
-% We'll leave this as an open future suggestion.
-%\newcommand{\journal}[1]{\def\@journal{#1}}
-%\def\@journal{}
-
-
-
-% pointsize values
-% used with ifx to determine the document's normal size
-\def\@IEEEptsizenine{9}
-\def\@IEEEptsizeten{10}
-\def\@IEEEptsizeeleven{11}
-\def\@IEEEptsizetwelve{12}
-
-
-
-% FONT DEFINITIONS (No sizexx.clo file needed)
-% V1.6 revised font sizes, displayskip values and
-% revised normalsize baselineskip to reduce underfull vbox problems
-% on the 58pc = 696pt = 9.5in text height we want
-% normalsize #lines/column baselineskip (aka leading)
-% 9pt 63 11.0476pt (truncated down)
-% 10pt 58 12pt (exact)
-% 11pt 52 13.3846pt (truncated down)
-% 12pt 50 13.92pt (exact)
-%
-
-% we need to store the nominal baselineskip for the given font size
-% in case baselinestretch ever changes.
-% this is a dimen, so it will not hold stretch or shrink
-\newdimen\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
-\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\baselineskip
-
-\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine
-\typeout{-- This is a 9 point document.}
-\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9}{11.0476pt}}%
-\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11.0476pt}%
-\normalsize
-\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus3pt minus1pt%
-\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip%
-\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus3pt%
-\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus3pt minus1pt
-\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{8.5}{10pt}}
-\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}}
-\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}}
-\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}}
-% sublargesize is the same as large - 10pt
-\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{10}{12pt}}
-\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{10}{12pt}}
-\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{12}{14pt}}
-\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{14}{17pt}}
-\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{17}{20pt}}
-\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{20}{24pt}}
-\fi
-
-
-% Check if we have selected 10 points
-\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten
-\typeout{-- This is a 10 point document.}
-\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10}{12.00pt}}%
-\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{12pt}%
-\normalsize
-\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus4pt minus2pt%
-\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip%
-\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus4pt%
-\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus4pt minus2pt
-\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{9}{10pt}}
-\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}}
-\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}}
-\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}}
-% sublargesize is a tad smaller than large - 11pt
-\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{11}{13.4pt}}
-\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}}
-\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}}
-\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}}
-\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}}
-\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}}
-\fi
-
-
-% Check if we have selected 11 points
-\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven
-\typeout{-- This is an 11 point document.}
-\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11}{13.3846pt}}%
-\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.3846pt}%
-\normalsize
-\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus5pt minus3pt%
-\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip%
-\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus5pt%
-\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus5pt minus3pt
-\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}}
-\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}}
-\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}}
-\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}}
-% sublargesize is the same as large - 12pt
-\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{12}{14pt}}
-\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}}
-\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}}
-\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}}
-\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}}
-\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}}
-\fi
-
-
-% Check if we have selected 12 points
-\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve
-\typeout{-- This is a 12 point document.}
-\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12}{13.92pt}}%
-\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.92pt}%
-\normalsize
-\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus6pt minus4pt%
-\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip%
-\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus6pt%
-\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus6pt minus4pt
-\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}}
-\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}}
-\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}}
-\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}}
-% sublargesize is the same as large - 14pt
-\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{14}{17pt}}
-\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{14}{17pt}}
-\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{17}{20pt}}
-\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{20}{24pt}}
-\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{22}{26pt}}
-\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}}
-\fi
-
-
-% V1.6 The Computer Modern Fonts will issue a substitution warning for
-% 24pt titles (24.88pt is used instead) increase the substitution
-% tolerance to turn off this warning
-\def\fontsubfuzz{.9pt}
-% However, the default (and correct) Times font will scale exactly as needed.
-
-
-% warn the user in case they forget to use the 9pt option with
-% technote
-\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote%
- \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\else%
- \typeout{** ATTENTION: Technotes are normally 9pt documents.}%
- \fi%
-\fi
-
-
-% V1.7
-% Improved \textunderscore to provide a much better fake _ when used with
-% OT1 encoding. Under OT1, detect use of pcr or cmtt \ttfamily and use
-% available true _ glyph for those two typewriter fonts.
-\def\@IEEEstringptm{ptm} % Times Roman family
-\def\@IEEEstringppl{ppl} % Palatino Roman family
-\def\@IEEEstringphv{phv} % Helvetica Sans Serif family
-\def\@IEEEstringpcr{pcr} % Courier typewriter family
-\def\@IEEEstringcmtt{cmtt} % Computer Modern typewriter family
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textunderscore}{\leavevmode
-\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringpcr\string_\else
-\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringcmtt\string_\else
-\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringptm\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else
-\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringppl\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else
-\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringphv\kern -0.03em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.62em\@height 0.52pt\kern -0.33ex}\kern -0.03em\else
-\kern 0.09em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.6em\@height 0.44pt\kern -0.63pt\kern -0.42ex}\kern 0.09em\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\relax}
-
-
-
-
-% set the default \baselinestretch
-\def\baselinestretch{1}
-\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
- \def\baselinestretch{1.5}% default baselinestretch for draft modes
-\fi
-
-
-% process CLASSINPUT baselinestretch
-\ifx\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch\@IEEEundefined
-\else
- \edef\baselinestretch{\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch} % user CLASSINPUT override
- \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding \string\baselinestretch\space to
- \baselinestretch\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.}
-\fi
-
-\normalsize % make \baselinestretch take affect
-
-
-
-
-% store the normalsize baselineskip
-\newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip
-\CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip=\baselineskip\relax
-% and the normalsize unity (baselinestretch=1) baselineskip
-% we could save a register by giving the user access to
-% \@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip. However, let's protect
-% its read only internal status
-\newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
-\CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\relax
-% store the nominal value of jot
-\newdimen\IEEEnormaljot
-\IEEEnormaljot=0.25\baselineskip\relax
-
-% set \jot
-\jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax
-
-
-
-
-% V1.6, we are now going to fine tune the interword spacing
-% The default interword glue for Times under TeX appears to use a
-% nominal interword spacing of 25% (relative to the font size, i.e., 1em)
-% a maximum of 40% and a minimum of 19%.
-% For example, 10pt text uses an interword glue of:
-%
-% 2.5pt plus 1.49998pt minus 0.59998pt
-%
-% However, IEEE allows for a more generous range which reduces the need
-% for hyphenation, especially for two column text. Furthermore, IEEE
-% tends to use a little bit more nominal space between the words.
-% IEEE's interword spacing percentages appear to be:
-% 35% nominal
-% 23% minimum
-% 50% maximum
-% (They may even be using a tad more for the largest fonts such as 24pt.)
-%
-% for bold text, IEEE increases the spacing a little more:
-% 37.5% nominal
-% 23% minimum
-% 55% maximum
-
-% here are the interword spacing ratios we'll use
-% for medium (normal weight)
-\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioM{0.35}
-\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM{0.23}
-\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM{0.50}
-
-% for bold
-\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioB{0.375}
-\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB{0.23}
-\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB{0.55}
-
-
-% command to revise the interword spacing for the current font under TeX:
-% \fontdimen2 = nominal interword space
-% \fontdimen3 = interword stretch
-% \fontdimen4 = interword shrink
-% since all changes to the \fontdimen are global, we can enclose these commands
-% in braces to confine any font attribute or length changes
-\def\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens#1#2#3{{%
-\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\f@size pt}% grab the font size in pt, could use 1em instead.
-\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%
-\fontdimen2\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
-\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%
-\fontdimen3\font=-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
-\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%
-\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%
-\fontdimen4\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax}}
-
-% revise the interword spacing for each font weight
-\def\@@IEEEsetfontdimens{{%
-\mdseries
-\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM}%
-\bfseries
-\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB}%
-}}
-
-% revise the interword spacing for each font shape
-% \slshape is not often used for IEEE work and is not altered here. The \scshape caps are
-% already a tad too large in the free LaTeX fonts (as compared to what IEEE uses) so we
-% won't alter these either.
-\def\@IEEEsetfontdimens{{%
-\normalfont
-\@@IEEEsetfontdimens
-\normalfont\itshape
-\@@IEEEsetfontdimens
-}}
-
-% command to revise the interword spacing for each font size (and shape
-% and weight). Only the \rmfamily is done here as \ttfamily uses a
-% fixed spacing and \sffamily is not used as the main text of IEEE papers.
-\def\@IEEEtunefonts{{\selectfont\rmfamily
-\tiny\@IEEEsetfontdimens
-\scriptsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens
-\footnotesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens
-\small\@IEEEsetfontdimens
-\normalsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens
-\sublargesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens
-\large\@IEEEsetfontdimens
-\LARGE\@IEEEsetfontdimens
-\huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens
-\Huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens}}
-
-% if the nofonttune class option is not given, revise the interword spacing
-% now - in case IEEEtran makes any default length measurements, and make
-% sure all the default fonts are loaded
-\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else
-\@IEEEtunefonts
-\fi
-
-% and again at the start of the document in case the user loaded different fonts
-\AtBeginDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else\@IEEEtunefonts\fi}
-
-
-
-% V1.6
-% LaTeX is a little to quick to use hyphenations
-% So, we increase the penalty for their use and raise
-% the badness level that triggers an underfull hbox
-% warning. The author may still have to tweak things,
-% but the appearance will be much better "right out
-% of the box" than that under V1.5 and prior.
-% TeX default is 50
-\hyphenpenalty=750
-% If we didn't adjust the interword spacing, 2200 might be better.
-% The TeX default is 1000
-\hbadness=1350
-% IEEE does not use extra spacing after punctuation
-\frenchspacing
-
-% V1.7 increase this a tad to discourage equation breaks
-\binoppenalty=1000 % default 700
-\relpenalty=800 % default 500
-
-
-% margin note stuff
-\marginparsep 10pt
-\marginparwidth 20pt
-\marginparpush 25pt
-
-
-% if things get too close, go ahead and let them touch
-\lineskip 0pt
-\normallineskip 0pt
-\lineskiplimit 0pt
-\normallineskiplimit 0pt
-
-% The distance from the lower edge of the text body to the
-% footline
-\footskip 0.4in
-
-% normally zero, should be relative to font height.
-% put in a little rubber to help stop some bad breaks (underfull vboxes)
-\parskip 0ex plus 0.2ex minus 0.1ex
-
-\parindent 1.0em
-
-\topmargin -49.0pt
-\headheight 12pt
-\headsep 0.25in
-
-% use the normal font baselineskip
-% so that \topskip is unaffected by changes in \baselinestretch
-\topskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
-\textheight 58pc % 9.63in, 696pt
-% Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page.
-% The normal baselineskip for each document point size is used
-% to determine these values.
-\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=63\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 63 lines/page
-\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=58\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 58 lines/page
-\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=52\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 52 lines/page
-\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=50\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 50 lines/page
-
-
-\columnsep 1pc
-\textwidth 43pc % 2 x 21pc + 1pc = 43pc
-
-
-% the default side margins are equal
-\if@IEEEusingAfourpaper
-\oddsidemargin 14.32mm
-\evensidemargin 14.32mm
-\else
-\oddsidemargin 0.680in
-\evensidemargin 0.680in
-\fi
-% compensate for LaTeX's 1in offset
-\addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
-\addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in}
-
-
-
-% adjust margins for conference mode
-\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
- \topmargin -0.25in
- % we retain the reserved, but unused space for headers
- \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}
- \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}
- \textheight 9.25in % The standard for conferences (668.4975pt)
- % Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page.
- \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=61\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 61 lines/page
- \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=56\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 56 lines/page
- \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=50\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 50 lines/page
- \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=48\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 48 lines/page
-\fi
-
-
-% compsoc conference
-\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
-\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
- % compsoc conference use a larger value for columnsep
- \columnsep 0.375in
- % compsoc conferences want 1in top margin, 1.125in bottom margin
- \topmargin 0in
- \addtolength{\topmargin}{-6pt}% we tweak this a tad to better comply with top of line stuff
- % we retain the reserved, but unused space for headers
- \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}
- \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}
- \textheight 8.875in % (641.39625pt)
- % Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page.
- \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=58\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 58 lines/page
- \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=53\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 53 lines/page
- \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=48\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 48 lines/page
- \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=46\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 46 lines/page
- \textwidth 6.5in
- % the default side margins are equal
- \if@IEEEusingAfourpaper
- \oddsidemargin 22.45mm
- \evensidemargin 22.45mm
- \else
- \oddsidemargin 1in
- \evensidemargin 1in
- \fi
- % compensate for LaTeX's 1in offset
- \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
- \addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in}
-\fi\fi
-
-
-
-% draft mode settings override that of all other modes
-% provides a nice 1in margin all around the paper and extra
-% space between the lines for editor's comments
-\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
- % want 1in from top of paper to text
- \setlength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}%
- \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}%
- % we want 1in side margins regardless of paper type
- \oddsidemargin 0in
- \evensidemargin 0in
- % set the text width
- \setlength{\textwidth}{\paperwidth}%
- \addtolength{\textwidth}{-2.0in}%
- \setlength{\textheight}{\paperheight}%
- \addtolength{\textheight}{-2.0in}%
- % digitize textheight to be an integer number of lines.
- % this may cause the bottom margin to be off a tad
- \addtolength{\textheight}{-1\topskip}%
- \divide\textheight by \baselineskip%
- \multiply\textheight by \baselineskip%
- \addtolength{\textheight}{\topskip}%
-\fi
-
-
-
-% process CLASSINPUT inner/outer margin
-% if inner margin defined, but outer margin not, set outer to inner.
-\ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined
-\else
- \ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined
- \edef\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}
- \fi
-\fi
-
-\ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined
-\else
- % if outer margin defined, but inner margin not, set inner to outer.
- \ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined
- \edef\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}
- \fi
- \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}
- \ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside
- \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}
- \else
- \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}
- \fi
- \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
- \addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in}
- \setlength{\textwidth}{\paperwidth}
- \addtolength{\textwidth}{-\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}
- \addtolength{\textwidth}{-\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}
- \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding inner side margin to \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\space and
- outer side margin to \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.}
-\fi
-
-
-
-% process CLASSINPUT top/bottom text margin
-% if toptext margin defined, but bottomtext margin not, set bottomtext to toptext margin
-\ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined
-\else
- \ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined
- \edef\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}
- \fi
-\fi
-
-\ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined
-\else
- % if bottomtext margin defined, but toptext margin not, set toptext to bottomtext margin
- \ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined
- \edef\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin{\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin}
- \fi
- \setlength{\topmargin}{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}
- \addtolength{\topmargin}{-1in}
- \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}
- \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}
- \setlength{\textheight}{\paperheight}
- \addtolength{\textheight}{-\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}
- \addtolength{\textheight}{-\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin}
- % in the default format we use the normal baselineskip as topskip
- % we only need 0.7 of this to clear typical top text and we need
- % an extra 0.3 spacing at the bottom for descenders. This will
- % correct for both.
- \addtolength{\topmargin}{-0.3\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}
- \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding top text margin to \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\space and
- bottom text margin to \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.}
-\fi
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-% LIST SPACING CONTROLS
-
-% Controls the amount of EXTRA spacing
-% above and below \trivlist
-% Both \list and IED lists override this.
-% However, \trivlist will use this as will most
-% things built from \trivlist like the \center
-% environment.
-\topsep 0.5\baselineskip
-
-% Controls the additional spacing around lists preceded
-% or followed by blank lines. IEEE does not increase
-% spacing before or after paragraphs so it is set to zero.
-% \z@ is the same as zero, but faster.
-\partopsep \z@
-
-% Controls the spacing between paragraphs in lists.
-% IEEE does not increase spacing before or after paragraphs
-% so this is also zero.
-% With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to
-% this value DO affect lists (but not IED lists).
-\parsep \z@
-
-% Controls the extra spacing between list items.
-% IEEE does not put extra spacing between items.
-% With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to this value DO affect
-% lists (but not IED lists).
-\itemsep \z@
-
-% \itemindent is the amount to indent the FIRST line of a list
-% item. It is auto set to zero within the \list environment. To alter
-% it, you have to do so when you call the \list.
-% However, IEEE uses this for the theorem environment
-% There is an alternative value for this near \leftmargini below
-\itemindent -1em
-
-% \leftmargin, the spacing from the left margin of the main text to
-% the left of the main body of a list item is set by \list.
-% Hence this statement does nothing for lists.
-% But, quote and verse do use it for indention.
-\leftmargin 2em
-
-% we retain this stuff from the older IEEEtran.cls so that \list
-% will work the same way as before. However, itemize, enumerate and
-% description (IED) could care less about what these are as they
-% all are overridden.
-\leftmargini 2em
-%\itemindent 2em % Alternative values: sometimes used.
-%\leftmargini 0em
-\leftmarginii 1em
-\leftmarginiii 1.5em
-\leftmarginiv 1.5em
-\leftmarginv 1.0em
-\leftmarginvi 1.0em
-\labelsep 0.5em
-\labelwidth \z@
-
-
-% The old IEEEtran.cls behavior of \list is retained.
-% However, the new V1.3 IED list environments override all the
-% @list stuff (\@listX is called within \list for the
-% appropriate level just before the user's list_decl is called).
-% \topsep is now 2pt as IEEE puts a little extra space around
-% lists - used by those non-IED macros that depend on \list.
-% Note that \parsep and \itemsep are not redefined as in
-% the sizexx.clo \@listX (which article.cls uses) so global changes
-% of these values DO affect \list
-%
-\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini \topsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt}
-\let\@listI\@listi
-\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii\labelwidth\leftmarginii%
- \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
-\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii\labelwidth\leftmarginiii%
- \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
-\def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv\labelwidth\leftmarginiv%
- \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
-\def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv\labelwidth\leftmarginv%
- \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
-\def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi\labelwidth\leftmarginvi%
- \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
-
-
-% IEEE uses 5) not 5.
-\def\labelenumi{\theenumi)} \def\theenumi{\arabic{enumi}}
-
-% IEEE uses a) not (a)
-\def\labelenumii{\theenumii)} \def\theenumii{\alph{enumii}}
-
-% IEEE uses iii) not iii.
-\def\labelenumiii{\theenumiii)} \def\theenumiii{\roman{enumiii}}
-
-% IEEE uses A) not A.
-\def\labelenumiv{\theenumiv)} \def\theenumiv{\Alph{enumiv}}
-
-% exactly the same as in article.cls
-\def\p@enumii{\theenumi}
-\def\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)}
-\def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii}
-
-% itemized list label styles
-\def\labelitemi{$\scriptstyle\bullet$}
-\def\labelitemii{\textbf{--}}
-\def\labelitemiii{$\ast$}
-\def\labelitemiv{$\cdot$}
-
-
-
-% **** V1.3 ENHANCEMENTS ****
-% Itemize, Enumerate and Description (IED) List Controls
-% ***************************
-%
-%
-% IEEE seems to use at least two different values by
-% which ITEMIZED list labels are indented to the right
-% For The Journal of Lightwave Technology (JLT) and The Journal
-% on Selected Areas in Communications (JSAC), they tend to use
-% an indention equal to \parindent. For Transactions on Communications
-% they tend to indent ITEMIZED lists a little more--- 1.3\parindent.
-% We'll provide both values here for you so that you can choose
-% which one you like in your document using a command such as:
-% setlength{\IEEEilabelindent}{\IEEEilabelindentB}
-\newdimen\IEEEilabelindentA
-\IEEEilabelindentA \parindent
-
-\newdimen\IEEEilabelindentB
-\IEEEilabelindentB 1.3\parindent
-% However, we'll default to using \parindent
-% which makes more sense to me
-\newdimen\IEEEilabelindent
-\IEEEilabelindent \IEEEilabelindentA
-
-
-% This controls the default amount the enumerated list labels
-% are indented to the right.
-% Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention
-\newdimen\IEEEelabelindent
-\IEEEelabelindent \parindent
-
-% This controls the default amount the description list labels
-% are indented to the right.
-% Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention
-\newdimen\IEEEdlabelindent
-\IEEEdlabelindent \parindent
-
-% This is the value actually used within the IED lists.
-% The IED environments automatically set its value to
-% one of the three values above, so global changes do
-% not have any effect
-\newdimen\IEEElabelindent
-\IEEElabelindent \parindent
-
-% The actual amount labels will be indented is
-% \IEEElabelindent multiplied by the factor below
-% corresponding to the level of nesting depth
-% This provides a means by which the user can
-% alter the effective \IEEElabelindent for deeper
-% levels
-% There may not be such a thing as correct "standard IEEE"
-% values. What IEEE actually does may depend on the specific
-% circumstances.
-% The first list level almost always has full indention.
-% The second levels I've seen have only 75% of the normal indentation
-% Three level or greater nestings are very rare. I am guessing
-% that they don't use any indentation.
-\def\IEEElabelindentfactori{1.0} % almost always one
-\def\IEEElabelindentfactorii{0.75} % 0.0 or 1.0 may be used in some cases
-\def\IEEElabelindentfactoriii{0.0} % 0.75? 0.5? 0.0?
-\def\IEEElabelindentfactoriv{0.0}
-\def\IEEElabelindentfactorv{0.0}
-\def\IEEElabelindentfactorvi{0.0}
-
-% value actually used within IED lists, it is auto
-% set to one of the 6 values above
-% global changes here have no effect
-\def\IEEElabelindentfactor{1.0}
-
-% This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED
-% list labels and the list text, when normal text is used for
-% the labels.
-\newdimen\IEEEiednormlabelsep
-\IEEEiednormlabelsep 0.6em
-
-% This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED
-% list labels and the list text, when math symbols are used for
-% the labels (nomenclature lists). IEEE usually increases the
-% spacing in these cases
-\newdimen\IEEEiedmathlabelsep
-\IEEEiedmathlabelsep 1.2em
-
-% This controls the extra vertical separation put above and
-% below each IED list. IEEE usually puts a little extra spacing
-% around each list. However, this spacing is barely noticeable.
-\newskip\IEEEiedtopsep
-\IEEEiedtopsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt
-
-
-% This command is executed within each IED list environment
-% at the beginning of the list. You can use this to set the
-% parameters for some/all your IED list(s) without disturbing
-% global parameters that affect things other than lists.
-% i.e., renewcommand{\IEEEiedlistdecl}{\setlength{\labelsep}{5em}}
-% will alter the \labelsep for the next list(s) until
-% \IEEEiedlistdecl is redefined.
-\def\IEEEiedlistdecl{\relax}
-
-% This command provides an easy way to set \leftmargin based
-% on the \labelwidth, \labelsep and the argument \IEEElabelindent
-% Usage: \IEEEcalcleftmargin{width-to-indent-the-label}
-% output is in the \leftmargin variable, i.e., effectively:
-% \leftmargin = argument + \labelwidth + \labelsep
-% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
-\def\IEEEcalcleftmargin#1{\setlength{\leftmargin}{#1}%
-\addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}%
-\addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}}
-
-% This command provides an easy way to set \labelwidth to the
-% width of the given text. It is the same as
-% \settowidth{\labelwidth}{label-text}
-% and useful as a shorter alternative.
-% Typically used to set \labelwidth to be the width
-% of the longest label in the list
-\def\IEEEsetlabelwidth#1{\settowidth{\labelwidth}{#1}}
-
-% When this command is executed, IED lists will use the
-% IEEEiedmathlabelsep label separation rather than the normal
-% spacing. To have an effect, this command must be executed via
-% the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list
-% environments.
-\def\IEEEusemathlabelsep{\setlength{\labelsep}{\IEEEiedmathlabelsep}}
-
-% A flag which controls whether the IED lists automatically
-% calculate \leftmargin from \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and \labelsep
-% Useful if you want to specify your own \leftmargin
-% This flag must be set (\IEEEnocalcleftmargintrue or \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse)
-% via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list
-% environments to have an effect.
-\newif\ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin
-\IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse
-
-% A flag which controls whether \IEEElabelindent is multiplied by
-% the \IEEElabelindentfactor for each list level.
-% This flag must be set via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option
-% of the IED list environments to have an effect.
-\newif\ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor
-\IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse
-
-
-% internal variable to indicate type of IED label
-% justification
-% 0 - left; 1 - center; 2 - right
-\def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}
-
-
-% commands to allow the user to control IED
-% label justifications. Use these commands within
-% the IED environment option or in the \IEEEiedlistdecl
-% Note that changing the normal list justifications
-% is nonstandard and IEEE may not like it if you do so!
-% I include these commands as they may be helpful to
-% those who are using these enhanced list controls for
-% other non-IEEE related LaTeX work.
-% itemize and enumerate automatically default to right
-% justification, description defaults to left.
-\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}}%left
-\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{1}}%center
-\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}}%right
-
-
-
-
-% commands to save to and restore from the list parameter copies
-% this allows us to set all the list parameters within
-% the list_decl and prevent \list (and its \@list)
-% from overriding any of our parameters
-% V1.6 use \edefs instead of dimen's to conserve dimen registers
-% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
-\def\@IEEEsavelistparams{\edef\@IEEEiedtopsep{\the\topsep}%
-\edef\@IEEEiedlabelwidth{\the\labelwidth}%
-\edef\@IEEEiedlabelsep{\the\labelsep}%
-\edef\@IEEEiedleftmargin{\the\leftmargin}%
-\edef\@IEEEiedpartopsep{\the\partopsep}%
-\edef\@IEEEiedparsep{\the\parsep}%
-\edef\@IEEEieditemsep{\the\itemsep}%
-\edef\@IEEEiedrightmargin{\the\rightmargin}%
-\edef\@IEEEiedlistparindent{\the\listparindent}%
-\edef\@IEEEieditemindent{\the\itemindent}}
-
-% Note controlled spacing here
-\def\@IEEErestorelistparams{\topsep\@IEEEiedtopsep\relax%
-\labelwidth\@IEEEiedlabelwidth\relax%
-\labelsep\@IEEEiedlabelsep\relax%
-\leftmargin\@IEEEiedleftmargin\relax%
-\partopsep\@IEEEiedpartopsep\relax%
-\parsep\@IEEEiedparsep\relax%
-\itemsep\@IEEEieditemsep\relax%
-\rightmargin\@IEEEiedrightmargin\relax%
-\listparindent\@IEEEiedlistparindent\relax%
-\itemindent\@IEEEieditemindent\relax}
-
-
-% v1.6b provide original LaTeX IED list environments
-% note that latex.ltx defines \itemize and \enumerate, but not \description
-% which must be created by the base classes
-% save original LaTeX itemize and enumerate
-\let\LaTeXitemize\itemize
-\let\endLaTeXitemize\enditemize
-\let\LaTeXenumerate\enumerate
-\let\endLaTeXenumerate\endenumerate
-
-% provide original LaTeX description environment from article.cls
-\newenvironment{LaTeXdescription}
- {\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin
- \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}}
- {\endlist}
-\newcommand*\descriptionlabel[1]{\hspace\labelsep
- \normalfont\bfseries #1}
-
-
-% override LaTeX's default IED lists
-\def\itemize{\@IEEEitemize}
-\def\enditemize{\@endIEEEitemize}
-\def\enumerate{\@IEEEenumerate}
-\def\endenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate}
-\def\description{\@IEEEdescription}
-\def\enddescription{\@endIEEEdescription}
-
-% provide the user with aliases - may help those using packages that
-% override itemize, enumerate, or description
-\def\IEEEitemize{\@IEEEitemize}
-\def\endIEEEitemize{\@endIEEEitemize}
-\def\IEEEenumerate{\@IEEEenumerate}
-\def\endIEEEenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate}
-\def\IEEEdescription{\@IEEEdescription}
-\def\endIEEEdescription{\@endIEEEdescription}
-
-
-% V1.6 we want to keep the IEEEtran IED list definitions as our own internal
-% commands so they are protected against redefinition
-\def\@IEEEitemize{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEitemize}{\@@IEEEitemize[\relax]}}
-\def\@IEEEenumerate{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEenumerate}{\@@IEEEenumerate[\relax]}}
-\def\@IEEEdescription{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEdescription}{\@@IEEEdescription[\relax]}}
-\def\@endIEEEitemize{\endlist}
-\def\@endIEEEenumerate{\endlist}
-\def\@endIEEEdescription{\endlist}
-
-
-% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS
-% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS
-% IEEEtran itemized list MDS 1/2001
-% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
-\def\@@IEEEitemize[#1]{%
- \ifnum\@itemdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else%
- \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else%
- \advance\@itemdepth\@ne%
- \edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}%
- % get the labelindentfactor for this level
- \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be
- \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}%
- \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment
- \def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default
- % set other defaults
- \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse%
- \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse%
- \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep%
- \IEEElabelindent\IEEEilabelindent%
- \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep%
- \partopsep 0ex%
- \parsep 0ex%
- \itemsep 0ex%
- \rightmargin 0em%
- \listparindent 0em%
- \itemindent 0em%
- % calculate the label width
- % the user can override this later if
- % they specified a \labelwidth
- \settowidth{\labelwidth}{\csname labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth\endcsname}%
- \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters
- \list{\csname\@itemitem\endcsname}{%
- \@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes
- % to our globals
- \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel
- \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters
- #1\relax%
- % If the user has requested not to use the
- % labelindent factor, don't revise \labelindent
- \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax%
- \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\labelindent%
- \fi%
- % Unless the user has requested otherwise,
- % calculate our left margin based
- % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and
- % \labelsep
- \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax%
- \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}%
- \fi}\fi\fi}%
-
-
-% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS
-% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS
-% IEEEtran enumerate list MDS 1/2001
-% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
-\def\@@IEEEenumerate[#1]{%
- \ifnum\@enumdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else%
- \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else%
- \advance\@enumdepth\@ne%
- \edef\@enumctr{enum\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth}%
- % get the labelindentfactor for this level
- \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be
- \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}%
- \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment
- \def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default
- % set other defaults
- \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse%
- \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse%
- \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep%
- \IEEElabelindent\IEEEelabelindent%
- \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep%
- \partopsep 0ex%
- \parsep 0ex%
- \itemsep 0ex%
- \rightmargin 0em%
- \listparindent 0em%
- \itemindent 0em%
- % calculate the label width
- % We'll set it to the width suitable for all labels using
- % normalfont 1) to 9)
- % The user can override this later
- \settowidth{\labelwidth}{9)}%
- \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters
- \list{\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname}{\usecounter{\@enumctr}%
- \@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes
- % to our globals
- \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel
- \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters
- #1\relax%
- % If the user has requested not to use the
- % IEEElabelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent
- \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax%
- \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent%
- \fi%
- % Unless the user has requested otherwise,
- % calculate our left margin based
- % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and
- % \labelsep
- \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax%
- \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}%
- \fi}\fi\fi}%
-
-
-% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS
-% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS
-% IEEEtran description list MDS 1/2001
-% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
-\def\@@IEEEdescription[#1]{%
- \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else%
- % get the labelindentfactor for this level
- \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be
- \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}%
- \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment
- \def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}% left justified labels are default
- % set other defaults
- \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse%
- \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse%
- \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep%
- \IEEElabelindent\IEEEdlabelindent%
- % assume normal labelsep
- \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep%
- \partopsep 0ex%
- \parsep 0ex%
- \itemsep 0ex%
- \rightmargin 0em%
- \listparindent 0em%
- \itemindent 0em%
- % Bogus label width in case the user forgets
- % to set it.
- % TIP: If you want to see what a variable's width is you
- % can use the TeX command \showthe\width-variable to
- % display it on the screen during compilation
- % (This might be helpful to know when you need to find out
- % which label is the widest)
- \settowidth{\labelwidth}{Hello}%
- \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters
- \list{}{\@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes
- % to our globals
- \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel
- \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters
- #1\relax%
- % If the user has requested not to use the
- % labelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent
- \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax%
- \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent%
- \fi%
- % Unless the user has requested otherwise,
- % calculate our left margin based
- % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and
- % \labelsep
- \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax%
- \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}\relax%
- \fi}\fi}
-
-% v1.6b we use one makelabel that does justification as needed.
-\def\@IEEEiedmakelabel#1{\relax\if\@IEEEiedjustify 0\relax
-\makebox[\labelwidth][l]{\normalfont #1}\else
-\if\@IEEEiedjustify 1\relax
-\makebox[\labelwidth][c]{\normalfont #1}\else
-\makebox[\labelwidth][r]{\normalfont #1}\fi\fi}
-
-
-% VERSE and QUOTE
-% V1.7 define environments with newenvironment
-\newenvironment{verse}{\let\\=\@centercr
- \list{}{\itemsep\z@ \itemindent -1.5em \listparindent \itemindent
- \rightmargin\leftmargin\advance\leftmargin 1.5em}\item\relax}
- {\endlist}
-\newenvironment{quotation}{\list{}{\listparindent 1.5em \itemindent\listparindent
- \rightmargin\leftmargin \parsep 0pt plus 1pt}\item\relax}
- {\endlist}
-\newenvironment{quote}{\list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}\item\relax}
- {\endlist}
-
-
-% \titlepage
-% provided only for backward compatibility. \maketitle is the correct
-% way to create the title page.
-\newif\if@restonecol
-\def\titlepage{\@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
- \else \newpage \fi \thispagestyle{empty}\c@page\z@}
-\def\endtitlepage{\if@restonecol\twocolumn \else \newpage \fi}
-
-% standard values from article.cls
-\arraycolsep 5pt
-\arrayrulewidth .4pt
-\doublerulesep 2pt
-
-\tabcolsep 6pt
-\tabbingsep 0.5em
-
-
-%% FOOTNOTES
-%
-%\skip\footins 10pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
-% V1.6 respond to changes in font size
-% space added above the footnotes (if present)
-\skip\footins 0.9\baselineskip plus 0.4\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip
-
-% V1.6, we need to make \footnotesep responsive to changes
-% in \baselineskip or strange spacings will result when in
-% draft mode. Here is a little LaTeX secret - \footnotesep
-% determines the height of an invisible strut that is placed
-% *above* the baseline of footnotes after the first. Since
-% LaTeX considers the space for characters to be 0.7/baselineskip
-% above the baseline and 0.3/baselineskip below it, we need to
-% use 0.7/baselineskip as a \footnotesep to maintain equal spacing
-% between all the lines of the footnotes. IEEE often uses a tad
-% more, so use 0.8\baselineskip. This slightly larger value also helps
-% the text to clear the footnote marks. Note that \thanks in IEEEtran
-% uses its own value of \footnotesep which is set in \maketitle.
-{\footnotesize
-\global\footnotesep 0.8\baselineskip}
-
-
-\skip\@mpfootins = \skip\footins
-\fboxsep = 3pt
-\fboxrule = .4pt
-% V1.6 use 1em, then use LaTeX2e's \@makefnmark
-% Note that IEEE normally *left* aligns the footnote marks, so we don't need
-% box resizing tricks here.
-\long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\indent\hbox{\@makefnmark}#1}% V1.6 use 1em
-% V1.7 compsoc does not use superscipts for footnote marks
-\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
-\def\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark{\hbox{\normalfont\@thefnmark.\ }}
-\long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\indent\hbox{\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark}#1}
-\fi
-
-% IEEE does not use footnote rules
-\def\footnoterule{}
-
-% V1.7 for compsoc, IEEE uses a footnote rule only for \thanks. We devise a "one-shot"
-% system to implement this.
-\newif\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule
-\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse
-\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
-\def\footnoterule{\relax\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule
-\kern-5pt
-\hbox to \columnwidth{\hfill\vrule width 0.5\columnwidth height 0.4pt\hfill}
-\kern4.6pt
-\global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse
-\else
-\relax
-\fi}
-\fi
-
-% V1.6 do not allow LaTeX to break a footnote across multiple pages
-\interfootnotelinepenalty=10000
-
-% V1.6 discourage breaks within equations
-% Note that amsmath normally sets this to 10000,
-% but LaTeX2e normally uses 100.
-\interdisplaylinepenalty=2500
-
-% default allows section depth up to /paragraph
-\setcounter{secnumdepth}{4}
-
-% technotes do not allow /paragraph
-\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote
- \setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}
-\fi
-% neither do compsoc conferences
-\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}}
-
-
-\newcounter{section}
-\newcounter{subsection}[section]
-\newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection]
-\newcounter{paragraph}[subsubsection]
-
-% used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray as other packages may
-% have their own, different, implementations
-\newcounter{IEEEsubequation}[equation]
-
-% as shown when called by user from \ref, \label and in table of contents
-\def\theequation{\arabic{equation}} % 1
-\def\theIEEEsubequation{\theequation\alph{IEEEsubequation}} % 1a (used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray)
-\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
-% compsoc is all arabic
-\def\thesection{\arabic{section}}
-\def\thesubsection{\thesection.\arabic{subsection}}
-\def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection.\arabic{subsubsection}}
-\def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection.\arabic{paragraph}}
-\else
-\def\thesection{\Roman{section}} % I
-% V1.7, \mbox prevents breaks around -
-\def\thesubsection{\mbox{\thesection-\Alph{subsection}}} % I-A
-% V1.7 use I-A1 format used by IEEE rather than I-A.1
-\def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection\arabic{subsubsection}} % I-A1
-\def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection\alph{paragraph}} % I-A1a
-\fi
-
-% From Heiko Oberdiek. Because of the \mbox in \thesubsection, we need to
-% tell hyperref to disable the \mbox command when making PDF bookmarks.
-% This done already with hyperref.sty version 6.74o and later, but
-% it will not hurt to do it here again for users of older versions.
-\@ifundefined{pdfstringdefPreHook}{\let\pdfstringdefPreHook\@empty}{}%
-\g@addto@macro\pdfstringdefPreHook{\let\mbox\relax}
-
-
-% Main text forms (how shown in main text headings)
-% V1.6, using \thesection in \thesectiondis allows changes
-% in the former to automatically appear in the latter
-\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
- \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference
- \def\thesectiondis{\thesection.}
- \def\thesubsectiondis{\thesectiondis\arabic{subsection}.}
- \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\thesubsectiondis\arabic{subsubsection}.}
- \def\theparagraphdis{\thesubsubsectiondis\arabic{paragraph}.}
- \else% compsoc not conferencs
- \def\thesectiondis{\thesection}
- \def\thesubsectiondis{\thesectiondis.\arabic{subsection}}
- \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\thesubsectiondis.\arabic{subsubsection}}
- \def\theparagraphdis{\thesubsubsectiondis.\arabic{paragraph}}
- \fi
-\else% not compsoc
- \def\thesectiondis{\thesection.} % I.
- \def\thesubsectiondis{\Alph{subsection}.} % B.
- \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\arabic{subsubsection})} % 3)
- \def\theparagraphdis{\alph{paragraph})} % d)
-\fi
-
-% just like LaTeX2e's \@eqnnum
-\def\theequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theequation)}}% (1)
-% IEEEsubequation used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray
-\def\theIEEEsubequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theIEEEsubequation)}}% (1a)
-% redirect LaTeX2e's equation number display and all that depend on
-% it, through IEEEtran's \theequationdis
-\def\@eqnnum{\theequationdis}
-
-
-
-% V1.7 provide string macros as article.cls does
-\def\contentsname{Contents}
-\def\listfigurename{List of Figures}
-\def\listtablename{List of Tables}
-\def\refname{References}
-\def\indexname{Index}
-\def\figurename{Fig.}
-\def\tablename{TABLE}
-\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\figurename{Figure}\def\tablename{Table}}
-\def\partname{Part}
-\def\appendixname{Appendix}
-\def\abstractname{Abstract}
-% IEEE specific names
-\def\IEEEkeywordsname{Index Terms}
-\def\IEEEproofname{Proof}
-
-
-% LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES AND TABLE OF CONTENTS
-%
-\def\@pnumwidth{1.55em}
-\def\@tocrmarg{2.55em}
-\def\@dotsep{4.5}
-\setcounter{tocdepth}{3}
-
-% adjusted some spacings here so that section numbers will not easily
-% collide with the section titles.
-% VIII; VIII-A; and VIII-A.1 are usually the worst offenders.
-% MDS 1/2001
-\def\tableofcontents{\section*{\contentsname}\@starttoc{toc}}
-\def\l@section#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty}\addvspace{1.0em plus 1pt}%
- \@tempdima 2.75em \begingroup \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth%
- \parfillskip-\@pnumwidth {\bfseries\leavevmode #1}\hfil\hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par%
- \endgroup}
-% argument format #1:level, #2:labelindent,#3:labelsep
-\def\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{2.75em}{3.75em}}
-\def\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{6.5em}{4.5em}}
-% must provide \l@ defs for ALL sublevels EVEN if tocdepth
-% is such as they will not appear in the table of contents
-% these defs are how TOC knows what level these things are!
-\def\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{6.5em}{5.5em}}
-\def\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{6.5em}{6.5em}}
-\def\listoffigures{\section*{\listfigurename}\@starttoc{lof}}
-\def\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{0em}{2.75em}}
-\def\listoftables{\section*{\listtablename}\@starttoc{lot}}
-\let\l@table\l@figure
-
-
-%% Definitions for floats
-%%
-%% Normal Floats
-\floatsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip
-\textfloatsep 1.7\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.4\baselineskip
-\@fptop 0pt plus 1fil
-\@fpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil
-\@fpbot 0pt plus 1fil
-\def\topfraction{0.9}
-\def\bottomfraction{0.4}
-\def\floatpagefraction{0.8}
-% V1.7, let top floats approach 90% of page
-\def\textfraction{0.1}
-
-%% Double Column Floats
-\dblfloatsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip
-
-\dbltextfloatsep 1.7\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.4\baselineskip
-% Note that it would be nice if the rubber here actually worked in LaTeX2e.
-% There is a long standing limitation in LaTeX, first discovered (to the best
-% of my knowledge) by Alan Jeffrey in 1992. LaTeX ignores the stretchable
-% portion of \dbltextfloatsep, and as a result, double column figures can and
-% do result in an non-integer number of lines in the main text columns with
-% underfull vbox errors as a consequence. A post to comp.text.tex
-% by Donald Arseneau confirms that this had not yet been fixed in 1998.
-% IEEEtran V1.6 will fix this problem for you in the titles, but it doesn't
-% protect you from other double floats. Happy vspace'ing.
-
-\@dblfptop 0pt plus 1fil
-\@dblfpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil
-\@dblfpbot 0pt plus 1fil
-\def\dbltopfraction{0.8}
-\def\dblfloatpagefraction{0.8}
-\setcounter{dbltopnumber}{4}
-
-\intextsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip
-\setcounter{topnumber}{2}
-\setcounter{bottomnumber}{2}
-\setcounter{totalnumber}{4}
-
-
-
-% article class provides these, we should too.
-\newlength\abovecaptionskip
-\newlength\belowcaptionskip
-% but only \abovecaptionskip is used above figure captions and *below* table
-% captions
-\setlength\abovecaptionskip{0.5\baselineskip}
-\setlength\belowcaptionskip{0pt}
-% V1.6 create hooks in case the caption spacing ever needs to be
-% overridden by a user
-\def\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace{\vskip\abovecaptionskip\relax}%
-\def\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace{\vskip\abovecaptionskip\relax}%
-
-
-% 1.6b revise caption system so that \@makecaption uses two arguments
-% as with LaTeX2e. Otherwise, there will be problems when using hyperref.
-\def\@IEEEtablestring{table}
-
-\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
-% V1.7 compsoc \@makecaption
-\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference
-\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
-% test if is a for a figure or table
-\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring%
-% if a table, do table caption
-\normalsize\begin{center}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}\end{center}%
-\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace
-% if not a table, format it as a figure
-\else
-\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace
-\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}%
-\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize%
-% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around
-\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ }%
-\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}%
-% if caption is shorter than a line, center
-\else%
-\hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
-\fi\fi}
-\else% nonconference compsoc
-\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
-% test if is a for a figure or table
-\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring%
-% if a table, do table caption
-\normalsize\begin{center}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize #1}\\{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize #2}\end{center}%
-\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace
-% if not a table, format it as a figure
-\else
-\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace
-\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}%
-\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize%
-% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around
-\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ }%
-\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}%
-% if caption is shorter than a line, left justify
-\else%
-\hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
-\fi\fi}
-\fi
-
-\else% traditional noncompsoc \@makecaption
-\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
-% test if is a for a figure or table
-\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring%
-% if a table, do table caption
-\footnotesize\begin{center}{\normalfont\footnotesize #1}\\{\normalfont\footnotesize\scshape #2}\end{center}%
-\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace
-% if not a table, format it as a figure
-\else
-\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace
-% 3/2001 use footnotesize, not small; use two nonbreaking spaces, not one
-\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}~~ #2}%
-\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize%
-% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around
-\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}~~ }%
-\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\footnotesize\noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}%
-% if caption is shorter than a line, center if conference, left justify otherwise
-\else%
-\ifCLASSOPTIONconference \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
-\else \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
-\fi\fi\fi}
-\fi
-
-
-
-% V1.7 disable captions class option, do so in a way that retains operation of \label
-% within \caption
-\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff
-\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{\vspace*{2em}\footnotesize\begin{center}{\footnotesize #1}\end{center}%
-\let\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave\label
-\let\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax
-\def\label##1{\gdef\@IEEEtemplabelargsave{##1}}%
-\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#2}%
-\let\label\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave
-\ifx\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax\else\label{\@IEEEtemplabelargsave}\fi}
-\fi
-
-
-% V1.7 define end environments with \def not \let so as to work OK with
-% preview-latex
-\newcounter{figure}
-\def\thefigure{\@arabic\c@figure}
-\def\fps@figure{tbp}
-\def\ftype@figure{1}
-\def\ext@figure{lof}
-\def\fnum@figure{\figurename~\thefigure}
-\def\figure{\@float{figure}}
-\def\endfigure{\end@float}
-\@namedef{figure*}{\@dblfloat{figure}}
-\@namedef{endfigure*}{\end@dblfloat}
-\newcounter{table}
-\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
-\def\thetable{\arabic{table}}
-\else
-\def\thetable{\@Roman\c@table}
-\fi
-\def\fps@table{tbp}
-\def\ftype@table{2}
-\def\ext@table{lot}
-\def\fnum@table{\tablename~\thetable}
-% V1.6 IEEE uses 8pt text for tables
-% to default to footnotesize, we hack into LaTeX2e's \@floatboxreset and pray
-\def\table{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@float{table}}
-\def\endtable{\end@float}
-% v1.6b double column tables need to default to footnotesize as well.
-\@namedef{table*}{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@dblfloat{table}}
-\@namedef{endtable*}{\end@dblfloat}
-
-
-
-
-%%
-%% START OF IEEEeqnarry DEFINITIONS
-%%
-%% Inspired by the concepts, examples, and previous works of LaTeX
-%% coders and developers such as Donald Arseneau, Fred Bartlett,
-%% David Carlisle, Tony Liu, Frank Mittelbach, Piet van Oostrum,
-%% Roland Winkler and Mark Wooding.
-%% I don't make the claim that my work here is even near their calibre. ;)
-
-
-% hook to allow easy changeover to IEEEtran.cls/tools.sty error reporting
-\def\@IEEEclspkgerror{\ClassError{IEEEtran}}
-
-\newif\if@IEEEeqnarraystarform% flag to indicate if the environment was called as the star form
-\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse
-
-\newif\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt% tracks if the environment should advance the col counter
-% allows a way to make an \IEEEeqnarraybox that can be used within an \IEEEeqnarray
-% used by IEEEeqnarraymulticol so that it can work properly in both
-\@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue
-
-\newcount\@IEEEeqnnumcols % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols are defined
-\newcount\@IEEEeqncolcnt % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols the user actually used
-
-
-% The default math style used by the columns
-\def\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{\displaystyle}
-% The default text style used by the columns
-% default to using the current font
-\def\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle{\relax}
-
-% like the iedlistdecl but for \IEEEeqnarray
-\def\IEEEeqnarraydecl{\relax}
-\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl{\relax}
-
-% \yesnumber is the opposite of \nonumber
-% a novel concept with the same def as the equationarray package
-% However, we give IEEE versions too since some LaTeX packages such as
-% the MDWtools mathenv.sty redefine \nonumber to something else.
-\providecommand{\yesnumber}{\global\@eqnswtrue}
-\def\IEEEyesnumber{\global\@eqnswtrue}
-\def\IEEEnonumber{\global\@eqnswfalse}
-
-
-\def\IEEEyessubnumber{\global\@IEEEissubequationtrue\global\@eqnswtrue%
-\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% only do something inside an IEEEeqnarray
-\if@IEEElastlinewassubequation\addtocounter{equation}{-1}\else\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{1}\fi%
-\def\@currentlabel{\p@IEEEsubequation\theIEEEsubequation}\fi}
-
-% flag to indicate that an equation is a sub equation
-\newif\if@IEEEissubequation%
-\@IEEEissubequationfalse
-
-% allows users to "push away" equations that get too close to the equation numbers
-\def\IEEEeqnarraynumspace{\hphantom{\if@IEEEissubequation\theIEEEsubequationdis\else\theequationdis\fi}}
-
-% provides a way to span multiple columns within IEEEeqnarray environments
-% will consider \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt before globally advancing the
-% column counter - so as to work within \IEEEeqnarraybox
-% usage: \IEEEeqnarraymulticol{number cols. to span}{col type}{cell text}
-\long\def\IEEEeqnarraymulticol#1#2#3{\multispan{#1}%
-% check if column is defined
-\relax\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#2\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined%
-\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#2\endcsname#3\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
-\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#2\endcsname%
-\else% if not, error and use default type
-\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#2" in \string\IEEEeqnarraymulticol.\MessageBreak
-Using a default centering column instead}%
-{You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}%
-\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE@IEEEdefault\endcsname#3\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
-\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST@IEEEdefault\endcsname%
-\fi%
-% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
-\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by #1\relax\fi}
-
-% like \omit, but maintains track of the column counter for \IEEEeqnarray
-\def\IEEEeqnarrayomit{\omit\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax\fi}
-
-
-% provides a way to define a letter referenced column type
-% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{col. type letter/name}{pre insertion text}{post insertion text}
-\def\IEEEeqnarraydefcol#1#2#3{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#1\endcsname{#2}%
-\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#1\endcsname{#3}%
-\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname{1}}
-
-
-% provides a way to define a numerically referenced inter-column glue types
-% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep{col. glue number}{glue definition}
-\def\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep#1#2{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\romannumeral #1\endcsname{#2}%
-\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\romannumeral #1\endcsname{1}}
-
-
-\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined{1}% just a macro for 1, used for checking undefined column types
-
-
-% expands and appends the given argument to the \@IEEEtrantmptoksA token list
-% used to build up the \halign preamble
-\def\@IEEEappendtoksA#1{\edef\@@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA #1}}%
-\@@IEEEappendtoksA}
-
-% also appends to \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, but does not expand the argument
-% uses \toks8 as a scratchpad register
-\def\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA#1{\toks8={#1}%
-\edef\@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\the\toks8}}%
-\@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA}
-
-% define some common column types for the user
-% math
-\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{l}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil}
-\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{c}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil}
-\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{r}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$}
-\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{L}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil}
-\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{C}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil}
-\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{R}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$}
-% text
-\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{s}{\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil}
-\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{t}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil}
-\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{u}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{}
-
-% vertical rules
-\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{v}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}
-\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{vv}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}{\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}
-\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{V}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}
-\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{VV}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}%
-{\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}
-
-% horizontal rules
-\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{h}{}{\leaders\hrule height\arrayrulewidth\hfil}
-\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{H}{}{\leaders\vbox{\hrule width\arrayrulewidth\vskip\doublerulesep\hrule width\arrayrulewidth}\hfil}
-
-% plain
-\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{x}{}{}
-\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{X}{$}{$}
-
-% the default column type to use in the event a column type is not defined
-\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{@IEEEdefault}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil}
-
-
-% a zero tabskip (used for "-" col types)
-\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero{0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt}
-% a centering tabskip (used for "+" col types)
-\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter{1000pt plus 0pt minus 1000pt}
-
-% top level default tabskip glues for the start, end, and inter-column
-% may be reset within environments not always at the top level, e.g., \IEEEeqnarraybox
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default start glue
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default end glue
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue
-
-
-
-% creates a vertical rule that extends from the bottom to the top a a cell
-% Provided in case other packages redefine \vline some other way.
-% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayvrule[rule thickness]
-% If no argument is provided, \arrayrulewidth will be used for the rule thickness.
-\newcommand\IEEEeqnarrayvrule[1][\arrayrulewidth]{\vrule\@width#1\relax}
-
-% creates a blank separator row
-% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[separation length][font size commands]
-% default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax]
-% blank arguments inherit the default values
-% uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers
-\def\IEEEeqnarrayseprow{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}}
-\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][\relax]}}
-\def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}%
-\ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty%
-% get the skip value, based on the font commands
-% use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3
-% assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes
-{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}%
-\else%
-{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}%
-\fi%
-\@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax}
-
-% creates a blank separator row, but omits all the column templates
-% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[separation length][font size commands]
-% default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax]
-% blank arguments inherit the default values
-% uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers
-\def\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols
-% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
-\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
-\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}}
-\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][\relax]}}
-\def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}%
-\ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty%
-% get the skip value, based on the font commands
-% use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3
-% assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes
-{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}%
-\else%
-{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}%
-\fi%
-\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax}
-
-
-
-% draws a single rule across all the columns optional
-% argument determines the rule width, \arrayrulewidth is the default
-% updates column counter as needed and turns off struts
-% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[rule line thickness]
-\def\IEEEeqnarrayrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols
-% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
-\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
-\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}}
-\def\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]{\leaders\hrule height#1\hfil\relax% put in our rule
-% turn off any struts
-\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]\relax}
-
-
-% draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator row, and then
-% another single rule row
-% first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default
-% second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default
-% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing]
-\def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols
-% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
-\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
-\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}}
-\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]}%
-{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][\doublerulesep]}}
-\def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%
-% we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][]
-\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
-\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%
-\else%
-\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]\relax%
-\fi%
-\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}%
-\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
-\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[\doublerulesep][\relax]%
-\else%
-\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#2][\relax]%
-\fi%
-\\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}%
-% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
-\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
-\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%
-\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
-\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%
-\else%
-\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]%
-\fi%
-}
-
-% draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator (cutting) row, and then
-% another single rule row
-% first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default
-% second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default
-% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing]
-\def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols
-% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
-\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
-\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[\arrayrulewidth]}}
-\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]}%
-{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][\doublerulesep]}}
-\def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%
-% we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][]
-\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
-\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%
-\else%
-\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]%
-\fi%
-\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}%
-\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
-\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[\doublerulesep][\relax]%
-\else%
-\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#2][\relax]%
-\fi%
-\\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}%
-% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
-\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
-\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%
-\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
-\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%
-\else%
-\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]%
-\fi%
-}
-
-
-
-% inserts a full row's worth of &'s
-% relies on \@IEEEeqnnumcols to provide the correct number of columns
-% uses \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, \count0 as scratch registers
-\def\@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}\count0=1\relax%
-\loop% add cols if the user did not use them all
-\ifnum\count0<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax%
-\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}%
-\advance\count0 by 1\relax% update the col count
-\repeat%
-\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA%execute the &'s
-}
-
-
-
-\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner % flag to indicate if we are within the lines
-\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % of an IEEEeqnarray - after the IEEEeqnarraydecl
-
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{0pt} % height and depth of IEEEeqnarray struts
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{0pt}
-
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{0pt} % default height and depth of
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{0pt} % struts within an IEEEeqnarray
-
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{0pt} % saved master strut height
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{0pt} % and depth
-
-\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut % flag to indicate that the master strut value
-\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue % is to be used
-
-
-
-% saves the strut height and depth of the master strut
-\def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave{\relax%
-\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%
-\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%
-% remove stretchability
-\dimen0\skip0\relax%
-\dimen2\skip2\relax%
-% save values
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{\the\dimen0}%
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{\the\dimen2}}
-
-% restores the strut height and depth of the master strut
-\def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore{\relax%
-\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE\relax%
-\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE\relax%
-% remove stretchability
-\dimen0\skip0\relax%
-\dimen2\skip2\relax%
-% restore values
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}}
-
-
-% globally restores the strut height and depth to the
-% master values and sets the master strut flag to true
-\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset{\relax%
-\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%
-\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%
-% remove stretchability
-\dimen0\skip0\relax%
-\dimen2\skip2\relax%
-% restore values
-\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
-\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
-\global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue}
-
-
-% if the master strut is not to be used, make the current
-% values of \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight, \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth
-% and the use master strut flag, global
-% this allows user strut commands issued in the last column to be carried
-% into the isolation/strut column
-\def\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus{\relax%
-\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut\else%
-\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight}%
-\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth}%
-\global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse%
-\fi}
-
-
-
-% usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{height}{depth}[font size commands]
-% If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, sets the height
-% and depth of both the master and local struts. If called inside
-% an IEEEeqnarray line, sets the height and depth of the local strut
-% only and sets the flag to indicate the use of the local strut
-% values. If the height or depth is left blank, 0.7\normalbaselineskip
-% and 0.3\normalbaselineskip will be used, respectively.
-% The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under
-% a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current
-% font is used.
-% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2
-\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}[\relax]}}
-\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#1}%
-\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty%
-{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.7\normalbaselineskip}}%
-\skip0=\skip3\relax%
-\else% arg one present
-{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1\relax}}%
-\skip0=\skip3\relax%
-\fi% if null arg
-\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#2}%
-\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty%
-{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.3\normalbaselineskip}}%
-\skip2=\skip3\relax%
-\else% arg two present
-{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2\relax}}%
-\skip2=\skip3\relax%
-\fi% if null arg
-% remove stretchability, just to be safe
-\dimen0\skip0\relax%
-\dimen2\skip2\relax%
-% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth
-\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
-\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master
-\else% outer, have to set master strut too
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
-\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut
-\fi}
-
-
-% usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{added height}{added depth}[font size commands]
-% If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, adds the given height
-% and depth to both the master and local struts.
-% If called inside an IEEEeqnarray line, adds the given height and depth
-% to the local strut only and sets the flag to indicate the use
-% of the local strut values.
-% In both cases, if a height or depth is left blank, 0pt is used instead.
-% The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under
-% a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current
-% font is used.
-% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2
-\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}[\relax]}}
-\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#1}%
-\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty%
-\skip0=0pt\relax%
-\else% arg one present
-{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1}}%
-\skip0=\skip3\relax%
-\fi% if null arg
-\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#2}%
-\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty%
-\skip2=0pt\relax%
-\else% arg two present
-{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2}}%
-\skip2=\skip3\relax%
-\fi% if null arg
-% remove stretchability, just to be safe
-\dimen0\skip0\relax%
-\dimen2\skip2\relax%
-% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth
-\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size
-% get local strut size
-\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax%
-\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax%
-% add it to the user supplied values
-\advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax%
-\advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax%
-% update the local strut size
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
-\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master
-\else% outer, have to set master strut too
-% get master strut size
-\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%
-\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%
-% add it to the user supplied values
-\advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax%
-\advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax%
-% update the local and master strut sizes
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
-\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
-\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut
-\fi}
-
-
-% allow user a way to see the struts
-\newif\ifIEEEvisiblestruts
-\IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse
-
-% inserts an invisible strut using the master or local strut values
-% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \dimen0, \dimen2
-\def\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut{\relax%
-\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut
-% get master strut size
-\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%
-\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%
-\else%
-% get local strut size
-\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax%
-\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax%
-\fi%
-% remove stretchability, probably not needed
-\dimen0\skip0\relax%
-\dimen2\skip2\relax%
-% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth
-% allow user to see struts if desired
-\ifIEEEvisiblestruts%
-\vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax%
-\else%
-\vrule width0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi}
-
-
-% creates an invisible strut, useable even outside \IEEEeqnarray
-% if \IEEEvisiblestrutstrue, the strut will be visible and 0.2pt wide.
-% usage: \IEEEstrut[height][depth][font size commands]
-% default is \IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip][0.3\normalbaselineskip][\relax]
-% blank arguments inherit the default values
-% uses \dimen0, \dimen2, \skip0, \skip2
-\def\IEEEstrut{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEstrut}{\@IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip]}}
-\def\@IEEEstrut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEstrut[#1]}{\@@IEEEstrut[#1][0.3\normalbaselineskip]}}
-\def\@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]}{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][\relax]}}
-\def\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][#3]{\mbox{#3\relax%
-\def\@IEEEstrutARG{#1}%
-\ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty%
-\skip0=0.7\normalbaselineskip\relax%
-\else%
-\skip0=#1\relax%
-\fi%
-\def\@IEEEstrutARG{#2}%
-\ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty%
-\skip2=0.3\normalbaselineskip\relax%
-\else%
-\skip2=#2\relax%
-\fi%
-% remove stretchability, probably not needed
-\dimen0\skip0\relax%
-\dimen2\skip2\relax%
-\ifIEEEvisiblestruts%
-\vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax%
-\else%
-\vrule width0.0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi}}
-
-
-% enables strut mode by setting a default strut size and then zeroing the
-% \baselineskip, \lineskip, \lineskiplimit and \jot
-\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutmode{\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0.7\normalbaselineskip}{0.3\normalbaselineskip}[\relax]%
-\baselineskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt\lineskiplimit=0pt\jot=0pt}
-
-
-
-\def\IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarray}
-\def\endIEEEeqnarray{\end@IEEEeqnarray}
-
-\@namedef{IEEEeqnarray*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarray}
-\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarray*}{\end@IEEEeqnarray}
-
-
-% \IEEEeqnarray is an enhanced \eqnarray.
-% The star form defaults to not putting equation numbers at the end of each row.
-% usage: \IEEEeqnarray[decl]{cols}
-\def\@IEEEeqnarray{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarray}{\@@IEEEeqnarray[\relax]}}
-\def\@@IEEEeqnarray[#1]#2{%
- % default to showing the equation number or not based on whether or not
- % the star form was involked
- \if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\global\@eqnswfalse
- \else% not the star form
- \global\@eqnswtrue
- \fi% if star form
- \@IEEEissubequationfalse% default to no subequations
- \@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse% assume last line is not a sub equation
- \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse% not yet within the lines of the halign
- \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default
- \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise
- \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off
- % no extra space unless the user specifically requests it
- \lineskip=0pt\relax
- \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax
- \baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax%
- \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax%
- \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math
- \@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue% advance the col counter for each col the user uses,
- % used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build
- \stepcounter{equation}% advance equation counter before first line
- \setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}% no subequation yet
- \def\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}% redefine the ref label
- \IEEEeqnarraydecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides
- #1\relax% allow user to override defaults
- \let\\\@IEEEeqnarraycr% replace newline with one that can put in eqn. numbers
- \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@% col. count = 0 for first line
- \@IEEEbuildpreamble #2\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA
- % put in the column for the equation number
- \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first
- \toks0={##}%
- % advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the isolation col, this helps with error checking
- \@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}%
- % add the isolation column
- \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}%
- % advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the equation number col, this helps with error checking
- \@IEEEappendtoksA{&\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}%
- % add the equation number col to the preamble
- \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\hb@xt@\z@\bgroup\hss\the\toks0\egroup}%
- % note \@IEEEeqnnumcols does not count the equation col or isolation col
- % set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build
- \tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax
- % begin the display alignment
- \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines
- $$\everycr{}\halign to\displaywidth\bgroup
- % "exspand" the preamble
- \span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr}
-
-% enter isolation/strut column (or the next column if the user did not use
-% every column), record the strut status, complete the columns, do the strut if needed,
-% restore counters to correct values and exit
-\def\end@IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&\@@IEEEeqnarraycr\egroup%
-\if@IEEElastlinewassubequation\global\advance\c@IEEEsubequation\m@ne\fi%
-\global\advance\c@equation\m@ne%
-$$\@ignoretrue}
-
-% need a way to remember if last line is a subequation
-\newif\if@IEEElastlinewassubequation%
-\@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse
-
-% IEEEeqnarray uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to
-% end rows. This allows for things like \\*[vskip amount]
-% This "cr" macros are modified versions those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray
-% the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid
-% altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the next column
-% as there is an isolation/strut column after the user's columns
-\def\@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&% save strut status and advance to next column
- {\ifnum0=`}\fi
- \@ifstar{%
- \global\@eqpen\@M\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR
- }{%
- \global\@eqpen\interdisplaylinepenalty \@IEEEeqnarrayYCR
- }%
-}
-
-\def\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR\z@skip}
-
-\def\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR[#1]{%
- \ifnum0=`{\fi}%
- \@@IEEEeqnarraycr
- \noalign{\penalty\@eqpen\vskip\jot\vskip #1\relax}}%
-
-\def\@@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register
- \advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by -1\relax% adjust col count because of the isolation column
- \ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt>\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax
- \@IEEEclspkgerror{Too many columns within the IEEEeqnarray\MessageBreak
- environment}%
- {Use fewer \string &'s or put more columns in the IEEEeqnarry column\MessageBreak
- specifications.}\relax%
- \else
- \loop% add cols if the user did not use them all
- \ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax
- \@IEEEappendtoksA{&}%
- \advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax% update the col count
- \repeat
- % this number of &'s will take us the the isolation column
- \fi
- % execute the &'s
- \the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA%
- % handle the strut/isolation column
- \@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do the strut if needed
- \@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray
- &% and enter the equation number column
- % is this line needs an equation number, display it and advance the
- % (sub)equation counters, record what type this line was
- \if@eqnsw%
- \if@IEEEissubequation\theIEEEsubequationdis\addtocounter{equation}{1}\stepcounter{IEEEsubequation}%
- \global\@IEEElastlinewassubequationtrue%
- \else% display a standard equation number, initialize the IEEEsubequation counter
- \theequationdis\stepcounter{equation}\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}%
- \global\@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse\fi%
- \fi%
- % reset the eqnsw flag to indicate default preference of the display of equation numbers
- \if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\global\@eqnswfalse\else\global\@eqnswtrue\fi
- \global\@IEEEissubequationfalse% reset the subequation flag
- % reset the number of columns the user actually used
- \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@\relax
- % the real end of the line
- \cr}
-
-
-
-
-
-% \IEEEeqnarraybox is like \IEEEeqnarray except the box form puts everything
-% inside a vtop, vbox, or vcenter box depending on the letter in the second
-% optional argument (t,b,c). Vbox is the default. Unlike \IEEEeqnarray,
-% equation numbers are not displayed and \IEEEeqnarraybox can be nested.
-% \IEEEeqnarrayboxm is for math mode (like \array) and does not put the vbox
-% within an hbox.
-% \IEEEeqnarrayboxt is for text mode (like \tabular) and puts the vbox within
-% a \hbox{$ $} construct.
-% \IEEEeqnarraybox will auto detect whether to use \IEEEeqnarrayboxm or
-% \IEEEeqnarrayboxt depending on the math mode.
-% The third optional argument specifies the width this box is to be set to -
-% natural width is the default.
-% The * forms do not add \jot line spacing
-% usage: \IEEEeqnarraybox[decl][pos][width]{cols}
-\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxm{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
-\def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxm{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
-\@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
-\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
-
-\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxt{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
-\def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxt{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
-\@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
-\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
-
-\def\IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi%
-\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
-\def\endIEEEeqnarraybox{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
-
-\@namedef{IEEEeqnarraybox*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi%
-\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
-\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarraybox*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
-
-% flag to indicate if the \IEEEeqnarraybox needs to put things into an hbox{$ $}
-% for \vcenter in non-math mode
-\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW%
-\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse
-
-\def\@IEEEeqnarraybox{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox}{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[\relax]}}
-\def\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]}{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][b]}}
-\def\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]}{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][\relax]}}
-
-% #1 = decl; #2 = t,b,c; #3 = width, #4 = col specs
-\def\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][#3]#4{\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % not yet within the lines of the halign
- \@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave% save current master strut values
- \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default
- \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise
- \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off
- % no extra space unless the user specifically requests it
- \lineskip=0pt\relax%
- \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax%
- \baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax%
- \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax%
- \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math
- % the default end glues are zero for an \IEEEeqnarraybox
- \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default start glue
- \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default end glue
- \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue
- \@advanceIEEEeqncolcntfalse% do not advance the col counter for each col the user uses,
- % used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build
- \IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides
- #1\relax% allow user to override defaults
- \let\\\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr% replace newline with one that allows optional spacing
- \@IEEEbuildpreamble #4\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA
- % add an isolation column to the preamble to stop \\'s {} from getting into the last col
- \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first
- \toks0={##}%
- % add the isolation column to the preamble
- \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}%
- % set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build
- \tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax
- % begin the alignment
- \everycr{}%
- % use only the very first token to determine the positioning
- % this stops some problems when the user uses more than one letter,
- % but is probably not worth the effort
- % \noindent is used as a delimiter
- \def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}%
- \@IEEEgrabfirstoken#2\relax\relax\noindent
- % \@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded
- % if we need to put things into and hbox and go into math mode, do so now
- \if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW \leavevmode \hbox \bgroup $\fi%
- % use the appropriate vbox type
- \if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken t\relax\vtop\else\if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken c\relax%
- \vcenter\else\vbox\fi\fi\bgroup%
- \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines
- \ifx#3\relax\halign\else\halign to #3\relax\fi%
- \bgroup
- % "exspand" the preamble
- \span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr}
-
-% carry strut status and enter the isolation/strut column,
-% exit from math mode if needed, and exit
-\def\end@IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status
-&% enter isolation/strut column
-\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed
-\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore% restore the previous master strut values
-% reset the strut system for next IEEEeqnarray
-% (sets local strut values back to previous master strut values)
-\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset%
-% ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox
-\crcr\egroup\egroup%
-% exit from math mode and close hbox if needed
-\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW $\egroup\fi}
-
-
-
-% IEEEeqnarraybox uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to
-% end rows. This allows for things like \\[vskip amount]
-% This "cr" macros are modified versions those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray
-% For IEEEeqnarraybox, \\* is the same as \\
-% the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid
-% altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the isolation/strut column
-% carry strut status into isolation/strut column
-\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status
-&% enter isolation/strut column
-\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed
-% reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray
-\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset%
-{\ifnum0=`}\fi%
-\@ifstar{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}}
-
-% test and setup the optional argument to \\[]
-\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR\z@skip}
-
-% IEEEeqnarraybox does not automatically increase line spacing by \jot
-\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}%
-\cr\noalign{\if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\else\vskip\jot\fi\vskip#1\relax}}
-
-
-
-% starts the halign preamble build
-\def\@IEEEbuildpreamble{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register
-\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=u%current column type is not yet known
-\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=s%the previous column type was the start
-\let\@IEEEBPnexttype=u%next column type is not yet known
-% ensure these are valid
-\def\@IEEEBPcurglue={0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt}%
-\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}% name of current column definition
-% currently acquired numerically referenced glue
-% use a name that is easier to remember
-\let\@IEEEBPcurnum=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA%
-\@IEEEBPcurnum=0%
-% tracks number of columns in the preamble
-\@IEEEeqnnumcols=0%
-% record the default end glues
-\edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart}%
-\edef\@IEEEBPendglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend}%
-% now parse the user's column specifications
-\@@IEEEbuildpreamble}
-
-
-% parses and builds the halign preamble
-\def\@@IEEEbuildpreamble#1#2{\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEbuildpreamble%
-% use only the very first token to check the end
-% \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here
-\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}%
-\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent
-\ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEfinishpreamble\else%
-% identify current and next token type
-\@IEEEgetcoltype{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurtype}{1}% current, error on invalid
-\@IEEEgetcoltype{#2}{\@IEEEBPnexttype}{0}% next, no error on invalid next
-% if curtype is a glue, get the glue def
-\if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEgetcurglue{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurglue}\fi%
-% if curtype is a column, get the column def and set the current column name
-\if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEgetcurcol{#1}\fi%
-% if curtype is a numeral, acquire the user defined glue
-\if\@IEEEBPcurtype n\@IEEEprocessNcol{#1}\fi%
-% process the acquired glue
-\if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEprocessGcol\fi%
-% process the acquired col
-\if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEprocessCcol\fi%
-% ready prevtype for next col spec.
-\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPcurtype%
-% be sure and put back the future token(s) as a group
-\fi\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble{#2}}
-
-
-% executed just after preamble build is completed
-% warn about zero cols, and if prevtype type = u, put in end tabskip glue
-\def\@@IEEEfinishpreamble#1{\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols<1\relax
-\@IEEEclspkgerror{No column specifiers declared for IEEEeqnarray}%
-{At least one column type must be declared for each IEEEeqnarray.}%
-\fi%num cols less than 1
-%if last type undefined, set default end tabskip glue
-\if\@IEEEBPprevtype u\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue}\fi}
-
-
-% Identify and return the column specifier's type code
-\def\@IEEEgetcoltype#1#2#3{%
-% use only the very first token to determine the type
-% \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here
-\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}%
-\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent
-% \@IEEEgrabfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded
-% n = number
-% g = glue (any other char in catagory 12)
-% c = letter
-% e = \end
-% u = undefined
-% third argument: 0 = no error message, 1 = error on invalid char
-\let#2=u\relax% assume invalid until know otherwise
-\ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let#2=e\else
-\ifcat\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\relax\else% screen out control sequences
-\if0\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
-\if1\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
-\if2\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
-\if3\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
-\if4\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
-\if5\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
-\if6\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
-\if7\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
-\if8\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
-\if9\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
-\ifcat,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=g\relax
-\else\ifcat a\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=c\relax\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
-\if#2u\relax
-\if0\noexpand#3\relax\else\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid character in column specifications}%
-{Only letters, numerals and certain other symbols are allowed \MessageBreak
-as IEEEeqnarray column specifiers.}\fi\fi}
-
-
-% identify the current letter referenced column
-% if invalid, use a default column
-\def\@IEEEgetcurcol#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined%
-\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{#1}\else% invalid column name
-\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#1" in column specifications.\MessageBreak
-Using a default centering column instead}%
-{You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}%
-\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}\fi}
-
-
-% identify and return the predefined (punctuation) glue value
-\def\@IEEEgetcurglue#1#2{%
-% ! = \! (neg small) -0.16667em (-3/18 em)
-% , = \, (small) 0.16667em ( 3/18 em)
-% : = \: (med) 0.22222em ( 4/18 em)
-% ; = \; (large) 0.27778em ( 5/18 em)
-% ' = \quad 1em
-% " = \qquad 2em
-% . = 0.5\arraycolsep
-% / = \arraycolsep
-% ? = 2\arraycolsep
-% * = 1fil
-% + = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter
-% - = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero
-% Note that all em values are referenced to the math font (textfont2) fontdimen6
-% value for 1em.
-%
-% use only the very first token to determine the type
-% this prevents errant tokens from getting in the main text
-% \noindent is used as a delimiter here
-\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}%
-\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent
-% get the math font 1em value
-% LaTeX2e's NFSS2 does not preload the fonts, but \IEEEeqnarray needs
-% to gain access to the math (\textfont2) font's spacing parameters.
-% So we create a bogus box here that uses the math font to ensure
-% that \textfont2 is loaded and ready. If this is not done,
-% the \textfont2 stuff here may not work.
-% Thanks to Bernd Raichle for his 1997 post on this topic.
-{\setbox0=\hbox{$\displaystyle\relax$}}%
-% fontdimen6 has the width of 1em (a quad).
-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\fontdimen6\textfont2\relax%
-% identify the glue value based on the first token
-% we discard anything after the first
-\if!\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=-0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
-\if,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
-\if:\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.22222\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
-\if;\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.27778\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
-\if'\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
-\if"\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
-\if.\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.5\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
-\if/\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\the\arraycolsep}\else
-\if?\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
-\if *\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{0pt plus 1fil minus 0pt}\else
-\if+\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}\else
-\if-\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}\else
-\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}%
-\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid predefined inter-column glue type "#1" in\MessageBreak
-column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak
-0pt instead}%
-{Only !,:;'"./?*+ and - are valid predefined glue types in the\MessageBreak
-IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
-
-
-
-% process a numerical digit from the column specification
-% and look up the corresponding user defined glue value
-% can transform current type from n to g or a as the user defined glue is acquired
-\def\@IEEEprocessNcol#1{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype g%
-\@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak
-specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak
-after the first}%
-{You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak
-in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}%
-\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue, future digits will be discarded
-\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax%
-\else% if we previously aborted a glue
-\if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain digit abortion
-\else%acquire this number
-% save the previous type before the numerical digits started
-\if\@IEEEBPprevtype n\else\let\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype=\@IEEEBPprevtype\fi%
-\multiply\@IEEEBPcurnum by 10\relax%
-\advance\@IEEEBPcurnum by #1\relax% add in number, \relax is needed to stop TeX's number scan
-\if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else%close acquisition
-\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined%
-\edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname}%
-\else%user glue not defined
-\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid user defined inter-column glue type "\number\@IEEEBPcurnum" in\MessageBreak
-column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak
-0pt instead}%
-{You must define all IEEEeqnarray numerical inter-column glue types via\MessageBreak
-\string\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep \space before they are used in column specifications.}%
-\edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}%
-\fi% glue defined or not
-\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=g% change the type to reflect the acquired glue
-\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype% restore the prev type before this number glue
-\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax%ready for next acquisition
-\fi%close acquisition, get glue
-\fi%discard or acquire number
-\fi%prevtype glue or not
-}
-
-
-% process an acquired glue
-% add any acquired column/glue pair to the preamble
-\def\@IEEEprocessGcol{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain previous glue abortions
-\else
-% if this is the start glue, save it, but do nothing else
-% as this is not used in the preamble, but before
-\if\@IEEEBPprevtype s\edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEBPcurglue}%
-\else%not the start glue
-\if\@IEEEBPprevtype g%ignore if back to back glues
-\@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak
-specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak
-after the first}%
-{You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak
-in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}%
-\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue
-\else% not a back to back glue
-\if\@IEEEBPprevtype c\relax% if the previoustype was a col, add column/glue pair to preamble
-\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi
-\toks0={##}%
-% make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this
-\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi
-% insert the column defintion into the preamble, being careful not to expand
-% the column definition
-\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPcurglue}%
-\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}%
-\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%
-\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}%
-\@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}%
-\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
-\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}%
-\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%
-\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
-\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}%
-\advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble
-\else% error: non-start glue with no pending column
-\@IEEEclspkgerror{Inter-column glue specifier without a prior column\MessageBreak
-type in the column specifications. Ignoring this glue\MessageBreak
-specifier}%
-{Except for the first and last positions, glue can be placed only\MessageBreak
-between column types.}%
-\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue
-\fi% previous was a column
-\fi% back-to-back glues
-\fi% is start column glue
-\fi% prev type not a
-}
-
-
-% process an acquired letter referenced column and, if necessary, add it to the preamble
-\def\@IEEEprocessCcol{\if\@IEEEBPnexttype g\else
-\if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else
-% we have a column followed by something other than a glue (or numeral glue)
-% so we must add this column to the preamble now
-\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi%col separator for those after the first
-\if\@IEEEBPnexttype e\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue\relax}\else%put in end glue
-\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid\relax}\fi% or default mid glue
-\toks0={##}%
-% make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this
-\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi
-% insert the column definition into the preamble, being careful not to expand
-% the column definition
-\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}%
-\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%
-\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}%
-\@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}%
-\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
-\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}%
-\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%
-\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
-\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}%
-\advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble
-\fi%next type not numeral
-\fi%next type not glue
-}
-
-
-%%
-%% END OF IEEEeqnarry DEFINITIONS
-%%
-
-
-
-
-% set up the running headings, this complex because of all the different
-% modes IEEEtran supports
-\if@twoside
- \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote
- \def\ps@headings{%
- \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}
- \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}
- \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
- \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot
- \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}%
- \else
- \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize\@date\hfil DRAFT}
- \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil\@date}
- \fi
- \else
- \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}
- \fi}
- \else % not a technote
- \def\ps@headings{%
- \ifCLASSOPTIONconference
- \def\@oddhead{}
- \def\@evenhead{}
- \else
- \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\rightmark \hfil \thepage}
- \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}
- \fi
- \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
- \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\rightmark \hfil \thepage}
- \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}
- \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot
- \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}%
- \else
- \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize\@date\hfil DRAFT}
- \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil\@date}
- \fi
- \else
- \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}%
- \fi}
- \fi
-\else % single side
-\def\ps@headings{%
- \ifCLASSOPTIONconference
- \def\@oddhead{}
- \def\@evenhead{}
- \else
- \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}
- \def\@evenhead{}
- \fi
- \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
- \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}
- \def\@evenhead{}
- \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot
- \def\@oddfoot{}
- \else
- \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date \hfil DRAFT}
- \fi
- \else
- \def\@oddfoot{}
- \fi
- \def\@evenfoot{}}
-\fi
-
-
-% title page style
-\def\ps@IEEEtitlepagestyle{\def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}%
-\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
- \def\@oddhead{}%
- \def\@evenhead{}%
-\else
- \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}%
- \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}%
-\fi
-\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
- \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}%
- \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}%
- \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\else
- \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date\hfil DRAFT}%
- \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil \@date}%
- \fi
-\else
- % all non-draft mode footers
- \if@IEEEusingpubid
- % for title pages that are using a pubid
- % do not repeat pubid if using peer review option
- \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
- \else
- \footskip 0pt%
- \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
- \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
- \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
- \else
- \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
- \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi
-\fi}
-
-
-% peer review cover page style
-\def\ps@IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle{%
-\def\@oddhead{}\def\@evenhead{}%
-\def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}%
-\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
- \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\else
- \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date\hfil DRAFT}%
- \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil \@date}%
- \fi
-\else
- % non-draft mode footers
- \if@IEEEusingpubid
- \footskip 0pt%
- \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
- \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
- \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
- \else
- \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
- \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
- \fi
- \fi
-\fi}
-
-
-% start with empty headings
-\def\rightmark{}\def\leftmark{}
-
-
-%% Defines the command for putting the header. \footernote{TEXT} is the same
-%% as \markboth{TEXT}{TEXT}.
-%% Note that all the text is forced into uppercase, if you have some text
-%% that needs to be in lower case, for instance et. al., then either manually
-%% set \leftmark and \rightmark or use \MakeLowercase{et. al.} within the
-%% arguments to \markboth.
-\def\markboth#1#2{\def\leftmark{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\MakeUppercase{#1}}%
-\def\rightmark{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\MakeUppercase{#2}}}
-\def\footernote#1{\markboth{#1}{#1}}
-
-\def\today{\ifcase\month\or
- January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
- July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
- \space\number\day, \number\year}
-
-
-
-
-%% CITATION AND BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMANDS
-%%
-%% V1.6 no longer supports the older, nonstandard \shortcite and \citename setup stuff
-%
-%
-% Modify Latex2e \@citex to separate citations with "], ["
-\def\@citex[#1]#2{%
- \let\@citea\@empty
- \@cite{\@for\@citeb:=#2\do
- {\@citea\def\@citea{], [}%
- \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb\@empty}%
- \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi
- \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb}{\mbox{\reset@font\bfseries ?}%
- \G@refundefinedtrue
- \@latex@warning
- {Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage \space undefined}}%
- {\hbox{\csname b@\@citeb\endcsname}}}}{#1}}
-
-% V1.6 we create hooks for the optional use of Donald Arseneau's
-% cite.sty package. cite.sty is "smart" and will notice that the
-% following format controls are already defined and will not
-% redefine them. The result will be the proper sorting of the
-% citation numbers and auto detection of 3 or more entry "ranges" -
-% all in IEEE style: [1], [2], [5]--[7], [12]
-% This also allows for an optional note, i.e., \cite[mynote]{..}.
-% If the \cite with note has more than one reference, the note will
-% be applied to the last of the listed references. It is generally
-% desired that if a note is given, only one reference is listed in
-% that \cite.
-% Thanks to Mr. Arseneau for providing the required format arguments
-% to produce the IEEE style.
-\def\citepunct{], [}
-\def\citedash{]--[}
-
-% V1.7 default to using same font for urls made by url.sty
-\AtBeginDocument{\csname url@samestyle\endcsname}
-
-% V1.6 class files should always provide these
-\def\newblock{\hskip .11em\@plus.33em\@minus.07em}
-\let\@openbib@code\@empty
-
-
-% Provide support for the control entries of IEEEtran.bst V1.00 and later.
-% V1.7 optional argument allows for a different aux file to be specified in
-% order to handle multiple bibliographies. For example, with multibib.sty:
-% \newcites{sec}{Secondary Literature}
-% \bstctlcite[@auxoutsec]{BSTcontrolhak}
-\def\bstctlcite{\@ifnextchar[{\@bstctlcite}{\@bstctlcite[@auxout]}}
-\def\@bstctlcite[#1]#2{\@bsphack
- \@for\@citeb:=#2\do{%
- \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
- \if@filesw\immediate\write\csname #1\endcsname{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi}%
- \@esphack}
-
-% V1.6 provide a way for a user to execute a command just before
-% a given reference number - used to insert a \newpage to balance
-% the columns on the last page
-\edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{0} % the default of zero means that
- % the command is not executed
-\def\@IEEEtriggercmd{\newpage}
-
-% allow the user to alter the triggered command
-\long\def\IEEEtriggercmd#1{\long\def\@IEEEtriggercmd{#1}}
-
-% allow user a way to specify the reference number just before the
-% command is executed
-\def\IEEEtriggeratref#1{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=#1%
-\edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA}}%
-
-% trigger command at the given reference
-\def\@IEEEbibitemprefix{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtriggerrefnum\relax%
-\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax%
-\ifnum\c@enumiv=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax\@IEEEtriggercmd\relax\fi}
-
-
-\def\@biblabel#1{[#1]}
-
-% compsoc journals left align the reference numbers
-\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\def\@biblabel#1{[#1]\hfill}}
-
-% controls bib item spacing
-\def\IEEEbibitemsep{0pt plus .5pt}
-
-\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\IEEEbibitemsep{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}}
-
-
-\def\thebibliography#1{\section*{\refname}%
- \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\refname}%
- % V1.6 add some rubber space here and provide a command trigger
- \footnotesize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\small}\vskip 0.3\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip%
- \list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
- {\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}%
- \leftmargin\labelwidth
- \advance\leftmargin\labelsep\relax
- \itemsep \IEEEbibitemsep\relax
- \usecounter{enumiv}%
- \let\p@enumiv\@empty
- \renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
- \let\@IEEElatexbibitem\bibitem%
- \def\bibitem{\@IEEEbibitemprefix\@IEEElatexbibitem}%
-\def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em}%
-% originally:
-% \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000%
-% by adding the \interlinepenalty here, we make it more
-% difficult, but not impossible, for LaTeX to break within a reference.
-% IEEE almost never breaks a reference (but they do it more often with
-% technotes). You may get an underfull vbox warning around the bibliography,
-% but the final result will be much more like what IEEE will publish.
-% MDS 11/2000
-\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty100%
-\else\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty500\fi%
- \sfcode`\.=1000\relax}
-\let\endthebibliography=\endlist
-
-
-
-
-% TITLE PAGE COMMANDS
-%
-%
-% \IEEEmembership is used to produce the sublargesize italic font used to indicate author
-% IEEE membership. compsoc uses a large size sans slant font
-\def\IEEEmembership#1{{\@IEEEnotcompsoconly{\sublargesize}\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\textit{#1}}}
-
-
-% \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a footnote type symbol to indicate author affiliation.
-% When given an argument of 1 to 9, \IEEEauthorrefmark{} follows the standard LaTeX footnote
-% symbol sequence convention. However, for arguments 10 and above, \IEEEauthorrefmark{}
-% reverts to using lower case roman numerals, so it cannot overflow. Do note that you
-% cannot use \footnotemark[] in place of \IEEEauthorrefmark{} within \author as the footnote
-% symbols will have been turned off to prevent \thanks from creating footnote marks.
-% \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a symbol that appears to LaTeX as having zero vertical
-% height - this allows for a more compact line packing, but the user must ensure that
-% the interline spacing is large enough to prevent \IEEEauthorrefmark{} from colliding
-% with the text above.
-% V1.7 make this a robust command
-\DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEauthorrefmark}[1]{\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\textsuperscript{\footnotesize\ensuremath{\ifcase#1\or *\or \dagger\or \ddagger\or%
- \mathsection\or \mathparagraph\or \|\or **\or \dagger\dagger%
- \or \ddagger\ddagger \else\textsuperscript{\expandafter\romannumeral#1}\fi}}}}
-
-
-% FONT CONTROLS AND SPACINGS FOR CONFERENCE MODE AUTHOR NAME AND AFFILIATION BLOCKS
-%
-% The default font styles for the author name and affiliation blocks (confmode)
-\def\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\large}}
-\def\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\itshape}\normalsize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\large}}
-% The default if the user does not use an author block
-\def\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize}
-
-% spacing from title (or special paper notice) to author name blocks (confmode)
-% can be negative
-\def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{-0.25em}
-% compsoc conferences need more space here
-\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{0.75\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}}
-
-% spacing between name and affiliation blocks (confmode)
-% This can be negative.
-% IEEE doesn't want any added spacing here, but I will leave these
-% controls in place in case they ever change their mind.
-% Personally, I like 0.75ex.
-%\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.75ex}
-%\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.75ex}
-\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.0ex}
-\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.0ex}
-% baseline spacing within name and affiliation blocks (confmode)
-% must be positive, spacings below certain values will make
-% the position of line of text sensitive to the contents of the
-% line above it i.e., whether or not the prior line has descenders,
-% subscripts, etc. For this reason it is a good idea to keep
-% these above 2.6ex
-\def\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace{2.6ex}
-\def\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace{2.75ex}
-
-% This tracks the required strut size.
-% See the \@IEEEauthorhalign command for the actual default value used.
-\def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex}
-
-% variables to retain font size and style across groups
-% values given here have no effect as they will be overwritten later
-\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize{10}
-\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip{12}
-\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding{OT1}
-\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily{ptm}
-\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries{m}
-\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape{n}
-
-% saves the current font attributes
-\def\@IEEEcurfontSAVE{\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize\f@size%
-\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip\f@baselineskip%
-\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding\f@encoding%
-\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily\f@family%
-\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries\f@series%
-\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape\f@shape}
-
-% restores the saved font attributes
-\def\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE{\fontsize{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize}{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip}%
-\fontencoding{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding}%
-\fontfamily{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily}%
-\fontseries{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries}%
-\fontshape{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape}%
-\selectfont}
-
-
-% variable to indicate if the current block is the first block in the column
-\newif\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol \@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse
-
-
-% the command places a strut with height and depth = \@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace
-% we use this technique to have complete manual control over the spacing of the lines
-% within the halign environment.
-% We set the below baseline portion at 30%, the above
-% baseline portion at 70% of the total length.
-% Responds to changes in the document's \baselinestretch
-\def\@IEEEauthorstrutrule{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace%
-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselinestretch\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%
-\rule[-0.3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA]{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}}
-
-
-% blocks to hold the authors' names and affilations.
-% Makes formatting easy for conferences
-%
-% use real definitions in conference mode
-% name block
-\def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle% set the default text style
-\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}% disable strut for spacer row
-% the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs
-% for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro
-% do a spacer row if needed
-\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline\fi
-\global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column
-%restore the correct strut value
-\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace}%
-% input the author names
-#1%
-% end the row if the user did not already
-\crcr}
-% spacer row for names
-\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace}}
-%
-% affiliation block
-\def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle% set the default text style
-\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}%disable strut for spacer row
-% the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs
-% for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro
-% do a spacer row if needed
-\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline\fi
-\global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column
-%restore the correct strut value
-\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace}%
-% input the author affiliations
-#1%
-% end the row if the user did not already
-\crcr}
-% spacer row for affiliations
-\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace}}
-
-
-% allow papers to compile even if author blocks are used in modes other
-% than conference or peerreviewca. For such cases, we provide dummy blocks.
-\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
-\else
- \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca\else
- % not conference or peerreviewca mode
- \def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{#1}%
- \def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{#1}%
- \fi
-\fi
-
-
-
-% we provide our own halign so as not to have to depend on tabular
-\def\@IEEEauthorhalign{\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle% default text style
- \lineskip=0pt\relax% disable line spacing
- \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax%
- \baselineskip=0pt\relax%
- \@IEEEcurfontSAVE% save the current font
- \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math
- \let\\\@IEEEauthorhaligncr% replace newline with halign friendly one
- \tabskip=0pt\relax% no column spacing
- \everycr{}% ensure no problems here
- \@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse% no author blocks yet
- \def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex}% default interline space
- \vtop\bgroup%vtop box
- \halign\bgroup&\relax\hfil\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE\relax ##\relax
- \hfil\@IEEEcurfontSAVE\@IEEEauthorstrutrule\cr}
-
-% ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox
-\def\end@IEEEauthorhalign{\crcr\egroup\egroup}
-
-% handle bogus star form
-\def\@IEEEauthorhaligncr{{\ifnum0=`}\fi\@ifstar{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}}
-
-% test and setup the optional argument to \\[]
-\def\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr{\@testopt\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr\z@skip}
-
-% end the line and do the optional spacer
-\def\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}\cr\noalign{\vskip#1\relax}}
-
-
-
-% flag to prevent multiple \and warning messages
-\newif\if@IEEEWARNand
-\@IEEEWARNandtrue
-
-% if in conference or peerreviewca modes, we support the use of \and as \author is a
-% tabular environment, otherwise we warn the user that \and is invalid
-% outside of conference or peerreviewca modes.
-\def\and{\relax} % provide a bogus \and that we will then override
-
-\renewcommand{\and}[1][\relax]{\if@IEEEWARNand\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\and is valid only
- when in conference or peerreviewca}\typeout{modes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNandfalse}
-
-\ifCLASSOPTIONconference%
-\renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}%
-\fi
-\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca
-\renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}%
-\fi
-
-
-% page clearing command
-% based on LaTeX2e's \cleardoublepage, but allows different page styles
-% for the inserted blank pages
-\def\@IEEEcleardoublepage#1{\clearpage\if@twoside\ifodd\c@page\else
-\hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\fi\fi\fi}
-
-
-% user command to invoke the title page
-\def\maketitle{\par%
- \begingroup%
- \normalfont%
- \def\thefootnote{}% the \thanks{} mark type is empty
- \def\footnotemark{}% and kill space from \thanks within author
- \let\@makefnmark\relax% V1.7, must *really* kill footnotemark to remove all \textsuperscript spacing as well.
- \footnotesize% equal spacing between thanks lines
- \footnotesep 0.7\baselineskip%see global setting of \footnotesep for more info
- % V1.7 disable \thanks note indention for compsoc
- \@IEEEcompsoconly{\long\def\@makefntext##1{\parindent 1em\noindent\hbox{\@makefnmark}##1}}%
- \normalsize%
- \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
- \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext%
- \thispagestyle{IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle}\@thanks%
- \else
- \if@twocolumn%
- \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote%
- \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext%
- \else
- \twocolumn[\@maketitle\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace\@IEEEaftertitletext]%
- \fi
- \else
- \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext%
- \fi
- \thispagestyle{IEEEtitlepagestyle}\@thanks%
- \fi
- % pullup page for pubid if used.
- \if@IEEEusingpubid
- \enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}%
- \fi
- \endgroup
- \setcounter{footnote}{0}\let\maketitle\relax\let\@maketitle\relax
- \gdef\@thanks{}%
- % v1.6b do not clear these as we will need the title again for peer review papers
- % \gdef\@author{}\gdef\@title{}%
- \let\thanks\relax}
-
-
-
-% V1.7 parbox to format \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext
-\long\def\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox#1{\parbox{0.915\textwidth}{#1}}
-
-% formats the Title, authors names, affiliations and special paper notice
-% THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING COMMAND! Do not allow blank lines or unintentional
-% spaces to enter the definition - use % at the end of each line
-\def\@maketitle{\newpage
-\begin{center}%
-\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technotes
- {\bfseries\large\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@title\par}\vskip 1.3em{\lineskip .5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@author
- \@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax
- \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}\par
- \hfill\@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax
-\else% not a technote
- \vskip0.2em{\Huge\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\normalfont\normalsize\vskip 2\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
- \bfseries\Large}\@title\par}\vskip1.0em\par%
- % V1.6 handle \author differently if in conference mode
- \ifCLASSOPTIONconference%
- {\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace%
- \mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par}\relax
- \else% peerreviewca, peerreview or journal
- \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca
- % peerreviewca handles author names just like conference mode
- {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace%
- \mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par
- {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax
- \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}\par\hfill
- \@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax
- \else% journal or peerreview
- {\lineskip.5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\sublargesize\@author\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par
- {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax
- \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}\par\hfill
- \@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax
- \fi
- \fi
-\fi\end{center}}
-
-
-
-% V1.7 Computer Society "diamond line" which follows index terms for nonconference papers
-\def\@IEEEcompsocdiamondline{\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\hspace{7.5pt}%
-\raisebox{-3.5pt}{\fontfamily{pzd}\fontencoding{U}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\fontsize{11}{12}\selectfont\char70}%
-\hspace{7.5pt}\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\relax}
-
-% V1.7 standard LateX2e \thanks, but with \itshape under compsoc. Also make it a \long\def
-% We also need to trigger the one-shot footnote rule
-\def\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule{\global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoteruletrue}
-
-
-\long\def\thanks#1{\footnotemark
- \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks
- \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\itshape
- \protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule\relax}\ignorespaces#1}}}
-\let\@thanks\@empty
-
-% V1.7 allow \author to contain \par's. This is needed to allow \thanks to contain \par.
-\long\def\author#1{\gdef\@author{#1}}
-
-
-% in addition to setting up IEEEitemize, we need to remove a baselineskip space above and
-% below it because \list's \pars introduce blank lines because of the footnote struts.
-\def\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist{\def\labelitemi{$\bullet$}%
-\setlength{\IEEElabelindent}{0pt}\setlength{\parskip}{0pt}%
-\setlength{\partopsep}{0pt}\setlength{\topsep}{0.5\baselineskip}\vspace{-1\baselineskip}\relax}
-
-
-% flag for fake non-compsoc \IEEEcompsocthanksitem - prevents line break on very first item
-\newif\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem \@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse
-
-\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
-% V1.7 compsoc bullet item \thanks
-% also, we need to redefine this to destroy the argument in \@IEEEdynamictitlevspace
-\long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\relax\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse\footnotemark
- \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks
- \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\itshape\protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule
- {\let\IEEEiedlistdecl\relax\protect\begin{IEEEitemize}[\protect\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist]\ignorespaces#1\relax
- \protect\end{IEEEitemize}}\protect\vspace{-1\baselineskip}}}}
-\DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\item}
-\else
-% non-compsoc, allow for dual compilation via rerouting to normal \thanks
-\long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\thanks{#1}}
-% redirect to "pseudo-par" \hfil\break\indent after swallowing [] from \IEEEcompsocthanksitem[]
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg}%
-{\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[\relax]}}
-% be sure and break only after first item, be sure and ignore spaces after optional argument
-\def\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[#1]{\relax\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem\hfil\break
-\indent\fi\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemtrue\ignorespaces}
-\fi
-
-
-% V1.6b define the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle as needed
-\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
-\def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\@IEEEcleardoublepage{empty}%
-\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn
-\twocolumn[\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace]
-\else
-\newpage\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip
-\fi
-\thispagestyle{IEEEtitlepagestyle}}
-\else
-% \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle does nothing if peer review option has not been selected
-\def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\relax}
-\fi
-
-% peerreview formats the repeated title like the title in journal papers.
-\def\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\begin{center}\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}%
-\normalfont\normalsize\vskip0.2em{\Huge\@title\par}\vskip1.0em\par
-\end{center}}
-
-
-
-% V1.6
-% this is a static rubber spacer between the title/authors and the main text
-% used for single column text, or when the title appears in the first column
-% of two column text (technotes).
-\def\@IEEEstatictitlevskip{{\normalfont\normalsize
-% adjust spacing to next text
-% v1.6b handle peer review papers
-\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
-% for peer review papers, the same value is used for both title pages
-% regardless of the other paper modes
- \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip
-\else
- \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% conference
- \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip%
- \else%
- \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technote
- \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip%
- \else% journal uses more space
- \vskip 2.5\baselineskip plus 0.75\baselineskip minus 0.375\baselineskip%
- \fi
- \fi
-\fi}}
-
-
-% V1.6
-% This is a dynamically determined rigid spacer between the title/authors
-% and the main text. This is used only for single column titles over two
-% column text (most common)
-% This is bit tricky because we have to ensure that the textheight of the
-% main text is an integer multiple of \baselineskip
-% otherwise underfull vbox problems may develop in the second column of the
-% text on the titlepage
-% The possible use of \IEEEpubid must also be taken into account.
-\def\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace{{%
- % we run within a group so that all the macros can be forgotten when we are done
- \long\def\thanks##1{\relax}%don't allow \thanks to run when we evaluate the vbox height
- \long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks##1{\relax}%don't allow \IEEEcompsocitemizethanks to run when we evaluate the vbox height
- \normalfont\normalsize% we declare more descriptive variable names
- \let\@IEEEmaintextheight=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%height of the main text columns
- \let\@IEEEINTmaintextheight=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB%height of the main text columns with integer # lines
- % set the nominal and minimum values for the title spacer
- % the dynamic algorithm will not allow the spacer size to
- % become less than \@IEEEMINtitlevspace - instead it will be
- % lengthened
- % default to journal values
- \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{2.5\baselineskip}%
- \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{2\baselineskip}%
- % conferences and technotes need tighter spacing
- \ifCLASSOPTIONconference%conference
- \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}%
- \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}%
- \fi
- \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote%technote
- \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}%
- \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}%
- \fi%
- % get the height that the title will take up
- \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
- \settoheight{\@IEEEmaintextheight}{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth \@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle}}%
- \else
- \settoheight{\@IEEEmaintextheight}{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth \@maketitle}}%
- \fi
- \@IEEEmaintextheight=-\@IEEEmaintextheight% title takes away from maintext, so reverse sign
- % add the height of the page textheight
- \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by \textheight%
- % correct for title pages using pubid
- \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else
- % peerreview papers use the pubid on the cover page only.
- % And the cover page uses a static spacer.
- \if@IEEEusingpubid\advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\@IEEEpubidpullup\fi
- \fi%
- % subtract off the nominal value of the title bottom spacer
- \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\@IEEENORMtitlevspace%
- % \topskip takes away some too
- \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\topskip%
- % calculate the column height of the main text for lines
- % now we calculate the main text height as if holding
- % an integer number of \normalsize lines after the first
- % and discard any excess fractional remainder
- % we subtracted the first line, because the first line
- % is placed \topskip into the maintext, not \baselineskip like the
- % rest of the lines.
- \@IEEEINTmaintextheight=\@IEEEmaintextheight%
- \divide\@IEEEINTmaintextheight by \baselineskip%
- \multiply\@IEEEINTmaintextheight by \baselineskip%
- % now we calculate how much the title spacer height will
- % have to be reduced from nominal (\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight is always
- % a positive value) so that the maintext area will contain an integer
- % number of normal size lines
- % we change variable names here (to avoid confusion) as we no longer
- % need \@IEEEINTmaintextheight and can reuse its dimen register
- \let\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight=\@IEEEINTmaintextheight%
- \advance\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight by -\@IEEEmaintextheight%
- \advance\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight by \baselineskip%
- % this is the calculated height of the spacer
- % we change variable names here (to avoid confusion) as we no longer
- % need \@IEEEmaintextheight and can reuse its dimen register
- \let\@IEEECOMPENSATElen=\@IEEEmaintextheight%
- \@IEEECOMPENSATElen=\@IEEENORMtitlevspace% set the nominal value
- % we go with the reduced length if it is smaller than an increase
- \ifdim\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight < 0.5\baselineskip\relax%
- \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by -\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight%
- % if the resulting spacer is too small back out and go with an increase instead
- \ifdim\@IEEECOMPENSATElen<\@IEEEMINtitlevspace\relax%
- \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by \baselineskip%
- \fi%
- \else%
- % go with an increase because it is closer to the nominal than a decrease
- \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by -\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight%
- \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by \baselineskip%
- \fi%
- % set the calculated rigid spacer
- \vspace{\@IEEECOMPENSATElen}}}
-
-
-
-% V1.6
-% we allow the user access to the last part of the title area
-% useful in emergencies such as when a different spacing is needed
-% This text is NOT compensated for in the dynamic sizer.
-\let\@IEEEaftertitletext=\relax
-\long\def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\def\@IEEEaftertitletext{#1}}
-
-% V1.7 provide a way for users to enter abstract and keywords
-% into the onecolumn title are. This text is compensated for
-% in the dynamic sizer.
-\let\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext=\relax
-\long\def\IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext#1{\def\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext{#1}}
-% V1.7 provide a way for users to get the \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext if
-% not in compsoc journal mode - this way abstract and keywords can be placed
-% in their conventional position if not in compsoc mode.
-\def\IEEEdisplaynotcompsoctitleabstractindextext{%
-\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc% display if compsoc conf
-\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext\fi
-\else% or if not compsoc
-\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext\fi}
-
-
-% command to allow alteration of baselinestretch, but only if the current
-% baselineskip is unity. Used to tweak the compsoc abstract and keywords line spacing.
-\def\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch#1{{\def\baselinestretch{1}\selectfont
-\global\@tempskipa\baselineskip}\ifnum\@tempskipa=\baselineskip%
-\def\baselinestretch{#1}\selectfont\fi\relax}
-
-
-% abstract and keywords are in \small, except
-% for 9pt docs in which they are in \footnotesize
-% Because 9pt docs use an 8pt footnotesize, \small
-% becomes a rather awkward 8.5pt
-\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\small}
-\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine
- \def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize}
-\fi
-
-% compsoc journals use \footnotesize, compsoc conferences use normalsize
-\@IEEEcompsoconly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize}}
-\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\normalsize}}
-
-
-
-
-% V1.6 have abstract and keywords strip leading spaces, pars and newlines
-% so that spacing is more tightly controlled.
-\def\abstract{\normalfont
- \if@twocolumn
- \@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\textit{\abstractname}---\relax
- \else
- \begin{center}\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize
- \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
-% V1.6 IEEE wants only 1 pica from end of abstract to introduction heading when in
-% conference mode (the heading already has this much above it)
-\def\endabstract{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\vspace{0ex}\else\vspace{1.34ex}\fi\par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi
- \normalfont\normalsize}
-
-\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont
- \if@twocolumn
- \@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\textit{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax
- \else
- \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize
- \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
-\def\endIEEEkeywords{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\vspace{1.34ex}\else\vspace{0.67ex}\fi
- \par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi%
- \normalfont\normalsize}
-
-% V1.7 compsoc keywords index terms
-\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
- \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference
-\def\abstract{\normalfont
- \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\large\abstractname}\end{center}\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip
- \if@twocolumn\else\quotation\fi\itshape\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
- \par\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
-\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\vskip 1.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip
- \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\large\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip
- \if@twocolumn\else\quotation\fi\itshape\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
- \par\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
- \else% compsoc not conference
-\def\abstract{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily
- \if@twocolumn
- \@IEEEabskeysecsize\noindent\textbf{\abstractname}---\relax
- \else
- \begin{center}\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
- \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
-\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily
- \if@twocolumn
- \@IEEEabskeysecsize\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip\noindent
- \textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax
- \else
- \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
- \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
- \fi
-\fi
-
-
-
-% gobbles all leading \, \\ and \par, upon finding first token that
-% is not a \ , \\ or a \par, it ceases and returns that token
-%
-% used to strip leading \, \\ and \par from the input
-% so that such things in the beginning of an environment will not
-% affect the formatting of the text
-\long\def\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP#1{\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=0%
-\let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken#1%
-\let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken=\par%
-\let\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken=\\%
-\let\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken=\ %
-\def\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO{\ }%
-\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken%
-\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%
-\fi%
-\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken%
-\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%
-\fi%
-\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken%
-\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%
-\fi%
-% a control space will come in as a macro
-% when it is the last one on a line
-\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO%
-\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%
-\fi%
-% if we have to swallow this token, do so and taste the next one
-% else spit it out and stop gobbling
-\ifx\@IEEEswallowthistoken 1\let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP\else%
-\let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=#1\fi%
-\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP}%
-
-
-
-
-% TITLING OF SECTIONS
-\def\@IEEEsectpunct{:\ \,} % Punctuation after run-in section heading (headings which are
- % part of the paragraphs), need little bit more than a single space
- % spacing from section number to title
-% compsoc conferences use regular period/space punctuation
-\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
-\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
-\def\@IEEEsectpunct{.\ }
-\fi\fi
-
-
-\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 0.5em\relax}
-
-\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
-% compsoc journals need extra spacing
-\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else
-\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 1em\relax}
-\fi\fi
-
-%v1.7 put {} after #6 to allow for some types of user font control
-%and use \@@par rather than \par
-\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{%
- \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth
- \let\@svsec\@empty
- \else
- \refstepcounter{#1}%
- % load section label and spacer into \@svsec
- \protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}%
- \fi%
- \@tempskipa #5\relax
- \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@% tempskipa determines whether is treated as a high
- \begingroup #6{\relax% or low level heading
- \noindent % subsections are NOT indented
- % print top level headings. \@svsec is label, #8 is heading title
- % IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal
- {\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}{\interlinepenalty \@M #8\@@par}}%
- \endgroup
- \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else
- \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}%
- \else % printout low level headings
- % svsechd seems to swallow the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{}
- % got rid of sectionmark stuff
- \def\@svsechd{#6{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec #8\@IEEEsectpunct\mbox{}}%
- \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else
- \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}}%
- \fi%skip down
- \@xsect{#5}}
-
-
-% section* handler
-%v1.7 put {} after #4 to allow for some types of user font control
-%and use \@@par rather than \par
-\def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{\@tempskipa #3\relax
- \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
- %\begingroup #4\@hangfrom{\hskip #1}{\interlinepenalty \@M #5\par}\endgroup
- % IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal
- \begingroup \noindent #4{\relax{\hskip #1}{\interlinepenalty \@M #5\@@par}}\endgroup
- % svsechd swallows the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{}
- \else \def\@svsechd{#4{\hskip #1\relax #5\@IEEEsectpunct\mbox{}}}\fi
- \@xsect{#3}}
-
-
-%% SECTION heading spacing and font
-%%
-% arguments are: #1 - sectiontype name
-% (for \@sect) #2 - section level
-% #3 - section heading indent
-% #4 - top separation (absolute value used, neg indicates not to indent main text)
-% If negative, make stretch parts negative too!
-% #5 - (absolute value used) positive: bottom separation after heading,
-% negative: amount to indent main text after heading
-% Both #4 and #5 negative means to indent main text and use negative top separation
-% #6 - font control
-% You've got to have \normalfont\normalsize in the font specs below to prevent
-% trouble when you do something like:
-% \section{Note}{\ttfamily TT-TEXT} is known to ...
-% IEEE sometimes REALLY stretches the area before a section
-% heading by up to about 0.5in. However, it may not be a good
-% idea to let LaTeX have quite this much rubber.
-\ifCLASSOPTIONconference%
-% IEEE wants section heading spacing to decrease for conference mode
-\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{1.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 0.5ex}%
-{0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\scshape}}%
-\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{1.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 0.5ex}%
-{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
-\else % for journals
-\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{3.0ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}% V1.6 3.0ex from 3.5ex
-{0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\scshape}}%
-\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{3.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}%
-{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
-\fi
-
-% for both journals and conferences
-% decided to put in a little rubber above the section, might help somebody
-\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}%
-{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
-\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}%
-{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
-
-
-% compsoc
-\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
-\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
-% compsoc conference
-\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}%
-{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\large\bfseries}}%
-\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}%
-{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\sublargesize\bfseries}}%
-\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}%
-{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}}%
-\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}%
-{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}%
-\else% compsoc journals
-% use negative top separation as compsoc journals do not indent paragraphs after section titles
-\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{-3ex plus -2ex minus -1.5ex}%
-{0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\large\sffamily\bfseries\scshape}}%
-% Note that subsection and smaller may not be correct for the Computer Society,
-% I have to look up an example.
-\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{-3.5ex plus -1.5ex minus -1.5ex}%
-{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\bfseries}}%
-\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{-2.5ex plus -1ex minus -1ex}%
-{0.5ex plus 0.5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\itshape}}%
-\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{-0ex plus -0.1ex minus -0.1ex}%
-{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}%
-\fi\fi
-
-
-
-
-%% ENVIRONMENTS
-% "box" symbols at end of proofs
-\def\IEEEQEDclosed{\mbox{\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{1.3ex}}} % for a filled box
-% V1.6 some journals use an open box instead that will just fit around a closed one
-\def\IEEEQEDopen{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.2pt}\fbox{\rule[0pt]{0pt}{1.3ex}\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{0pt}}}}
-\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
-\def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDopen} % default to open for compsoc
-\else
-\def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDclosed} % otherwise default to closed
-\fi
-
-% v1.7 name change to avoid namespace collision with amsthm. Also add support
-% for an optional argument.
-\def\IEEEproof{\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEproof}{\@IEEEproof[\IEEEproofname]}}
-\def\@IEEEproof[#1]{\par\noindent\hspace{2em}{\itshape #1: }}
-\def\endIEEEproof{\hspace*{\fill}~\IEEEQED\par}
-
-
-%\itemindent is set to \z@ by list, so define new temporary variable
-\newdimen\@IEEEtmpitemindent
-\def\@begintheorem#1#2{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\topsep 0pt\rmfamily\trivlist%
- \item[\hskip \labelsep{\indent\itshape #1\ #2:}]\itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent}
-\def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\topsep 0pt\rmfamily \trivlist%
-% V1.6 IEEE is back to using () around theorem names which are also in italics
-% Thanks to Christian Peel for reporting this.
- \item[\hskip\labelsep{\indent\itshape #1\ #2\ (#3):}]\itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent}
-% V1.7 remove bogus \unskip that caused equations in theorems to collide with
-% lines below.
-\def\@endtheorem{\endtrivlist}
-
-% V1.6
-% display command for the section the theorem is in - so that \thesection
-% is not used as this will be in Roman numerals when we want arabic.
-% LaTeX2e uses \def\@thmcounter#1{\noexpand\arabic{#1}} for the theorem number
-% (second part) display and \def\@thmcountersep{.} as a separator.
-% V1.7 intercept calls to the section counter and reroute to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection
-% to allow \appendix(ices} to override as needed.
-%
-% special handler for sections, allows appendix(ices) to override
-\gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection#1{\arabic{#1}}
-% string macro
-\edef\@IEEEstringsection{section}
-
-% redefine the #1#2[#3] form of newtheorem to use a hook to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection
-% if section in_counter is used
-\def\@xnthm#1#2[#3]{%
- \expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname
- {\@definecounter{#1}\@newctr{#1}[#3]%
- \edef\@IEEEstringtmp{#3}
- \ifx\@IEEEstringtmp\@IEEEstringsection
- \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{%
- \noexpand\@IEEEthmcounterinsection{#3}\@thmcountersep
- \@thmcounter{#1}}%
- \else
- \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{%
- \expandafter\noexpand\csname the#3\endcsname \@thmcountersep
- \@thmcounter{#1}}%
- \fi
- \global\@namedef{#1}{\@thm{#1}{#2}}%
- \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}}
-
-
-
-%% SET UP THE DEFAULT PAGESTYLE
-\ps@headings
-\pagenumbering{arabic}
-
-% normally the page counter starts at 1
-\setcounter{page}{1}
-% however, for peerreview the cover sheet is page 0 or page -1
-% (for duplex printing)
-\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
- \if@twoside
- \setcounter{page}{-1}
- \else
- \setcounter{page}{0}
- \fi
-\fi
-
-% standard book class behavior - let bottom line float up and down as
-% needed when single sided
-\ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside\else\raggedbottom\fi
-% if two column - turn on twocolumn, allow word spacings to stretch more and
-% enforce a rigid position for the last lines
-\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn
-% the peer review option delays invoking twocolumn
- \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else
- \twocolumn
- \fi
-\sloppy
-\flushbottom
-\fi
-
-
-
-
-% \APPENDIX and \APPENDICES definitions
-
-% This is the \@ifmtarg command from the LaTeX ifmtarg package
-% by Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau
-% \@ifmtarg is used to determine if an argument to a command
-% is present or not.
-% For instance:
-% \@ifmtarg{#1}{\typeout{empty}}{\typeout{has something}}
-% \@ifmtarg is used with our redefined \section command if
-% \appendices is invoked.
-% The command \section will behave slightly differently depending
-% on whether the user specifies a title:
-% \section{My appendix title}
-% or not:
-% \section{}
-% This way, we can eliminate the blank lines where the title
-% would be, and the unneeded : after Appendix in the table of
-% contents
-\begingroup
-\catcode`\Q=3
-\long\gdef\@ifmtarg#1{\@xifmtarg#1QQ\@secondoftwo\@firstoftwo\@nil}
-\long\gdef\@xifmtarg#1#2Q#3#4#5\@nil{#4}
-\endgroup
-% end of \@ifmtarg defs
-
-
-% V1.7
-% command that allows the one time saving of the original definition
-% of section to \@IEEEappendixsavesection for \appendix or \appendices
-% we don't save \section here as it may be redefined later by other
-% packages (hyperref.sty, etc.)
-\def\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce{\let\@IEEEappendixsavesection\section
-\let\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\relax}
-
-% neat trick to grab and process the argument from \section{argument}
-% we process differently if the user invoked \section{} with no
-% argument (title)
-% note we reroute the call to the old \section*
-\def\@IEEEprocessthesectionargument#1{%
-\@ifmtarg{#1}{%
-\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\thesectiondis}%
-\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname~\thesection}}{%
-\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\thesectiondis \\* #1}%
-\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname~\thesection: #1}}}
-
-% we use this if the user calls \section{} after
-% \appendix-- which has no meaning. So, we ignore the
-% command and its argument. Then, warn the user.
-\def\@IEEEdestroythesectionargument#1{\typeout{** WARNING: Ignoring useless
-\protect\section\space in Appendix (line \the\inputlineno).}}
-
-
-% remember \thesection forms will be displayed in \ref calls
-% and in the Table of Contents.
-% The \sectiondis form is used in the actual heading itself
-
-% appendix command for one single appendix
-% normally has no heading. However, if you want a
-% heading, you can do so via the optional argument:
-% \appendix[Optional Heading]
-\def\appendix{\relax}
-\renewcommand{\appendix}[1][]{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par
- % v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique
- \gdef\theHsection{Appendix.A}%
- % v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section
- \xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}%
- \setcounter{section}{0}%
- \setcounter{subsection}{0}%
- \setcounter{subsubsection}{0}%
- \setcounter{paragraph}{0}%
- \gdef\thesection{A}%
- \gdef\thesectiondis{}%
- \gdef\thesubsection{\Alph{subsection}}%
- \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A}
- \refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter
- \@ifmtarg{#1}{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname}%
- \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname}}{%
- \@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\\* #1}%
- \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname: #1}}%
- % redefine \section command for appendix
- % leave \section* as is
- \def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{%
- \@IEEEdestroythesectionargument}}% throw out the argument
- % of the normal form
-}
-
-
-
-% appendices command for multiple appendices
-% user then calls \section with an argument (possibly empty) to
-% declare the individual appendices
-\def\appendices{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par
- % v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique
- \gdef\theHsection{Appendix.\Alph{section}}%
- % v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section
- \xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}%
- \setcounter{section}{-1}% we want \refstepcounter to use section 0
- \setcounter{subsection}{0}%
- \setcounter{subsubsection}{0}%
- \setcounter{paragraph}{0}%
- \ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices%
- \gdef\thesection{\Roman{section}}%
- \gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}}%
- \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}.}}%
- \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A\arabic{##1}}
- \else%
- \gdef\thesection{\Alph{section}}%
- \gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}}%
- \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}.}}%
- \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{\Alph{##1}}
- \fi%
- \refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter
- \setcounter{section}{0}% NEXT \section will be the FIRST appendix
- % redefine \section command for appendices
- % leave \section* as is
- \def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{% process the *-form
- \refstepcounter{section}% or is a new section so,
- \@IEEEprocessthesectionargument}}% process the argument
- % of the normal form
-}
-
-
-
-% \IEEEPARstart
-% Definition for the big two line drop cap letter at the beginning of the
-% first paragraph of journal papers. The first argument is the first letter
-% of the first word, the second argument is the remaining letters of the
-% first word which will be rendered in upper case.
-% In V1.6 this has been completely rewritten to:
-%
-% 1. no longer have problems when the user begins an environment
-% within the paragraph that uses \IEEEPARstart.
-% 2. auto-detect and use the current font family
-% 3. revise handling of the space at the end of the first word so that
-% interword glue will now work as normal.
-% 4. produce correctly aligned edges for the (two) indented lines.
-%
-% We generalize things via control macros - playing with these is fun too.
-%
-% V1.7 added more control macros to make it easy for IEEEtrantools.sty users
-% to change the font style.
-%
-% the number of lines that are indented to clear it
-% may need to increase if using decenders
-\def\@IEEEPARstartDROPLINES{2}
-% minimum number of lines left on a page to allow a \@IEEEPARstart
-% Does not take into consideration rubber shrink, so it tends to
-% be overly cautious
-\def\@IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES{2}
-% V1.7 the height of the drop cap is adjusted to match the height of this text
-% in the current font (when \IEEEPARstart is called).
-\def\@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT{T}
-% the depth the letter is lowered below the baseline
-% the height (and size) of the letter is determined by the sum
-% of this value and the height of the \@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current
-% font. It is a good idea to set this value in terms of the baselineskip
-% so that it can respond to changes therein.
-\def\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH{1.1\baselineskip}
-% V1.7 the font the drop cap will be rendered in,
-% can take zero or one argument.
-\def\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\bfseries}
-% V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify
-% the drop cap letter, can take zero or one argument.
-\def\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{\MakeUppercase}
-% V1.7 the font that will be used to render the rest of the word,
-% can take zero or one argument.
-\def\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\relax}
-% V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify
-% the rest of the word, can take zero or one argument.
-\def\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\MakeUppercase}
-% This is the horizontal separation distance from the drop letter to the main text.
-% Lengths that depend on the font (e.g., ex, em, etc.) will be referenced
-% to the font that is active when \IEEEPARstart is called.
-\def\@IEEEPARstartSEP{0.15em}
-% V1.7 horizontal offset applied to the left of the drop cap.
-\def\@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET{0em}
-% V1.7 Italic correction command applied at the end of the drop cap.
-\def\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT{\/}
-
-% V1.7 compoc uses nonbold drop cap and small caps word style
-\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
-\def\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\mdseries}
-\def\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\scshape}
-\def\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\relax}
-\fi
-
-% definition of \IEEEPARstart
-% THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING AREA, DO NOT ALLOW SPACES WITHIN THESE LINES
-%
-% The token \@IEEEPARstartfont will be globally defined after the first use
-% of \IEEEPARstart and will be a font command which creates the big letter
-% The first argument is the first letter of the first word and the second
-% argument is the rest of the first word(s).
-\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{\par{%
-% if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start
-% on a new one
-\@IEEEtranneedspace{\@IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES\baselineskip}{\relax}%
-% V1.7 move this up here in case user uses \textbf for \@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE
-% which uses command \leavevmode which causes an unwanted \indent to be issued
-\noindent
-% calculate the desired height of the big letter
-% it extends from the top of \@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current font
-% down to \@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH below the current baseline
-\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT}%
-\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}%
-% extract the name of the current font in bold
-% and place it in \@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME
-\def\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD##1 ##2\relax{##1}%
-{\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\selectfont\edef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE{\fontname\font\space}%
-\xdef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME{\expandafter\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE\relax}}}%
-% define a font based on this name with a point size equal to the desired
-% height of the drop letter
-\font\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax%
-% save this value as a counter (integer) value (sp points)
-\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%
-% now get the height of the actual letter produced by this font size
-\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1}}%
-% If something bogus happens like the first argument is empty or the
-% current font is strange, do not allow a zero height.
-\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0pt\relax%
-\typeout{** WARNING: IEEEPARstart drop letter has zero height! (line \the\inputlineno)}%
-\typeout{ Forcing the drop letter font size to 10pt.}%
-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=10pt%
-\fi%
-% and store it as a counter
-\@IEEEtrantmpcountB=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB%
-% Since a font size doesn't exactly correspond to the height of the capital
-% letters in that font, the actual height of the letter, \@IEEEtrantmpcountB,
-% will be less than that desired, \@IEEEtrantmpcountA
-% we need to raise the font size, \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
-% by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA / \@IEEEtrantmpcountB
-% But, TeX doesn't have floating point division, so we have to use integer
-% division. Hence the use of the counters.
-% We need to reduce the denominator so that the loss of the remainder will
-% have minimal affect on the accuracy of the result
-\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by 200%
-\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountB%
-% Then reequalize things when we use TeX's ability to multiply by
-% floating point values
-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0.005\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%
-\multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA%
-% \@IEEEPARstartfont is globaly set to the calculated font of the big letter
-% We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to to create the
-% big letter.
-\global\font\@IEEEPARstartfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB%
-% Now set \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA to the width of the big letter
-% We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to set the
-% hanging indent
-\settowidth{\global\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartfont
-\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}}}%
-% end of the isolated calculation environment
-% add in the extra clearance we want
-\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEPARstartSEP\relax%
-% add in the optional offset
-\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET\relax%
-% V1.7 don't allow negative offsets to produce negative hanging indents
-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
-\ifnum\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB < 0 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 0pt\fi
-% \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA has the width of the big letter plus the
-% separation space and \@IEEEPARstartfont is the font we need to use
-% Now, we make the letter and issue the hanging indent command
-% The letter is placed in a box of zero width and height so that other
-% text won't be displaced by it.
-\hangindent\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\hangafter=-\@IEEEPARstartDROPLINES%
-\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}%
-\raisebox{-\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}[0pt][0pt]{\hspace{\@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET}%
-\@IEEEPARstartfont\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}%
-\hspace{\@IEEEPARstartSEP}}}%
-{\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\selectfont#2}}}}
-
-
-
-
-
-
-% determines if the space remaining on a given page is equal to or greater
-% than the specified space of argument one
-% if not, execute argument two (only if the remaining space is greater than zero)
-% and issue a \newpage
-%
-% example: \@IEEEtranneedspace{2in}{\vfill}
-%
-% Does not take into consideration rubber shrinkage, so it tends to
-% be overly cautious
-% Based on an example posted by Donald Arseneau
-% Note this macro uses \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB internally for calculations,
-% so DO NOT PASS \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB to this routine
-% if you need a dimen register, import with \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA instead
-\def\@IEEEtranneedspace#1#2{\penalty-100\begingroup%shield temp variable
-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\pagegoal\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB-\pagetotal% space left
-\ifdim #1>\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax% not enough space left
-\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB>\z@\relax #2\fi%
-\newpage%
-\fi\endgroup}
-
-
-
-% IEEEbiography ENVIRONMENT
-% Allows user to enter biography leaving place for picture (adapts to font size)
-% As of V1.5, a new optional argument allows you to have a real graphic!
-% V1.5 and later also fixes the "colliding biographies" which could happen when a
-% biography's text was shorter than the space for the photo.
-% MDS 7/2001
-% V1.6 prevent multiple biographies from making multiple TOC entries
-\newif\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade
-\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadetrue
-
-% biography counter so hyperref can jump directly to the biographies
-% and not just the previous section
-\newcounter{IEEEbiography}
-\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{0}
-
-% photo area size
-\def\@IEEEBIOphotowidth{1.0in} % width of the biography photo area
-\def\@IEEEBIOphotodepth{1.25in} % depth (height) of the biography photo area
-% area cleared for photo
-\def\@IEEEBIOhangwidth{1.14in} % width cleared for the biography photo area
-\def\@IEEEBIOhangdepth{1.25in} % depth cleared for the biography photo area
- % actual depth will be a multiple of
- % \baselineskip, rounded up
-\def\@IEEEBIOskipN{4\baselineskip}% nominal value of the vskip above the biography
-
-\newenvironment{IEEEbiography}[2][]{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\footnotesize%
-\unitlength 1in\parskip=0pt\par\parindent 1em\interlinepenalty500%
-% we need enough space to support the hanging indent
-% the nominal value of the spacer
-% and one extra line for good measure
-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth%
-\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEBIOskipN%
-\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by 1\baselineskip%
-% if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start
-% with a new one
-\@IEEEtranneedspace{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\relax}%
-% nominal spacer can strech, not shrink use 1fil so user can out stretch with \vfill
-\vskip \@IEEEBIOskipN plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip%
-% the default box for where the photo goes
-\def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox{%
-\begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}\centering PLACE\\ PHOTO\\ HERE \end{minipage}}}}%
-%
-% detect if the optional argument was supplied, this requires the
-% \@ifmtarg command as defined in the appendix section above
-% and if so, override the default box with what they want
-\@ifmtarg{#1}{\relax}{\def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{\mbox{\begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}%
-\centering%
-#1%
-\end{minipage}}}}% end if optional argument supplied
-% Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before
-\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade%
-% link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump
-% to the biography, not the previous section
-\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}%
-\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%
-\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}%
-\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse%
-\fi%
-% one more biography
-\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%
-% Make an entry for this name into the table of contents
-\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#2}%
-% V1.6 properly handle if a new paragraph should occur while the
-% hanging indent is still active. Do this by redefining \par so
-% that it will not start a new paragraph. (But it will appear to the
-% user as if it did.) Also, strip any leading pars, newlines, or spaces.
-\let\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD=\par% save the original \par command
-\edef\par{\hfil\break\indent}% the new \par will not be a "real" \par
-\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}% get height of biography box
-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth%
-\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% countA has the hang depth
-\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \baselineskip% calculates lines needed to produce the hang depth
-\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by 1% ensure we overestimate
-% set the hanging indent
-\hangindent\@IEEEBIOhangwidth%
-\hangafter-\@IEEEtrantmpcountA%
-% reference the top of the photo area to the top of a capital T
-\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\mbox{T}}%
-% set the photo box, give it zero width and height so as not to disturb anything
-\noindent\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEBIOhangwidth}\raisebox{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}[0pt][0pt]{%
-\raisebox{-\@IEEEBIOphotodepth}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}}}%
-% now place the author name and begin the bio text
-\noindent\textbf{#2\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\let\par=\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD\par%
-% 7/2001 V1.5 detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo area
-% and pad the unused area - preventing a collision from the next biography entry
-% MDS
-\ifnum \prevgraf <\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax% detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo
- \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -\prevgraf% calculate how many lines we need to pad
- \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax% we compensate for the fact that we indented an extra line
- \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselineskip% calculate the length of the padding
- \multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA%
- \noindent\rule{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}% insert an invisible support strut
-\fi%
-\par\normalfont}
-
-
-
-% V1.6
-% added biography without a photo environment
-\newenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{%
-% Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before
-\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade%
-% link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump
-% to the biography, not the previous section
-\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}%
-\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%
-\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}%
-\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse%
-\fi%
-% one more biography
-\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%
-% Make an entry for this name into the table of contents
-\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#1}%
-\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\footnotesize\interlinepenalty500%
-\vskip 4\baselineskip plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip%
-\parskip=0pt\par%
-\noindent\textbf{#1\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\par\normalfont}
-
-
-% provide the user with some old font commands
-% got this from article.cls
-\DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm}
-\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf}
-\DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt}
-\DeclareOldFontCommand{\bf}{\normalfont\bfseries}{\mathbf}
-\DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit}
-\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sl}{\normalfont\slshape}{\@nomath\sl}
-\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\@nomath\sc}
-\DeclareRobustCommand*\cal{\@fontswitch\relax\mathcal}
-\DeclareRobustCommand*\mit{\@fontswitch\relax\mathnormal}
-
-
-% SPECIAL PAPER NOTICE COMMANDS
-%
-% holds the special notice text
-\def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{\relax}
-
-% for special papers, like invited papers, the user can do:
-% \IEEEspecialpapernotice{(Invited Paper)} before \maketitle
-\def\IEEEspecialpapernotice#1{\ifCLASSOPTIONconference%
-\def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{{\sublargesize\textit{#1}\vspace*{1em}}}%
-\else%
-\def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{{\\*[1.5ex]\sublargesize\textit{#1}}\vspace*{-2ex}}%
-\fi}
-
-
-
-
-% PUBLISHER ID COMMANDS
-% to insert a publisher's ID footer
-% V1.6 \IEEEpubid has been changed so that the change in page size and style
-% occurs in \maketitle. \IEEEpubid must now be issued prior to \maketitle
-% use \IEEEpubidadjcol as before - in the second column of the title page
-% These changes allow \maketitle to take the reduced page height into
-% consideration when dynamically setting the space between the author
-% names and the maintext.
-%
-% the amount the main text is pulled up to make room for the
-% publisher's ID footer
-% IEEE uses about 1.3\baselineskip for journals,
-% dynamic title spacing will clean up the fraction
-\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{1.3\baselineskip}
-\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote
-% for technotes it must be an integer of baselineskip as there can be no
-% dynamic title spacing for two column mode technotes (the title is in the
-% in first column) and we should maintain an integer number of lines in the
-% second column
-% There are some examples (such as older issues of "Transactions on
-% Information Theory") in which IEEE really pulls the text off the ID for
-% technotes - about 0.55in (or 4\baselineskip). We'll use 2\baselineskip
-% and call it even.
-\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{2\baselineskip}
-\fi
-
-% V1.7 compsoc does not use a pullup
-\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
-\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{0pt}
-\fi
-
-% holds the ID text
-\def\@IEEEpubid{\relax}
-
-% flag so \maketitle can tell if \IEEEpubid was called
-\newif\if@IEEEusingpubid
-\global\@IEEEusingpubidfalse
-% issue this command in the page to have the ID at the bottom
-% V1.6 use before \maketitle
-\def\IEEEpubid#1{\def\@IEEEpubid{#1}\global\@IEEEusingpubidtrue}
-
-
-% command which will pull up (shorten) the column it is executed in
-% to make room for the publisher ID. Place in the second column of
-% the title page when using \IEEEpubid
-% Is smart enough not to do anything when in single column text or
-% if the user hasn't called \IEEEpubid
-% currently needed in for the second column of a page with the
-% publisher ID. If not needed in future releases, please provide this
-% command and define it as \relax for backward compatibility
-% v1.6b do not allow command to operate if the peer review option has been
-% selected because \IEEEpubidadjcol will not be on the cover page.
-% V1.7 do nothing if compsoc
-\def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else
-\if@twocolumn\if@IEEEusingpubid\enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}\fi\fi\fi\fi}
-
-% Special thanks to Peter Wilson, Daniel Luecking, and the other
-% gurus at comp.text.tex, for helping me to understand how best to
-% implement the IEEEpubid command in LaTeX.
-
-
-
-%% Lockout some commands under various conditions
-
-% general purpose bit bucket
-\newsavebox{\@IEEEtranrubishbin}
-
-% flags to prevent multiple warning messages
-\newif\if@IEEEWARNthanks
-\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart
-\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography
-\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto
-\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid
-\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol
-\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership
-\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext
-\@IEEEWARNthankstrue
-\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstarttrue
-\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographytrue
-\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophototrue
-\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidtrue
-\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcoltrue
-\@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershiptrue
-\@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletexttrue
-
-
-%% Lockout some commands when in various modes, but allow them to be restored if needed
-%%
-% save commands which might be locked out
-% so that the user can later restore them if needed
-\let\@IEEESAVECMDthanks\thanks
-\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart\IEEEPARstart
-\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography\IEEEbiography
-\let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography\endIEEEbiography
-\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto\IEEEbiographynophoto
-\let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto\endIEEEbiographynophoto
-\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid\IEEEpubid
-\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol\IEEEpubidadjcol
-\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership\IEEEmembership
-\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext\IEEEaftertitletext
-
-
-% disable \IEEEPARstart when in draft mode
-% This may have originally been done because the pre-V1.6 drop letter
-% algorithm had problems with a non-unity baselinestretch
-% At any rate, it seems too formal to have a drop letter in a draft
-% paper.
-\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
-\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** ATTENTION: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart
- is disabled in draft mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse}
-\fi
-% and for technotes
-\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote
-\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart
- is locked out for technotes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse}
-\fi
-
-
-% lockout unneeded commands when in conference mode
-\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
-% when locked out, \thanks, \IEEEbiography, \IEEEbiographynophoto, \IEEEpubid,
-% \IEEEmembership and \IEEEaftertitletext will all swallow their given text.
-% \IEEEPARstart will output a normal character instead
-% warn the user about these commands only once to prevent the console screen
-% from filling up with redundant messages
-\def\thanks#1{\if@IEEEWARNthanks\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\thanks
- is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNthanksfalse}
-\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart
- is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse}
-
-
-% LaTeX treats environments and commands with optional arguments differently.
-% the actual ("internal") command is stored as \\commandname
-% (accessed via \csname\string\commandname\endcsname )
-% the "external" command \commandname is a macro with code to determine
-% whether or not the optional argument is presented and to provide the
-% default if it is absent. So, in order to save and restore such a command
-% we would have to save and restore \\commandname as well. But, if LaTeX
-% ever changes the way it names the internal names, the trick would break.
-% Instead let us just define a new environment so that the internal
-% name can be left undisturbed.
-\newenvironment{@IEEEbogusbiography}[2][]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiography
- is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographyfalse%
-\setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax}
-% and make biography point to our bogus biography
-\let\IEEEbiography=\@IEEEbogusbiography
-\let\endIEEEbiography=\end@IEEEbogusbiography
-
-\renewenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiographynophoto
- is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophotofalse%
-\setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax}
-
-\def\IEEEpubid#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubid
- is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidfalse}
-\def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubidadjcol
- is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcolfalse}
-\def\IEEEmembership#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEmembership
- is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershipfalse}
-\def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEaftertitletext
- is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletextfalse}
-\fi
-
-
-% provide a way to restore the commands that are locked out
-\def\IEEEoverridecommandlockouts{%
-\typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding command lockouts (line \the\inputlineno).}%
-\let\thanks\@IEEESAVECMDthanks%
-\let\IEEEPARstart\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart%
-\let\IEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography%
-\let\endIEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography%
-\let\IEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto%
-\let\endIEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto%
-\let\IEEEpubid\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid%
-\let\IEEEpubidadjcol\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol%
-\let\IEEEmembership\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership%
-\let\IEEEaftertitletext\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext}
-
-
-
-% need a backslash character for typeout output
-{\catcode`\|=0 \catcode`\\=12
-|xdef|@IEEEbackslash{\}}
-
-
-% hook to allow easy disabling of all legacy warnings
-\def\@IEEElegacywarn#1#2{\typeout{** ATTENTION: \@IEEEbackslash #1 is deprecated (line \the\inputlineno).
-Use \@IEEEbackslash #2 instead.}}
-
-
-% provide for legacy commands
-\def\authorblockA{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockA}{IEEEauthorblockA}\IEEEauthorblockA}
-\def\authorblockN{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockN}{IEEEauthorblockN}\IEEEauthorblockN}
-\def\authorrefmark{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorrefmark}{IEEEauthorrefmark}\IEEEauthorrefmark}
-\def\PARstart{\@IEEElegacywarn{PARstart}{IEEEPARstart}\IEEEPARstart}
-\def\pubid{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubid}{IEEEpubid}\IEEEpubid}
-\def\pubidadjcol{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubidadjcol}{IEEEpubidadjcol}\IEEEpubidadjcol}
-\def\QED{\@IEEElegacywarn{QED}{IEEEQED}\IEEEQED}
-\def\QEDclosed{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDclosed}{IEEEQEDclosed}\IEEEQEDclosed}
-\def\QEDopen{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDopen}{IEEEQEDopen}\IEEEQEDopen}
-\def\specialpapernotice{\@IEEElegacywarn{specialpapernotice}{IEEEspecialpapernotice}\IEEEspecialpapernotice}
-
-
-
-% provide for legacy environments
-\def\biography{\@IEEElegacywarn{biography}{IEEEbiography}\IEEEbiography}
-\def\biographynophoto{\@IEEElegacywarn{biographynophoto}{IEEEbiographynophoto}\IEEEbiographynophoto}
-\def\keywords{\@IEEElegacywarn{keywords}{IEEEkeywords}\IEEEkeywords}
-\def\endbiography{\endIEEEbiography}
-\def\endbiographynophoto{\endIEEEbiographynophoto}
-\def\endkeywords{\endIEEEkeywords}
-
-
-% provide for legacy IED commands/lengths when possible
-\let\labelindent\IEEElabelindent
-\def\calcleftmargin{\@IEEElegacywarn{calcleftmargin}{IEEEcalcleftmargin}\IEEEcalcleftmargin}
-\def\setlabelwidth{\@IEEElegacywarn{setlabelwidth}{IEEEsetlabelwidth}\IEEEsetlabelwidth}
-\def\usemathlabelsep{\@IEEElegacywarn{usemathlabelsep}{IEEEusemathlabelsep}\IEEEusemathlabelsep}
-\def\iedlabeljustifyc{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyc}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyc}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc}
-\def\iedlabeljustifyl{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyl}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyl}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl}
-\def\iedlabeljustifyr{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyr}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyr}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr}
-
-
-
-% let \proof use the IEEEtran version even after amsthm is loaded
-% \proof is now deprecated in favor of \IEEEproof
-\AtBeginDocument{\def\proof{\@IEEElegacywarn{proof}{IEEEproof}\IEEEproof}\def\endproof{\endIEEEproof}}
-
-% V1.7 \overrideIEEEmargins is no longer supported.
-\def\overrideIEEEmargins{%
-\typeout{** WARNING: \string\overrideIEEEmargins \space no longer supported (line \the\inputlineno).}%
-\typeout{** Use the \string\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin, \string\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin \space controls instead.}}
-
-
-\endinput
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of IEEEtran.cls %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% That's all folks!
-
+++ /dev/null
-%%\r
-%% IEEEtranS.bst\r
-%% BibTeX Bibliography Style file\r
-%% Sorting version of IEEEtran.bst\r
-%% *** Not for normal IEEE work ***\r
-%% Version 1.12 (2007/01/11)\r
-%% \r
-%% Copyright (c) 2003-2007 Michael Shell\r
-%% \r
-%% Original starting code base and algorithms obtained from the output of\r
-%% Patrick W. Daly's makebst package as well as from prior versions of\r
-%% IEEE BibTeX styles:\r
-%% \r
-%% 1. Howard Trickey and Oren Patashnik's ieeetr.bst (1985/1988)\r
-%% 2. Silvano Balemi and Richard H. Roy's IEEEbib.bst (1993)\r
-%% \r
-%% Added sorting code is from plain.bst.\r
-%% \r
-%% Support sites:\r
-%% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/\r
-%% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/\r
-%% and/or\r
-%% http://www.ieee.org/\r
-%% \r
-%% For use with BibTeX version 0.99a or later\r
-%%\r
-%% This is a numerical citation style.\r
-%% \r
-%%*************************************************************************\r
-%% Legal Notice:\r
-%% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or\r
-%% implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or\r
-%% FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE! \r
-%% User assumes all risk.\r
-%% In no event shall IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for\r
-%% any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental,\r
-%% consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse\r
-%% of any information contained here.\r
-%%\r
-%% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not\r
-%% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE.\r
-%%\r
-%% This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL)\r
-%% ( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used,\r
-%% distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included\r
-%% in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released\r
-%% 2003/12/01 or later.\r
-%% Retain all contribution notices and credits.\r
-%% ** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including **\r
-%% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. **\r
-%%\r
-%% File list of work: IEEEabrv.bib, IEEEfull.bib, IEEEexample.bib,\r
-%% IEEEtran.bst, IEEEtranS.bst, IEEEtranSA.bst,\r
-%% IEEEtranN.bst, IEEEtranSN.bst, IEEEtran_bst_HOWTO.pdf\r
-%%*************************************************************************\r
-%\r
-%\r
-% Changelog:\r
-%\r
-% 1.10 (2002/09/27) Initial release\r
-%\r
-% 1.11 (2003/04/02)\r
-% 1. Fixed bug with URLs containing underscores when using url.sty. Thanks\r
-% to Ming Kin Lai for reporting this.\r
-%\r
-% 1.12 (2007/01/11)\r
-% 1. Fixed bug with unwanted comma before "et al." when an entry contained\r
-% more than two author names. Thanks to Pallav Gupta for reporting this.\r
-% 2. Fixed bug with anomalous closing quote in tech reports that have a\r
-% type, but without a number or address. Thanks to Mehrdad Mirreza for\r
-% reporting this.\r
-% 3. Use braces in \providecommand in begin.bib to better support\r
-% latex2html. TeX style length assignments OK with recent versions\r
-% of latex2html - 1.71 (2002/2/1) or later is strongly recommended.\r
-% Use of the language field still causes trouble with latex2html.\r
-% Thanks to Federico Beffa for reporting this.\r
-% 4. Added IEEEtran.bst ID and version comment string to .bbl output.\r
-% 5. Provide a \BIBdecl hook that allows the user to execute commands\r
-% just prior to the first entry.\r
-% 6. Use default urlstyle (is using url.sty) of "same" rather than rm to\r
-% better work with a wider variety of bibliography styles.\r
-% 7. Changed month abbreviations from Sept., July and June to Sep., Jul.,\r
-% and Jun., respectively, as IEEE now does. Thanks to Moritz Borgmann\r
-% for reporting this.\r
-% 8. Control entry types should not be considered when calculating longest\r
-% label width.\r
-% 9. Added alias www for electronic/online.\r
-% 10. Added CTLname_url_prefix control entry type.\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% DEFAULTS FOR THE CONTROLS OF THE BST STYLE %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-% These are the defaults for the user adjustable controls. The values used\r
-% here can be overridden by the user via IEEEtranBSTCTL entry type.\r
-\r
-% NOTE: The recommended LaTeX command to invoke a control entry type is:\r
-% \r
-%\makeatletter\r
-%\def\bstctlcite{\@ifnextchar[{\@bstctlcite}{\@bstctlcite[@auxout]}}\r
-%\def\@bstctlcite[#1]#2{\@bsphack\r
-% \@for\@citeb:=#2\do{%\r
-% \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%\r
-% \if@filesw\immediate\write\csname #1\endcsname{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi}%\r
-% \@esphack}\r
-%\makeatother\r
-%\r
-% It is called at the start of the document, before the first \cite, like:\r
-% \bstctlcite{IEEEexample:BSTcontrol}\r
-%\r
-% IEEEtran.cls V1.6 and later does provide this command.\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% #0 turns off the display of the number for articles.\r
-% #1 enables\r
-FUNCTION {default.is.use.number.for.article} { #1 }\r
-\r
-\r
-% #0 turns off the display of the paper and type fields in @inproceedings.\r
-% #1 enables\r
-FUNCTION {default.is.use.paper} { #1 }\r
-\r
-\r
-% #0 turns off the forced use of "et al."\r
-% #1 enables\r
-FUNCTION {default.is.forced.et.al} { #0 }\r
-\r
-% The maximum number of names that can be present beyond which an "et al."\r
-% usage is forced. Be sure that num.names.shown.with.forced.et.al (below)\r
-% is not greater than this value!\r
-% Note: There are many instances of references in IEEE journals which have\r
-% a very large number of authors as well as instances in which "et al." is\r
-% used profusely.\r
-FUNCTION {default.max.num.names.before.forced.et.al} { #10 }\r
-\r
-% The number of names that will be shown with a forced "et al.".\r
-% Must be less than or equal to max.num.names.before.forced.et.al\r
-FUNCTION {default.num.names.shown.with.forced.et.al} { #1 }\r
-\r
-\r
-% #0 turns off the alternate interword spacing for entries with URLs.\r
-% #1 enables\r
-FUNCTION {default.is.use.alt.interword.spacing} { #1 }\r
-\r
-% If alternate interword spacing for entries with URLs is enabled, this is\r
-% the interword spacing stretch factor that will be used. For example, the\r
-% default "4" here means that the interword spacing in entries with URLs can\r
-% stretch to four times normal. Does not have to be an integer. Note that\r
-% the value specified here can be overridden by the user in their LaTeX\r
-% code via a command such as: \r
-% "\providecommand\BIBentryALTinterwordstretchfactor{1.5}" in addition to\r
-% that via the IEEEtranBSTCTL entry type.\r
-FUNCTION {default.ALTinterwordstretchfactor} { "4" }\r
-\r
-\r
-% #0 turns off the "dashification" of repeated (i.e., identical to those\r
-% of the previous entry) names. IEEE normally does this.\r
-% #1 enables\r
-FUNCTION {default.is.dash.repeated.names} { #1 }\r
-\r
-\r
-% The default name format control string.\r
-FUNCTION {default.name.format.string}{ "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" }\r
-\r
-\r
-% The default LaTeX font command for the names.\r
-FUNCTION {default.name.latex.cmd}{ "" }\r
-\r
-\r
-% The default URL prefix.\r
-FUNCTION {default.name.url.prefix}{ "[Online]. Available:" }\r
-\r
-\r
-% Other controls that cannot be accessed via IEEEtranBSTCTL entry type.\r
-\r
-% #0 turns off the terminal startup banner/completed message so as to\r
-% operate more quietly.\r
-% #1 enables\r
-FUNCTION {is.print.banners.to.terminal} { #1 }\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% FILE VERSION AND BANNER %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-FUNCTION{bst.file.version} { "1.12" }\r
-FUNCTION{bst.file.date} { "2007/01/11" }\r
-FUNCTION{bst.file.website} { "http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/bibtex/" }\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {banner.message}\r
-{ is.print.banners.to.terminal\r
- { "-- IEEEtranS.bst version" " " * bst.file.version *\r
- " (" * bst.file.date * ") " * "by Michael Shell." *\r
- top$\r
- "-- " bst.file.website *\r
- top$\r
- "-- See the " quote$ * "IEEEtran_bst_HOWTO.pdf" * quote$ * " manual for usage information." *\r
- top$\r
- "** Sorting version - not for normal IEEE work."\r
- top$\r
- }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {completed.message}\r
-{ is.print.banners.to.terminal\r
- { ""\r
- top$\r
- "Done."\r
- top$\r
- }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% STRING CONSTANTS %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.and}{ "and" }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.etal}{ "et~al." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.editors}{ "eds." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.editor}{ "ed." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.edition}{ "ed." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.volume}{ "vol." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.of}{ "of" }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.number}{ "no." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.in}{ "in" }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.pages}{ "pp." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.page}{ "p." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}{ "ch." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.paper}{ "paper" }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.part}{ "pt." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.patent}{ "Patent" }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.patentUS}{ "U.S." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.revision}{ "Rev." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.series}{ "ser." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.standard}{ "Std." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}{ "Tech. Rep." }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}{ "Master's thesis" }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}{ "Ph.D. dissertation" }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.st}{ "st" }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.nd}{ "nd" }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.rd}{ "rd" }\r
-FUNCTION {bbl.th}{ "th" }\r
-\r
-\r
-% This is the LaTeX spacer that is used when a larger than normal space\r
-% is called for (such as just before the address:publisher).\r
-FUNCTION {large.space} { "\hskip 1em plus 0.5em minus 0.4em\relax " }\r
-\r
-% The LaTeX code for dashes that are used to represent repeated names.\r
-% Note: Some older IEEE journals used something like\r
-% "\rule{0.275in}{0.5pt}\," which is fairly thick and runs right along\r
-% the baseline. However, IEEE now uses a thinner, above baseline,\r
-% six dash long sequence.\r
-FUNCTION {repeated.name.dashes} { "------" }\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% PREDEFINED STRING MACROS %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-MACRO {jan} {"Jan."}\r
-MACRO {feb} {"Feb."}\r
-MACRO {mar} {"Mar."}\r
-MACRO {apr} {"Apr."}\r
-MACRO {may} {"May"}\r
-MACRO {jun} {"Jun."}\r
-MACRO {jul} {"Jul."}\r
-MACRO {aug} {"Aug."}\r
-MACRO {sep} {"Sep."}\r
-MACRO {oct} {"Oct."}\r
-MACRO {nov} {"Nov."}\r
-MACRO {dec} {"Dec."}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% ENTRY FIELDS %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-ENTRY\r
- { address\r
- assignee\r
- author\r
- booktitle\r
- chapter\r
- day\r
- dayfiled\r
- edition\r
- editor\r
- howpublished\r
- institution\r
- intype\r
- journal\r
- key\r
- language\r
- month\r
- monthfiled\r
- nationality\r
- note\r
- number\r
- organization\r
- pages\r
- paper\r
- publisher\r
- school\r
- series\r
- revision\r
- title\r
- type\r
- url\r
- volume\r
- year\r
- yearfiled\r
- CTLuse_article_number\r
- CTLuse_paper\r
- CTLuse_forced_etal\r
- CTLmax_names_forced_etal\r
- CTLnames_show_etal\r
- CTLuse_alt_spacing\r
- CTLalt_stretch_factor\r
- CTLdash_repeated_names\r
- CTLname_format_string\r
- CTLname_latex_cmd\r
- CTLname_url_prefix\r
- }\r
- {}\r
- { label }\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% INTEGER VARIABLES %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-INTEGERS { prev.status.punct this.status.punct punct.std\r
- punct.no punct.comma punct.period \r
- prev.status.space this.status.space space.std\r
- space.no space.normal space.large\r
- prev.status.quote this.status.quote quote.std\r
- quote.no quote.close\r
- prev.status.nline this.status.nline nline.std\r
- nline.no nline.newblock \r
- status.cap cap.std\r
- cap.no cap.yes}\r
-\r
-INTEGERS { longest.label.width multiresult nameptr namesleft number.label numnames }\r
-\r
-INTEGERS { is.use.number.for.article\r
- is.use.paper\r
- is.forced.et.al\r
- max.num.names.before.forced.et.al\r
- num.names.shown.with.forced.et.al\r
- is.use.alt.interword.spacing\r
- is.dash.repeated.names}\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% STRING VARIABLES %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-STRINGS { bibinfo\r
- longest.label\r
- oldname\r
- s\r
- t\r
- ALTinterwordstretchfactor\r
- name.format.string\r
- name.latex.cmd\r
- name.url.prefix}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% LOW LEVEL FUNCTIONS %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {initialize.controls}\r
-{ default.is.use.number.for.article 'is.use.number.for.article :=\r
- default.is.use.paper 'is.use.paper :=\r
- default.is.forced.et.al 'is.forced.et.al :=\r
- default.max.num.names.before.forced.et.al 'max.num.names.before.forced.et.al :=\r
- default.num.names.shown.with.forced.et.al 'num.names.shown.with.forced.et.al :=\r
- default.is.use.alt.interword.spacing 'is.use.alt.interword.spacing :=\r
- default.is.dash.repeated.names 'is.dash.repeated.names :=\r
- default.ALTinterwordstretchfactor 'ALTinterwordstretchfactor :=\r
- default.name.format.string 'name.format.string :=\r
- default.name.latex.cmd 'name.latex.cmd :=\r
- default.name.url.prefix 'name.url.prefix :=\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-% This IEEEtran.bst features a very powerful and flexible mechanism for\r
-% controlling the capitalization, punctuation, spacing, quotation, and\r
-% newlines of the formatted entry fields. (Note: IEEEtran.bst does not need\r
-% or use the newline/newblock feature, but it has been implemented for\r
-% possible future use.) The output states of IEEEtran.bst consist of\r
-% multiple independent attributes and, as such, can be thought of as being\r
-% vectors, rather than the simple scalar values ("before.all", \r
-% "mid.sentence", etc.) used in most other .bst files.\r
-% \r
-% The more flexible and complex design used here was motivated in part by\r
-% IEEE's rather unusual bibliography style. For example, IEEE ends the\r
-% previous field item with a period and large space prior to the publisher\r
-% address; the @electronic entry types use periods as inter-item punctuation\r
-% rather than the commas used by the other entry types; and URLs are never\r
-% followed by periods even though they are the last item in the entry.\r
-% Although it is possible to accommodate these features with the conventional\r
-% output state system, the seemingly endless exceptions make for convoluted,\r
-% unreliable and difficult to maintain code.\r
-%\r
-% IEEEtran.bst's output state system can be easily understood via a simple\r
-% illustration of two most recently formatted entry fields (on the stack):\r
-%\r
-% CURRENT_ITEM\r
-% "PREVIOUS_ITEM\r
-%\r
-% which, in this example, is to eventually appear in the bibliography as:\r
-% \r
-% "PREVIOUS_ITEM," CURRENT_ITEM\r
-%\r
-% It is the job of the output routine to take the previous item off of the\r
-% stack (while leaving the current item at the top of the stack), apply its\r
-% trailing punctuation (including closing quote marks) and spacing, and then\r
-% to write the result to BibTeX's output buffer:\r
-% \r
-% "PREVIOUS_ITEM," \r
-% \r
-% Punctuation (and spacing) between items is often determined by both of the\r
-% items rather than just the first one. The presence of quotation marks\r
-% further complicates the situation because, in standard English, trailing\r
-% punctuation marks are supposed to be contained within the quotes.\r
-% \r
-% IEEEtran.bst maintains two output state (aka "status") vectors which\r
-% correspond to the previous and current (aka "this") items. Each vector\r
-% consists of several independent attributes which track punctuation,\r
-% spacing, quotation, and newlines. Capitalization status is handled by a\r
-% separate scalar because the format routines, not the output routine,\r
-% handle capitalization and, therefore, there is no need to maintain the\r
-% capitalization attribute for both the "previous" and "this" items.\r
-% \r
-% When a format routine adds a new item, it copies the current output status\r
-% vector to the previous output status vector and (usually) resets the\r
-% current (this) output status vector to a "standard status" vector. Using a\r
-% "standard status" vector in this way allows us to redefine what we mean by\r
-% "standard status" at the start of each entry handler and reuse the same\r
-% format routines under the various inter-item separation schemes. For\r
-% example, the standard status vector for the @book entry type may use\r
-% commas for item separators, while the @electronic type may use periods,\r
-% yet both entry handlers exploit many of the exact same format routines.\r
-% \r
-% Because format routines have write access to the output status vector of\r
-% the previous item, they can override the punctuation choices of the\r
-% previous format routine! Therefore, it becomes trivial to implement rules\r
-% such as "Always use a period and a large space before the publisher." By\r
-% pushing the generation of the closing quote mark to the output routine, we\r
-% avoid all the problems caused by having to close a quote before having all\r
-% the information required to determine what the punctuation should be.\r
-%\r
-% The IEEEtran.bst output state system can easily be expanded if needed.\r
-% For instance, it is easy to add a "space.tie" attribute value if the\r
-% bibliography rules mandate that two items have to be joined with an\r
-% unbreakable space. \r
-\r
-FUNCTION {initialize.status.constants}\r
-{ #0 'punct.no :=\r
- #1 'punct.comma :=\r
- #2 'punct.period :=\r
- #0 'space.no := \r
- #1 'space.normal :=\r
- #2 'space.large :=\r
- #0 'quote.no :=\r
- #1 'quote.close :=\r
- #0 'cap.no :=\r
- #1 'cap.yes :=\r
- #0 'nline.no :=\r
- #1 'nline.newblock :=\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {std.status.using.comma}\r
-{ punct.comma 'punct.std :=\r
- space.normal 'space.std :=\r
- quote.no 'quote.std :=\r
- nline.no 'nline.std :=\r
- cap.no 'cap.std :=\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {std.status.using.period}\r
-{ punct.period 'punct.std :=\r
- space.normal 'space.std :=\r
- quote.no 'quote.std :=\r
- nline.no 'nline.std :=\r
- cap.yes 'cap.std :=\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {initialize.prev.this.status}\r
-{ punct.no 'prev.status.punct :=\r
- space.no 'prev.status.space :=\r
- quote.no 'prev.status.quote :=\r
- nline.no 'prev.status.nline :=\r
- punct.no 'this.status.punct :=\r
- space.no 'this.status.space :=\r
- quote.no 'this.status.quote :=\r
- nline.no 'this.status.nline :=\r
- cap.yes 'status.cap :=\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {this.status.std}\r
-{ punct.std 'this.status.punct :=\r
- space.std 'this.status.space :=\r
- quote.std 'this.status.quote :=\r
- nline.std 'this.status.nline :=\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {cap.status.std}{ cap.std 'status.cap := }\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {this.to.prev.status}\r
-{ this.status.punct 'prev.status.punct :=\r
- this.status.space 'prev.status.space :=\r
- this.status.quote 'prev.status.quote :=\r
- this.status.nline 'prev.status.nline :=\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {not}\r
-{ { #0 }\r
- { #1 }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {and}\r
-{ { skip$ }\r
- { pop$ #0 }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {or}\r
-{ { pop$ #1 }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-% convert the strings "yes" or "no" to #1 or #0 respectively\r
-FUNCTION {yes.no.to.int}\r
-{ "l" change.case$ duplicate$\r
- "yes" =\r
- { pop$ #1 }\r
- { duplicate$ "no" =\r
- { pop$ #0 }\r
- { "unknown boolean " quote$ * swap$ * quote$ *\r
- " in " * cite$ * warning$\r
- #0\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-% pushes true if the single char string on the stack is in the\r
-% range of "0" to "9"\r
-FUNCTION {is.num}\r
-{ chr.to.int$\r
- duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ < not\r
- swap$ "9" chr.to.int$ > not and\r
-}\r
-\r
-% multiplies the integer on the stack by a factor of 10\r
-FUNCTION {bump.int.mag}\r
-{ #0 'multiresult :=\r
- { duplicate$ #0 > }\r
- { #1 -\r
- multiresult #10 +\r
- 'multiresult :=\r
- }\r
- while$\r
-pop$\r
-multiresult\r
-}\r
-\r
-% converts a single character string on the stack to an integer\r
-FUNCTION {char.to.integer}\r
-{ duplicate$ \r
- is.num\r
- { chr.to.int$ "0" chr.to.int$ - }\r
- {"noninteger character " quote$ * swap$ * quote$ *\r
- " in integer field of " * cite$ * warning$\r
- #0\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-% converts a string on the stack to an integer\r
-FUNCTION {string.to.integer}\r
-{ duplicate$ text.length$ 'namesleft :=\r
- #1 'nameptr :=\r
- #0 'numnames :=\r
- { nameptr namesleft > not }\r
- { duplicate$ nameptr #1 substring$\r
- char.to.integer numnames bump.int.mag +\r
- 'numnames :=\r
- nameptr #1 +\r
- 'nameptr :=\r
- }\r
- while$\r
-pop$\r
-numnames\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% The output routines write out the *next* to the top (previous) item on the\r
-% stack, adding punctuation and such as needed. Since IEEEtran.bst maintains\r
-% the output status for the top two items on the stack, these output\r
-% routines have to consider the previous output status (which corresponds to\r
-% the item that is being output). Full independent control of punctuation,\r
-% closing quote marks, spacing, and newblock is provided.\r
-% \r
-% "output.nonnull" does not check for the presence of a previous empty\r
-% item.\r
-% \r
-% "output" does check for the presence of a previous empty item and will\r
-% remove an empty item rather than outputing it.\r
-% \r
-% "output.warn" is like "output", but will issue a warning if it detects\r
-% an empty item.\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {output.nonnull}\r
-{ swap$\r
- prev.status.punct punct.comma =\r
- { "," * }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- prev.status.punct punct.period =\r
- { add.period$ }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$ \r
- prev.status.quote quote.close =\r
- { "''" * }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- prev.status.space space.normal =\r
- { " " * }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- prev.status.space space.large =\r
- { large.space * }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- write$\r
- prev.status.nline nline.newblock =\r
- { newline$ "\newblock " write$ }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {output}\r
-{ duplicate$ empty$\r
- 'pop$\r
- 'output.nonnull\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {output.warn}\r
-{ 't :=\r
- duplicate$ empty$\r
- { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ }\r
- 'output.nonnull\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-% "fin.entry" is the output routine that handles the last item of the entry\r
-% (which will be on the top of the stack when "fin.entry" is called).\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {fin.entry}\r
-{ this.status.punct punct.no =\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { add.period$ }\r
- if$\r
- this.status.quote quote.close =\r
- { "''" * }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
-write$\r
-newline$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {is.last.char.not.punct}\r
-{ duplicate$\r
- "}" * add.period$\r
- #-1 #1 substring$ "." =\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {is.multiple.pages}\r
-{ 't :=\r
- #0 'multiresult :=\r
- { multiresult not\r
- t empty$ not\r
- and\r
- }\r
- { t #1 #1 substring$\r
- duplicate$ "-" =\r
- swap$ duplicate$ "," =\r
- swap$ "+" =\r
- or or\r
- { #1 'multiresult := }\r
- { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- while$\r
- multiresult\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {capitalize}{ "u" change.case$ "t" change.case$ }\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {emphasize}\r
-{ duplicate$ empty$\r
- { pop$ "" }\r
- { "\emph{" swap$ * "}" * }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {do.name.latex.cmd}\r
-{ name.latex.cmd\r
- empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { name.latex.cmd "{" * swap$ * "}" * }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-% IEEEtran.bst uses its own \BIBforeignlanguage command which directly\r
-% invokes the TeX hyphenation patterns without the need of the Babel\r
-% package. Babel does a lot more than switch hyphenation patterns and\r
-% its loading can cause unintended effects in many class files (such as\r
-% IEEEtran.cls).\r
-FUNCTION {select.language}\r
-{ duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$\r
- { language empty$ 'skip$\r
- { "\BIBforeignlanguage{" language * "}{" * swap$ * "}" * }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {tie.or.space.prefix}\r
-{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 <\r
- { "~" }\r
- { " " }\r
- if$\r
- swap$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {get.bbl.editor}\r
-{ editor num.names$ #1 > 'bbl.editors 'bbl.editor if$ }\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {space.word}{ " " swap$ * " " * }\r
-\r
-\r
-% Field Conditioners, Converters, Checkers and External Interfaces\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {empty.field.to.null.string}\r
-{ duplicate$ empty$\r
- { pop$ "" }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {either.or.check}\r
-{ empty$\r
- { pop$ }\r
- { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {empty.entry.warn}\r
-{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$\r
- month empty$ year empty$ note empty$ url empty$\r
- and and and and and and\r
- { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ }\r
- 'skip$\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-% The bibinfo system provides a way for the electronic parsing/acquisition\r
-% of a bibliography's contents as is done by ReVTeX. For example, a field\r
-% could be entered into the bibliography as:\r
-% \bibinfo{volume}{2}\r
-% Only the "2" would show up in the document, but the LaTeX \bibinfo command\r
-% could do additional things with the information. IEEEtran.bst does provide\r
-% a \bibinfo command via "\providecommand{\bibinfo}[2]{#2}". However, it is\r
-% currently not used as the bogus bibinfo functions defined here output the\r
-% entry values directly without the \bibinfo wrapper. The bibinfo functions\r
-% themselves (and the calls to them) are retained for possible future use.\r
-% \r
-% bibinfo.check avoids acting on missing fields while bibinfo.warn will\r
-% issue a warning message if a missing field is detected. Prior to calling\r
-% the bibinfo functions, the user should push the field value and then its\r
-% name string, in that order.\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {bibinfo.check}\r
-{ swap$ duplicate$ missing$\r
- { pop$ pop$ "" }\r
- { duplicate$ empty$\r
- { swap$ pop$ }\r
- { swap$ pop$ }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {bibinfo.warn}\r
-{ swap$ duplicate$ missing$\r
- { swap$ "missing " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ pop$ "" }\r
- { duplicate$ empty$\r
- { swap$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ }\r
- { swap$ pop$ }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-% IEEE separates large numbers with more than 4 digits into groups of\r
-% three. IEEE uses a small space to separate these number groups. \r
-% Typical applications include patent and page numbers.\r
-\r
-% number of consecutive digits required to trigger the group separation.\r
-FUNCTION {large.number.trigger}{ #5 }\r
-\r
-% For numbers longer than the trigger, this is the blocksize of the groups.\r
-% The blocksize must be less than the trigger threshold, and 2 * blocksize\r
-% must be greater than the trigger threshold (can't do more than one\r
-% separation on the initial trigger).\r
-FUNCTION {large.number.blocksize}{ #3 }\r
-\r
-% What is actually inserted between the number groups.\r
-FUNCTION {large.number.separator}{ "\," }\r
-\r
-% So as to save on integer variables by reusing existing ones, numnames\r
-% holds the current number of consecutive digits read and nameptr holds\r
-% the number that will trigger an inserted space.\r
-FUNCTION {large.number.separate}\r
-{ 't :=\r
- ""\r
- #0 'numnames :=\r
- large.number.trigger 'nameptr :=\r
- { t empty$ not }\r
- { t #-1 #1 substring$ is.num\r
- { numnames #1 + 'numnames := }\r
- { #0 'numnames := \r
- large.number.trigger 'nameptr :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- t #-1 #1 substring$ swap$ *\r
- t #-2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=\r
- numnames nameptr =\r
- { duplicate$ #1 nameptr large.number.blocksize - substring$ swap$\r
- nameptr large.number.blocksize - #1 + global.max$ substring$\r
- large.number.separator swap$ * *\r
- nameptr large.number.blocksize - 'numnames :=\r
- large.number.blocksize #1 + 'nameptr :=\r
- }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- while$\r
-}\r
-\r
-% Converts all single dashes "-" to double dashes "--".\r
-FUNCTION {n.dashify}\r
-{ large.number.separate\r
- 't :=\r
- ""\r
- { t empty$ not }\r
- { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" =\r
- { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not\r
- { "--" *\r
- t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=\r
- }\r
- { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = }\r
- { "-" *\r
- t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=\r
- }\r
- while$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { t #1 #1 substring$ *\r
- t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- while$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-% This function detects entries with names that are identical to that of\r
-% the previous entry and replaces the repeated names with dashes (if the\r
-% "is.dash.repeated.names" user control is nonzero).\r
-FUNCTION {name.or.dash}\r
-{ 's :=\r
- oldname empty$\r
- { s 'oldname := s }\r
- { s oldname =\r
- { is.dash.repeated.names\r
- { repeated.name.dashes }\r
- { s 'oldname := s }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { s 'oldname := s }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-% Converts the number string on the top of the stack to\r
-% "numerical ordinal form" (e.g., "7" to "7th"). There is\r
-% no artificial limit to the upper bound of the numbers as the\r
-% least significant digit always determines the ordinal form.\r
-FUNCTION {num.to.ordinal}\r
-{ duplicate$ #-1 #1 substring$ "1" =\r
- { bbl.st * }\r
- { duplicate$ #-1 #1 substring$ "2" =\r
- { bbl.nd * }\r
- { duplicate$ #-1 #1 substring$ "3" =\r
- { bbl.rd * }\r
- { bbl.th * }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-% If the string on the top of the stack begins with a number,\r
-% (e.g., 11th) then replace the string with the leading number\r
-% it contains. Otherwise retain the string as-is. s holds the\r
-% extracted number, t holds the part of the string that remains\r
-% to be scanned.\r
-FUNCTION {extract.num}\r
-{ duplicate$ 't :=\r
- "" 's :=\r
- { t empty$ not }\r
- { t #1 #1 substring$\r
- t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=\r
- duplicate$ is.num\r
- { s swap$ * 's := }\r
- { pop$ "" 't := }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- while$\r
- s empty$\r
- 'skip$\r
- { pop$ s }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-% Converts the word number string on the top of the stack to\r
-% Arabic string form. Will be successful up to "tenth".\r
-FUNCTION {word.to.num}\r
-{ duplicate$ "l" change.case$ 's :=\r
- s "first" =\r
- { pop$ "1" }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- s "second" =\r
- { pop$ "2" }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- s "third" =\r
- { pop$ "3" }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- s "fourth" =\r
- { pop$ "4" }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- s "fifth" =\r
- { pop$ "5" }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- s "sixth" =\r
- { pop$ "6" }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- s "seventh" =\r
- { pop$ "7" }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- s "eighth" =\r
- { pop$ "8" }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- s "ninth" =\r
- { pop$ "9" }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- s "tenth" =\r
- { pop$ "10" }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-% Converts the string on the top of the stack to numerical\r
-% ordinal (e.g., "11th") form.\r
-FUNCTION {convert.edition}\r
-{ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { duplicate$ #1 #1 substring$ is.num\r
- { extract.num\r
- num.to.ordinal\r
- }\r
- { word.to.num\r
- duplicate$ #1 #1 substring$ is.num\r
- { num.to.ordinal }\r
- { "edition ordinal word " quote$ * edition * quote$ *\r
- " may be too high (or improper) for conversion" * " in " * cite$ * warning$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% LATEX BIBLIOGRAPHY CODE %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {start.entry}\r
-{ newline$\r
- "\bibitem{" write$\r
- cite$ write$\r
- "}" write$\r
- newline$\r
- ""\r
- initialize.prev.this.status\r
-}\r
-\r
-% Here we write out all the LaTeX code that we will need. The most involved\r
-% code sequences are those that control the alternate interword spacing and\r
-% foreign language hyphenation patterns. The heavy use of \providecommand\r
-% gives users a way to override the defaults. Special thanks to Javier Bezos,\r
-% Johannes Braams, Robin Fairbairns, Heiko Oberdiek, Donald Arseneau and all\r
-% the other gurus on comp.text.tex for their help and advice on the topic of\r
-% \selectlanguage, Babel and BibTeX.\r
-FUNCTION {begin.bib}\r
-{ "% Generated by IEEEtranS.bst, version: " bst.file.version * " (" * bst.file.date * ")" *\r
- write$ newline$\r
- preamble$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { preamble$ write$ newline$ }\r
- if$\r
- "\begin{thebibliography}{" longest.label * "}" *\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\providecommand{\url}[1]{#1}"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\csname url@samestyle\endcsname"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\providecommand{\newblock}{\relax}"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\providecommand{\bibinfo}[2]{#2}"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\providecommand{\BIBentrySTDinterwordspacing}{\spaceskip=0pt\relax}"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\providecommand{\BIBentryALTinterwordstretchfactor}{"\r
- ALTinterwordstretchfactor * "}" *\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\providecommand{\BIBentryALTinterwordspacing}{\spaceskip=\fontdimen2\font plus "\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\BIBentryALTinterwordstretchfactor\fontdimen3\font minus \fontdimen4\font\relax}"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\providecommand{\BIBforeignlanguage}[2]{{%"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1\endcsname\relax"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\typeout{** WARNING: IEEEtranS.bst: No hyphenation pattern has been}%"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\typeout{** loaded for the language `#1'. Using the pattern for}%"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\typeout{** the default language instead.}%"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\else"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\language=\csname l@#1\endcsname"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\fi"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "#2}}"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\providecommand{\BIBdecl}{\relax}"\r
- write$ newline$\r
- "\BIBdecl"\r
- write$ newline$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {end.bib}\r
-{ newline$ "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ }\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {if.url.alt.interword.spacing}\r
-{ is.use.alt.interword.spacing \r
- {url empty$ 'skip$ {"\BIBentryALTinterwordspacing" write$ newline$} if$}\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {if.url.std.interword.spacing}\r
-{ is.use.alt.interword.spacing \r
- {url empty$ 'skip$ {"\BIBentrySTDinterwordspacing" write$ newline$} if$}\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% LONGEST LABEL PASS %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label}\r
-{ "" 'longest.label :=\r
- #1 'number.label :=\r
- #0 'longest.label.width :=\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {longest.label.pass}\r
-{ type$ "ieeetranbstctl" =\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { number.label int.to.str$ 'label :=\r
- number.label #1 + 'number.label :=\r
- label width$ longest.label.width >\r
- { label 'longest.label :=\r
- label width$ 'longest.label.width :=\r
- }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% FORMAT HANDLERS %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-%% Lower Level Formats (used by higher level formats)\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.address.org.or.pub.date}\r
-{ 't :=\r
- ""\r
- year empty$\r
- { "empty year in " cite$ * warning$ }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- address empty$ t empty$ and\r
- year empty$ and month empty$ and\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.status.std\r
- address "address" bibinfo.check *\r
- t empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { punct.period 'prev.status.punct :=\r
- space.large 'prev.status.space :=\r
- address empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { ": " * }\r
- if$\r
- t *\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- year empty$ month empty$ and\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { t empty$ address empty$ and\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { ", " * }\r
- if$\r
- month empty$\r
- { year empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { year "year" bibinfo.check * }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { month "month" bibinfo.check *\r
- year empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { " " * year "year" bibinfo.check * }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.names}\r
-{ 'bibinfo :=\r
- duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {\r
- this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- 's :=\r
- "" 't :=\r
- #1 'nameptr :=\r
- s num.names$ 'numnames :=\r
- numnames 'namesleft :=\r
- { namesleft #0 > }\r
- { s nameptr\r
- name.format.string\r
- format.name$\r
- bibinfo bibinfo.check\r
- 't :=\r
- nameptr #1 >\r
- { nameptr num.names.shown.with.forced.et.al #1 + =\r
- numnames max.num.names.before.forced.et.al >\r
- is.forced.et.al and and\r
- { "others" 't :=\r
- #1 'namesleft :=\r
- }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- namesleft #1 >\r
- { ", " * t do.name.latex.cmd * }\r
- { s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =\r
- { 't := }\r
- { pop$ }\r
- if$\r
- t "others" =\r
- { " " * bbl.etal emphasize * }\r
- { numnames #2 >\r
- { "," * }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- bbl.and\r
- space.word * t do.name.latex.cmd *\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { t do.name.latex.cmd }\r
- if$\r
- nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=\r
- namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=\r
- }\r
- while$\r
- cap.status.std\r
- } if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% Higher Level Formats\r
-\r
-%% addresses/locations\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.address}\r
-{ address duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% author/editor names\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.authors}{ author "author" format.names }\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.editors}\r
-{ editor "editor" format.names duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { ", " *\r
- get.bbl.editor\r
- capitalize\r
- *\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% date\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.date}\r
-{\r
- month "month" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$\r
- year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$\r
- { swap$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.status.std\r
- "there's a month but no year in " cite$ * warning$ }\r
- if$\r
- *\r
- }\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.status.std\r
- swap$ 'skip$\r
- {\r
- swap$\r
- " " * swap$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- *\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.date.electronic}\r
-{ month "month" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$\r
- year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$\r
- { swap$ \r
- { pop$ }\r
- { "there's a month but no year in " cite$ * warning$\r
- pop$ ")" * "(" swap$ *\r
- this.to.prev.status\r
- punct.no 'this.status.punct :=\r
- space.normal 'this.status.space :=\r
- quote.no 'this.status.quote :=\r
- cap.yes 'status.cap :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { swap$ \r
- { swap$ pop$ ")" * "(" swap$ * }\r
- { "(" swap$ * ", " * swap$ * ")" * }\r
- if$\r
- this.to.prev.status\r
- punct.no 'this.status.punct :=\r
- space.normal 'this.status.space :=\r
- quote.no 'this.status.quote :=\r
- cap.yes 'status.cap :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% edition/title\r
-\r
-% Note: IEEE considers the edition to be closely associated with\r
-% the title of a book. So, in IEEEtran.bst the edition is normally handled \r
-% within the formatting of the title. The format.edition function is \r
-% retained here for possible future use.\r
-FUNCTION {format.edition}\r
-{ edition duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- convert.edition\r
- status.cap\r
- { "t" }\r
- { "l" }\r
- if$ change.case$\r
- "edition" bibinfo.check\r
- "~" * bbl.edition *\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-% This is used to format the booktitle of a conference proceedings.\r
-% Here we use the "intype" field to provide the user a way to \r
-% override the word "in" (e.g., with things like "presented at")\r
-% Use of intype stops the emphasis of the booktitle to indicate that\r
-% we no longer mean the written conference proceedings, but the\r
-% conference itself.\r
-FUNCTION {format.in.booktitle}\r
-{ booktitle "booktitle" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- select.language\r
- intype missing$\r
- { emphasize\r
- bbl.in " " *\r
- }\r
- { intype " " * }\r
- if$\r
- swap$ *\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-% This is used to format the booktitle of collection.\r
-% Here the "intype" field is not supported, but "edition" is.\r
-FUNCTION {format.in.booktitle.edition}\r
-{ booktitle "booktitle" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- select.language\r
- emphasize\r
- edition empty$ 'skip$\r
- { ", " *\r
- edition\r
- convert.edition\r
- "l" change.case$\r
- * "~" * bbl.edition *\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- bbl.in " " * swap$ *\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.article.title}\r
-{ title duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- "t" change.case$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- "title" bibinfo.check\r
- duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { quote.close 'this.status.quote :=\r
- is.last.char.not.punct\r
- { punct.std 'this.status.punct := }\r
- { punct.no 'this.status.punct := }\r
- if$\r
- select.language\r
- "``" swap$ *\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.article.title.electronic}\r
-{ title duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.status.std\r
- "t" change.case$ \r
- }\r
- if$\r
- "title" bibinfo.check\r
- duplicate$ empty$ \r
- { skip$ } \r
- { select.language }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.book.title.edition}\r
-{ title "title" bibinfo.check\r
- duplicate$ empty$\r
- { "empty title in " cite$ * warning$ }\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- select.language\r
- emphasize\r
- edition empty$ 'skip$\r
- { ", " *\r
- edition\r
- convert.edition\r
- status.cap\r
- { "t" }\r
- { "l" }\r
- if$\r
- change.case$\r
- * "~" * bbl.edition *\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.book.title}\r
-{ title "title" bibinfo.check\r
- duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.status.std\r
- select.language\r
- emphasize\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% journal\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.journal}\r
-{ journal duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.status.std\r
- select.language\r
- emphasize\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% how published\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.howpublished}\r
-{ howpublished duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% institutions/organization/publishers/school\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.institution}\r
-{ institution duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.organization}\r
-{ organization duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.address.publisher.date}\r
-{ publisher "publisher" bibinfo.warn format.address.org.or.pub.date }\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.address.publisher.date.nowarn}\r
-{ publisher "publisher" bibinfo.check format.address.org.or.pub.date }\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.address.organization.date}\r
-{ organization "organization" bibinfo.check format.address.org.or.pub.date }\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.school}\r
-{ school duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% volume/number/series/chapter/pages\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.volume}\r
-{ volume empty.field.to.null.string\r
- duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- bbl.volume \r
- status.cap\r
- { capitalize }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- swap$ tie.or.space.prefix\r
- "volume" bibinfo.check\r
- * *\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.number}\r
-{ number empty.field.to.null.string\r
- duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- status.cap\r
- { bbl.number capitalize }\r
- { bbl.number }\r
- if$\r
- swap$ tie.or.space.prefix\r
- "number" bibinfo.check\r
- * *\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.number.if.use.for.article}\r
-{ is.use.number.for.article \r
- { format.number }\r
- { "" }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-% IEEE does not seem to tie the series so closely with the volume\r
-% and number as is done in other bibliography styles. Instead the\r
-% series is treated somewhat like an extension of the title.\r
-FUNCTION {format.series}\r
-{ series empty$ \r
- { "" }\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- bbl.series " " *\r
- series "series" bibinfo.check *\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.chapter}\r
-{ chapter empty$\r
- { "" }\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- type empty$\r
- { bbl.chapter }\r
- { type "l" change.case$\r
- "type" bibinfo.check\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- chapter tie.or.space.prefix\r
- "chapter" bibinfo.check\r
- * *\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-% The intended use of format.paper is for paper numbers of inproceedings.\r
-% The paper type can be overridden via the type field.\r
-% We allow the type to be displayed even if the paper number is absent\r
-% for things like "postdeadline paper"\r
-FUNCTION {format.paper}\r
-{ is.use.paper\r
- { paper empty$\r
- { type empty$\r
- { "" }\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- type "type" bibinfo.check\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- type empty$\r
- { bbl.paper }\r
- { type "type" bibinfo.check }\r
- if$\r
- " " * paper\r
- "paper" bibinfo.check\r
- *\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { "" } \r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.pages}\r
-{ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- duplicate$ is.multiple.pages\r
- {\r
- bbl.pages swap$\r
- n.dashify\r
- }\r
- {\r
- bbl.page swap$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- tie.or.space.prefix\r
- "pages" bibinfo.check\r
- * *\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% technical report number\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.tech.report.number}\r
-{ number "number" bibinfo.check\r
- this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.status.std\r
- type duplicate$ empty$\r
- { pop$ \r
- bbl.techrep\r
- }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- "type" bibinfo.check \r
- swap$ duplicate$ empty$\r
- { pop$ }\r
- { tie.or.space.prefix * * }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% note\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.note}\r
-{ note empty$\r
- { "" }\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- punct.period 'this.status.punct :=\r
- note #1 #1 substring$\r
- duplicate$ "{" =\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { status.cap\r
- { "u" }\r
- { "l" }\r
- if$\r
- change.case$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- note #2 global.max$ substring$ * "note" bibinfo.check\r
- cap.yes 'status.cap :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% patent\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.patent.date}\r
-{ this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- year empty$\r
- { monthfiled duplicate$ empty$\r
- { "monthfiled" bibinfo.check pop$ "" }\r
- { "monthfiled" bibinfo.check }\r
- if$\r
- dayfiled duplicate$ empty$\r
- { "dayfiled" bibinfo.check pop$ "" * }\r
- { "dayfiled" bibinfo.check \r
- monthfiled empty$ \r
- { "dayfiled without a monthfiled in " cite$ * warning$\r
- * \r
- }\r
- { " " swap$ * * }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- yearfiled empty$\r
- { "no year or yearfiled in " cite$ * warning$ }\r
- { yearfiled "yearfiled" bibinfo.check \r
- swap$\r
- duplicate$ empty$\r
- { pop$ }\r
- { ", " * swap$ * }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { month duplicate$ empty$\r
- { "month" bibinfo.check pop$ "" }\r
- { "month" bibinfo.check }\r
- if$\r
- day duplicate$ empty$\r
- { "day" bibinfo.check pop$ "" * }\r
- { "day" bibinfo.check \r
- month empty$ \r
- { "day without a month in " cite$ * warning$\r
- * \r
- }\r
- { " " swap$ * * }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- year "year" bibinfo.check \r
- swap$\r
- duplicate$ empty$\r
- { pop$ }\r
- { ", " * swap$ * }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- cap.status.std\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.patent.nationality.type.number}\r
-{ this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- nationality duplicate$ empty$\r
- { "nationality" bibinfo.warn pop$ "" }\r
- { "nationality" bibinfo.check\r
- duplicate$ "l" change.case$ "united states" =\r
- { pop$ bbl.patentUS }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- " " *\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- type empty$\r
- { bbl.patent "type" bibinfo.check }\r
- { type "type" bibinfo.check }\r
- if$ \r
- *\r
- number duplicate$ empty$\r
- { "number" bibinfo.warn pop$ }\r
- { "number" bibinfo.check\r
- large.number.separate\r
- swap$ " " * swap$ *\r
- }\r
- if$ \r
- cap.status.std\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% standard\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.organization.institution.standard.type.number}\r
-{ this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- organization duplicate$ empty$\r
- { pop$ \r
- institution duplicate$ empty$\r
- { "institution" bibinfo.warn }\r
- { "institution" bibinfo.warn " " * }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { "organization" bibinfo.warn " " * }\r
- if$\r
- type empty$\r
- { bbl.standard "type" bibinfo.check }\r
- { type "type" bibinfo.check }\r
- if$ \r
- *\r
- number duplicate$ empty$\r
- { "number" bibinfo.check pop$ }\r
- { "number" bibinfo.check\r
- large.number.separate\r
- swap$ " " * swap$ *\r
- }\r
- if$ \r
- cap.status.std\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.revision}\r
-{ revision empty$\r
- { "" }\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- bbl.revision\r
- revision tie.or.space.prefix\r
- "revision" bibinfo.check\r
- * *\r
- cap.status.std\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-%% thesis\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.master.thesis.type}\r
-{ this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- type empty$\r
- {\r
- bbl.mthesis\r
- }\r
- { \r
- type "type" bibinfo.check\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-cap.status.std\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.phd.thesis.type}\r
-{ this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- type empty$\r
- {\r
- bbl.phdthesis\r
- }\r
- { \r
- type "type" bibinfo.check\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-cap.status.std\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%% URL\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {format.url}\r
-{ url empty$\r
- { "" }\r
- { this.to.prev.status\r
- this.status.std\r
- cap.yes 'status.cap :=\r
- name.url.prefix " " *\r
- "\url{" * url * "}" *\r
- punct.no 'this.status.punct :=\r
- punct.period 'prev.status.punct :=\r
- space.normal 'this.status.space :=\r
- space.normal 'prev.status.space :=\r
- quote.no 'this.status.quote :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% ENTRY HANDLERS %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-\r
-% Note: In many journals, IEEE (or the authors) tend not to show the number\r
-% for articles, so the display of the number is controlled here by the\r
-% switch "is.use.number.for.article"\r
-FUNCTION {article}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors "author" output.warn\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.article.title "title" output.warn\r
- format.journal "journal" bibinfo.check "journal" output.warn\r
- format.volume output\r
- format.number.if.use.for.article output\r
- format.pages output\r
- format.date "year" output.warn\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {book}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- author empty$\r
- { format.editors "author and editor" output.warn }\r
- { format.authors output.nonnull }\r
- if$\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.book.title.edition output\r
- format.series output\r
- author empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { format.editors output }\r
- if$\r
- format.address.publisher.date output\r
- format.volume output\r
- format.number output\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {booklet}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors output\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.article.title "title" output.warn\r
- format.howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.organization "organization" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.address "address" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.date output\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {electronic}\r
-{ std.status.using.period\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors output\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.date.electronic output\r
- format.article.title.electronic output\r
- format.howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.organization "organization" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.address "address" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- empty.entry.warn\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {inbook}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- author empty$\r
- { format.editors "author and editor" output.warn }\r
- { format.authors output.nonnull }\r
- if$\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.book.title.edition output\r
- format.series output\r
- format.address.publisher.date output\r
- format.volume output\r
- format.number output\r
- format.chapter output\r
- format.pages output\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {incollection}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors "author" output.warn\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.article.title "title" output.warn\r
- format.in.booktitle.edition "booktitle" output.warn\r
- format.series output\r
- format.editors output\r
- format.address.publisher.date.nowarn output\r
- format.volume output\r
- format.number output\r
- format.chapter output\r
- format.pages output\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {inproceedings}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors "author" output.warn\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.article.title "title" output.warn\r
- format.in.booktitle "booktitle" output.warn\r
- format.series output\r
- format.editors output\r
- format.volume output\r
- format.number output\r
- publisher empty$\r
- { format.address.organization.date output }\r
- { format.organization "organization" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.address.publisher.date output\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- format.paper output\r
- format.pages output\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {manual}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors output\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.book.title.edition "title" output.warn\r
- format.howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output \r
- format.organization "organization" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.address "address" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.date output\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {mastersthesis}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors "author" output.warn\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.article.title "title" output.warn\r
- format.master.thesis.type output.nonnull\r
- format.school "school" bibinfo.warn output\r
- format.address "address" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.date "year" output.warn\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {misc}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors output\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.article.title output\r
- format.howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output \r
- format.organization "organization" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.address "address" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.pages output\r
- format.date output\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- empty.entry.warn\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {patent}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors output\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.article.title output\r
- format.patent.nationality.type.number output\r
- format.patent.date output\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- empty.entry.warn\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {periodical}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.editors output\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.book.title "title" output.warn\r
- format.series output\r
- format.volume output\r
- format.number output\r
- format.organization "organization" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.date "year" output.warn\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {phdthesis}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors "author" output.warn\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.article.title "title" output.warn\r
- format.phd.thesis.type output.nonnull\r
- format.school "school" bibinfo.warn output\r
- format.address "address" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.date "year" output.warn\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {proceedings}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.editors output\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.book.title "title" output.warn\r
- format.series output\r
- format.volume output\r
- format.number output\r
- publisher empty$\r
- { format.address.organization.date output }\r
- { format.organization "organization" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.address.publisher.date output\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {standard}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors output\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.book.title "title" output.warn\r
- format.howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output \r
- format.organization.institution.standard.type.number output\r
- format.revision output\r
- format.date output\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {techreport}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors "author" output.warn\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.article.title "title" output.warn\r
- format.howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output \r
- format.institution "institution" bibinfo.warn output\r
- format.address "address" bibinfo.check output\r
- format.tech.report.number output.nonnull\r
- format.date "year" output.warn\r
- format.note output\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {unpublished}\r
-{ std.status.using.comma\r
- start.entry\r
- if.url.alt.interword.spacing\r
- format.authors "author" output.warn\r
- name.or.dash\r
- format.article.title "title" output.warn\r
- format.date output\r
- format.note "note" output.warn\r
- format.url output\r
- fin.entry\r
- if.url.std.interword.spacing\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-% The special entry type which provides the user interface to the\r
-% BST controls\r
-FUNCTION {IEEEtranBSTCTL}\r
-{ is.print.banners.to.terminal\r
- { "** IEEEtran BST control entry " quote$ * cite$ * quote$ * " detected." *\r
- top$\r
- }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- CTLuse_article_number\r
- empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { CTLuse_article_number\r
- yes.no.to.int\r
- 'is.use.number.for.article :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- CTLuse_paper\r
- empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { CTLuse_paper\r
- yes.no.to.int\r
- 'is.use.paper :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- CTLuse_forced_etal\r
- empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { CTLuse_forced_etal\r
- yes.no.to.int\r
- 'is.forced.et.al :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- CTLmax_names_forced_etal\r
- empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { CTLmax_names_forced_etal\r
- string.to.integer\r
- 'max.num.names.before.forced.et.al :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- CTLnames_show_etal\r
- empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { CTLnames_show_etal\r
- string.to.integer\r
- 'num.names.shown.with.forced.et.al :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- CTLuse_alt_spacing\r
- empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { CTLuse_alt_spacing\r
- yes.no.to.int\r
- 'is.use.alt.interword.spacing :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- CTLalt_stretch_factor\r
- empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { CTLalt_stretch_factor\r
- 'ALTinterwordstretchfactor :=\r
- "\renewcommand{\BIBentryALTinterwordstretchfactor}{"\r
- ALTinterwordstretchfactor * "}" *\r
- write$ newline$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- CTLdash_repeated_names\r
- empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { CTLdash_repeated_names\r
- yes.no.to.int\r
- 'is.dash.repeated.names :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- CTLname_format_string\r
- empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { CTLname_format_string\r
- 'name.format.string :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- CTLname_latex_cmd\r
- empty$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { CTLname_latex_cmd\r
- 'name.latex.cmd :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- CTLname_url_prefix\r
- missing$\r
- { skip$ }\r
- { CTLname_url_prefix\r
- 'name.url.prefix :=\r
- }\r
- if$\r
-\r
-\r
- num.names.shown.with.forced.et.al max.num.names.before.forced.et.al >\r
- { "CTLnames_show_etal cannot be greater than CTLmax_names_forced_etal in " cite$ * warning$ \r
- max.num.names.before.forced.et.al 'num.names.shown.with.forced.et.al :=\r
- }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% ENTRY ALIASES %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-FUNCTION {conference}{inproceedings}\r
-FUNCTION {online}{electronic}\r
-FUNCTION {internet}{electronic}\r
-FUNCTION {webpage}{electronic}\r
-FUNCTION {www}{electronic}\r
-FUNCTION {default.type}{misc}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-%% MAIN PROGRAM %%\r
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
-\r
-READ\r
-\r
-EXECUTE {initialize.controls}\r
-EXECUTE {initialize.status.constants}\r
-EXECUTE {banner.message}\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-% BEGIN sort code based on that of plain.bst\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {sortify}\r
-{ purify$\r
- "l" change.case$\r
-}\r
-\r
-INTEGERS { len }\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {chop.word}\r
-{ 's :=\r
- 'len :=\r
- s #1 len substring$ =\r
- { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ }\r
- { s }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {sort.format.names}\r
-{ 's :=\r
- #1 'nameptr :=\r
- ""\r
- s num.names$ 'numnames :=\r
- numnames 'namesleft :=\r
- { namesleft #0 > }\r
- { nameptr #1 >\r
- { " " * }\r
- { skip$ }\r
- if$\r
- s nameptr "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}{ ff{ }}{ jj{ }}" format.name$ 't :=\r
- nameptr numnames = t "others" = and\r
- { "et al" * }\r
- { t sortify * }\r
- if$\r
- nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=\r
- namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=\r
- }\r
- while$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {sort.format.title}\r
-{ 't :=\r
- "A " #2\r
- "An " #3\r
- "The " #4 t chop.word\r
- chop.word\r
- chop.word\r
- sortify\r
- #1 global.max$ substring$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {author.sort}\r
-{ author empty$\r
- { key empty$\r
- { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$ "" }\r
- { key sortify }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { author sort.format.names }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {author.editor.sort}\r
-{ author empty$\r
- { editor empty$\r
- { key empty$\r
- { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$ "" }\r
- { key sortify }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { editor sort.format.names }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { author sort.format.names }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {author.organization.sort}\r
-{ author empty$\r
- { organization empty$\r
- { key empty$\r
- { "to sort, need author, organization, or key in " cite$ * warning$ "" }\r
- { key sortify }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { "The " #4 organization chop.word sortify }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { author sort.format.names }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {editor.organization.sort}\r
-{ editor empty$\r
- { organization empty$\r
- { key empty$\r
- { "to sort, need editor, organization, or key in " cite$ * warning$ "" }\r
- { key sortify }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { "The " #4 organization chop.word sortify }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { editor sort.format.names }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {author.organization.institution.sort}\r
-{ author empty$\r
- { organization empty$\r
- { institution empty$\r
- { key empty$\r
- { "to sort, need author, organization, institution or key in " cite$ * warning$ "" }\r
- { key sortify }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { "The " #4 institution chop.word sortify }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { "The " #4 organization chop.word sortify }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { author sort.format.names }\r
- if$\r
-}\r
-\r
-\r
-FUNCTION {presort}\r
-{ type$ "ieeetranbstctl" =\r
- { key empty$\r
- { "_" }\r
- { key sortify }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { type$ "book" =\r
- type$ "inbook" =\r
- or \r
- { author.editor.sort }\r
- { type$ "proceedings" =\r
- type$ "periodical" =\r
- or\r
- { editor.organization.sort }\r
- { type$ "manual" =\r
- type$ "electronic" =\r
- type$ "misc" =\r
- or or\r
- { author.organization.sort }\r
- { type$ "standard" =\r
- { author.organization.institution.sort }\r
- { author.sort }\r
- if$ \r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- " "\r
- *\r
- type$ "patent" =\r
- { year empty$\r
- { yearfiled }\r
- { year }\r
- if$\r
- }\r
- { year }\r
- if$\r
- empty.field.to.null.string sortify\r
- *\r
- " "\r
- *\r
- title empty.field.to.null.string\r
- sort.format.title\r
- *\r
- }\r
- if$\r
- #1 entry.max$ substring$\r
- 'sort.key$ :=\r
-}\r
-\r
-ITERATE {presort}\r
-\r
-SORT\r
-\r
-% END sort code based on that of plain.bst\r
-\r
-\r
-\r
-EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label}\r
-ITERATE {longest.label.pass}\r
-\r
-EXECUTE {begin.bib}\r
-ITERATE {call.type$}\r
-EXECUTE {end.bib}\r
-\r
-EXECUTE{completed.message}\r
-\r
-\r
-%% That's all folks, mds.\r
-\documentclass[conference]{IEEEtran}
+\documentclass{sig-alt-release2}
\usepackage[noadjust]{cite}
-
-\usepackage[dvips]{graphicx}
-
\usepackage{url}
-\usepackage[cmex10]{amsmath}
-\interdisplaylinepenalty=2500
-\usepackage{threeparttable}
-\usepackage{multirow}
+\hyphenation{dis-tri-bu-ted}
\begin{document}
+\conferenceinfo{SIGCOMM'08,} {August 17--22, 2008, Seattle, Washington, USA.}
+\CopyrightYear{2008}
+\crdata{978-1-60558-175-0/08/08}
+
\title{Leveraging Altruistic Peers to Reduce the Bandwidth Costs of Free Content Downloads}
-\author{\IEEEauthorblockN{Cameron Dale}
-\IEEEauthorblockA{School of Computing Science (student)\\
-Simon Fraser University\\
-Burnaby, British Columbia, Canada\\
-Email: camerond@cs.sfu.ca}
-\and
-\IEEEauthorblockN{Jiangchuan Liu}
-\IEEEauthorblockA{School of Computing Science (faculty)\\
-Simon Fraser University\\
-Burnaby, British Columbia, Canada\\
-Email: jcliu@cs.sfu.ca}}
+\numberofauthors{2}
+\author{
+\alignauthor Cameron Dale\\
+ \affaddr{School of Computing Science (student)}\\
+ \affaddr{Simon Fraser University}\\
+ \affaddr{Burnaby, British Columbia, Canada}\\
+ \email{Email: camerond@cs.sfu.ca}
+%\and
+\alignauthor Jiangchuan Liu\\
+ \affaddr{School of Computing Science (faculty)}\\
+ \affaddr{Simon Fraser University}\\
+ \affaddr{Burnaby, British Columbia, Canada}\\
+ \email{Email: jcliu@cs.sfu.ca}
+}
\maketitle
+\begin{abstract}
+We introduce the opportunity many free content distributors have to
+reduce their bandwidth costs using a peer-to-peer download
+mechanism. Our model for this peer-to-peer distribution is simple to
+implement, backwards-compatible with the existing infrastructure,
+and can be deployed incrementally. It makes wide use of a customized
+distributed hash table (DHT) to facilitate the finding of peers and
+the efficient downloading of files. We also present the example
+solution we created for one of these distributors, the Debian
+project, which is already in use by some users.
+\end{abstract}
+
+% A category with the (minimum) three required fields
+%\category{H.4}{Information Systems Applications}{Miscellaneous}
+%A category including the fourth, optional field follows...
+\category{C.2.4}{Computer-Communication Networks}{Distributed Systems}[Distributed applications]
+\terms{Design, Performance, Reliability}
+\keywords{BitTorrent, P2P}
+
\section{Introduction}
\label{intro}
been well-used to address this problem.
We present a new peer-to-peer distribution model to meet these
-demands. It is based on the lessons learned from many previous
-implementations of successful peer-to-peer protocols, such as
+demands, based on other successful peer-to-peer protocols such as
Distributed Hash Tables and BitTorrent.
The model relies on the pre-existence of cryptographic
hashes of the content, which uniquely identify it for a request from
containing software packages for the PERL programming language,
using SOAP RPC requests to find and download files; Cygwin provides
many of the standard Unix/Linux tools in a Windows environment,
-using a package management tool that requests packages from
+using a package management tool that requests \texttt{tar} files from
websites; two software distribution systems exist for Mac OSX,
fink and MacPorts, that also retrieve packages in this way. Also,
some systems use direct web downloads, but with a hash verification
-file also available for download next to the desired file. These
+file also available. These
hash files usually have the same file name, but with an added
extension identifying the hash used (e.g. \texttt{.md5} for the MD5
hash). Finally, there are other programs that make use of
fallback to downloading from the original content location, and once
complete will announce to other peers indicating that it now has
the content. The original servers or mirrors thus act as \emph{seeds} for the
-P2P system without any modification to them.
+P2P system without any modification to them, and users are satisfied even when
+there are no peers which allows the system to be deployed incrementally.
This functionality could be directly integrated into the
package management software, although this would be
difficult as the protocol should be running at all times, whereas the
package software typically only runs until the download request is complete.
-Alternatively, since many of the package management software
-implementations use HTTP requests to download the files, it
-it possible to implement the P2P aspect as as HTTP caching
+Alternatively, it
+it possible to implement the P2P aspect as a caching
proxy. The proxy will get uncached requests first from the P2P system,
-and then fallback to the normal HTTP request from a server. For
-methods that don't use HTTP requests, other types of proxies
-(possibly custom-made) may also be possible.
+and then fallback to the normal request from a server.
The sparse interest in a large
number of packages undergoing constant updating is well suited to
created a sample implementation called \texttt{apt-p2p} which
interacts with the \texttt{apt} tool found in most Debian-based
Linux distributions. \texttt{apt} uses SHA1 hashes to verify most
-downloaded files, including the large index files that contain
+downloaded files, including the large index files that contains detailed
information such as the hashes of the individual packages. Since all
requests from \texttt{apt} are in the form of HTTP downloads from a
server, the implementation takes the form of a caching HTTP proxy.
and TCP port), as well as the piece strings (or hashes of piece
strings) as described in the previous section. Downloading is
accomplished by simple HTTP requests for the hash of the file,
-which is sent to the peers identified from the DHT lookup to
+which is sent to the peers identified in a DHT lookup to
have the desired file. All peers support HTTP/1.1, both as
servers and clients, which allows for pipelining of multiple
requests to a peer, and the requesting of smaller pieces of a large
more widely used, we plan to collect more usage information on the
system through crawls and data analysis.
-\bibliographystyle{IEEEtran}
-\bibliography{./IEEEabrv,./all}
+\bibliographystyle{abbrv}
+\bibliography{./all}
\end{document}
@article{kademlia,
title = {{Kademlia: A Peer-to-Peer Information System Based on the XOR Metric}},
author = {P. Maymounkov and D. Mazieres},
- journal = {Peer-To-Peer Systems: First International Workshop, IPTPS 2002, Cambridge, MA, USA, March 7-8, 2002},
+ journal = {Peer-To-Peer Systems: First International Workshop, IPTPS 2002, Cambridge, MA, USA, March 7-8},
publisher = {Springer},
year = 2002,
entrytype = {article},
[item:abstract.tex]
archive=true
-column=33
+column=38
encoding=UTF-8
highlight=LaTeX
-line=21
+line=38
open=true
[item:all.bib]
archive=true
-column=19
+column=112
encoding=UTF-8
highlight=BibTeX
-line=424
+line=223
open=false
[item:apt-p2p-abstract.kilepr]
--- /dev/null
+% SIG-ALT-RELEASE.CLS - VERSION 1.5\r
+% "COMPATIBLE" WITH THE "ACM_PROC_ARTICLE-SP.CLS" V3.1SP\r
+% PRODUCES A 'TIGHTER' PAPER AND DOES INCLUDE A RELEASE STATEMENT\r
+% Gerald Murray June 7th. 2007\r
+%\r
+% ---- Start of 'updates' ----\r
+%\r
+% To produce Type 1 fonts in the document plus allow for 'normal LaTeX accenting' in the critical areas;\r
+% title, author block, section-heads, confname, etc. etc. \r
+% i.e. the whole purpose of this version update is to NOT resort to 'inelegant accent patches'.\r
+% After much research, three extra .sty packages were added to the the tail (ae, aecompl, aeguill) to solve,\r
+% in particular, the accenting problem(s). We _could_ ask authors (via instructions/sample file) to 'include' these in\r
+% the source .tex file - in the preamble - but if everything is already provided ('behind the scenes' - embedded IN the .cls)\r
+% then this is less work for authors and also makes everything appear 'vanilla'.\r
+% NOTE: all 'patchwork accenting" has been commented out (here) and is no longer 'used' in the sample .tex file (either).\r
+% Gerry June 2007\r
+%\r
+% Patch for accenting in conference name/location. Gerry May 3rd. 2007\r
+% Rule widths changed to .5, author count (>6) fixed, roll-back for Type 3 problem. Gerry March 20th. 2007\r
+% Changes made to 'modernize' the fontnames but esp. for MikTeX users V2.4/2.5 - Nov. 30th. 2006\r
+% Updated the \email definition to allow for its use inside of 'shared affiliations' - Nov. 30th. 2006\r
+% Fixed the 'section number depth value' - Nov. 30th. 2006\r
+%\r
+% Footnotes inside table cells using \minipage (Oct. 2002)\r
+% Georgia fixed bug in sub-sub-section numbering in paragraphs (July 29th. 2002)\r
+% JS/GM fix to vertical spacing before Proofs (July 30th. 2002)\r
+%\r
+% Made the Permission Statement / Conference Info / Copyright Info\r
+% 'user definable' in the source .tex file OR automatic if\r
+% not specified.\r
+%\r
+% Allowance made to switch default fonts between those systems using\r
+% normal/modern font names and those using 'Type 1' or 'Truetype' fonts.\r
+% See LINE NUMBER 255 for details.\r
+% Also provided for enumerated/annotated Corollaries 'surrounded' by\r
+% enumerated Theorems (line 848).\r
+% Gerry November 11th. 1999\r
+%\r
+% ---- End of 'updates' ----\r
+%\r
+\def\fileversion{v1.5} % for ACM's tracking purposes\r
+\def\filedate{June 7, 2007} % Gerry Murray's tracking data\r
+\def\docdate {Thursday 7th. June 2007} % Gerry Murray (with deltas to doc}\r
+\usepackage{epsfig}\r
+\usepackage{amssymb}\r
+\usepackage{amsmath}\r
+\usepackage{amsfonts}\r
+% Need this for accents in Arial/Helvetica\r
+%\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} % Gerry March 12, 2007 - causes Type 3 problems (body text)\r
+%\usepackage{textcomp}\r
+%\r
+% SIG-ALT-RELEASE DOCUMENT STYLE\r
+% G.K.M. Tobin August-October 1999\r
+% adapted from ARTICLE document style by Ken Traub, Olin Shivers\r
+% also using elements of esub2acm.cls\r
+% HEAVILY MODIFIED, SUBSEQUENTLY, BY GERRY MURRAY 2000\r
+% ARTICLE DOCUMENT STYLE -- Released 16 March 1988\r
+% for LaTeX version 2.09\r
+% Copyright (C) 1988 by Leslie Lamport\r
+%\r
+%\r
+%%% sig-alt-release.cls is an 'ALTERNATE-RELEASE' document style for producing\r
+%%% two-column camera-ready pages for ACM conferences.\r
+%%% THIS FILE DOES NOT STRICTLY ADHERE TO THE SIGS (BOARD-ENDORSED)\r
+%%% PROCEEDINGS STYLE. It has been designed to produce a 'tighter'\r
+%%% paper in response to concerns over page budgets.\r
+%%% The main features of this style are:\r
+%%%\r
+%%% 1) Two columns.\r
+%%% 2) Side and top margins of 4.5pc, bottom margin of 6pc, column gutter of\r
+%%% 2pc, hence columns are 20pc wide and 55.5pc tall. (6pc =3D 1in, approx)\r
+%%% 3) First page has title information, and an extra 6pc of space at the\r
+%%% bottom of the first column for the ACM copyright notice.\r
+%%% 4) Text is 9pt on 10pt baselines; titles (except main) are 9pt bold.\r
+%%%\r
+%%%\r
+%%% There are a few restrictions you must observe:\r
+%%%\r
+%%% 1) You cannot change the font size; ACM wants you to use 9pt.\r
+%%% 3) You must start your paper with the \maketitle command. Prior to the\r
+%%% \maketitle you must have \title and \author commands. If you have a\r
+%%% \date command it will be ignored; no date appears on the paper, since\r
+%%% the proceedings will have a date on the front cover.\r
+%%% 4) Marginal paragraphs, tables of contents, lists of figures and tables,\r
+%%% and page headings are all forbidden.\r
+%%% 5) The `figure' environment will produce a figure one column wide; if you\r
+%%% want one that is two columns wide, use `figure*'.\r
+%%%\r
+%\r
+%%% Copyright Space:\r
+%%% This style automatically reserves 1" blank space at the bottom of page 1/\r
+%%% column 1. This space can optionally be filled with some text using the\r
+%%% \toappear{...} command. If used, this command must be BEFORE the \maketitle\r
+%%% command. If this command is defined AND [preprint] is on, then the\r
+%%% space is filled with the {...} text (at the bottom); otherwise, it is\r
+%%% blank. If you use \toappearbox{...} instead of \toappear{...} then a\r
+%%% box will be drawn around the text (if [preprint] is on).\r
+%%%\r
+%%% A typical usage looks like this:\r
+%%% \toappear{To appear in the Ninth AES Conference on Medievil Lithuanian\r
+%%% Embalming Technique, June 1991, Alfaretta, Georgia.}\r
+%%% This will be included in the preprint, and left out of the conference\r
+%%% version.\r
+%%%\r
+%%% WARNING:\r
+%%% Some dvi-ps converters heuristically allow chars to drift from their\r
+%%% true positions a few pixels. This may be noticeable with the 9pt sans-serif\r
+%%% bold font used for section headers.\r
+%%% You may turn this hackery off via the -e option:\r
+%%% dvips -e 0 foo.dvi >foo.ps\r
+%%%\r
+\typeout{Document Class 'sig-alt-release' <7th. June '07>. Modified by G.K.M. Tobin/Gerry Murray}\r
+\typeout{Based in part upon document Style `acmconf' <22 May 89>. Hacked 4/91 by}\r
+\typeout{shivers@cs.cmu.edu, 4/93 by theobald@cs.mcgill.ca}\r
+\typeout{Excerpts were taken from (Journal Style) 'esub2acm.cls'.}\r
+\typeout{****** Bugs/comments/suggestions/technicalities to Gerry Murray -- murray@hq.acm.org ******}\r
+\typeout{Questions on the style, SIGS policies, etc. to Julie Goetz goetz@acm.org or Adrienne Griscti griscti@acm.org}\r
+\oddsidemargin 4.5pc\r
+\evensidemargin 4.5pc\r
+\advance\oddsidemargin by -1in % Correct for LaTeX gratuitousness\r
+\advance\evensidemargin by -1in % Correct for LaTeX gratuitousness\r
+\marginparwidth 0pt % Margin pars are not allowed.\r
+\marginparsep 11pt % Horizontal space between outer margin and\r
+ % marginal note\r
+\r
+ % Top of page:\r
+\topmargin 4.5pc % Nominal distance from top of page to top of\r
+ % box containing running head.\r
+\advance\topmargin by -1in % Correct for LaTeX gratuitousness\r
+\headheight 0pt % Height of box containing running head.\r
+\headsep 0pt % Space between running head and text.\r
+ % Bottom of page:\r
+\footskip 30pt % Distance from baseline of box containing foot\r
+ % to baseline of last line of text.\r
+\@ifundefined{footheight}{\newdimen\footheight}{}% this is for LaTeX2e\r
+\footheight 12pt % Height of box containing running foot.\r
+\r
+%% Must redefine the top margin so there's room for headers and\r
+%% page numbers if you are using the preprint option. Footers\r
+%% are OK as is. Olin.\r
+\advance\topmargin by -37pt % Leave 37pt above text for headers\r
+\headheight 12pt % Height of box containing running head.\r
+\headsep 25pt % Space between running head and text.\r
+\r
+\textheight 666pt % 9 1/4 column height\r
+\textwidth 42pc % Width of text line.\r
+ % For two-column mode:\r
+\columnsep 2pc % Space between columns\r
+\columnseprule 0pt % Width of rule between columns.\r
+\hfuzz 1pt % Allow some variation in column width, otherwise it's\r
+ % too hard to typeset in narrow columns.\r
+\r
+\footnotesep 5.6pt % Height of strut placed at the beginning of every\r
+ % footnote =3D height of normal \footnotesize strut,\r
+ % so no extra space between footnotes.\r
+\r
+\skip\footins 8.1pt plus 4pt minus 2pt % Space between last line of text and\r
+ % top of first footnote.\r
+\floatsep 11pt plus 2pt minus 2pt % Space between adjacent floats moved\r
+ % to top or bottom of text page.\r
+\textfloatsep 18pt plus 2pt minus 4pt % Space between main text and floats\r
+ % at top or bottom of page.\r
+\intextsep 11pt plus 2pt minus 2pt % Space between in-text figures and\r
+ % text.\r
+\@ifundefined{@maxsep}{\newdimen\@maxsep}{}% this is for LaTeX2e\r
+\@maxsep 18pt % The maximum of \floatsep,\r
+ % \textfloatsep and \intextsep (minus\r
+ % the stretch and shrink).\r
+\dblfloatsep 11pt plus 2pt minus 2pt % Same as \floatsep for double-column\r
+ % figures in two-column mode.\r
+\dbltextfloatsep 18pt plus 2pt minus 4pt% \textfloatsep for double-column\r
+ % floats.\r
+\@ifundefined{@dblmaxsep}{\newdimen\@dblmaxsep}{}% this is for LaTeX2e\r
+\@dblmaxsep 18pt % The maximum of \dblfloatsep and\r
+ % \dbltexfloatsep.\r
+\@fptop 0pt plus 1fil % Stretch at top of float page/column. (Must be\r
+ % 0pt plus ...)\r
+\@fpsep 8pt plus 2fil % Space between floats on float page/column.\r
+\@fpbot 0pt plus 1fil % Stretch at bottom of float page/column. (Must be\r
+ % 0pt plus ... )\r
+\@dblfptop 0pt plus 1fil % Stretch at top of float page. (Must be 0pt plus ...)\r
+\@dblfpsep 8pt plus 2fil % Space between floats on float page.\r
+\@dblfpbot 0pt plus 1fil % Stretch at bottom of float page. (Must be\r
+ % 0pt plus ... )\r
+\marginparpush 5pt % Minimum vertical separation between two marginal\r
+ % notes.\r
+\r
+\parskip 0pt plus 1pt % Extra vertical space between paragraphs.\r
+\parindent 9pt % GM July 2000 / was 0pt - width of paragraph indentation.\r
+\partopsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt% Extra vertical space, in addition to\r
+ % \parskip and \topsep, added when user\r
+ % leaves blank line before environment.\r
+\r
+\@lowpenalty 51 % Produced by \nopagebreak[1] or \nolinebreak[1]\r
+\@medpenalty 151 % Produced by \nopagebreak[2] or \nolinebreak[2]\r
+\@highpenalty 301 % Produced by \nopagebreak[3] or \nolinebreak[3]\r
+\r
+\@beginparpenalty -\@lowpenalty % Before a list or paragraph environment.\r
+\@endparpenalty -\@lowpenalty % After a list or paragraph environment.\r
+\@itempenalty -\@lowpenalty % Between list items.\r
+\r
+\@namedef{ds@10pt}{\@latexerr{The `10pt' option is not allowed in the `acmconf'\r
+ document style.}\@eha}\r
+\@namedef{ds@11pt}{\@latexerr{The `11pt' option is not allowed in the `acmconf'\r
+ document style.}\@eha}\r
+\@namedef{ds@12pt}{\@latexerr{The `12pt' option is not allowed in the `acmconf'\r
+ document style.}\@eha}\r
+\r
+\@options\r
+\r
+\lineskip 2pt % \lineskip is 1pt for all font sizes.\r
+\normallineskip 2pt\r
+\def\baselinestretch{1}\r
+\r
+\abovedisplayskip 9pt plus2pt minus4.5pt%\r
+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip\r
+\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ plus3pt%\r
+\belowdisplayshortskip 5.4pt plus3pt minus3pt%\r
+\let\@listi\@listI % Setting of \@listi added 9 Jun 87\r
+\r
+\def\small{\@setsize\small{9pt}\viiipt\@viiipt\r
+\abovedisplayskip 7.6pt plus 3pt minus 4pt%\r
+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip\r
+\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ plus2pt%\r
+\belowdisplayshortskip 3.6pt plus2pt minus 2pt\r
+\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini %% Added 22 Dec 87\r
+\topsep 4pt plus 2pt minus 2pt\parsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt\r
+\itemsep \parsep}}\r
+\r
+\def\footnotesize{\@setsize\footnotesize{9pt}\ixpt\@ixpt\r
+\abovedisplayskip 6.4pt plus 2pt minus 4pt%\r
+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip\r
+\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ plus 1pt%\r
+\belowdisplayshortskip 2.7pt plus 1pt minus 2pt\r
+\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini %% Added 22 Dec 87\r
+\topsep 3pt plus 1pt minus 1pt\parsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt\r
+\itemsep \parsep}}\r
+\r
+\newcount\aucount\r
+\newcount\originalaucount\r
+\newdimen\auwidth\r
+\auwidth=\textwidth\r
+\newdimen\auskip\r
+\newcount\auskipcount\r
+\newdimen\auskip\r
+\global\auskip=1pc\r
+\newdimen\allauboxes\r
+\allauboxes=\auwidth\r
+\newtoks\addauthors\r
+\newcount\addauflag\r
+\global\addauflag=0 %Haven't shown additional authors yet\r
+\r
+\newtoks\subtitletext\r
+\gdef\subtitle#1{\subtitletext={#1}}\r
+\r
+\gdef\additionalauthors#1{\addauthors={#1}}\r
+\r
+\gdef\numberofauthors#1{\global\aucount=#1\r
+\ifnum\aucount>3\global\originalaucount=\aucount \global\aucount=3\fi %g}\r
+\global\auskipcount=\aucount\global\advance\auskipcount by 1\r
+\global\multiply\auskipcount by 2\r
+\global\multiply\auskip by \auskipcount\r
+\global\advance\auwidth by -\auskip\r
+\global\divide\auwidth by \aucount}\r
+\r
+% \and was modified to count the number of authors. GKMT 12 Aug 1999\r
+\def\alignauthor{% % \begin{tabular}\r
+\end{tabular}%\r
+ \begin{tabular}[t]{p{\auwidth}}\centering}%\r
+\r
+% *** NOTE *** NOTE *** NOTE *** NOTE ***\r
+% If you have 'font problems' then you may need\r
+% to change these, e.g. 'arialb' instead of "arialbd".\r
+% Gerry Murray 11/11/1999\r
+% *** OR ** comment out block A and activate block B or vice versa.\r
+% **********************************************\r
+%\r
+% -- Start of block A -- (Type 1 or Truetype fonts)\r
+%\newfont{\secfnt}{timesbd at 12pt} % was timenrb originally - now is timesbd\r
+%\newfont{\secit}{timesbi at 12pt} %13 Jan 00 gkmt\r
+%\newfont{\subsecfnt}{timesi at 11pt} % was timenrri originally - now is timesi\r
+%\newfont{\subsecit}{timesbi at 11pt} % 13 Jan 00 gkmt -- was times changed to timesbi gm 2/4/2000\r
+% % because "normal" is italic, "italic" is Roman\r
+%\newfont{\ttlfnt}{arialbd at 18pt} % was arialb originally - now is arialbd\r
+%\newfont{\ttlit}{arialbi at 18pt} % 13 Jan 00 gkmt\r
+%\newfont{\subttlfnt}{arial at 14pt} % was arialr originally - now is arial\r
+%\newfont{\subttlit}{ariali at 14pt} % 13 Jan 00 gkmt\r
+%\newfont{\subttlbf}{arialbd at 14pt} % 13 Jan 00 gkmt\r
+%\newfont{\aufnt}{arial at 12pt} % was arialr originally - now is arial\r
+%\newfont{\auit}{ariali at 12pt} % 13 Jan 00 gkmt\r
+%\newfont{\affaddr}{arial at 10pt} % was arialr originally - now is arial\r
+%\newfont{\affaddrit}{ariali at 10pt} %13 Jan 00 gkmt\r
+%\newfont{\eaddfnt}{arial at 12pt} % was arialr originally - now is arial\r
+%\newfont{\ixpt}{times at 9pt} % was timenrr originally - now is times\r
+%\newfont{\confname}{timesi at 8pt} % was timenrri - now is timesi\r
+%\newfont{\crnotice}{times at 8pt} % was timenrr originally - now is times\r
+%\newfont{\ninept}{times at 9pt} % was timenrr originally - now is times\r
+% *********************************************\r
+% -- End of block A --\r
+%\r
+%\r
+% -- Start of block B -- UPDATED FONT NAMES\r
+% *********************************************\r
+% Gerry Murray 11/30/2006\r
+% *********************************************\r
+\newfont{\secfnt}{ptmb8t at 12pt}\r
+\newfont{\secit}{ptmbi8t at 12pt} %13 Jan 00 gkmt\r
+\newfont{\subsecfnt}{ptmri8t at 11pt}\r
+\newfont{\subsecit}{ptmbi8t at 11pt} % \r
+\newfont{\ttlfnt}{phvb8t at 18pt}\r
+\newfont{\ttlit}{phvbo8t at 18pt} % GM 2/4/2000\r
+\newfont{\subttlfnt}{phvr8t at 14pt}\r
+\newfont{\subttlit}{phvro8t at 14pt} % GM 2/4/2000\r
+\newfont{\subttlbf}{phvb8t at 14pt} % 13 Jan 00 gkmt\r
+\newfont{\aufnt}{phvr8t at 12pt}\r
+\newfont{\auit}{phvro8t at 12pt} % GM 2/4/2000\r
+\newfont{\affaddr}{phvr8t at 10pt}\r
+\newfont{\affaddrit}{phvro8t at 10pt} % GM 2/4/2000\r
+\newfont{\eaddfnt}{phvr8t at 12pt}\r
+\newfont{\ixpt}{ptmr8t at 9pt}\r
+\newfont{\confname}{ptmri8t at 8pt}\r
+\newfont{\crnotice}{ptmr8t at 8pt}\r
+\newfont{\ninept}{ptmr8t at 9pt}\r
+% +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++\r
+% -- End of block B --\r
+\r
+%\def\email#1{{{\eaddfnt{\vskip 4pt#1}}}}\r
+% If we have an email, inside a "shared affiliation" then we need the following instead\r
+\def\email#1{{{\eaddfnt{\par #1}}}} % revised - GM - 11/30/2006\r
+\r
+\def\addauthorsection{\ifnum\originalaucount>6 % was 3 - Gerry March 2007\r
+ \section{Additional Authors}\the\addauthors\r
+ \fi}\r
+\r
+\newcount\savesection\r
+\newcount\sectioncntr\r
+\global\sectioncntr=1\r
+\r
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}\r
+\r
+\def\appendix{\par\r
+\section*{APPENDIX}\r
+\setcounter{section}{0}\r
+ \setcounter{subsection}{0}\r
+ \def\thesection{\Alph{section}} }\r
+\r
+\leftmargini 22.5pt\r
+\leftmarginii 19.8pt % > \labelsep + width of '(m)'\r
+\leftmarginiii 16.8pt % > \labelsep + width of 'vii.'\r
+\leftmarginiv 15.3pt % > \labelsep + width of 'M.'\r
+\leftmarginv 9pt\r
+\leftmarginvi 9pt\r
+\r
+\leftmargin\leftmargini\r
+\labelsep 4.5pt\r
+\labelwidth\leftmargini\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep\r
+\r
+\def\@listI{\leftmargin\leftmargini \parsep 3.6pt plus 2pt minus 1pt%\r
+\topsep 7.2pt plus 2pt minus 4pt%\r
+\itemsep 3.6pt plus 2pt minus 1pt}\r
+\r
+\let\@listi\@listI\r
+\@listi\r
+\r
+\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii\r
+ \labelwidth\leftmarginii\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep\r
+ \topsep 3.6pt plus 2pt minus 1pt\r
+ \parsep 1.8pt plus 0.9pt minus 0.9pt\r
+ \itemsep \parsep}\r
+\r
+\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii\r
+ \labelwidth\leftmarginiii\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep\r
+ \topsep 1.8pt plus 0.9pt minus 0.9pt\r
+ \parsep \z@ \partopsep 1pt plus 0pt minus 1pt\r
+ \itemsep \topsep}\r
+\r
+\def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv\r
+ \labelwidth\leftmarginiv\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}\r
+\r
+\def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv\r
+ \labelwidth\leftmarginv\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}\r
+\r
+\def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi\r
+ \labelwidth\leftmarginvi\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}\r
+\r
+\def\labelenumi{\theenumi.}\r
+\def\theenumi{\arabic{enumi}}\r
+\r
+\def\labelenumii{(\theenumii)}\r
+\def\theenumii{\alph{enumii}}\r
+\def\p@enumii{\theenumi}\r
+\r
+\def\labelenumiii{\theenumiii.}\r
+\def\theenumiii{\roman{enumiii}}\r
+\def\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)}\r
+\r
+\def\labelenumiv{\theenumiv.}\r
+\def\theenumiv{\Alph{enumiv}}\r
+\def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii}\r
+\r
+\def\labelitemi{$\bullet$}\r
+\def\labelitemii{\bf --}\r
+\def\labelitemiii{$\ast$}\r
+\def\labelitemiv{$\cdot$}\r
+\r
+\def\verse{\let\\=\@centercr\r
+ \list{}{\itemsep\z@ \itemindent -1.5em\listparindent \itemindent\r
+ \rightmargin\leftmargin\advance\leftmargin 1.5em}\item[]}\r
+\let\endverse\endlist\r
+\r
+\def\quotation{\list{}{\listparindent 1.5em\r
+ \itemindent\listparindent\r
+ \rightmargin\leftmargin \parsep 0pt plus 1pt}\item[]}\r
+\let\endquotation=\endlist\r
+\r
+\def\quote{\list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}\item[]}\r
+\let\endquote=\endlist\r
+\r
+\def\descriptionlabel#1{\hspace\labelsep \bf #1}\r
+\def\description{\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin\r
+ \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}}\r
+\r
+\let\enddescription\endlist\r
+\r
+\def\theequation{\arabic{equation}}\r
+\r
+\arraycolsep 4.5pt % Half the space between columns in an array environment.\r
+\tabcolsep 5.4pt % Half the space between columns in a tabular environment.\r
+\arrayrulewidth .5pt % Width of rules in array and tabular environment. % (was .4) updated Gerry March 20 2007\r
+\doublerulesep 1.8pt % Space between adjacent rules in array or tabular env.\r
+\r
+\tabbingsep \labelsep % Space used by the \' command. (See LaTeX manual.)\r
+\r
+\skip\@mpfootins =\skip\footins\r
+\r
+\fboxsep =2.7pt % Space left between box and text by \fbox and \framebox.\r
+\fboxrule =.5pt % Width of rules in box made by \fbox and \framebox. % (was .4) updated Gerry March 20 2007\r
+\r
+\def\thepart{\Roman{part}} % Roman numeral part numbers.\r
+\def\thesection {\arabic{section}}\r
+\def\thesubsection {\thesection.\arabic{subsection}}\r
+%\def\thesubsubsection {\thesubsection.\arabic{subsubsection}} % GM 7/30/2002\r
+%\def\theparagraph {\thesubsubsection.\arabic{paragraph}} % GM 7/30/2002\r
+\def\thesubparagraph {\theparagraph.\arabic{subparagraph}}\r
+\r
+\def\@pnumwidth{1.55em}\r
+\def\@tocrmarg {2.55em}\r
+\def\@dotsep{4.5}\r
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{3}\r
+\r
+\def\tableofcontents{\@latexerr{\tableofcontents: Tables of contents are not\r
+ allowed in the `acmconf' document style.}\@eha}\r
+\r
+\def\l@part#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty}\r
+ \addvspace{2.25em plus 1pt} % space above part line\r
+ \begingroup\r
+ \@tempdima 3em % width of box holding part number, used by\r
+ \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth %% \numberline\r
+ \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth\r
+ {\large \bf % set line in \large boldface\r
+ \leavevmode % TeX command to enter horizontal mode.\r
+ #1\hfil \hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}}\par\r
+ \nobreak % Never break after part entry\r
+ \endgroup}\r
+\r
+\def\l@section#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty} % good place for page break\r
+ \addvspace{1.0em plus 1pt} % space above toc entry\r
+ \@tempdima 1.5em % width of box holding section number\r
+ \begingroup\r
+ \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth\r
+ \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth\r
+ \bf % Boldface.\r
+ \leavevmode % TeX command to enter horizontal mode.\r
+ \advance\leftskip\@tempdima %% added 5 Feb 88 to conform to\r
+ \hskip -\leftskip %% 25 Jan 88 change to \numberline\r
+ #1\nobreak\hfil \nobreak\hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par\r
+ \endgroup}\r
+\r
+\r
+\def\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{1.5em}{2.3em}}\r
+\def\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{3.8em}{3.2em}}\r
+\def\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{7.0em}{4.1em}}\r
+\def\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{10em}{5em}}\r
+\r
+\def\listoffigures{\@latexerr{\listoffigures: Lists of figures are not\r
+ allowed in the `acmconf' document style.}\@eha}\r
+\r
+\def\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}\r
+\r
+\def\listoftables{\@latexerr{\listoftables: Lists of tables are not\r
+ allowed in the `acmconf' document style.}\@eha}\r
+\let\l@table\l@figure\r
+\r
+\def\footnoterule{\kern-3\p@\r
+ \hrule width .5\columnwidth % (was .4) updated Gerry March 20 2007\r
+ \kern 2.6\p@} % The \hrule has default height of .4pt % (was .4) updated Gerry March 20 2007\r
+% ------\r
+\long\def\@makefntext#1{\noindent \r
+%\hbox to .5em{\hss$^{\@thefnmark}$}#1} % original\r
+\hbox to .5em{\hss\textsuperscript{\@thefnmark}}#1} % C. Clifton / GM Oct. 2nd. 2002\r
+% -------\r
+\r
+\long\def\@maketntext#1{\noindent\r
+#1}\r
+\r
+\long\def\@maketitlenotetext#1#2{\noindent\r
+ \hbox to 1.8em{\hss$^{#1}$}#2}\r
+\r
+\setcounter{topnumber}{2}\r
+\def\topfraction{.7}\r
+\setcounter{bottomnumber}{1}\r
+\def\bottomfraction{.3}\r
+\setcounter{totalnumber}{3}\r
+\def\textfraction{.2}\r
+\def\floatpagefraction{.5}\r
+\setcounter{dbltopnumber}{2}\r
+\def\dbltopfraction{.7}\r
+\def\dblfloatpagefraction{.5}\r
+\r
+%\r
+\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{\r
+ \vskip \baselineskip\r
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\textbf{#1: #2}}\r
+ \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize % IF longer than one line:\r
+ \textbf{#1: #2}\par % THEN set as ordinary paragraph.\r
+ \else % ELSE center.\r
+ \hbox to\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}\par\r
+ \fi}\r
+\r
+%\r
+\r
+\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{\r
+ \vskip 10pt\r
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\textbf{#1: #2}}\r
+ \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize % IF longer than one line:\r
+ \textbf{#1: #2}\par % THEN set as ordinary paragraph.\r
+ \else % ELSE center.\r
+ \hbox to\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}\r
+ \fi}\r
+\r
+\@ifundefined{figure}{\newcounter {figure}} % this is for LaTeX2e\r
+\r
+\def\fps@figure{tbp}\r
+\def\ftype@figure{1}\r
+\def\ext@figure{lof}\r
+\def\fnum@figure{Figure \thefigure}\r
+\def\figure{\@float{figure}}\r
+\let\endfigure\end@float\r
+\@namedef{figure*}{\@dblfloat{figure}}\r
+\@namedef{endfigure*}{\end@dblfloat}\r
+\r
+\@ifundefined{table}{\newcounter {table}} % this is for LaTeX2e\r
+\r
+\def\fps@table{tbp}\r
+\def\ftype@table{2}\r
+\def\ext@table{lot}\r
+\def\fnum@table{Table \thetable}\r
+\def\table{\@float{table}}\r
+\let\endtable\end@float\r
+\@namedef{table*}{\@dblfloat{table}}\r
+\@namedef{endtable*}{\end@dblfloat}\r
+\r
+\newtoks\titleboxnotes\r
+\newcount\titleboxnoteflag\r
+\r
+\def\maketitle{\par\r
+ \begingroup\r
+ \def\thefootnote{\fnsymbol{footnote}}\r
+ \def\@makefnmark{\hbox\r
+ to 0pt{$^{\@thefnmark}$\hss}}\r
+ \twocolumn[\@maketitle]\r
+\@thanks\r
+ \endgroup\r
+ \setcounter{footnote}{0}\r
+ \let\maketitle\relax\r
+ \let\@maketitle\relax\r
+ \gdef\@thanks{}\gdef\@author{}\gdef\@title{}\gdef\@subtitle{}\let\thanks\relax\r
+ \@copyrightspace}\r
+\r
+%% CHANGES ON NEXT LINES\r
+\newif\if@ll % to record which version of LaTeX is in use\r
+\r
+\expandafter\ifx\csname LaTeXe\endcsname\relax % LaTeX2.09 is used\r
+\else% LaTeX2e is used, so set ll to true\r
+\global\@lltrue\r
+\fi\r
+\r
+\if@ll\r
+ \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}\r
+ \ProvidesClass{sig-alt-release} [2007/06/07 - V1.5 - based on acmproc.cls V1.3 <Nov. 30 '99>]\r
+ \RequirePackage{latexsym}% QUERY: are these two really needed?\r
+ \let\dooptions\ProcessOptions\r
+\else\r
+ \let\dooptions\@options\r
+\fi\r
+%% END CHANGES\r
+\r
+\def\@height{height}\r
+\def\@width{width}\r
+\def\@minus{minus}\r
+\def\@plus{plus}\r
+\def\hb@xt@{\hbox to}\r
+\newif\if@faircopy\r
+\@faircopyfalse\r
+\def\ds@faircopy{\@faircopytrue}\r
+\r
+\def\ds@preprint{\@faircopyfalse}\r
+\r
+\@twosidetrue\r
+\@mparswitchtrue\r
+\def\ds@draft{\overfullrule 5\p@}\r
+%% CHANGE ON NEXT LINE\r
+\dooptions\r
+\r
+\lineskip \p@\r
+\normallineskip \p@\r
+\def\baselinestretch{1}\r
+\def\@ptsize{0} %needed for amssymbols.sty\r
+\r
+%% CHANGES ON NEXT LINES\r
+\if@ll% allow use of old-style font change commands in LaTeX2e\r
+\@maxdepth\maxdepth\r
+%\r
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\ninept\rmfamily}{\mathrm}\r
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf}\r
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt}\r
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\bf}{\normalfont\bfseries}{\mathbf}\r
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit}\r
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sl}{\normalfont\slshape}{\@nomath\sl}\r
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\@nomath\sc}\r
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\cal}{\@fontswitch{\relax}{\mathcal}}\r
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\mit}{\@fontswitch{\relax}{\mathnormal}}\r
+\fi\r
+%\r
+\if@ll\r
+ \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{cmr} % was 'ttm'\r
+% Note! I have also found 'mvr' to work ESPECIALLY well.\r
+% Gerry - October 1999\r
+% You may need to change your LV1times.fd file so that sc is\r
+% mapped to cmcsc - -for smallcaps -- that is if you decide\r
+% to change {cmr} to {times} above. (Not recommended)\r
+ \renewcommand{\@ptsize}{}\r
+ \renewcommand{\normalsize}{%\r
+ \@setfontsize\normalsize\@ixpt{10.5\p@}%\ninept%\r
+ \abovedisplayskip 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@\r
+ \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip\r
+ \abovedisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@minus 3\p@\r
+ \belowdisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@minus 3\p@\r
+ \let\@listi\@listI\r
+ }\r
+\else\r
+ \def\@normalsize{%changed next to 9 from 10\r
+ \@setsize\normalsize{9\p@}\ixpt\@ixpt\r
+ \abovedisplayskip 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@\r
+ \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip\r
+ \abovedisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@minus 3\p@\r
+ \belowdisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@minus 3\p@\r
+ \let\@listi\@listI\r
+ }%\r
+\fi\r
+\if@ll\r
+ \newcommand\scriptsize{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@viipt{8\p@}}\r
+ \newcommand\tiny{\@setfontsize\tiny\@vpt{6\p@}}\r
+ \newcommand\large{\@setfontsize\large\@xiipt{14\p@}}\r
+ \newcommand\Large{\@setfontsize\Large\@xivpt{18\p@}}\r
+ \newcommand\LARGE{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@xviipt{20\p@}}\r
+ \newcommand\huge{\@setfontsize\huge\@xxpt{25\p@}}\r
+ \newcommand\Huge{\@setfontsize\Huge\@xxvpt{30\p@}}\r
+\else\r
+ \def\scriptsize{\@setsize\scriptsize{8\p@}\viipt\@viipt}\r
+ \def\tiny{\@setsize\tiny{6\p@}\vpt\@vpt}\r
+ \def\large{\@setsize\large{14\p@}\xiipt\@xiipt}\r
+ \def\Large{\@setsize\Large{18\p@}\xivpt\@xivpt}\r
+ \def\LARGE{\@setsize\LARGE{20\p@}\xviipt\@xviipt}\r
+ \def\huge{\@setsize\huge{25\p@}\xxpt\@xxpt}\r
+ \def\Huge{\@setsize\Huge{30\p@}\xxvpt\@xxvpt}\r
+\fi\r
+\normalsize\r
+\r
+% make aubox hsize/number of authors up to 3, less gutter\r
+% then showbox gutter showbox gutter showbox -- GKMT Aug 99\r
+\newbox\@acmtitlebox\r
+\def\@maketitle{\newpage\r
+ \null\r
+ \setbox\@acmtitlebox\vbox{%\r
+\baselineskip 20pt\r
+\vskip 2em % Vertical space above title.\r
+ \begin{center}\r
+ {\ttlfnt \@title\par} % Title set in 18pt Helvetica (Arial) bold size.\r
+ \vskip 1.5em % Vertical space after title.\r
+%This should be the subtitle.\r
+{\subttlfnt \the\subtitletext\par}\vskip 1.25em%\fi\r
+ {\baselineskip 16pt\aufnt % each author set in \12 pt Arial, in a\r
+ \lineskip .5em % tabular environment\r
+ \begin{tabular}[t]{c}\@author\r
+ \end{tabular}\par}\r
+ \vskip 1.5em % Vertical space after author.\r
+ \end{center}}\r
+ \dimen0=\ht\@acmtitlebox\r
+ \advance\dimen0 by -12.75pc\relax % Increased space for title box -- KBT\r
+ \unvbox\@acmtitlebox\r
+ \ifdim\dimen0<0.0pt\relax\vskip-\dimen0\fi}\r
+\r
+\r
+\newcount\titlenotecount\r
+\global\titlenotecount=0\r
+\newtoks\tntoks\r
+\newtoks\tntokstwo\r
+\newtoks\tntoksthree\r
+\newtoks\tntoksfour\r
+\newtoks\tntoksfive\r
+\r
+\def\abstract{\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount>0 % was =1\r
+ \insert\footins{%\r
+ \reset@font\footnotesize\r
+ \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty\r
+ \splittopskip\footnotesep\r
+ \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM\r
+ \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore\r
+ \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%\r
+ }%\r
+ \color@begingroup\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=1\r
+ \@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\ast$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntoks\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\fi\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=2\r
+ \@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\ast$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntoks\par\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\dagger$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntokstwo\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\fi\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=3\r
+ \@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\ast$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntoks\par\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\dagger$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntokstwo\par\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\ddagger$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntoksthree\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\fi\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=4\r
+ \@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\ast$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntoks\par\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\dagger$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntokstwo\par\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\ddagger$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntoksthree\par\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\S$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntoksfour\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\fi\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=5\r
+ \@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\ast$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntoks\par\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\dagger$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntokstwo\par\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\ddagger$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntoksthree\par\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\S$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntoksfour\par\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\P$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntoksfive\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\fi\r
+ \color@endgroup} %g}\r
+\fi\r
+\setcounter{footnote}{0}\r
+\section*{ABSTRACT}\normalsize%\ninept\r
+}\r
+\r
+\def\endabstract{\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi}\r
+\r
+\def\keywords{\if@twocolumn\r
+\section*{Keywords}\r
+\else \small\r
+\quotation\r
+\fi}\r
+\r
+\def\terms{\if@twocolumn\r
+\section*{General Terms}\r
+\else \small\r
+\quotation\r
+\fi}\r
+\r
+% -- Classification needs to be a bit smart due to optionals - Gerry/Georgia November 2nd. 1999\r
+\newcount\catcount\r
+\global\catcount=1\r
+\r
+\def\category#1#2#3{%\r
+\ifnum\catcount=1\r
+\section*{Categories and Subject Descriptors}\r
+\advance\catcount by 1\else{\unskip; }\fi\r
+ \@ifnextchar [{\@category{#1}{#2}{#3}}{\@category{#1}{#2}{#3}[]}%\r
+}\r
+\r
+\def\@category#1#2#3[#4]{%\r
+ \begingroup\r
+ \let\and\relax\r
+ #1 [\textbf{#2}]%\r
+ \if!#4!%\r
+ \if!#3!\else : #3\fi\r
+ \else\r
+ :\space\r
+ \if!#3!\else #3\kern\z@---\hskip\z@\fi\r
+ \textit{#4}%\r
+ \fi\r
+ \endgroup\r
+}\r
+%\r
+\r
+%%% This section (written by KBT) handles the 1" box in the lower left\r
+%%% corner of the left column of the first page by creating a picture,\r
+%%% and inserting the predefined string at the bottom (with a negative\r
+%%% displacement to offset the space allocated for a non-existent\r
+%%% caption).\r
+%%%\r
+\newtoks\copyrightnotice\r
+\def\ftype@copyrightbox{8}\r
+\def\@copyrightspace{\r
+\@float{copyrightbox}[b]\r
+\begin{center}\r
+\setlength{\unitlength}{1pc}\r
+\begin{picture}(20,6) %Space for copyright notice\r
+\put(0,-0.95){\crnotice{\@toappear}}\r
+\end{picture}\r
+\end{center}\r
+\end@float}\r
+\r
+\def\@toappear{} % Default setting blank - commands below change this.\r
+\long\def\toappear#1{\def\@toappear{\parbox[b]{20pc}{\baselineskip 9pt#1}}}\r
+\def\toappearbox#1{\def\@toappear{\raisebox{5pt}{\framebox[20pc]{\parbox[b]{19pc}{#1}}}}}\r
+\r
+\newtoks\conf\r
+\newtoks\confinfo\r
+\def\conferenceinfo#1#2{\global\conf={#1}\global\confinfo{#2}}\r
+\r
+\r
+\def\marginpar{\@latexerr{The \marginpar command is not allowed in the\r
+ `acmconf' document style.}\@eha}\r
+\r
+\mark{{}{}} % Initializes TeX's marks\r
+\r
+\def\today{\ifcase\month\or\r
+ January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or\r
+ July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi\r
+ \space\number\day, \number\year}\r
+\r
+\def\@begintheorem#1#2{%\r
+ \parskip 0pt % GM July 2000 (for tighter spacing)\r
+ \trivlist\r
+ \item[%\r
+ \hskip 10\p@\r
+ \hskip \labelsep\r
+ {{\sc #1}\hskip 5\p@\relax#2.}%\r
+ ]\r
+ \it\r
+}\r
+\def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{%\r
+ \parskip 0pt % GM July 2000 (for tighter spacing)\r
+ \trivlist\r
+ \item[%\r
+ \hskip 10\p@\r
+ \hskip \labelsep\r
+ {\sc #1\ #2\ % This mod by Gerry to enumerate corollaries\r
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{(#3)} % and bracket the 'corollary title'\r
+ \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa>\z@ % and retain the correct numbering of e.g. theorems\r
+ \hskip 5\p@\relax % if they occur 'around' said corollaries.\r
+ \box\@tempboxa % Gerry - Nov. 1999.\r
+ \fi.}%\r
+ ]\r
+ \it\r
+}\r
+\newif\if@qeded\r
+\global\@qededfalse\r
+\r
+% -- original\r
+%\def\proof{%\r
+% \vspace{-\parskip} % GM July 2000 (for tighter spacing)\r
+% \global\@qededfalse\r
+% \@ifnextchar[{\@xproof}{\@proof}%\r
+%}\r
+% -- end of original\r
+\r
+% (JSS) Fix for vertical spacing bug - Gerry Murray July 30th. 2002\r
+\def\proof{%\r
+\vspace{-\lastskip}\vspace{-\parsep}\penalty-51%\r
+\global\@qededfalse\r
+\@ifnextchar[{\@xproof}{\@proof}%\r
+}\r
+\r
+\r
+\def\endproof{%\r
+ \if@qeded\else\qed\fi\r
+ \endtrivlist\r
+}\r
+\def\@proof{%\r
+ \trivlist\r
+ \item[%\r
+ \hskip 10\p@\r
+ \hskip \labelsep\r
+ {\sc Proof.}%\r
+ ]\r
+ \ignorespaces\r
+}\r
+\def\@xproof[#1]{%\r
+ \trivlist\r
+ \item[\hskip 10\p@\hskip \labelsep{\sc Proof #1.}]%\r
+ \ignorespaces\r
+}\r
+\def\qed{%\r
+ \unskip\r
+ \kern 10\p@\r
+ \begingroup\r
+ \unitlength\p@\r
+ \linethickness{.4\p@}%\r
+ \framebox(6,6){}%\r
+ \endgroup\r
+ \global\@qededtrue\r
+}\r
+\r
+\def\newdef#1#2{%\r
+ \expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname\r
+ {\@definecounter{#1}%\r
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{\@thmcounter{#1}}%\r
+ \global\@namedef{#1}{\@defthm{#1}{#2}}%\r
+ \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}%\r
+ }%\r
+}\r
+\def\@defthm#1#2{%\r
+ \refstepcounter{#1}%\r
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@ydefthm{#1}{#2}}{\@xdefthm{#1}{#2}}%\r
+}\r
+\def\@xdefthm#1#2{%\r
+ \@begindef{#2}{\csname the#1\endcsname}%\r
+ \ignorespaces\r
+}\r
+\def\@ydefthm#1#2[#3]{%\r
+ \trivlist\r
+ \item[%\r
+ \hskip 10\p@\r
+ \hskip \labelsep\r
+ {\it #2%\r
+ \savebox\@tempboxa{#3}%\r
+ \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa>\z@\r
+ \ \box\@tempboxa\r
+ \fi.%\r
+ }]%\r
+ \ignorespaces\r
+}\r
+\def\@begindef#1#2{%\r
+ \trivlist\r
+ \item[%\r
+ \hskip 10\p@\r
+ \hskip \labelsep\r
+ {\it #1\ \rm #2.}%\r
+ ]%\r
+}\r
+\def\theequation{\arabic{equation}}\r
+\r
+\newcounter{part}\r
+\newcounter{section}\r
+\newcounter{subsection}[section]\r
+\newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection]\r
+\newcounter{paragraph}[subsubsection]\r
+\def\thepart{\Roman{part}}\r
+\def\thesection{\arabic{section}}\r
+\def\thesubsection{\thesection.\arabic{subsection}}\r
+\def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection.\arabic{subsubsection}} %removed \subsecfnt 29 July 2002 gkmt\r
+\def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection.\arabic{paragraph}} %removed \subsecfnt 29 July 2002 gkmt\r
+\newif\if@uchead\r
+\@ucheadfalse\r
+\r
+%% CHANGES: NEW NOTE\r
+%% NOTE: OK to use old-style font commands below, since they were\r
+%% suitably redefined for LaTeX2e\r
+%% END CHANGES\r
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}\r
+\def\part{%\r
+ \@startsection{part}{9}{\z@}{-10\p@ \@plus -4\p@ \@minus -2\p@}\r
+ {4\p@}{\normalsize\@ucheadtrue}%\r
+}\r
+\def\section{%\r
+ \@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{-10\p@ \@plus -4\p@ \@minus -2\p@}% GM\r
+ {4\p@}{\baselineskip 14pt\secfnt\@ucheadtrue}%\r
+}\r
+\r
+\def\subsection{%\r
+ \@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{-8\p@ \@plus -2\p@ \@minus -\p@}\r
+ {4\p@}{\secfnt}%\r
+}\r
+\def\subsubsection{%\r
+ \@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{-8\p@ \@plus -2\p@ \@minus -\p@}%\r
+ {4\p@}{\subsecfnt}%\r
+}\r
+%\def\paragraph{%\r
+% \vskip 12pt\@startsection{paragraph}{3}{\z@}{6\p@ \@plus \p@}% original\r
+% {-5\p@}{\subsecfnt}%\r
+%}\r
+% If one wants sections, subsections and subsubsections numbered,\r
+% but not paragraphs, one usually sets secnumepth to 3.\r
+% For that, the "depth" of paragraphs must be given correctly\r
+% in the definition (``4'' instead of ``3'' as second argument\r
+% of @startsection):\r
+\def\paragraph{%\r
+ \vskip 12pt\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\z@}{6\p@ \@plus \p@}% % GM and Wolfgang May - 11/30/06\r
+ {-5\p@}{\subsecfnt}%\r
+}\r
+\let\@period=.\r
+\def\@startsection#1#2#3#4#5#6{%\r
+ \if@noskipsec %gkmt, 11 aug 99\r
+ \global\let\@period\@empty\r
+ \leavevmode\r
+ \global\let\@period.%\r
+ \fi\r
+ \par %\r
+ \@tempskipa #4\relax\r
+ \@afterindenttrue\r
+ \ifdim \@tempskipa <\z@\r
+ \@tempskipa -\@tempskipa\r
+ \@afterindentfalse\r
+ \fi\r
+ \if@nobreak\r
+ \everypar{}%\r
+ \else\r
+ \addpenalty\@secpenalty\r
+ \addvspace\@tempskipa\r
+ \fi\r
+\parskip=0pt % GM July 2000 (non numbered) section heads\r
+ \@ifstar\r
+ {\@ssect{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}\r
+ {\@dblarg{\@sect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}%\r
+}\r
+\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{%\r
+ \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\r
+ \let\@svsec\@empty\r
+ \else\r
+ \refstepcounter{#1}%\r
+ \edef\@svsec{%\r
+ \begingroup\r
+ %\ifnum#2>2 \noexpand\rm \fi % changed to next 29 July 2002 gkmt\r
+ \ifnum#2>2 \noexpand#6 \fi\r
+ \csname the#1\endcsname\r
+ \endgroup\r
+ \ifnum #2=1\relax .\fi\r
+ \hskip 1em\r
+ }%\r
+ \fi\r
+ \@tempskipa #5\relax\r
+ \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@\r
+ \begingroup\r
+ #6\relax\r
+ \@hangfrom{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}%\r
+ \begingroup\r
+ \interlinepenalty \@M\r
+ \if@uchead\r
+ \uppercase{#8}%\r
+ \else\r
+ #8%\r
+ \fi\r
+ \par\r
+ \endgroup\r
+ \endgroup\r
+ \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}%\r
+ \vskip -12pt %gkmt, 11 aug 99 and GM July 2000 (was -14) - numbered section head spacing\r
+\addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{%\r
+ \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else\r
+ \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%\r
+ \fi\r
+ #7%\r
+ }%\r
+ \else\r
+ \def\@svsechd{%\r
+ #6%\r
+ \hskip #3\relax\r
+ \@svsec\r
+ \if@uchead\r
+ \uppercase{#8}%\r
+ \else\r
+ #8%\r
+ \fi\r
+ \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}%\r
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{%\r
+ \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else\r
+ \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%\r
+ \fi\r
+ #7%\r
+ }%\r
+ }%\r
+ \fi\r
+ \@xsect{#5}\hskip 1pt\r
+ \par\r
+}\r
+\def\@xsect#1{%\r
+ \@tempskipa #1\relax\r
+ \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@\r
+ \par\r
+ \nobreak\r
+ \vskip \@tempskipa\r
+ \@afterheading\r
+ \else\r
+ \global\@nobreakfalse\r
+ \global\@noskipsectrue\r
+ \everypar{%\r
+ \if@noskipsec\r
+ \global\@noskipsecfalse\r
+ \clubpenalty\@M\r
+ \hskip -\parindent\r
+ \begingroup\r
+ \@svsechd\r
+ \@period\r
+ \endgroup\r
+ \unskip\r
+ \@tempskipa #1\relax\r
+ \hskip -\@tempskipa\r
+ \else\r
+ \clubpenalty \@clubpenalty\r
+ \everypar{}%\r
+ \fi\r
+ }%\r
+ \fi\r
+ \ignorespaces\r
+}\r
+\def\@trivlist{%\r
+ \@topsepadd\topsep\r
+ \if@noskipsec\r
+ \global\let\@period\@empty\r
+ \leavevmode\r
+ \global\let\@period.%\r
+ \fi\r
+ \ifvmode\r
+ \advance\@topsepadd\partopsep\r
+ \else\r
+ \unskip\r
+ \par\r
+ \fi\r
+ \if@inlabel\r
+ \@noparitemtrue\r
+ \@noparlisttrue\r
+ \else\r
+ \@noparlistfalse\r
+ \@topsep\@topsepadd\r
+ \fi\r
+ \advance\@topsep \parskip\r
+ \leftskip\z@skip\r
+ \rightskip\@rightskip\r
+ \parfillskip\@flushglue\r
+ \@setpar{\if@newlist\else{\@@par}\fi}\r
+ \global\@newlisttrue\r
+ \@outerparskip\parskip\r
+}\r
+\r
+%%% Actually, 'abbrev' works just fine as the default\r
+%%% Bibliography style.\r
+\r
+\typeout{Using 'Abbrev' bibliography style}\r
+\newcommand\bibyear[2]{%\r
+ \unskip\quad\ignorespaces#1\unskip\r
+ \if#2..\quad \else \quad#2 \fi\r
+}\r
+\newcommand{\bibemph}[1]{{\em#1}}\r
+\newcommand{\bibemphic}[1]{{\em#1\/}}\r
+\newcommand{\bibsc}[1]{{\sc#1}}\r
+\def\@normalcite{%\r
+ \def\@cite##1##2{[##1\if@tempswa , ##2\fi]}%\r
+}\r
+\def\@citeNB{%\r
+ \def\@cite##1##2{##1\if@tempswa , ##2\fi}%\r
+}\r
+\def\@citeRB{%\r
+ \def\@cite##1##2{##1\if@tempswa , ##2\fi]}%\r
+}\r
+\def\start@cite#1#2{%\r
+ \edef\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{%\r
+ ###1%\r
+ \ifnum#2=\z@ \else\ ###2\fi\r
+ }%\r
+ \ifnum#1=\thr@@\r
+ \let\@@cite\@citeyear\r
+ \else\r
+ \let\@@cite\@citenormal\r
+ \fi\r
+ \@ifstar{\@citeNB\@@cite}{\@normalcite\@@cite}%\r
+}\r
+\def\cite{\start@cite23}\r
+\def\citeNP{\cite*}\r
+\def\citeA{\start@cite10}\r
+\def\citeANP{\citeA*}\r
+\def\shortcite{\start@cite23}\r
+\def\shortciteNP{\shortcite*}\r
+\def\shortciteA{\start@cite20}\r
+\def\shortciteANP{\shortciteA*}\r
+\def\citeyear{\start@cite30}\r
+\def\citeyearNP{\citeyear*}\r
+\def\citeN{%\r
+ \@citeRB\r
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{##1\ [##3%\r
+ \def\reserved@a{##1}%\r
+ \def\citeauthoryear####1####2####3{%\r
+ \def\reserved@b{####1}%\r
+ \ifx\reserved@a\reserved@b\r
+ ####3%\r
+ \else\r
+ \errmessage{Package acmart Error: author mismatch\r
+ in \string\citeN^^J^^J%\r
+ See the acmart package documentation for explanation}%\r
+ \fi\r
+ }%\r
+ }%\r
+ \@ifstar\@citeyear\@citeyear\r
+}\r
+\def\shortciteN{%\r
+ \@citeRB\r
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{##2\ [##3%\r
+ \def\reserved@a{##2}%\r
+ \def\citeauthoryear####1####2####3{%\r
+ \def\reserved@b{####2}%\r
+ \ifx\reserved@a\reserved@b\r
+ ####3%\r
+ \else\r
+ \errmessage{Package acmart Error: author mismatch\r
+ in \string\shortciteN^^J^^J%\r
+ See the acmart package documentation for explanation}%\r
+ \fi\r
+ }%\r
+ }%\r
+ \@ifstar\@citeyear\@citeyear % GM July 2000\r
+}\r
+\def\@citenormal{%\r
+ \@ifnextchar [{\@tempswatrue\@citex;}\r
+ {\@tempswafalse\@citex,[]}% % GM July 2000\r
+}\r
+\def\@citeyear{%\r
+ \@ifnextchar [{\@tempswatrue\@citex,}%\r
+ {\@tempswafalse\@citex,[]}%\r
+}\r
+\def\@citex#1[#2]#3{%\r
+ \let\@citea\@empty\r
+ \@cite{%\r
+ \@for\@citeb:=#3\do{%\r
+ \@citea\r
+ \def\@citea{#1 }%\r
+ \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@iden\@citeb}%\r
+ \if@filesw\r
+ \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{\@citeb}}%\r
+ \fi\r
+ \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb}{%\r
+ {\bf ?}%\r
+ \@warning{%\r
+ Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage\space undefined%\r
+ }%\r
+ }%\r
+ {\csname b@\@citeb\endcsname}%\r
+ }%\r
+ }{#2}%\r
+}\r
+\let\@biblabel\@gobble\r
+\newdimen\bibindent\r
+\setcounter{enumi}{1}\r
+\bibindent=0em\r
+\def\thebibliography#1{% \r
+\ifnum\addauflag=0\addauthorsection\global\addauflag=1\fi\r
+ \section[References]{% <=== OPTIONAL ARGUMENT ADDED HERE\r
+ {References} % was uppercased but this affects pdf bookmarks (SP/GM October 2004)\r
+ {\vskip -9pt plus 1pt} % GM Nov. 2006 / GM July 2000 (for somewhat tighter spacing) \r
+ \@mkboth{{\refname}}{{\refname}}%\r
+ }%\r
+ \list{[\arabic{enumi}]}{%\r
+ \settowidth\labelwidth{[#1]}%\r
+ \leftmargin\labelwidth\r
+ \advance\leftmargin\labelsep\r
+ \advance\leftmargin\bibindent\r
+ \parsep=0pt\itemsep=1pt % GM July 2000\r
+ \itemindent -\bibindent\r
+ \listparindent \itemindent\r
+ \usecounter{enumi}\r
+ }%\r
+ \let\newblock\@empty\r
+ \raggedright % GM July 2000\r
+ \sloppy\r
+ \sfcode`\.=1000\relax\r
+}\r
+\r
+\r
+\gdef\balancecolumns\r
+{\vfill\eject\r
+\global\@colht=\textheight\r
+\global\ht\@cclv=\textheight\r
+}\r
+\r
+\newcount\colcntr\r
+\global\colcntr=0\r
+\newbox\savebox\r
+\r
+\gdef \@makecol {%\r
+\global\advance\colcntr by 1\r
+\ifnum\colcntr>2 \global\colcntr=1\fi\r
+ \ifvoid\footins\r
+ \setbox\@outputbox \box\@cclv\r
+ \else\r
+ \setbox\@outputbox \vbox{%\r
+\boxmaxdepth \@maxdepth\r
+ \@tempdima\dp\@cclv\r
+ \unvbox \@cclv\r
+ \vskip-\@tempdima\r
+ \vskip \skip\footins\r
+ \color@begingroup\r
+ \normalcolor\r
+ \footnoterule\r
+ \unvbox \footins\r
+ \color@endgroup\r
+ }%\r
+ \fi\r
+ \xdef\@freelist{\@freelist\@midlist}%\r
+ \global \let \@midlist \@empty\r
+ \@combinefloats\r
+ \ifvbox\@kludgeins\r
+ \@makespecialcolbox\r
+ \else\r
+ \setbox\@outputbox \vbox to\@colht {%\r
+\@texttop\r
+ \dimen@ \dp\@outputbox\r
+ \unvbox \@outputbox\r
+ \vskip -\dimen@\r
+ \@textbottom\r
+ }%\r
+ \fi\r
+ \global \maxdepth \@maxdepth\r
+}\r
+\def\titlenote{\@ifnextchar[\@xtitlenote{\stepcounter\@mpfn\r
+\global\advance\titlenotecount by 1\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=1\r
+ \raisebox{9pt}{$\ast$}\r
+\fi\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=2\r
+ \raisebox{9pt}{$\dagger$}\r
+\fi\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=3\r
+ \raisebox{9pt}{$\ddagger$}\r
+\fi\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=4\r
+\raisebox{9pt}{$\S$}\r
+\fi\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=5\r
+\raisebox{9pt}{$\P$}\r
+\fi\r
+ \@titlenotetext\r
+}}\r
+\r
+\long\def\@titlenotetext#1{\insert\footins{%\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=1\global\tntoks={#1}\fi\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=2\global\tntokstwo={#1}\fi\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=3\global\tntoksthree={#1}\fi\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=4\global\tntoksfour={#1}\fi\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=5\global\tntoksfive={#1}\fi\r
+ \reset@font\footnotesize\r
+ \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty\r
+ \splittopskip\footnotesep\r
+ \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM\r
+ \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore\r
+ \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%\r
+ }%\r
+ \color@begingroup\r
+ \color@endgroup}}\r
+\r
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
+\ps@plain\r
+\baselineskip=11pt\r
+\let\thepage\relax % For NO page numbers - GM Nov. 30th. 1999 and July 2000\r
+\def\setpagenumber#1{\global\setcounter{page}{#1}}\r
+%\pagenumbering{arabic} % Arabic page numbers GM July 2000\r
+\twocolumn % Double column.\r
+\flushbottom % Even bottom -- alas, does not balance columns at end of document\r
+\pagestyle{plain}\r
+\r
+% Need Copyright Year and Copyright Data to be user definable (in .tex file).\r
+% Gerry Nov. 30th. 1999\r
+\newtoks\copyrtyr\r
+\newtoks\acmcopyr\r
+\newtoks\boilerplate\r
+\global\acmcopyr={X-XXXXX-XX-X/XX/XX} % Default - 5/11/2001 *** Gerry\r
+\global\copyrtyr={200X} % Default - 3/3/2003 *** Gerry\r
+\def\CopyrightYear#1{\global\copyrtyr{#1}}\r
+\def\crdata#1{\global\acmcopyr{#1}}\r
+\def\permission#1{\global\boilerplate{#1}}\r
+%\r
+\global\boilerplate={Copyright is held by the author/owner(s).}\r
+\newtoks\copyrightetc\r
+\global\copyrightetc{ACM \the\acmcopyr}\r
+\r
+\toappear{\the\boilerplate\par\r
+{\confname{\the\conf}} \the\confinfo\par \the\copyrightetc.}\r
+%\DeclareFixedFont{\altcrnotice}{OT1}{tmr}{m}{n}{8} % << patch needed for accenting e.g. Montreal - Gerry, May 2007\r
+%\DeclareFixedFont{\altconfname}{OT1}{tmr}{m}{it}{8} % << patch needed for accenting in italicized confname - Gerry, May 2007\r
+%\r
+%{\altconfname{{\the\conf}}} {\altcrnotice\the\confinfo\par} \the\copyrightetc.} % << Gerry, May 2007\r
+%\r
+%% End of sig-alt-release.cls -- V1.5 - 6/07/2007 --\r
+%% Gerry Murray -- Thursday June 7th. 2007\r
+%\r
+% For proper (font) accenting we NEED these packages to be part of the .cls file i.e. 'ae', 'aecompl' and 'aeguil' \r
+% ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~\r
+%% This is file `ae.sty' \r
+\def\fileversion{1.3}\r
+\def\filedate{2001/02/12}\r
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}\r
+%\ProvidesPackage{ae}[\filedate\space\fileversion\space % GM\r
+% Almost European Computer Modern] % GM - keeping the log file clean(er)\r
+\newif\if@ae@slides \@ae@slidesfalse\r
+\DeclareOption{slides}{\@ae@slidestrue}\r
+\ProcessOptions\r
+\fontfamily{aer}\r
+\RequirePackage[T1]{fontenc}\r
+\if@ae@slides\r
+ \renewcommand{\sfdefault}{laess}\r
+ \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{laess} % no roman\r
+ \renewcommand{\ttdefault}{laett}\r
+\else\r
+ \renewcommand{\sfdefault}{aess}\r
+ \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{aer}\r
+ \renewcommand{\ttdefault}{aett}\r
+\fi\r
+\endinput\r
+%% \r
+%% End of file `ae.sty'.\r
+%\r
+%\r
+\def\fileversion{0.9}\r
+\def\filedate{1998/07/23}\r
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}\r
+%\ProvidesPackage{aecompl}[\filedate\space\fileversion\space % GM\r
+%T1 Complements for AE fonts (D. Roegel)] % GM -- keeping the log file clean(er)\r
+ \r
+\def\@ae@compl#1{{\fontencoding{T1}\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\symbol{#1}}}\r
+\def\guillemotleft{\@ae@compl{19}}\r
+\def\guillemotright{\@ae@compl{20}}\r
+\def\guilsinglleft{\@ae@compl{14}}\r
+\def\guilsinglright{\@ae@compl{15}}\r
+\def\TH{\@ae@compl{222}}\r
+\def\NG{\@ae@compl{141}}\r
+\def\ng{\@ae@compl{173}}\r
+\def\th{\@ae@compl{254}}\r
+\def\DJ{\@ae@compl{208}}\r
+\def\dj{\@ae@compl{158}}\r
+\def\DH{\@ae@compl{208}}\r
+\def\dh{\@ae@compl{240}}\r
+\def\@perthousandzero{\@ae@compl{24}}\r
+\def\textperthousand{\%\@perthousandzero}\r
+\def\textpertenthousand{\%\@perthousandzero\@perthousandzero}\r
+\endinput\r
+%\r
+%\r
+%% This is file `aeguill.sty' \r
+% This file gives french guillemets (and not guillemots!)\r
+% built with the Polish CMR fonts (default), WNCYR fonts, the LASY fonts \r
+% or with the EC fonts. \r
+% This is useful in conjunction with the ae package\r
+% (this package loads the ae package in case it has not been loaded)\r
+% and with or without the french(le) package.\r
+%\r
+% In order to get the guillemets, it is necessary to either type\r
+% \guillemotleft and \guillemotright, or to use an 8 bit encoding\r
+% (such as ISO-Latin1) which selects these two commands, \r
+% or, if you use the french package (but not the frenchle package), \r
+% to type << or >>.\r
+%\r
+% By default, you get the Polish CMR guillemets; if this package is loaded\r
+% with the `cm' option, you get the LASY guillemets; with `ec,' you\r
+% get the EC guillemets, and with `cyr,' you get the cyrillic guillemets.\r
+%\r
+% In verbatim mode, you always get the EC/TT guillemets.\r
+%\r
+% The default option is interesting in conjunction with PDF,\r
+% because there is a Type 1 version of the Polish CMR fonts\r
+% and these guillemets are very close in shape to the EC guillemets.\r
+% There are no free Type 1 versions of the EC fonts.\r
+%\r
+% Support for Polish CMR guillemets was kindly provided by \r
+% Rolf Niepraschk <niepraschk@ptb.de> in version 0.99 (2000/05/22).\r
+% Bernd Raichle provided extensive simplifications to the code\r
+% for version 1.00.\r
+%\r
+% This package is released under the LPPL.\r
+%\r
+% Changes:\r
+% Date version\r
+% 2001/04/12 1.01 the frenchle and french package are now distinguished.\r
+%\r
+\def\fileversion{1.01}\r
+\def\filedate{2001/04/12}\r
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}\r
+%\ProvidesPackage{aeguill}[2001/04/12 1.01 % % GM\r
+%AE fonts with french guillemets (D. Roegel)] % GM - keeping the log file clean(er)\r
+%\RequirePackage{ae} % GM May 2007 - already embedded here\r
+\r
+\newcommand{\@ae@switch}[4]{#4}\r
+\DeclareOption{ec}{\renewcommand\@ae@switch[4]{#1}}\r
+\DeclareOption{cm}{\renewcommand\@ae@switch[4]{#2}}\r
+\DeclareOption{cyr}{\renewcommand\@ae@switch[4]{#3}}\r
+\DeclareOption{pl}{\renewcommand\@ae@switch[4]{#4}}\r
+\ExecuteOptions{pl}\r
+\ProcessOptions\r
+\r
+%\r
+% Load necessary packages\r
+%\r
+\@ae@switch{% ec\r
+ % do nothing\r
+}{% cm\r
+ \RequirePackage{latexsym}% GM - May 2007 - already 'mentioned as required' up above\r
+}{% cyr\r
+ \RequirePackage[OT2,T1]{fontenc}%\r
+}{% pl\r
+ \RequirePackage[OT4,T1]{fontenc}%\r
+}\r
+\r
+% The following command will be compared to \frenchname,\r
+% as defined in french.sty and frenchle.sty.\r
+\def\aeguillfrenchdefault{french}%\r
+\r
+\let\guill@verbatim@font\verbatim@font\r
+\def\verbatim@font{\guill@verbatim@font\ecguills{cmtt}%\r
+ \let\guillemotleft\@oguills\let\guillemotright\@fguills}\r
+\r
+\begingroup \catcode`\<=13 \catcode`\>=13\r
+\def\x{\endgroup\r
+ \def\ae@lfguill{<<}%\r
+ \def\ae@rfguill{>>}%\r
+}\x\r
+\r
+\newcommand{\ecguills}[1]{%\r
+ \def\selectguillfont{\fontencoding{T1}\fontfamily{#1}\selectfont}%\r
+ \def\@oguills{{\selectguillfont\symbol{19}}}%\r
+ \def\@fguills{{\selectguillfont\symbol{20}}}%\r
+ } \r
+\r
+\newcommand{\aeguills}{%\r
+ \ae@guills\r
+ % We redefine \guillemotleft and \guillemotright\r
+ % in order to catch them when they are used \r
+ % with \DeclareInputText (in latin1.def for instance)\r
+ % We use \auxWARNINGi as a safe indicator that french.sty is used.\r
+ \gdef\guillemotleft{\ifx\auxWARNINGi\undefined\r
+ \@oguills % neither french.sty nor frenchle.sty\r
+ \else\r
+ \ifx\aeguillfrenchdefault\frenchname\r
+ \ae@lfguill % french.sty\r
+ \else\r
+ \@oguills % frenchle.sty\r
+ \fi\r
+ \fi}%\r
+ \gdef\guillemotright{\ifx\auxWARNINGi\undefined\r
+ \@fguills % neither french.sty nor frenchle.sty\r
+ \else\r
+ \ifx\aeguillfrenchdefault\frenchname\r
+ \ae@rfguill % french.sty\r
+ \else\r
+ \@fguills % frenchle.sty\r
+ \fi\r
+ \fi}%\r
+ }\r
+\r
+%\r
+% Depending on the class option\r
+% define the internal command \ae@guills\r
+\@ae@switch{% ec\r
+ \newcommand{\ae@guills}{%\r
+ \ecguills{cmr}}%\r
+}{% cm\r
+ \newcommand{\ae@guills}{%\r
+ \def\selectguillfont{\fontencoding{U}\fontfamily{lasy}%\r
+ \fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\selectfont}%\r
+ \def\@oguills{\leavevmode\nobreak\r
+ \hbox{\selectguillfont (\kern-.20em(\kern.20em}\nobreak}%\r
+ \def\@fguills{\leavevmode\nobreak\r
+ \hbox{\selectguillfont \kern.20em)\kern-.2em)}%\r
+ \ifdim\fontdimen\@ne\font>\z@\/\fi}}%\r
+}{% cyr\r
+ \newcommand{\ae@guills}{%\r
+ \def\selectguillfont{\fontencoding{OT2}\fontfamily{wncyr}\selectfont}%\r
+ \def\@oguills{{\selectguillfont\symbol{60}}}%\r
+ \def\@fguills{{\selectguillfont\symbol{62}}}}\r
+}{% pl\r
+ \newcommand{\ae@guills}{%\r
+ \def\selectguillfont{\fontencoding{OT4}\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont}%\r
+ \def\@oguills{{\selectguillfont\symbol{174}}}%\r
+ \def\@fguills{{\selectguillfont\symbol{175}}}}\r
+}\r
+\r
+\r
+\AtBeginDocument{%\r
+ \ifx\GOfrench\undefined\r
+ \aeguills\r
+ \else\r
+ \let\aeguill@GOfrench\GOfrench\r
+ \gdef\GOfrench{\aeguill@GOfrench \aeguills}%\r
+ \fi\r
+ }\r
+\r
+\endinput\r
+%\r
+%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~\r
+\r
+\r
+\r
+\r
--- /dev/null
+% SIG-ALT-RELEASE2.CLS - VERSION 1.5\r
+% "COMPATIBLE" WITH THE "ACM_PROC_ARTICLE-SP.CLS" V3.1SP\r
+% PRODUCES A 'TIGHTER' PAPER AND DOES INCLUDE A RELEASE STATEMENT\r
+% Gerald Murray June 7th. 2007\r
+%\r
+% ---- Start of 'updates' ----\r
+%\r
+% To produce Type 1 fonts in the document plus allow for 'normal LaTeX accenting' in the critical areas;\r
+% title, author block, section-heads, confname, etc. etc. \r
+% i.e. the whole purpose of this version update is to NOT resort to 'inelegant accent patches'.\r
+% After much research, three extra .sty packages were added to the the tail (ae, aecompl, aeguill) to solve,\r
+% in particular, the accenting problem(s). We _could_ ask authors (via instructions/sample file) to 'include' these in\r
+% the source .tex file - in the preamble - but if everything is already provided ('behind the scenes' - embedded IN the .cls)\r
+% then this is less work for authors and also makes everything appear 'vanilla'.\r
+% NOTE: all 'patchwork accenting" has been commented out (here) and is no longer 'used' in the sample .tex file (either).\r
+% Gerry June 2007\r
+%\r
+% Patch for accenting in conference name/location. Gerry May 3rd. 2007\r
+% Rule widths changed to .5, author count (>6) fixed, roll-back for Type 3 problem. Gerry March 20th. 2007\r
+% Changes made to 'modernize' the fontnames but esp. for MikTeX users V2.4/2.5 - Nov. 30th. 2006\r
+% Updated the \email definition to allow for its use inside of 'shared affiliations' - Nov. 30th. 2006\r
+% Fixed the 'section number depth value' - Nov. 30th. 2006\r
+%\r
+% Footnotes inside table cells using \minipage (Oct. 2002)\r
+% Georgia fixed bug in sub-sub-section numbering in paragraphs (July 29th. 2002)\r
+% JS/GM fix to vertical spacing before Proofs (July 30th. 2002)\r
+%\r
+% Made the Permission Statement / Conference Info / Copyright Info\r
+% 'user definable' in the source .tex file OR automatic if\r
+% not specified.\r
+%\r
+% Allowance made to switch default fonts between those systems using\r
+% normal/modern font names and those using 'Type 1' or 'Truetype' fonts.\r
+% See LINE NUMBER 255 for details.\r
+% Also provided for enumerated/annotated Corollaries 'surrounded' by\r
+% enumerated Theorems (line 848).\r
+% Gerry November 11th. 1999\r
+%\r
+% ---- End of 'updates' ----\r
+%\r
+\def\fileversion{v1.5} % for ACM's tracking purposes\r
+\def\filedate{June 7, 2007} % Gerry Murray's tracking data\r
+\def\docdate {Thursday 7th. June 2007} % Gerry Murray (with deltas to doc}\r
+\usepackage{epsfig}\r
+\usepackage{amssymb}\r
+\usepackage{amsmath}\r
+\usepackage{amsfonts}\r
+% Need this for accents in Arial/Helvetica\r
+%\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} % Gerry March 12, 2007 - causes Type 3 problems (body text)\r
+%\usepackage{textcomp}\r
+%\r
+% SIG-ALT-RELEASE2 DOCUMENT STYLE\r
+% G.K.M. Tobin August-October 1999\r
+% adapted from ARTICLE document style by Ken Traub, Olin Shivers\r
+% also using elements of esub2acm.cls\r
+% HEAVILY MODIFIED, SUBSEQUENTLY, BY GERRY MURRAY 2000\r
+% ARTICLE DOCUMENT STYLE -- Released 16 March 1988\r
+% for LaTeX version 2.09\r
+% Copyright (C) 1988 by Leslie Lamport\r
+%\r
+%\r
+%%% sig-alt-release2.cls is an 'ALTERNATE-RELEASE' document style for producing\r
+%%% two-column camera-ready pages for ACM conferences.\r
+%%% THIS FILE DOES NOT STRICTLY ADHERE TO THE SIGS (BOARD-ENDORSED)\r
+%%% PROCEEDINGS STYLE. It has been designed to produce a 'tighter'\r
+%%% paper in response to concerns over page budgets.\r
+%%% The main features of this style are:\r
+%%%\r
+%%% 1) Two columns.\r
+%%% 2) Side and top margins of 4.5pc, bottom margin of 6pc, column gutter of\r
+%%% 2pc, hence columns are 20pc wide and 55.5pc tall. (6pc =3D 1in, approx)\r
+%%% 3) First page has title information, and an extra 6pc of space at the\r
+%%% bottom of the first column for the ACM copyright notice.\r
+%%% 4) Text is 9pt on 10pt baselines; titles (except main) are 9pt bold.\r
+%%%\r
+%%%\r
+%%% There are a few restrictions you must observe:\r
+%%%\r
+%%% 1) You cannot change the font size; ACM wants you to use 9pt.\r
+%%% 3) You must start your paper with the \maketitle command. Prior to the\r
+%%% \maketitle you must have \title and \author commands. If you have a\r
+%%% \date command it will be ignored; no date appears on the paper, since\r
+%%% the proceedings will have a date on the front cover.\r
+%%% 4) Marginal paragraphs, tables of contents, lists of figures and tables,\r
+%%% and page headings are all forbidden.\r
+%%% 5) The `figure' environment will produce a figure one column wide; if you\r
+%%% want one that is two columns wide, use `figure*'.\r
+%%%\r
+%\r
+%%% Copyright Space:\r
+%%% This style automatically reserves 1" blank space at the bottom of page 1/\r
+%%% column 1. This space can optionally be filled with some text using the\r
+%%% \toappear{...} command. If used, this command must be BEFORE the \maketitle\r
+%%% command. If this command is defined AND [preprint] is on, then the\r
+%%% space is filled with the {...} text (at the bottom); otherwise, it is\r
+%%% blank. If you use \toappearbox{...} instead of \toappear{...} then a\r
+%%% box will be drawn around the text (if [preprint] is on).\r
+%%%\r
+%%% A typical usage looks like this:\r
+%%% \toappear{To appear in the Ninth AES Conference on Medievil Lithuanian\r
+%%% Embalming Technique, June 1991, Alfaretta, Georgia.}\r
+%%% This will be included in the preprint, and left out of the conference\r
+%%% version.\r
+%%%\r
+%%% WARNING:\r
+%%% Some dvi-ps converters heuristically allow chars to drift from their\r
+%%% true positions a few pixels. This may be noticeable with the 9pt sans-serif\r
+%%% bold font used for section headers.\r
+%%% You may turn this hackery off via the -e option:\r
+%%% dvips -e 0 foo.dvi >foo.ps\r
+%%%\r
+\typeout{Document Class 'sig-alt-release2' <7th. June '07>. Modified by G.K.M. Tobin/Gerry Murray}\r
+\typeout{Based in part upon document Style `acmconf' <22 May 89>. Hacked 4/91 by}\r
+\typeout{shivers@cs.cmu.edu, 4/93 by theobald@cs.mcgill.ca}\r
+\typeout{Excerpts were taken from (Journal Style) 'esub2acm.cls'.}\r
+\typeout{****** Bugs/comments/suggestions/technicalities to Gerry Murray -- murray@hq.acm.org ******}\r
+\typeout{Questions on the style, SIGS policies, etc. to Gerry Murray at ACM murray@acm.org}\r
+\oddsidemargin 4.5pc\r
+\evensidemargin 4.5pc\r
+\advance\oddsidemargin by -1in % Correct for LaTeX gratuitousness\r
+\advance\evensidemargin by -1in % Correct for LaTeX gratuitousness\r
+\marginparwidth 0pt % Margin pars are not allowed.\r
+\marginparsep 11pt % Horizontal space between outer margin and\r
+ % marginal note\r
+\r
+ % Top of page:\r
+\topmargin 4.5pc % Nominal distance from top of page to top of\r
+ % box containing running head.\r
+\advance\topmargin by -1in % Correct for LaTeX gratuitousness\r
+\headheight 0pt % Height of box containing running head.\r
+\headsep 0pt % Space between running head and text.\r
+ % Bottom of page:\r
+\footskip 30pt % Distance from baseline of box containing foot\r
+ % to baseline of last line of text.\r
+\@ifundefined{footheight}{\newdimen\footheight}{}% this is for LaTeX2e\r
+\footheight 12pt % Height of box containing running foot.\r
+\r
+%% Must redefine the top margin so there's room for headers and\r
+%% page numbers if you are using the preprint option. Footers\r
+%% are OK as is. Olin.\r
+\advance\topmargin by -37pt % Leave 37pt above text for headers\r
+\headheight 12pt % Height of box containing running head.\r
+\headsep 25pt % Space between running head and text.\r
+\r
+\textheight 666pt % 9 1/4 column height\r
+\textwidth 42pc % Width of text line.\r
+ % For two-column mode:\r
+\columnsep 2pc % Space between columns\r
+\columnseprule 0pt % Width of rule between columns.\r
+\hfuzz 1pt % Allow some variation in column width, otherwise it's\r
+ % too hard to typeset in narrow columns.\r
+\r
+\footnotesep 5.6pt % Height of strut placed at the beginning of every\r
+ % footnote =3D height of normal \footnotesize strut,\r
+ % so no extra space between footnotes.\r
+\r
+\skip\footins 8.1pt plus 4pt minus 2pt % Space between last line of text and\r
+ % top of first footnote.\r
+\floatsep 11pt plus 2pt minus 2pt % Space between adjacent floats moved\r
+ % to top or bottom of text page.\r
+\textfloatsep 18pt plus 2pt minus 4pt % Space between main text and floats\r
+ % at top or bottom of page.\r
+\intextsep 11pt plus 2pt minus 2pt % Space between in-text figures and\r
+ % text.\r
+\@ifundefined{@maxsep}{\newdimen\@maxsep}{}% this is for LaTeX2e\r
+\@maxsep 18pt % The maximum of \floatsep,\r
+ % \textfloatsep and \intextsep (minus\r
+ % the stretch and shrink).\r
+\dblfloatsep 11pt plus 2pt minus 2pt % Same as \floatsep for double-column\r
+ % figures in two-column mode.\r
+\dbltextfloatsep 18pt plus 2pt minus 4pt% \textfloatsep for double-column\r
+ % floats.\r
+\@ifundefined{@dblmaxsep}{\newdimen\@dblmaxsep}{}% this is for LaTeX2e\r
+\@dblmaxsep 18pt % The maximum of \dblfloatsep and\r
+ % \dbltexfloatsep.\r
+\@fptop 0pt plus 1fil % Stretch at top of float page/column. (Must be\r
+ % 0pt plus ...)\r
+\@fpsep 8pt plus 2fil % Space between floats on float page/column.\r
+\@fpbot 0pt plus 1fil % Stretch at bottom of float page/column. (Must be\r
+ % 0pt plus ... )\r
+\@dblfptop 0pt plus 1fil % Stretch at top of float page. (Must be 0pt plus ...)\r
+\@dblfpsep 8pt plus 2fil % Space between floats on float page.\r
+\@dblfpbot 0pt plus 1fil % Stretch at bottom of float page. (Must be\r
+ % 0pt plus ... )\r
+\marginparpush 5pt % Minimum vertical separation between two marginal\r
+ % notes.\r
+\r
+\parskip 0pt plus 1pt % Extra vertical space between paragraphs.\r
+\parindent 9pt % GM July 2000 / was 0pt - width of paragraph indentation.\r
+\partopsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt% Extra vertical space, in addition to\r
+ % \parskip and \topsep, added when user\r
+ % leaves blank line before environment.\r
+\r
+\@lowpenalty 51 % Produced by \nopagebreak[1] or \nolinebreak[1]\r
+\@medpenalty 151 % Produced by \nopagebreak[2] or \nolinebreak[2]\r
+\@highpenalty 301 % Produced by \nopagebreak[3] or \nolinebreak[3]\r
+\r
+\@beginparpenalty -\@lowpenalty % Before a list or paragraph environment.\r
+\@endparpenalty -\@lowpenalty % After a list or paragraph environment.\r
+\@itempenalty -\@lowpenalty % Between list items.\r
+\r
+\@namedef{ds@10pt}{\@latexerr{The `10pt' option is not allowed in the `acmconf'\r
+ document style.}\@eha}\r
+\@namedef{ds@11pt}{\@latexerr{The `11pt' option is not allowed in the `acmconf'\r
+ document style.}\@eha}\r
+\@namedef{ds@12pt}{\@latexerr{The `12pt' option is not allowed in the `acmconf'\r
+ document style.}\@eha}\r
+\r
+\@options\r
+\r
+\lineskip 2pt % \lineskip is 1pt for all font sizes.\r
+\normallineskip 2pt\r
+\def\baselinestretch{1}\r
+\r
+\abovedisplayskip 9pt plus2pt minus4.5pt%\r
+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip\r
+\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ plus3pt%\r
+\belowdisplayshortskip 5.4pt plus3pt minus3pt%\r
+\let\@listi\@listI % Setting of \@listi added 9 Jun 87\r
+\r
+\def\small{\@setsize\small{9pt}\viiipt\@viiipt\r
+\abovedisplayskip 7.6pt plus 3pt minus 4pt%\r
+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip\r
+\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ plus2pt%\r
+\belowdisplayshortskip 3.6pt plus2pt minus 2pt\r
+\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini %% Added 22 Dec 87\r
+\topsep 4pt plus 2pt minus 2pt\parsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt\r
+\itemsep \parsep}}\r
+\r
+\def\footnotesize{\@setsize\footnotesize{9pt}\ixpt\@ixpt\r
+\abovedisplayskip 6.4pt plus 2pt minus 4pt%\r
+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip\r
+\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ plus 1pt%\r
+\belowdisplayshortskip 2.7pt plus 1pt minus 2pt\r
+\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini %% Added 22 Dec 87\r
+\topsep 3pt plus 1pt minus 1pt\parsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt\r
+\itemsep \parsep}}\r
+\r
+\newcount\aucount\r
+\newcount\originalaucount\r
+\newdimen\auwidth\r
+\auwidth=\textwidth\r
+\newdimen\auskip\r
+\newcount\auskipcount\r
+\newdimen\auskip\r
+\global\auskip=1pc\r
+\newdimen\allauboxes\r
+\allauboxes=\auwidth\r
+\newtoks\addauthors\r
+\newcount\addauflag\r
+\global\addauflag=0 %Haven't shown additional authors yet\r
+\r
+\newtoks\subtitletext\r
+\gdef\subtitle#1{\subtitletext={#1}}\r
+\r
+\gdef\additionalauthors#1{\addauthors={#1}}\r
+\r
+\gdef\numberofauthors#1{\global\aucount=#1\r
+\ifnum\aucount>3\global\originalaucount=\aucount \global\aucount=3\fi %g}\r
+\global\auskipcount=\aucount\global\advance\auskipcount by 1\r
+\global\multiply\auskipcount by 2\r
+\global\multiply\auskip by \auskipcount\r
+\global\advance\auwidth by -\auskip\r
+\global\divide\auwidth by \aucount}\r
+\r
+% \and was modified to count the number of authors. GKMT 12 Aug 1999\r
+\def\alignauthor{% % \begin{tabular}\r
+\end{tabular}%\r
+ \begin{tabular}[t]{p{\auwidth}}\centering}%\r
+\r
+% *** NOTE *** NOTE *** NOTE *** NOTE ***\r
+% If you have 'font problems' then you may need\r
+% to change these, e.g. 'arialb' instead of "arialbd".\r
+% Gerry Murray 11/11/1999\r
+% *** OR ** comment out block A and activate block B or vice versa.\r
+% **********************************************\r
+%\r
+% -- Start of block A -- (Type 1 or Truetype fonts)\r
+%\newfont{\secfnt}{timesbd at 12pt} % was timenrb originally - now is timesbd\r
+%\newfont{\secit}{timesbi at 12pt} %13 Jan 00 gkmt\r
+%\newfont{\subsecfnt}{timesi at 11pt} % was timenrri originally - now is timesi\r
+%\newfont{\subsecit}{timesbi at 11pt} % 13 Jan 00 gkmt -- was times changed to timesbi gm 2/4/2000\r
+% % because "normal" is italic, "italic" is Roman\r
+%\newfont{\ttlfnt}{arialbd at 18pt} % was arialb originally - now is arialbd\r
+%\newfont{\ttlit}{arialbi at 18pt} % 13 Jan 00 gkmt\r
+%\newfont{\subttlfnt}{arial at 14pt} % was arialr originally - now is arial\r
+%\newfont{\subttlit}{ariali at 14pt} % 13 Jan 00 gkmt\r
+%\newfont{\subttlbf}{arialbd at 14pt} % 13 Jan 00 gkmt\r
+%\newfont{\aufnt}{arial at 12pt} % was arialr originally - now is arial\r
+%\newfont{\auit}{ariali at 12pt} % 13 Jan 00 gkmt\r
+%\newfont{\affaddr}{arial at 10pt} % was arialr originally - now is arial\r
+%\newfont{\affaddrit}{ariali at 10pt} %13 Jan 00 gkmt\r
+%\newfont{\eaddfnt}{arial at 12pt} % was arialr originally - now is arial\r
+%\newfont{\ixpt}{times at 9pt} % was timenrr originally - now is times\r
+%\newfont{\confname}{timesi at 8pt} % was timenrri - now is timesi\r
+%\newfont{\crnotice}{times at 8pt} % was timenrr originally - now is times\r
+%\newfont{\ninept}{times at 9pt} % was timenrr originally - now is times\r
+\r
+% *********************************************\r
+% -- End of block A --\r
+%\r
+%\r
+% -- Start of block B -- UPDATED FONT NAMES\r
+% *********************************************\r
+% Gerry Murray 11/30/2006\r
+% *********************************************\r
+\newfont{\secfnt}{ptmb8t at 12pt}\r
+\newfont{\secit}{ptmbi8t at 12pt} %13 Jan 00 gkmt\r
+\newfont{\subsecfnt}{ptmri8t at 11pt}\r
+\newfont{\subsecit}{ptmbi8t at 11pt} % \r
+\newfont{\ttlfnt}{phvb8t at 18pt}\r
+\newfont{\ttlit}{phvbo8t at 18pt} % GM 2/4/2000\r
+\newfont{\subttlfnt}{phvr8t at 14pt}\r
+\newfont{\subttlit}{phvro8t at 14pt} % GM 2/4/2000\r
+\newfont{\subttlbf}{phvb8t at 14pt} % 13 Jan 00 gkmt\r
+\newfont{\aufnt}{phvr8t at 12pt}\r
+\newfont{\auit}{phvro8t at 12pt} % GM 2/4/2000\r
+\newfont{\affaddr}{phvr8t at 10pt}\r
+\newfont{\affaddrit}{phvro8t at 10pt} % GM 2/4/2000\r
+\newfont{\eaddfnt}{phvr8t at 12pt}\r
+\newfont{\ixpt}{ptmr8t at 9pt}\r
+\newfont{\confname}{ptmri8t at 8pt}\r
+\newfont{\crnotice}{ptmr8t at 8pt}\r
+\newfont{\ninept}{ptmr8t at 9pt}\r
+% +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++\r
+% -- End of block B --\r
+\r
+%\def\email#1{{{\eaddfnt{\vskip 4pt#1}}}}\r
+% If we have an email, inside a "shared affiliation" then we need the following instead\r
+\def\email#1{{{\eaddfnt{\par #1}}}} % revised - GM - 11/30/2006\r
+\r
+\def\addauthorsection{\ifnum\originalaucount>6 % was 3 - Gerry March 2007\r
+ \section{Additional Authors}\the\addauthors\r
+ \fi}\r
+\r
+\newcount\savesection\r
+\newcount\sectioncntr\r
+\global\sectioncntr=1\r
+\r
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}\r
+\r
+\def\appendix{\par\r
+\section*{APPENDIX}\r
+\setcounter{section}{0}\r
+ \setcounter{subsection}{0}\r
+ \def\thesection{\Alph{section}} }\r
+\r
+\leftmargini 22.5pt\r
+\leftmarginii 19.8pt % > \labelsep + width of '(m)'\r
+\leftmarginiii 16.8pt % > \labelsep + width of 'vii.'\r
+\leftmarginiv 15.3pt % > \labelsep + width of 'M.'\r
+\leftmarginv 9pt\r
+\leftmarginvi 9pt\r
+\r
+\leftmargin\leftmargini\r
+\labelsep 4.5pt\r
+\labelwidth\leftmargini\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep\r
+\r
+\def\@listI{\leftmargin\leftmargini \parsep 3.6pt plus 2pt minus 1pt%\r
+\topsep 7.2pt plus 2pt minus 4pt%\r
+\itemsep 3.6pt plus 2pt minus 1pt}\r
+\r
+\let\@listi\@listI\r
+\@listi\r
+\r
+\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii\r
+ \labelwidth\leftmarginii\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep\r
+ \topsep 3.6pt plus 2pt minus 1pt\r
+ \parsep 1.8pt plus 0.9pt minus 0.9pt\r
+ \itemsep \parsep}\r
+\r
+\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii\r
+ \labelwidth\leftmarginiii\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep\r
+ \topsep 1.8pt plus 0.9pt minus 0.9pt\r
+ \parsep \z@ \partopsep 1pt plus 0pt minus 1pt\r
+ \itemsep \topsep}\r
+\r
+\def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv\r
+ \labelwidth\leftmarginiv\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}\r
+\r
+\def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv\r
+ \labelwidth\leftmarginv\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}\r
+\r
+\def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi\r
+ \labelwidth\leftmarginvi\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}\r
+\r
+\def\labelenumi{\theenumi.}\r
+\def\theenumi{\arabic{enumi}}\r
+\r
+\def\labelenumii{(\theenumii)}\r
+\def\theenumii{\alph{enumii}}\r
+\def\p@enumii{\theenumi}\r
+\r
+\def\labelenumiii{\theenumiii.}\r
+\def\theenumiii{\roman{enumiii}}\r
+\def\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)}\r
+\r
+\def\labelenumiv{\theenumiv.}\r
+\def\theenumiv{\Alph{enumiv}}\r
+\def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii}\r
+\r
+\def\labelitemi{$\bullet$}\r
+\def\labelitemii{\bf --}\r
+\def\labelitemiii{$\ast$}\r
+\def\labelitemiv{$\cdot$}\r
+\r
+\def\verse{\let\\=\@centercr\r
+ \list{}{\itemsep\z@ \itemindent -1.5em\listparindent \itemindent\r
+ \rightmargin\leftmargin\advance\leftmargin 1.5em}\item[]}\r
+\let\endverse\endlist\r
+\r
+\def\quotation{\list{}{\listparindent 1.5em\r
+ \itemindent\listparindent\r
+ \rightmargin\leftmargin \parsep 0pt plus 1pt}\item[]}\r
+\let\endquotation=\endlist\r
+\r
+\def\quote{\list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}\item[]}\r
+\let\endquote=\endlist\r
+\r
+\def\descriptionlabel#1{\hspace\labelsep \bf #1}\r
+\def\description{\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin\r
+ \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}}\r
+\r
+\let\enddescription\endlist\r
+\r
+\def\theequation{\arabic{equation}}\r
+\r
+\arraycolsep 4.5pt % Half the space between columns in an array environment.\r
+\tabcolsep 5.4pt % Half the space between columns in a tabular environment.\r
+\arrayrulewidth .5pt % Width of rules in array and tabular environment. % (was .4) updated Gerry March 20 2007\r
+\doublerulesep 1.8pt % Space between adjacent rules in array or tabular env.\r
+\r
+\tabbingsep \labelsep % Space used by the \' command. (See LaTeX manual.)\r
+\r
+\skip\@mpfootins =\skip\footins\r
+\r
+\fboxsep =2.7pt % Space left between box and text by \fbox and \framebox.\r
+\fboxrule =.5pt % Width of rules in box made by \fbox and \framebox. % (was .4) updated Gerry March 20 2007\r
+\r
+\def\thepart{\Roman{part}} % Roman numeral part numbers.\r
+\def\thesection {\arabic{section}}\r
+\def\thesubsection {\thesection.\arabic{subsection}}\r
+%\def\thesubsubsection {\thesubsection.\arabic{subsubsection}} % GM 7/30/2002\r
+%\def\theparagraph {\thesubsubsection.\arabic{paragraph}} % GM 7/30/2002\r
+\def\thesubparagraph {\theparagraph.\arabic{subparagraph}}\r
+\r
+\def\@pnumwidth{1.55em}\r
+\def\@tocrmarg {2.55em}\r
+\def\@dotsep{4.5}\r
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{3}\r
+\r
+\def\tableofcontents{\@latexerr{\tableofcontents: Tables of contents are not\r
+ allowed in the `acmconf' document style.}\@eha}\r
+\r
+\def\l@part#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty}\r
+ \addvspace{2.25em plus 1pt} % space above part line\r
+ \begingroup\r
+ \@tempdima 3em % width of box holding part number, used by\r
+ \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth %% \numberline\r
+ \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth\r
+ {\large \bf % set line in \large boldface\r
+ \leavevmode % TeX command to enter horizontal mode.\r
+ #1\hfil \hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}}\par\r
+ \nobreak % Never break after part entry\r
+ \endgroup}\r
+\r
+\def\l@section#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty} % good place for page break\r
+ \addvspace{1.0em plus 1pt} % space above toc entry\r
+ \@tempdima 1.5em % width of box holding section number\r
+ \begingroup\r
+ \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth\r
+ \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth\r
+ \bf % Boldface.\r
+ \leavevmode % TeX command to enter horizontal mode.\r
+ \advance\leftskip\@tempdima %% added 5 Feb 88 to conform to\r
+ \hskip -\leftskip %% 25 Jan 88 change to \numberline\r
+ #1\nobreak\hfil \nobreak\hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par\r
+ \endgroup}\r
+\r
+\r
+\def\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{1.5em}{2.3em}}\r
+\def\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{3.8em}{3.2em}}\r
+\def\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{7.0em}{4.1em}}\r
+\def\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{10em}{5em}}\r
+\r
+\def\listoffigures{\@latexerr{\listoffigures: Lists of figures are not\r
+ allowed in the `acmconf' document style.}\@eha}\r
+\r
+\def\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}\r
+\r
+\def\listoftables{\@latexerr{\listoftables: Lists of tables are not\r
+ allowed in the `acmconf' document style.}\@eha}\r
+\let\l@table\l@figure\r
+\r
+\def\footnoterule{\kern-3\p@\r
+ \hrule width .5\columnwidth % (was .4) updated Gerry March 20 2007\r
+ \kern 2.6\p@} % The \hrule has default height of .4pt % (was .4) updated Gerry March 20 2007\r
+% ------\r
+\long\def\@makefntext#1{\noindent \r
+%\hbox to .5em{\hss$^{\@thefnmark}$}#1} % original\r
+\hbox to .5em{\hss\textsuperscript{\@thefnmark}}#1} % C. Clifton / GM Oct. 2nd. 2002\r
+% -------\r
+\r
+\long\def\@maketntext#1{\noindent\r
+#1}\r
+\r
+\long\def\@maketitlenotetext#1#2{\noindent\r
+ \hbox to 1.8em{\hss$^{#1}$}#2}\r
+\r
+\setcounter{topnumber}{2}\r
+\def\topfraction{.7}\r
+\setcounter{bottomnumber}{1}\r
+\def\bottomfraction{.3}\r
+\setcounter{totalnumber}{3}\r
+\def\textfraction{.2}\r
+\def\floatpagefraction{.5}\r
+\setcounter{dbltopnumber}{2}\r
+\def\dbltopfraction{.7}\r
+\def\dblfloatpagefraction{.5}\r
+\r
+%\r
+\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{\r
+ \vskip \baselineskip\r
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\textbf{#1: #2}}\r
+ \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize % IF longer than one line:\r
+ \textbf{#1: #2}\par % THEN set as ordinary paragraph.\r
+ \else % ELSE center.\r
+ \hbox to\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}\par\r
+ \fi}\r
+\r
+%\r
+\r
+\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{\r
+ \vskip 10pt\r
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\textbf{#1: #2}}\r
+ \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize % IF longer than one line:\r
+ \textbf{#1: #2}\par % THEN set as ordinary paragraph.\r
+ \else % ELSE center.\r
+ \hbox to\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}\r
+ \fi}\r
+\r
+\@ifundefined{figure}{\newcounter {figure}} % this is for LaTeX2e\r
+\r
+\def\fps@figure{tbp}\r
+\def\ftype@figure{1}\r
+\def\ext@figure{lof}\r
+\def\fnum@figure{Figure \thefigure}\r
+\def\figure{\@float{figure}}\r
+\let\endfigure\end@float\r
+\@namedef{figure*}{\@dblfloat{figure}}\r
+\@namedef{endfigure*}{\end@dblfloat}\r
+\r
+\@ifundefined{table}{\newcounter {table}} % this is for LaTeX2e\r
+\r
+\def\fps@table{tbp}\r
+\def\ftype@table{2}\r
+\def\ext@table{lot}\r
+\def\fnum@table{Table \thetable}\r
+\def\table{\@float{table}}\r
+\let\endtable\end@float\r
+\@namedef{table*}{\@dblfloat{table}}\r
+\@namedef{endtable*}{\end@dblfloat}\r
+\r
+\newtoks\titleboxnotes\r
+\newcount\titleboxnoteflag\r
+\r
+\def\maketitle{\par\r
+ \begingroup\r
+ \def\thefootnote{\fnsymbol{footnote}}\r
+ \def\@makefnmark{\hbox\r
+ to 0pt{$^{\@thefnmark}$\hss}}\r
+ \twocolumn[\@maketitle]\r
+\@thanks\r
+ \endgroup\r
+ \setcounter{footnote}{0}\r
+ \let\maketitle\relax\r
+ \let\@maketitle\relax\r
+ \gdef\@thanks{}\gdef\@author{}\gdef\@title{}\gdef\@subtitle{}\let\thanks\relax\r
+ \@copyrightspace}\r
+\r
+%% CHANGES ON NEXT LINES\r
+\newif\if@ll % to record which version of LaTeX is in use\r
+\r
+\expandafter\ifx\csname LaTeXe\endcsname\relax % LaTeX2.09 is used\r
+\else% LaTeX2e is used, so set ll to true\r
+\global\@lltrue\r
+\fi\r
+\r
+\if@ll\r
+ \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}\r
+ \ProvidesClass{sig-alt-release2} [2007/06/07 - V1.5 - based on acmproc.cls V1.3 <Nov. 30 '99>]\r
+ \RequirePackage{latexsym}% QUERY: are these two really needed?\r
+ \let\dooptions\ProcessOptions\r
+\else\r
+ \let\dooptions\@options\r
+\fi\r
+%% END CHANGES\r
+\r
+\def\@height{height}\r
+\def\@width{width}\r
+\def\@minus{minus}\r
+\def\@plus{plus}\r
+\def\hb@xt@{\hbox to}\r
+\newif\if@faircopy\r
+\@faircopyfalse\r
+\def\ds@faircopy{\@faircopytrue}\r
+\r
+\def\ds@preprint{\@faircopyfalse}\r
+\r
+\@twosidetrue\r
+\@mparswitchtrue\r
+\def\ds@draft{\overfullrule 5\p@}\r
+%% CHANGE ON NEXT LINE\r
+\dooptions\r
+\r
+\lineskip \p@\r
+\normallineskip \p@\r
+\def\baselinestretch{1}\r
+\def\@ptsize{0} %needed for amssymbols.sty\r
+\r
+%% CHANGES ON NEXT LINES\r
+\if@ll% allow use of old-style font change commands in LaTeX2e\r
+\@maxdepth\maxdepth\r
+%\r
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\ninept\rmfamily}{\mathrm}\r
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf}\r
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt}\r
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\bf}{\normalfont\bfseries}{\mathbf}\r
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit}\r
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sl}{\normalfont\slshape}{\@nomath\sl}\r
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\@nomath\sc}\r
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\cal}{\@fontswitch{\relax}{\mathcal}}\r
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\mit}{\@fontswitch{\relax}{\mathnormal}}\r
+\fi\r
+%\r
+\if@ll\r
+ \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{cmr} % was 'ttm'\r
+% Note! I have also found 'mvr' to work ESPECIALLY well.\r
+% Gerry - October 1999\r
+% You may need to change your LV1times.fd file so that sc is\r
+% mapped to cmcsc - -for smallcaps -- that is if you decide\r
+% to change {cmr} to {times} above. (Not recommended)\r
+ \renewcommand{\@ptsize}{}\r
+ \renewcommand{\normalsize}{%\r
+ \@setfontsize\normalsize\@ixpt{10.5\p@}%\ninept%\r
+ \abovedisplayskip 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@\r
+ \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip\r
+ \abovedisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@minus 3\p@\r
+ \belowdisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@minus 3\p@\r
+ \let\@listi\@listI\r
+ }\r
+\else\r
+ \def\@normalsize{%changed next to 9 from 10\r
+ \@setsize\normalsize{9\p@}\ixpt\@ixpt\r
+ \abovedisplayskip 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@\r
+ \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip\r
+ \abovedisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@minus 3\p@\r
+ \belowdisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@minus 3\p@\r
+ \let\@listi\@listI\r
+ }%\r
+\fi\r
+\if@ll\r
+ \newcommand\scriptsize{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@viipt{8\p@}}\r
+ \newcommand\tiny{\@setfontsize\tiny\@vpt{6\p@}}\r
+ \newcommand\large{\@setfontsize\large\@xiipt{14\p@}}\r
+ \newcommand\Large{\@setfontsize\Large\@xivpt{18\p@}}\r
+ \newcommand\LARGE{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@xviipt{20\p@}}\r
+ \newcommand\huge{\@setfontsize\huge\@xxpt{25\p@}}\r
+ \newcommand\Huge{\@setfontsize\Huge\@xxvpt{30\p@}}\r
+\else\r
+ \def\scriptsize{\@setsize\scriptsize{8\p@}\viipt\@viipt}\r
+ \def\tiny{\@setsize\tiny{6\p@}\vpt\@vpt}\r
+ \def\large{\@setsize\large{14\p@}\xiipt\@xiipt}\r
+ \def\Large{\@setsize\Large{18\p@}\xivpt\@xivpt}\r
+ \def\LARGE{\@setsize\LARGE{20\p@}\xviipt\@xviipt}\r
+ \def\huge{\@setsize\huge{25\p@}\xxpt\@xxpt}\r
+ \def\Huge{\@setsize\Huge{30\p@}\xxvpt\@xxvpt}\r
+\fi\r
+\normalsize\r
+\r
+% make aubox hsize/number of authors up to 3, less gutter\r
+% then showbox gutter showbox gutter showbox -- GKMT Aug 99\r
+\newbox\@acmtitlebox\r
+\def\@maketitle{\newpage\r
+ \null\r
+ \setbox\@acmtitlebox\vbox{%\r
+\baselineskip 20pt\r
+\vskip 2em % Vertical space above title.\r
+ \begin{center}\r
+ {\ttlfnt \@title\par} % Title set in 18pt Helvetica (Arial) bold size.\r
+ \vskip 1.5em % Vertical space after title.\r
+%This should be the subtitle.\r
+{\subttlfnt \the\subtitletext\par}\vskip 1.25em%\fi\r
+ {\baselineskip 16pt\aufnt % each author set in \12 pt Arial, in a\r
+ \lineskip .5em % tabular environment\r
+ \begin{tabular}[t]{c}\@author\r
+ \end{tabular}\par}\r
+ \vskip 1.5em % Vertical space after author.\r
+ \end{center}}\r
+ \dimen0=\ht\@acmtitlebox\r
+ \advance\dimen0 by -12.75pc\relax % Increased space for title box -- KBT\r
+ \unvbox\@acmtitlebox\r
+ \ifdim\dimen0<0.0pt\relax\vskip-\dimen0\fi}\r
+\r
+\r
+\newcount\titlenotecount\r
+\global\titlenotecount=0\r
+\newtoks\tntoks\r
+\newtoks\tntokstwo\r
+\newtoks\tntoksthree\r
+\newtoks\tntoksfour\r
+\newtoks\tntoksfive\r
+\r
+\def\abstract{\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount>0 % was =1\r
+ \insert\footins{%\r
+ \reset@font\footnotesize\r
+ \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty\r
+ \splittopskip\footnotesep\r
+ \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM\r
+ \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore\r
+ \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%\r
+ }%\r
+ \color@begingroup\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=1\r
+ \@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\ast$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntoks\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\fi\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=2\r
+ \@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\ast$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntoks\par\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\dagger$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntokstwo\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\fi\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=3\r
+ \@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\ast$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntoks\par\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\dagger$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntokstwo\par\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\ddagger$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntoksthree\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\fi\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=4\r
+ \@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\ast$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntoks\par\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\dagger$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntokstwo\par\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\ddagger$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntoksthree\par\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\S$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntoksfour\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\fi\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=5\r
+ \@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\ast$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntoks\par\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\dagger$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntokstwo\par\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\ddagger$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntoksthree\par\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\S$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntoksfour\par\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\P$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntoksfive\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\fi\r
+ \color@endgroup} %g}\r
+\fi\r
+\setcounter{footnote}{0}\r
+\section*{ABSTRACT}\normalsize%\ninept\r
+}\r
+\r
+\def\endabstract{\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi}\r
+\r
+\def\keywords{\if@twocolumn\r
+\section*{Keywords}\r
+\else \small\r
+\quotation\r
+\fi}\r
+\r
+\def\terms{\if@twocolumn\r
+\section*{General Terms}\r
+\else \small\r
+\quotation\r
+\fi}\r
+\r
+% -- Classification needs to be a bit smart due to optionals - Gerry/Georgia November 2nd. 1999\r
+\newcount\catcount\r
+\global\catcount=1\r
+\r
+\def\category#1#2#3{%\r
+\ifnum\catcount=1\r
+\section*{Categories and Subject Descriptors}\r
+\advance\catcount by 1\else{\unskip; }\fi\r
+ \@ifnextchar [{\@category{#1}{#2}{#3}}{\@category{#1}{#2}{#3}[]}%\r
+}\r
+\r
+\def\@category#1#2#3[#4]{%\r
+ \begingroup\r
+ \let\and\relax\r
+ #1 [\textbf{#2}]%\r
+ \if!#4!%\r
+ \if!#3!\else : #3\fi\r
+ \else\r
+ :\space\r
+ \if!#3!\else #3\kern\z@---\hskip\z@\fi\r
+ \textit{#4}%\r
+ \fi\r
+ \endgroup\r
+}\r
+%\r
+\r
+%%% This section (written by KBT) handles the 1" box in the lower left\r
+%%% corner of the left column of the first page by creating a picture,\r
+%%% and inserting the predefined string at the bottom (with a negative\r
+%%% displacement to offset the space allocated for a non-existent\r
+%%% caption).\r
+%%%\r
+\newtoks\copyrightnotice\r
+\def\ftype@copyrightbox{8}\r
+\def\@copyrightspace{\r
+\@float{copyrightbox}[b]\r
+\begin{center}\r
+\setlength{\unitlength}{1pc}\r
+%\begin{picture}(20,6) %Space for copyright notice\r
+\begin{picture}(20,1) %Space for copyright notice\r
+\put(0,-0.95){\crnotice{\@toappear}}\r
+\end{picture}\r
+\end{center}\r
+\end@float}\r
+\r
+\def\@toappear{} % Default setting blank - commands below change this.\r
+\long\def\toappear#1{\def\@toappear{\parbox[b]{20pc}{\baselineskip 9pt#1}}}\r
+\def\toappearbox#1{\def\@toappear{\raisebox{5pt}{\framebox[20pc]{\parbox[b]{19pc}{#1}}}}}\r
+\r
+\newtoks\conf\r
+\newtoks\confinfo\r
+\def\conferenceinfo#1#2{\global\conf={#1}\global\confinfo{#2}}\r
+\r
+\r
+\def\marginpar{\@latexerr{The \marginpar command is not allowed in the\r
+ `acmconf' document style.}\@eha}\r
+\r
+\mark{{}{}} % Initializes TeX's marks\r
+\r
+\def\today{\ifcase\month\or\r
+ January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or\r
+ July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi\r
+ \space\number\day, \number\year}\r
+\r
+\def\@begintheorem#1#2{%\r
+ \parskip 0pt % GM July 2000 (for tighter spacing)\r
+ \trivlist\r
+ \item[%\r
+ \hskip 10\p@\r
+ \hskip \labelsep\r
+ {{\sc #1}\hskip 5\p@\relax#2.}%\r
+ ]\r
+ \it\r
+}\r
+\def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{%\r
+ \parskip 0pt % GM July 2000 (for tighter spacing)\r
+ \trivlist\r
+ \item[%\r
+ \hskip 10\p@\r
+ \hskip \labelsep\r
+ {\sc #1\ #2\ % This mod by Gerry to enumerate corollaries\r
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{(#3)} % and bracket the 'corollary title'\r
+ \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa>\z@ % and retain the correct numbering of e.g. theorems\r
+ \hskip 5\p@\relax % if they occur 'around' said corollaries.\r
+ \box\@tempboxa % Gerry - Nov. 1999.\r
+ \fi.}%\r
+ ]\r
+ \it\r
+}\r
+\newif\if@qeded\r
+\global\@qededfalse\r
+\r
+% -- original\r
+%\def\proof{%\r
+% \vspace{-\parskip} % GM July 2000 (for tighter spacing)\r
+% \global\@qededfalse\r
+% \@ifnextchar[{\@xproof}{\@proof}%\r
+%}\r
+% -- end of original\r
+\r
+% (JSS) Fix for vertical spacing bug - Gerry Murray July 30th. 2002\r
+\def\proof{%\r
+\vspace{-\lastskip}\vspace{-\parsep}\penalty-51%\r
+\global\@qededfalse\r
+\@ifnextchar[{\@xproof}{\@proof}%\r
+}\r
+\r
+\def\endproof{%\r
+ \if@qeded\else\qed\fi\r
+ \endtrivlist\r
+}\r
+\def\@proof{%\r
+ \trivlist\r
+ \item[%\r
+ \hskip 10\p@\r
+ \hskip \labelsep\r
+ {\sc Proof.}%\r
+ ]\r
+ \ignorespaces\r
+}\r
+\def\@xproof[#1]{%\r
+ \trivlist\r
+ \item[\hskip 10\p@\hskip \labelsep{\sc Proof #1.}]%\r
+ \ignorespaces\r
+}\r
+\def\qed{%\r
+ \unskip\r
+ \kern 10\p@\r
+ \begingroup\r
+ \unitlength\p@\r
+ \linethickness{.4\p@}%\r
+ \framebox(6,6){}%\r
+ \endgroup\r
+ \global\@qededtrue\r
+}\r
+\r
+\def\newdef#1#2{%\r
+ \expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname\r
+ {\@definecounter{#1}%\r
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{\@thmcounter{#1}}%\r
+ \global\@namedef{#1}{\@defthm{#1}{#2}}%\r
+ \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}%\r
+ }%\r
+}\r
+\def\@defthm#1#2{%\r
+ \refstepcounter{#1}%\r
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@ydefthm{#1}{#2}}{\@xdefthm{#1}{#2}}%\r
+}\r
+\def\@xdefthm#1#2{%\r
+ \@begindef{#2}{\csname the#1\endcsname}%\r
+ \ignorespaces\r
+}\r
+\def\@ydefthm#1#2[#3]{%\r
+ \trivlist\r
+ \item[%\r
+ \hskip 10\p@\r
+ \hskip \labelsep\r
+ {\it #2%\r
+ \savebox\@tempboxa{#3}%\r
+ \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa>\z@\r
+ \ \box\@tempboxa\r
+ \fi.%\r
+ }]%\r
+ \ignorespaces\r
+}\r
+\def\@begindef#1#2{%\r
+ \trivlist\r
+ \item[%\r
+ \hskip 10\p@\r
+ \hskip \labelsep\r
+ {\it #1\ \rm #2.}%\r
+ ]%\r
+}\r
+\def\theequation{\arabic{equation}}\r
+\r
+\newcounter{part}\r
+\newcounter{section}\r
+\newcounter{subsection}[section]\r
+\newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection]\r
+\newcounter{paragraph}[subsubsection]\r
+\def\thepart{\Roman{part}}\r
+\def\thesection{\arabic{section}}\r
+\def\thesubsection{\thesection.\arabic{subsection}}\r
+\def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection.\arabic{subsubsection}} %removed \subsecfnt 29 July 2002 gkmt\r
+\def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection.\arabic{paragraph}} %removed \subsecfnt 29 July 2002 gkmt\r
+\newif\if@uchead\r
+\@ucheadfalse\r
+\r
+%% CHANGES: NEW NOTE\r
+%% NOTE: OK to use old-style font commands below, since they were\r
+%% suitably redefined for LaTeX2e\r
+%% END CHANGES\r
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}\r
+\def\part{%\r
+ \@startsection{part}{9}{\z@}{-10\p@ \@plus -4\p@ \@minus -2\p@}\r
+ {4\p@}{\normalsize\@ucheadtrue}%\r
+}\r
+\def\section{%\r
+ \@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{-10\p@ \@plus -4\p@ \@minus -2\p@}% GM\r
+ {4\p@}{\baselineskip 14pt\secfnt\@ucheadtrue}%\r
+}\r
+\r
+\def\subsection{%\r
+ \@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{-8\p@ \@plus -2\p@ \@minus -\p@}\r
+ {4\p@}{\secfnt}%\r
+}\r
+\def\subsubsection{%\r
+ \@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{-8\p@ \@plus -2\p@ \@minus -\p@}%\r
+ {4\p@}{\subsecfnt}%\r
+}\r
+%\def\paragraph{%\r
+% \vskip 12pt\@startsection{paragraph}{3}{\z@}{6\p@ \@plus \p@}% original\r
+% {-5\p@}{\subsecfnt}%\r
+%}\r
+% If one wants sections, subsections and subsubsections numbered,\r
+% but not paragraphs, one usually sets secnumepth to 3.\r
+% For that, the "depth" of paragraphs must be given correctly\r
+% in the definition (``4'' instead of ``3'' as second argument\r
+% of @startsection):\r
+\def\paragraph{%\r
+ \vskip 12pt\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\z@}{6\p@ \@plus \p@}% % GM and Wolfgang May - 11/30/06\r
+ {-5\p@}{\subsecfnt}%\r
+}\r
+\let\@period=.\r
+\def\@startsection#1#2#3#4#5#6{%\r
+ \if@noskipsec %gkmt, 11 aug 99\r
+ \global\let\@period\@empty\r
+ \leavevmode\r
+ \global\let\@period.%\r
+ \fi\r
+ \par %\r
+ \@tempskipa #4\relax\r
+ \@afterindenttrue\r
+ \ifdim \@tempskipa <\z@\r
+ \@tempskipa -\@tempskipa\r
+ \@afterindentfalse\r
+ \fi\r
+ \if@nobreak\r
+ \everypar{}%\r
+ \else\r
+ \addpenalty\@secpenalty\r
+ \addvspace\@tempskipa\r
+ \fi\r
+\parskip=0pt % GM July 2000 (non numbered) section heads\r
+ \@ifstar\r
+ {\@ssect{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}\r
+ {\@dblarg{\@sect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}%\r
+}\r
+\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{%\r
+ \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\r
+ \let\@svsec\@empty\r
+ \else\r
+ \refstepcounter{#1}%\r
+ \edef\@svsec{%\r
+ \begingroup\r
+ %\ifnum#2>2 \noexpand\rm \fi % changed to next 29 July 2002 gkmt\r
+ \ifnum#2>2 \noexpand#6 \fi\r
+ \csname the#1\endcsname\r
+ \endgroup\r
+ \ifnum #2=1\relax .\fi\r
+ \hskip 1em\r
+ }%\r
+ \fi\r
+ \@tempskipa #5\relax\r
+ \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@\r
+ \begingroup\r
+ #6\relax\r
+ \@hangfrom{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}%\r
+ \begingroup\r
+ \interlinepenalty \@M\r
+ \if@uchead\r
+ \uppercase{#8}%\r
+ \else\r
+ #8%\r
+ \fi\r
+ \par\r
+ \endgroup\r
+ \endgroup\r
+ \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}%\r
+ \vskip -12pt %gkmt, 11 aug 99 and GM July 2000 (was -14) - numbered section head spacing\r
+\addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{%\r
+ \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else\r
+ \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%\r
+ \fi\r
+ #7%\r
+ }%\r
+ \else\r
+ \def\@svsechd{%\r
+ #6%\r
+ \hskip #3\relax\r
+ \@svsec\r
+ \if@uchead\r
+ \uppercase{#8}%\r
+ \else\r
+ #8%\r
+ \fi\r
+ \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}%\r
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{%\r
+ \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else\r
+ \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%\r
+ \fi\r
+ #7%\r
+ }%\r
+ }%\r
+ \fi\r
+ \@xsect{#5}\hskip 1pt\r
+ \par\r
+}\r
+\def\@xsect#1{%\r
+ \@tempskipa #1\relax\r
+ \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@\r
+ \par\r
+ \nobreak\r
+ \vskip \@tempskipa\r
+ \@afterheading\r
+ \else\r
+ \global\@nobreakfalse\r
+ \global\@noskipsectrue\r
+ \everypar{%\r
+ \if@noskipsec\r
+ \global\@noskipsecfalse\r
+ \clubpenalty\@M\r
+ \hskip -\parindent\r
+ \begingroup\r
+ \@svsechd\r
+ \@period\r
+ \endgroup\r
+ \unskip\r
+ \@tempskipa #1\relax\r
+ \hskip -\@tempskipa\r
+ \else\r
+ \clubpenalty \@clubpenalty\r
+ \everypar{}%\r
+ \fi\r
+ }%\r
+ \fi\r
+ \ignorespaces\r
+}\r
+\def\@trivlist{%\r
+ \@topsepadd\topsep\r
+ \if@noskipsec\r
+ \global\let\@period\@empty\r
+ \leavevmode\r
+ \global\let\@period.%\r
+ \fi\r
+ \ifvmode\r
+ \advance\@topsepadd\partopsep\r
+ \else\r
+ \unskip\r
+ \par\r
+ \fi\r
+ \if@inlabel\r
+ \@noparitemtrue\r
+ \@noparlisttrue\r
+ \else\r
+ \@noparlistfalse\r
+ \@topsep\@topsepadd\r
+ \fi\r
+ \advance\@topsep \parskip\r
+ \leftskip\z@skip\r
+ \rightskip\@rightskip\r
+ \parfillskip\@flushglue\r
+ \@setpar{\if@newlist\else{\@@par}\fi}\r
+ \global\@newlisttrue\r
+ \@outerparskip\parskip\r
+}\r
+\r
+%%% Actually, 'abbrev' works just fine as the default\r
+%%% Bibliography style.\r
+\r
+\typeout{Using 'Abbrev' bibliography style}\r
+\newcommand\bibyear[2]{%\r
+ \unskip\quad\ignorespaces#1\unskip\r
+ \if#2..\quad \else \quad#2 \fi\r
+}\r
+\newcommand{\bibemph}[1]{{\em#1}}\r
+\newcommand{\bibemphic}[1]{{\em#1\/}}\r
+\newcommand{\bibsc}[1]{{\sc#1}}\r
+\def\@normalcite{%\r
+ \def\@cite##1##2{[##1\if@tempswa , ##2\fi]}%\r
+}\r
+\def\@citeNB{%\r
+ \def\@cite##1##2{##1\if@tempswa , ##2\fi}%\r
+}\r
+\def\@citeRB{%\r
+ \def\@cite##1##2{##1\if@tempswa , ##2\fi]}%\r
+}\r
+\def\start@cite#1#2{%\r
+ \edef\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{%\r
+ ###1%\r
+ \ifnum#2=\z@ \else\ ###2\fi\r
+ }%\r
+ \ifnum#1=\thr@@\r
+ \let\@@cite\@citeyear\r
+ \else\r
+ \let\@@cite\@citenormal\r
+ \fi\r
+ \@ifstar{\@citeNB\@@cite}{\@normalcite\@@cite}%\r
+}\r
+\def\cite{\start@cite23}\r
+\def\citeNP{\cite*}\r
+\def\citeA{\start@cite10}\r
+\def\citeANP{\citeA*}\r
+\def\shortcite{\start@cite23}\r
+\def\shortciteNP{\shortcite*}\r
+\def\shortciteA{\start@cite20}\r
+\def\shortciteANP{\shortciteA*}\r
+\def\citeyear{\start@cite30}\r
+\def\citeyearNP{\citeyear*}\r
+\def\citeN{%\r
+ \@citeRB\r
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{##1\ [##3%\r
+ \def\reserved@a{##1}%\r
+ \def\citeauthoryear####1####2####3{%\r
+ \def\reserved@b{####1}%\r
+ \ifx\reserved@a\reserved@b\r
+ ####3%\r
+ \else\r
+ \errmessage{Package acmart Error: author mismatch\r
+ in \string\citeN^^J^^J%\r
+ See the acmart package documentation for explanation}%\r
+ \fi\r
+ }%\r
+ }%\r
+ \@ifstar\@citeyear\@citeyear\r
+}\r
+\def\shortciteN{%\r
+ \@citeRB\r
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{##2\ [##3%\r
+ \def\reserved@a{##2}%\r
+ \def\citeauthoryear####1####2####3{%\r
+ \def\reserved@b{####2}%\r
+ \ifx\reserved@a\reserved@b\r
+ ####3%\r
+ \else\r
+ \errmessage{Package acmart Error: author mismatch\r
+ in \string\shortciteN^^J^^J%\r
+ See the acmart package documentation for explanation}%\r
+ \fi\r
+ }%\r
+ }%\r
+ \@ifstar\@citeyear\@citeyear % GM July 2000\r
+}\r
+\def\@citenormal{%\r
+ \@ifnextchar [{\@tempswatrue\@citex;}\r
+ {\@tempswafalse\@citex,[]}% % GM July 2000\r
+}\r
+\def\@citeyear{%\r
+ \@ifnextchar [{\@tempswatrue\@citex,}%\r
+ {\@tempswafalse\@citex,[]}%\r
+}\r
+\def\@citex#1[#2]#3{%\r
+ \let\@citea\@empty\r
+ \@cite{%\r
+ \@for\@citeb:=#3\do{%\r
+ \@citea\r
+ \def\@citea{#1 }%\r
+ \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@iden\@citeb}%\r
+ \if@filesw\r
+ \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{\@citeb}}%\r
+ \fi\r
+ \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb}{%\r
+ {\bf ?}%\r
+ \@warning{%\r
+ Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage\space undefined%\r
+ }%\r
+ }%\r
+ {\csname b@\@citeb\endcsname}%\r
+ }%\r
+ }{#2}%\r
+}\r
+\let\@biblabel\@gobble\r
+\newdimen\bibindent\r
+\setcounter{enumi}{1}\r
+\bibindent=0em\r
+\def\thebibliography#1{% \r
+\ifnum\addauflag=0\addauthorsection\global\addauflag=1\fi\r
+ \section[References]{% <=== OPTIONAL ARGUMENT ADDED HERE\r
+ {References} % was uppercased but this affects pdf bookmarks (SP/GM October 2004)\r
+ {\vskip -9pt plus 1pt} % GM Nov. 2006 / GM July 2000 (for somewhat tighter spacing) \r
+ \@mkboth{{\refname}}{{\refname}}%\r
+ }%\r
+ \list{[\arabic{enumi}]}{%\r
+ \settowidth\labelwidth{[#1]}%\r
+ \leftmargin\labelwidth\r
+ \advance\leftmargin\labelsep\r
+ \advance\leftmargin\bibindent\r
+ \parsep=0pt\itemsep=1pt % GM July 2000\r
+ \itemindent -\bibindent\r
+ \listparindent \itemindent\r
+ \usecounter{enumi}\r
+ }%\r
+ \let\newblock\@empty\r
+ \raggedright % GM July 2000\r
+ \sloppy\r
+ \sfcode`\.=1000\relax\r
+}\r
+\r
+\r
+\gdef\balancecolumns\r
+{\vfill\eject\r
+\global\@colht=\textheight\r
+\global\ht\@cclv=\textheight\r
+}\r
+\r
+\newcount\colcntr\r
+\global\colcntr=0\r
+\newbox\savebox\r
+\r
+\gdef \@makecol {%\r
+\global\advance\colcntr by 1\r
+\ifnum\colcntr>2 \global\colcntr=1\fi\r
+ \ifvoid\footins\r
+ \setbox\@outputbox \box\@cclv\r
+ \else\r
+ \setbox\@outputbox \vbox{%\r
+\boxmaxdepth \@maxdepth\r
+ \@tempdima\dp\@cclv\r
+ \unvbox \@cclv\r
+ \vskip-\@tempdima\r
+ \vskip \skip\footins\r
+ \color@begingroup\r
+ \normalcolor\r
+ \footnoterule\r
+ \unvbox \footins\r
+ \color@endgroup\r
+ }%\r
+ \fi\r
+ \xdef\@freelist{\@freelist\@midlist}%\r
+ \global \let \@midlist \@empty\r
+ \@combinefloats\r
+ \ifvbox\@kludgeins\r
+ \@makespecialcolbox\r
+ \else\r
+ \setbox\@outputbox \vbox to\@colht {%\r
+\@texttop\r
+ \dimen@ \dp\@outputbox\r
+ \unvbox \@outputbox\r
+ \vskip -\dimen@\r
+ \@textbottom\r
+ }%\r
+ \fi\r
+ \global \maxdepth \@maxdepth\r
+}\r
+\def\titlenote{\@ifnextchar[\@xtitlenote{\stepcounter\@mpfn\r
+\global\advance\titlenotecount by 1\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=1\r
+ \raisebox{9pt}{$\ast$}\r
+\fi\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=2\r
+ \raisebox{9pt}{$\dagger$}\r
+\fi\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=3\r
+ \raisebox{9pt}{$\ddagger$}\r
+\fi\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=4\r
+\raisebox{9pt}{$\S$}\r
+\fi\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=5\r
+\raisebox{9pt}{$\P$}\r
+\fi\r
+ \@titlenotetext\r
+}}\r
+\r
+\long\def\@titlenotetext#1{\insert\footins{%\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=1\global\tntoks={#1}\fi\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=2\global\tntokstwo={#1}\fi\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=3\global\tntoksthree={#1}\fi\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=4\global\tntoksfour={#1}\fi\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=5\global\tntoksfive={#1}\fi\r
+ \reset@font\footnotesize\r
+ \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty\r
+ \splittopskip\footnotesep\r
+ \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM\r
+ \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore\r
+ \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%\r
+ }%\r
+ \color@begingroup\r
+ \color@endgroup}}\r
+\r
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
+\ps@plain\r
+\baselineskip=11pt\r
+\let\thepage\relax % For NO page numbers - GM Nov. 30th. 1999 and July 2000\r
+\def\setpagenumber#1{\global\setcounter{page}{#1}}\r
+%\pagenumbering{arabic} % Arabic page numbers GM July 2000\r
+\twocolumn % Double column.\r
+\flushbottom % Even bottom -- alas, does not balance columns at end of document\r
+\pagestyle{plain}\r
+\r
+% Need Copyright Year and Copyright Data to be user definable (in .tex file).\r
+% Gerry Nov. 30th. 1999\r
+\newtoks\copyrtyr\r
+\newtoks\acmcopyr\r
+\newtoks\boilerplate\r
+\global\acmcopyr={X-XXXXX-XX-X/XX/XX} % Default - 5/11/2001 *** Gerry\r
+\global\copyrtyr={200X} % Default - 3/3/2003 *** Gerry\r
+\def\CopyrightYear#1{\global\copyrtyr{#1}}\r
+\def\crdata#1{\global\acmcopyr{#1}}\r
+\def\permission#1{\global\boilerplate{#1}}\r
+%\r
+\global\boilerplate={Copyright is held by the author/owner(s).}\r
+\newtoks\copyrightetc\r
+\global\copyrightetc{ACM \the\acmcopyr}\r
+\r
+\toappear{\the\boilerplate\par\r
+{\confname{\the\conf}} \the\confinfo\par \the\copyrightetc.}\r
+%\DeclareFixedFont{\altcrnotice}{OT1}{tmr}{m}{n}{8} % << patch needed for accenting e.g. Montreal - Gerry, May 2007\r
+%\DeclareFixedFont{\altconfname}{OT1}{tmr}{m}{it}{8} % << patch needed for accenting in italicized confname - Gerry, May 2007\r
+%\r
+%{\altconfname{{\the\conf}}} {\altcrnotice\the\confinfo\par} \the\copyrightetc.} % << Gerry, May 2007\r
+%\r
+%% End of sig-alt-release2.cls -- V1.5 - 6/07/2007 --\r
+%% Gerry Murray -- Thursday June 7th. 2007\r
+%\r
+% The following section (i.e. 3 .sty inclusions) was added in May 2007 so as to fix the problems that many\r
+% authors were having with accents. Sometimes accents would occur, but the letter-character would be of a different\r
+% font. Conversely the letter-character font would be correct but, e.g. a 'bar' would appear superimposed on the\r
+% character instead of, say, an unlaut/diaresis. Sometimes the letter-character would NOT appear at all.\r
+% Using [T1]{fontenc} outright was not an option as this caused 99% of the authors to 'produce' a Type-3 (bitmapped)\r
+% PDF file - useless for production. \r
+%\r
+% For proper (font) accenting we NEED these packages to be part of the .cls file i.e. 'ae', 'aecompl' and 'aeguil' \r
+% ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~\r
+%% This is file `ae.sty' \r
+\def\fileversion{1.3}\r
+\def\filedate{2001/02/12}\r
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}\r
+%\ProvidesPackage{ae}[\filedate\space\fileversion\space % GM\r
+% Almost European Computer Modern] % GM - keeping the log file clean(er)\r
+\newif\if@ae@slides \@ae@slidesfalse\r
+\DeclareOption{slides}{\@ae@slidestrue}\r
+\ProcessOptions\r
+\fontfamily{aer}\r
+\RequirePackage[T1]{fontenc}\r
+\if@ae@slides\r
+ \renewcommand{\sfdefault}{laess}\r
+ \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{laess} % no roman\r
+ \renewcommand{\ttdefault}{laett}\r
+\else\r
+ \renewcommand{\sfdefault}{aess}\r
+ \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{aer}\r
+ \renewcommand{\ttdefault}{aett}\r
+\fi\r
+\endinput\r
+%% \r
+%% End of file `ae.sty'.\r
+%\r
+%\r
+\def\fileversion{0.9}\r
+\def\filedate{1998/07/23}\r
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}\r
+%\ProvidesPackage{aecompl}[\filedate\space\fileversion\space % GM\r
+%T1 Complements for AE fonts (D. Roegel)] % GM -- keeping the log file clean(er)\r
+ \r
+\def\@ae@compl#1{{\fontencoding{T1}\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\symbol{#1}}}\r
+\def\guillemotleft{\@ae@compl{19}}\r
+\def\guillemotright{\@ae@compl{20}}\r
+\def\guilsinglleft{\@ae@compl{14}}\r
+\def\guilsinglright{\@ae@compl{15}}\r
+\def\TH{\@ae@compl{222}}\r
+\def\NG{\@ae@compl{141}}\r
+\def\ng{\@ae@compl{173}}\r
+\def\th{\@ae@compl{254}}\r
+\def\DJ{\@ae@compl{208}}\r
+\def\dj{\@ae@compl{158}}\r
+\def\DH{\@ae@compl{208}}\r
+\def\dh{\@ae@compl{240}}\r
+\def\@perthousandzero{\@ae@compl{24}}\r
+\def\textperthousand{\%\@perthousandzero}\r
+\def\textpertenthousand{\%\@perthousandzero\@perthousandzero}\r
+\endinput\r
+%\r
+%\r
+%% This is file `aeguill.sty' \r
+% This file gives french guillemets (and not guillemots!)\r
+% built with the Polish CMR fonts (default), WNCYR fonts, the LASY fonts \r
+% or with the EC fonts. \r
+% This is useful in conjunction with the ae package\r
+% (this package loads the ae package in case it has not been loaded)\r
+% and with or without the french(le) package.\r
+%\r
+% In order to get the guillemets, it is necessary to either type\r
+% \guillemotleft and \guillemotright, or to use an 8 bit encoding\r
+% (such as ISO-Latin1) which selects these two commands, \r
+% or, if you use the french package (but not the frenchle package), \r
+% to type << or >>.\r
+%\r
+% By default, you get the Polish CMR guillemets; if this package is loaded\r
+% with the `cm' option, you get the LASY guillemets; with `ec,' you\r
+% get the EC guillemets, and with `cyr,' you get the cyrillic guillemets.\r
+%\r
+% In verbatim mode, you always get the EC/TT guillemets.\r
+%\r
+% The default option is interesting in conjunction with PDF,\r
+% because there is a Type 1 version of the Polish CMR fonts\r
+% and these guillemets are very close in shape to the EC guillemets.\r
+% There are no free Type 1 versions of the EC fonts.\r
+%\r
+% Support for Polish CMR guillemets was kindly provided by \r
+% Rolf Niepraschk <niepraschk@ptb.de> in version 0.99 (2000/05/22).\r
+% Bernd Raichle provided extensive simplifications to the code\r
+% for version 1.00.\r
+%\r
+% This package is released under the LPPL.\r
+%\r
+% Changes:\r
+% Date version\r
+% 2001/04/12 1.01 the frenchle and french package are now distinguished.\r
+%\r
+\def\fileversion{1.01}\r
+\def\filedate{2001/04/12}\r
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}\r
+%\ProvidesPackage{aeguill}[2001/04/12 1.01 % % GM\r
+%AE fonts with french guillemets (D. Roegel)] % GM - keeping the log file clean(er)\r
+%\RequirePackage{ae} % GM May 2007 - already embedded here\r
+\r
+\newcommand{\@ae@switch}[4]{#4}\r
+\DeclareOption{ec}{\renewcommand\@ae@switch[4]{#1}}\r
+\DeclareOption{cm}{\renewcommand\@ae@switch[4]{#2}}\r
+\DeclareOption{cyr}{\renewcommand\@ae@switch[4]{#3}}\r
+\DeclareOption{pl}{\renewcommand\@ae@switch[4]{#4}}\r
+\ExecuteOptions{pl}\r
+\ProcessOptions\r
+\r
+%\r
+% Load necessary packages\r
+%\r
+\@ae@switch{% ec\r
+ % do nothing\r
+}{% cm\r
+ \RequirePackage{latexsym}% GM - May 2007 - already 'mentioned as required' up above\r
+}{% cyr\r
+ \RequirePackage[OT2,T1]{fontenc}%\r
+}{% pl\r
+ \RequirePackage[OT4,T1]{fontenc}%\r
+}\r
+\r
+% The following command will be compared to \frenchname,\r
+% as defined in french.sty and frenchle.sty.\r
+\def\aeguillfrenchdefault{french}%\r
+\r
+\let\guill@verbatim@font\verbatim@font\r
+\def\verbatim@font{\guill@verbatim@font\ecguills{cmtt}%\r
+ \let\guillemotleft\@oguills\let\guillemotright\@fguills}\r
+\r
+\begingroup \catcode`\<=13 \catcode`\>=13\r
+\def\x{\endgroup\r
+ \def\ae@lfguill{<<}%\r
+ \def\ae@rfguill{>>}%\r
+}\x\r
+\r
+\newcommand{\ecguills}[1]{%\r
+ \def\selectguillfont{\fontencoding{T1}\fontfamily{#1}\selectfont}%\r
+ \def\@oguills{{\selectguillfont\symbol{19}}}%\r
+ \def\@fguills{{\selectguillfont\symbol{20}}}%\r
+ } \r
+\r
+\newcommand{\aeguills}{%\r
+ \ae@guills\r
+ % We redefine \guillemotleft and \guillemotright\r
+ % in order to catch them when they are used \r
+ % with \DeclareInputText (in latin1.def for instance)\r
+ % We use \auxWARNINGi as a safe indicator that french.sty is used.\r
+ \gdef\guillemotleft{\ifx\auxWARNINGi\undefined\r
+ \@oguills % neither french.sty nor frenchle.sty\r
+ \else\r
+ \ifx\aeguillfrenchdefault\frenchname\r
+ \ae@lfguill % french.sty\r
+ \else\r
+ \@oguills % frenchle.sty\r
+ \fi\r
+ \fi}%\r
+ \gdef\guillemotright{\ifx\auxWARNINGi\undefined\r
+ \@fguills % neither french.sty nor frenchle.sty\r
+ \else\r
+ \ifx\aeguillfrenchdefault\frenchname\r
+ \ae@rfguill % french.sty\r
+ \else\r
+ \@fguills % frenchle.sty\r
+ \fi\r
+ \fi}%\r
+ }\r
+\r
+%\r
+% Depending on the class option\r
+% define the internal command \ae@guills\r
+\@ae@switch{% ec\r
+ \newcommand{\ae@guills}{%\r
+ \ecguills{cmr}}%\r
+}{% cm\r
+ \newcommand{\ae@guills}{%\r
+ \def\selectguillfont{\fontencoding{U}\fontfamily{lasy}%\r
+ \fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\selectfont}%\r
+ \def\@oguills{\leavevmode\nobreak\r
+ \hbox{\selectguillfont (\kern-.20em(\kern.20em}\nobreak}%\r
+ \def\@fguills{\leavevmode\nobreak\r
+ \hbox{\selectguillfont \kern.20em)\kern-.2em)}%\r
+ \ifdim\fontdimen\@ne\font>\z@\/\fi}}%\r
+}{% cyr\r
+ \newcommand{\ae@guills}{%\r
+ \def\selectguillfont{\fontencoding{OT2}\fontfamily{wncyr}\selectfont}%\r
+ \def\@oguills{{\selectguillfont\symbol{60}}}%\r
+ \def\@fguills{{\selectguillfont\symbol{62}}}}\r
+}{% pl\r
+ \newcommand{\ae@guills}{%\r
+ \def\selectguillfont{\fontencoding{OT4}\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont}%\r
+ \def\@oguills{{\selectguillfont\symbol{174}}}%\r
+ \def\@fguills{{\selectguillfont\symbol{175}}}}\r
+}\r
+\r
+\r
+\AtBeginDocument{%\r
+ \ifx\GOfrench\undefined\r
+ \aeguills\r
+ \else\r
+ \let\aeguill@GOfrench\GOfrench\r
+ \gdef\GOfrench{\aeguill@GOfrench \aeguills}%\r
+ \fi\r
+ }\r
+\r
+\endinput\r
+%\r
+%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~\r
+\r
+\r
+\r
+\r
+\r
--- /dev/null
+% SIG-ALTERNATE.CLS - VERSION 2.3\r
+% "COMPATIBLE" WITH THE "ACM_PROC_ARTICLE-SP.CLS" V3.1SP\r
+% Gerald Murray June 7th. 2007\r
+%\r
+% ---- Start of 'updates' ----\r
+%\r
+% To produce Type 1 fonts in the document plus allow for 'normal LaTeX accenting' in the critical areas;\r
+% title, author block, section-heads, confname, etc. etc. \r
+% i.e. the whole purpose of this version update is to NOT resort to 'inelegant accent patches'.\r
+% After much research, three extra .sty packages were added to the the tail (ae, aecompl, aeguill) to solve,\r
+% in particular, the accenting problem(s). We _could_ ask authors (via instructions/sample file) to 'include' these in\r
+% the source .tex file - in the preamble - but if everything is already provided ('behind the scenes' - embedded IN the .cls)\r
+% then this is less work for authors and also makes everything appear 'vanilla'.\r
+% NOTE: all 'patchwork accenting" has been commented out (here) and is no longer 'used' in the sample .tex file (either).\r
+% Gerry June 2007\r
+%\r
+% Patch for accenting in conference name/location. Gerry May 3rd. 2007\r
+% Rule widths changed to .5, author count (>6) fixed, roll-back for Type 3 problem. Gerry March 20th. 2007\r
+% Changes made to 'modernize' the fontnames but esp. for MikTeX users V2.4/2.5 - Nov. 30th. 2006\r
+% Updated the \email definition to allow for its use inside of 'shared affiliations' - Nov. 30th. 2006\r
+% Fixed the 'section number depth value' - Nov. 30th. 2006\r
+%\r
+% Footnotes inside table cells using \minipage (Oct. 2002)\r
+% Georgia fixed bug in sub-sub-section numbering in paragraphs (July 29th. 2002)\r
+% JS/GM fix to vertical spacing before Proofs (July 30th. 2002)\r
+%\r
+% Made the Permission Statement / Conference Info / Copyright Info\r
+% 'user definable' in the source .tex file OR automatic if\r
+% not specified.\r
+%\r
+% Allowance made to switch default fonts between those systems using\r
+% normal/modern font names and those using 'Type 1' or 'Truetype' fonts.\r
+% See LINE NUMBER 255 for details.\r
+% Also provided for enumerated/annotated Corollaries 'surrounded' by\r
+% enumerated Theorems (line 848).\r
+% Gerry November 11th. 1999\r
+%\r
+% ---- End of 'updates' ----\r
+%\r
+\def\fileversion{v2.3} % for ACM's tracking purposes\r
+\def\filedate{June 7, 2007} % Gerry Murray's tracking data\r
+\def\docdate {Thursday 7th. June 2007} % Gerry Murray (with deltas to doc}\r
+\usepackage{epsfig}\r
+\usepackage{amssymb}\r
+\usepackage{amsmath}\r
+\usepackage{amsfonts}\r
+% Need this for accents in Arial/Helvetica\r
+%\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} % Gerry March 12, 2007 - causes Type 3 problems (body text)\r
+%\usepackage{textcomp}\r
+%\r
+% SIG-ALTERNATE DOCUMENT STYLE\r
+% G.K.M. Tobin August-October 1999\r
+% adapted from ARTICLE document style by Ken Traub, Olin Shivers\r
+% also using elements of esub2acm.cls\r
+% HEAVILY MODIFIED, SUBSEQUENTLY, BY GERRY MURRAY 2000\r
+% ARTICLE DOCUMENT STYLE -- Released 16 March 1988\r
+% for LaTeX version 2.09\r
+% Copyright (C) 1988 by Leslie Lamport\r
+%\r
+%\r
+%%% sig-alternate.cls is an 'ALTERNATE' document style for producing\r
+%%% two-column camera-ready pages for ACM conferences.\r
+%%% THIS FILE DOES NOT STRICTLY ADHERE TO THE SIGS (BOARD-ENDORSED)\r
+%%% PROCEEDINGS STYLE. It has been designed to produce a 'tighter'\r
+%%% paper in response to concerns over page budgets.\r
+%%% The main features of this style are:\r
+%%%\r
+%%% 1) Two columns.\r
+%%% 2) Side and top margins of 4.5pc, bottom margin of 6pc, column gutter of\r
+%%% 2pc, hence columns are 20pc wide and 55.5pc tall. (6pc =3D 1in, approx)\r
+%%% 3) First page has title information, and an extra 6pc of space at the\r
+%%% bottom of the first column for the ACM copyright notice.\r
+%%% 4) Text is 9pt on 10pt baselines; titles (except main) are 9pt bold.\r
+%%%\r
+%%%\r
+%%% There are a few restrictions you must observe:\r
+%%%\r
+%%% 1) You cannot change the font size; ACM wants you to use 9pt.\r
+%%% 3) You must start your paper with the \maketitle command. Prior to the\r
+%%% \maketitle you must have \title and \author commands. If you have a\r
+%%% \date command it will be ignored; no date appears on the paper, since\r
+%%% the proceedings will have a date on the front cover.\r
+%%% 4) Marginal paragraphs, tables of contents, lists of figures and tables,\r
+%%% and page headings are all forbidden.\r
+%%% 5) The `figure' environment will produce a figure one column wide; if you\r
+%%% want one that is two columns wide, use `figure*'.\r
+%%%\r
+%\r
+%%% Copyright Space:\r
+%%% This style automatically reserves 1" blank space at the bottom of page 1/\r
+%%% column 1. This space can optionally be filled with some text using the\r
+%%% \toappear{...} command. If used, this command must be BEFORE the \maketitle\r
+%%% command. If this command is defined AND [preprint] is on, then the\r
+%%% space is filled with the {...} text (at the bottom); otherwise, it is\r
+%%% blank. If you use \toappearbox{...} instead of \toappear{...} then a\r
+%%% box will be drawn around the text (if [preprint] is on).\r
+%%%\r
+%%% A typical usage looks like this:\r
+%%% \toappear{To appear in the Ninth AES Conference on Medievil Lithuanian\r
+%%% Embalming Technique, June 1991, Alfaretta, Georgia.}\r
+%%% This will be included in the preprint, and left out of the conference\r
+%%% version.\r
+%%%\r
+%%% WARNING:\r
+%%% Some dvi-ps converters heuristically allow chars to drift from their\r
+%%% true positions a few pixels. This may be noticeable with the 9pt sans-serif\r
+%%% bold font used for section headers.\r
+%%% You may turn this hackery off via the -e option:\r
+%%% dvips -e 0 foo.dvi >foo.ps\r
+%%%\r
+\typeout{Document Class 'sig-alternate' <7th. June '07>. Modified by G.K.M. Tobin/Gerry Murray}\r
+\typeout{Based in part upon document Style `acmconf' <22 May 89>. Hacked 4/91 by}\r
+\typeout{shivers@cs.cmu.edu, 4/93 by theobald@cs.mcgill.ca}\r
+\typeout{Excerpts were taken from (Journal Style) 'esub2acm.cls'.}\r
+\typeout{****** Bugs/comments/suggestions/technicalities to Gerry Murray -- murray@hq.acm.org ******}\r
+\typeout{Questions on the style, SIGS policies, etc. to Adrienne Griscti griscti@acm.org}\r
+\oddsidemargin 4.5pc\r
+\evensidemargin 4.5pc\r
+\advance\oddsidemargin by -1in % Correct for LaTeX gratuitousness\r
+\advance\evensidemargin by -1in % Correct for LaTeX gratuitousness\r
+\marginparwidth 0pt % Margin pars are not allowed.\r
+\marginparsep 11pt % Horizontal space between outer margin and\r
+ % marginal note\r
+\r
+ % Top of page:\r
+\topmargin 4.5pc % Nominal distance from top of page to top of\r
+ % box containing running head.\r
+\advance\topmargin by -1in % Correct for LaTeX gratuitousness\r
+\headheight 0pt % Height of box containing running head.\r
+\headsep 0pt % Space between running head and text.\r
+ % Bottom of page:\r
+\footskip 30pt % Distance from baseline of box containing foot\r
+ % to baseline of last line of text.\r
+\@ifundefined{footheight}{\newdimen\footheight}{}% this is for LaTeX2e\r
+\footheight 12pt % Height of box containing running foot.\r
+\r
+%% Must redefine the top margin so there's room for headers and\r
+%% page numbers if you are using the preprint option. Footers\r
+%% are OK as is. Olin.\r
+\advance\topmargin by -37pt % Leave 37pt above text for headers\r
+\headheight 12pt % Height of box containing running head.\r
+\headsep 25pt % Space between running head and text.\r
+\r
+\textheight 666pt % 9 1/4 column height\r
+\textwidth 42pc % Width of text line.\r
+ % For two-column mode:\r
+\columnsep 2pc % Space between columns\r
+\columnseprule 0pt % Width of rule between columns.\r
+\hfuzz 1pt % Allow some variation in column width, otherwise it's\r
+ % too hard to typeset in narrow columns.\r
+\r
+\footnotesep 5.6pt % Height of strut placed at the beginning of every\r
+ % footnote =3D height of normal \footnotesize strut,\r
+ % so no extra space between footnotes.\r
+\r
+\skip\footins 8.1pt plus 4pt minus 2pt % Space between last line of text and\r
+ % top of first footnote.\r
+\floatsep 11pt plus 2pt minus 2pt % Space between adjacent floats moved\r
+ % to top or bottom of text page.\r
+\textfloatsep 18pt plus 2pt minus 4pt % Space between main text and floats\r
+ % at top or bottom of page.\r
+\intextsep 11pt plus 2pt minus 2pt % Space between in-text figures and\r
+ % text.\r
+\@ifundefined{@maxsep}{\newdimen\@maxsep}{}% this is for LaTeX2e\r
+\@maxsep 18pt % The maximum of \floatsep,\r
+ % \textfloatsep and \intextsep (minus\r
+ % the stretch and shrink).\r
+\dblfloatsep 11pt plus 2pt minus 2pt % Same as \floatsep for double-column\r
+ % figures in two-column mode.\r
+\dbltextfloatsep 18pt plus 2pt minus 4pt% \textfloatsep for double-column\r
+ % floats.\r
+\@ifundefined{@dblmaxsep}{\newdimen\@dblmaxsep}{}% this is for LaTeX2e\r
+\@dblmaxsep 18pt % The maximum of \dblfloatsep and\r
+ % \dbltexfloatsep.\r
+\@fptop 0pt plus 1fil % Stretch at top of float page/column. (Must be\r
+ % 0pt plus ...)\r
+\@fpsep 8pt plus 2fil % Space between floats on float page/column.\r
+\@fpbot 0pt plus 1fil % Stretch at bottom of float page/column. (Must be\r
+ % 0pt plus ... )\r
+\@dblfptop 0pt plus 1fil % Stretch at top of float page. (Must be 0pt plus ...)\r
+\@dblfpsep 8pt plus 2fil % Space between floats on float page.\r
+\@dblfpbot 0pt plus 1fil % Stretch at bottom of float page. (Must be\r
+ % 0pt plus ... )\r
+\marginparpush 5pt % Minimum vertical separation between two marginal\r
+ % notes.\r
+\r
+\parskip 0pt plus 1pt % Extra vertical space between paragraphs.\r
+\parindent 9pt % GM July 2000 / was 0pt - width of paragraph indentation.\r
+\partopsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt% Extra vertical space, in addition to\r
+ % \parskip and \topsep, added when user\r
+ % leaves blank line before environment.\r
+\r
+\@lowpenalty 51 % Produced by \nopagebreak[1] or \nolinebreak[1]\r
+\@medpenalty 151 % Produced by \nopagebreak[2] or \nolinebreak[2]\r
+\@highpenalty 301 % Produced by \nopagebreak[3] or \nolinebreak[3]\r
+\r
+\@beginparpenalty -\@lowpenalty % Before a list or paragraph environment.\r
+\@endparpenalty -\@lowpenalty % After a list or paragraph environment.\r
+\@itempenalty -\@lowpenalty % Between list items.\r
+\r
+\@namedef{ds@10pt}{\@latexerr{The `10pt' option is not allowed in the `acmconf'\r
+ document style.}\@eha}\r
+\@namedef{ds@11pt}{\@latexerr{The `11pt' option is not allowed in the `acmconf'\r
+ document style.}\@eha}\r
+\@namedef{ds@12pt}{\@latexerr{The `12pt' option is not allowed in the `acmconf'\r
+ document style.}\@eha}\r
+\r
+\@options\r
+\r
+\lineskip 2pt % \lineskip is 1pt for all font sizes.\r
+\normallineskip 2pt\r
+\def\baselinestretch{1}\r
+\r
+\abovedisplayskip 9pt plus2pt minus4.5pt%\r
+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip\r
+\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ plus3pt%\r
+\belowdisplayshortskip 5.4pt plus3pt minus3pt%\r
+\let\@listi\@listI % Setting of \@listi added 9 Jun 87\r
+\r
+\def\small{\@setsize\small{9pt}\viiipt\@viiipt\r
+\abovedisplayskip 7.6pt plus 3pt minus 4pt%\r
+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip\r
+\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ plus2pt%\r
+\belowdisplayshortskip 3.6pt plus2pt minus 2pt\r
+\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini %% Added 22 Dec 87\r
+\topsep 4pt plus 2pt minus 2pt\parsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt\r
+\itemsep \parsep}}\r
+\r
+\def\footnotesize{\@setsize\footnotesize{9pt}\ixpt\@ixpt\r
+\abovedisplayskip 6.4pt plus 2pt minus 4pt%\r
+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip\r
+\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ plus 1pt%\r
+\belowdisplayshortskip 2.7pt plus 1pt minus 2pt\r
+\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini %% Added 22 Dec 87\r
+\topsep 3pt plus 1pt minus 1pt\parsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt\r
+\itemsep \parsep}}\r
+\r
+\newcount\aucount\r
+\newcount\originalaucount\r
+\newdimen\auwidth\r
+\auwidth=\textwidth\r
+\newdimen\auskip\r
+\newcount\auskipcount\r
+\newdimen\auskip\r
+\global\auskip=1pc\r
+\newdimen\allauboxes\r
+\allauboxes=\auwidth\r
+\newtoks\addauthors\r
+\newcount\addauflag\r
+\global\addauflag=0 %Haven't shown additional authors yet\r
+\r
+\newtoks\subtitletext\r
+\gdef\subtitle#1{\subtitletext={#1}}\r
+\r
+\gdef\additionalauthors#1{\addauthors={#1}}\r
+\r
+\gdef\numberofauthors#1{\global\aucount=#1\r
+\ifnum\aucount>3\global\originalaucount=\aucount \global\aucount=3\fi %g} % 3 OK - Gerry March 2007\r
+\global\auskipcount=\aucount\global\advance\auskipcount by 1\r
+\global\multiply\auskipcount by 2\r
+\global\multiply\auskip by \auskipcount\r
+\global\advance\auwidth by -\auskip\r
+\global\divide\auwidth by \aucount}\r
+\r
+% \and was modified to count the number of authors. GKMT 12 Aug 1999\r
+\def\alignauthor{% % \begin{tabular}\r
+\end{tabular}%\r
+ \begin{tabular}[t]{p{\auwidth}}\centering}%\r
+\r
+% *** NOTE *** NOTE *** NOTE *** NOTE ***\r
+% If you have 'font problems' then you may need\r
+% to change these, e.g. 'arialb' instead of "arialbd".\r
+% Gerry Murray 11/11/1999\r
+% *** OR ** comment out block A and activate block B or vice versa.\r
+% **********************************************\r
+%\r
+% -- Start of block A -- (Type 1 or Truetype fonts)\r
+%\newfont{\secfnt}{timesbd at 12pt} % was timenrb originally - now is timesbd\r
+%\newfont{\secit}{timesbi at 12pt} %13 Jan 00 gkmt\r
+%\newfont{\subsecfnt}{timesi at 11pt} % was timenrri originally - now is timesi\r
+%\newfont{\subsecit}{timesbi at 11pt} % 13 Jan 00 gkmt -- was times changed to timesbi gm 2/4/2000\r
+% % because "normal" is italic, "italic" is Roman\r
+%\newfont{\ttlfnt}{arialbd at 18pt} % was arialb originally - now is arialbd\r
+%\newfont{\ttlit}{arialbi at 18pt} % 13 Jan 00 gkmt\r
+%\newfont{\subttlfnt}{arial at 14pt} % was arialr originally - now is arial\r
+%\newfont{\subttlit}{ariali at 14pt} % 13 Jan 00 gkmt\r
+%\newfont{\subttlbf}{arialbd at 14pt} % 13 Jan 00 gkmt\r
+%\newfont{\aufnt}{arial at 12pt} % was arialr originally - now is arial\r
+%\newfont{\auit}{ariali at 12pt} % 13 Jan 00 gkmt\r
+%\newfont{\affaddr}{arial at 10pt} % was arialr originally - now is arial\r
+%\newfont{\affaddrit}{ariali at 10pt} %13 Jan 00 gkmt\r
+%\newfont{\eaddfnt}{arial at 12pt} % was arialr originally - now is arial\r
+%\newfont{\ixpt}{times at 9pt} % was timenrr originally - now is times\r
+%\newfont{\confname}{timesi at 8pt} % was timenrri - now is timesi\r
+%\newfont{\crnotice}{times at 8pt} % was timenrr originally - now is times\r
+%\newfont{\ninept}{times at 9pt} % was timenrr originally - now is times\r
+\r
+% *********************************************\r
+% -- End of block A --\r
+%\r
+%\r
+% -- Start of block B -- UPDATED FONT NAMES\r
+% *********************************************\r
+% Gerry Murray 11/30/2006\r
+% *********************************************\r
+\newfont{\secfnt}{ptmb8t at 12pt}\r
+\newfont{\secit}{ptmbi8t at 12pt} %13 Jan 00 gkmt\r
+\newfont{\subsecfnt}{ptmri8t at 11pt}\r
+\newfont{\subsecit}{ptmbi8t at 11pt} % \r
+\newfont{\ttlfnt}{phvb8t at 18pt}\r
+\newfont{\ttlit}{phvbo8t at 18pt} % GM 2/4/2000\r
+\newfont{\subttlfnt}{phvr8t at 14pt}\r
+\newfont{\subttlit}{phvro8t at 14pt} % GM 2/4/2000\r
+\newfont{\subttlbf}{phvb8t at 14pt} % 13 Jan 00 gkmt\r
+\newfont{\aufnt}{phvr8t at 12pt}\r
+\newfont{\auit}{phvro8t at 12pt} % GM 2/4/2000\r
+\newfont{\affaddr}{phvr8t at 10pt}\r
+\newfont{\affaddrit}{phvro8t at 10pt} % GM 2/4/2000\r
+\newfont{\eaddfnt}{phvr8t at 12pt}\r
+\newfont{\ixpt}{ptmr8t at 9pt}\r
+\newfont{\confname}{ptmri8t at 8pt}\r
+\newfont{\crnotice}{ptmr8t at 8pt}\r
+\newfont{\ninept}{ptmr8t at 9pt}\r
+% +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++\r
+% -- End of block B --\r
+\r
+%\def\email#1{{{\eaddfnt{\vskip 4pt#1}}}}\r
+% If we have an email, inside a "shared affiliation" then we need the following instead\r
+\def\email#1{{{\eaddfnt{\par #1}}}} % revised - GM - 11/30/2006\r
+\r
+\def\addauthorsection{\ifnum\originalaucount>6 % was 3 - Gerry March 2007\r
+ \section{Additional Authors}\the\addauthors\r
+ \fi}\r
+\r
+\newcount\savesection\r
+\newcount\sectioncntr\r
+\global\sectioncntr=1\r
+\r
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}\r
+\r
+\def\appendix{\par\r
+\section*{APPENDIX}\r
+\setcounter{section}{0}\r
+ \setcounter{subsection}{0}\r
+ \def\thesection{\Alph{section}} }\r
+\r
+\leftmargini 22.5pt\r
+\leftmarginii 19.8pt % > \labelsep + width of '(m)'\r
+\leftmarginiii 16.8pt % > \labelsep + width of 'vii.'\r
+\leftmarginiv 15.3pt % > \labelsep + width of 'M.'\r
+\leftmarginv 9pt\r
+\leftmarginvi 9pt\r
+\r
+\leftmargin\leftmargini\r
+\labelsep 4.5pt\r
+\labelwidth\leftmargini\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep\r
+\r
+\def\@listI{\leftmargin\leftmargini \parsep 3.6pt plus 2pt minus 1pt%\r
+\topsep 7.2pt plus 2pt minus 4pt%\r
+\itemsep 3.6pt plus 2pt minus 1pt}\r
+\r
+\let\@listi\@listI\r
+\@listi\r
+\r
+\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii\r
+ \labelwidth\leftmarginii\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep\r
+ \topsep 3.6pt plus 2pt minus 1pt\r
+ \parsep 1.8pt plus 0.9pt minus 0.9pt\r
+ \itemsep \parsep}\r
+\r
+\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii\r
+ \labelwidth\leftmarginiii\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep\r
+ \topsep 1.8pt plus 0.9pt minus 0.9pt\r
+ \parsep \z@ \partopsep 1pt plus 0pt minus 1pt\r
+ \itemsep \topsep}\r
+\r
+\def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv\r
+ \labelwidth\leftmarginiv\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}\r
+\r
+\def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv\r
+ \labelwidth\leftmarginv\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}\r
+\r
+\def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi\r
+ \labelwidth\leftmarginvi\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}\r
+\r
+\def\labelenumi{\theenumi.}\r
+\def\theenumi{\arabic{enumi}}\r
+\r
+\def\labelenumii{(\theenumii)}\r
+\def\theenumii{\alph{enumii}}\r
+\def\p@enumii{\theenumi}\r
+\r
+\def\labelenumiii{\theenumiii.}\r
+\def\theenumiii{\roman{enumiii}}\r
+\def\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)}\r
+\r
+\def\labelenumiv{\theenumiv.}\r
+\def\theenumiv{\Alph{enumiv}}\r
+\def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii}\r
+\r
+\def\labelitemi{$\bullet$}\r
+\def\labelitemii{\bf --}\r
+\def\labelitemiii{$\ast$}\r
+\def\labelitemiv{$\cdot$}\r
+\r
+\def\verse{\let\\=\@centercr\r
+ \list{}{\itemsep\z@ \itemindent -1.5em\listparindent \itemindent\r
+ \rightmargin\leftmargin\advance\leftmargin 1.5em}\item[]}\r
+\let\endverse\endlist\r
+\r
+\def\quotation{\list{}{\listparindent 1.5em\r
+ \itemindent\listparindent\r
+ \rightmargin\leftmargin \parsep 0pt plus 1pt}\item[]}\r
+\let\endquotation=\endlist\r
+\r
+\def\quote{\list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}\item[]}\r
+\let\endquote=\endlist\r
+\r
+\def\descriptionlabel#1{\hspace\labelsep \bf #1}\r
+\def\description{\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin\r
+ \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}}\r
+\r
+\let\enddescription\endlist\r
+\r
+\def\theequation{\arabic{equation}}\r
+\r
+\arraycolsep 4.5pt % Half the space between columns in an array environment.\r
+\tabcolsep 5.4pt % Half the space between columns in a tabular environment.\r
+\arrayrulewidth .5pt % Width of rules in array and tabular environment. % (was .4) updated Gerry March 20 2007\r
+\doublerulesep 1.8pt % Space between adjacent rules in array or tabular env.\r
+\r
+\tabbingsep \labelsep % Space used by the \' command. (See LaTeX manual.)\r
+\r
+\skip\@mpfootins =\skip\footins\r
+\r
+\fboxsep =2.7pt % Space left between box and text by \fbox and \framebox.\r
+\fboxrule =.5pt % Width of rules in box made by \fbox and \framebox. % (was .4) updated Gerry March 20 2007\r
+\r
+\def\thepart{\Roman{part}} % Roman numeral part numbers.\r
+\def\thesection {\arabic{section}}\r
+\def\thesubsection {\thesection.\arabic{subsection}}\r
+%\def\thesubsubsection {\thesubsection.\arabic{subsubsection}} % GM 7/30/2002\r
+%\def\theparagraph {\thesubsubsection.\arabic{paragraph}} % GM 7/30/2002\r
+\def\thesubparagraph {\theparagraph.\arabic{subparagraph}}\r
+\r
+\def\@pnumwidth{1.55em}\r
+\def\@tocrmarg {2.55em}\r
+\def\@dotsep{4.5}\r
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{3}\r
+\r
+\def\tableofcontents{\@latexerr{\tableofcontents: Tables of contents are not\r
+ allowed in the `acmconf' document style.}\@eha}\r
+\r
+\def\l@part#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty}\r
+ \addvspace{2.25em plus 1pt} % space above part line\r
+ \begingroup\r
+ \@tempdima 3em % width of box holding part number, used by\r
+ \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth %% \numberline\r
+ \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth\r
+ {\large \bf % set line in \large boldface\r
+ \leavevmode % TeX command to enter horizontal mode.\r
+ #1\hfil \hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}}\par\r
+ \nobreak % Never break after part entry\r
+ \endgroup}\r
+\r
+\def\l@section#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty} % good place for page break\r
+ \addvspace{1.0em plus 1pt} % space above toc entry\r
+ \@tempdima 1.5em % width of box holding section number\r
+ \begingroup\r
+ \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth\r
+ \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth\r
+ \bf % Boldface.\r
+ \leavevmode % TeX command to enter horizontal mode.\r
+ \advance\leftskip\@tempdima %% added 5 Feb 88 to conform to\r
+ \hskip -\leftskip %% 25 Jan 88 change to \numberline\r
+ #1\nobreak\hfil \nobreak\hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par\r
+ \endgroup}\r
+\r
+\r
+\def\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{1.5em}{2.3em}}\r
+\def\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{3.8em}{3.2em}}\r
+\def\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{7.0em}{4.1em}}\r
+\def\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{10em}{5em}}\r
+\r
+\def\listoffigures{\@latexerr{\listoffigures: Lists of figures are not\r
+ allowed in the `acmconf' document style.}\@eha}\r
+\r
+\def\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}\r
+\r
+\def\listoftables{\@latexerr{\listoftables: Lists of tables are not\r
+ allowed in the `acmconf' document style.}\@eha}\r
+\let\l@table\l@figure\r
+\r
+\def\footnoterule{\kern-3\p@\r
+ \hrule width .5\columnwidth % (was .4) updated Gerry March 20 2007\r
+ \kern 2.6\p@} % The \hrule has default height of .4pt % (was .4) updated Gerry March 20 2007\r
+% ------\r
+\long\def\@makefntext#1{\noindent \r
+%\hbox to .5em{\hss$^{\@thefnmark}$}#1} % original\r
+\hbox to .5em{\hss\textsuperscript{\@thefnmark}}#1} % C. Clifton / GM Oct. 2nd. 2002\r
+% -------\r
+\r
+\long\def\@maketntext#1{\noindent\r
+#1}\r
+\r
+\long\def\@maketitlenotetext#1#2{\noindent\r
+ \hbox to 1.8em{\hss$^{#1}$}#2}\r
+\r
+\setcounter{topnumber}{2}\r
+\def\topfraction{.7}\r
+\setcounter{bottomnumber}{1}\r
+\def\bottomfraction{.3}\r
+\setcounter{totalnumber}{3}\r
+\def\textfraction{.2}\r
+\def\floatpagefraction{.5}\r
+\setcounter{dbltopnumber}{2}\r
+\def\dbltopfraction{.7}\r
+\def\dblfloatpagefraction{.5}\r
+\r
+%\r
+\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{\r
+ \vskip \baselineskip\r
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\textbf{#1: #2}}\r
+ \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize % IF longer than one line:\r
+ \textbf{#1: #2}\par % THEN set as ordinary paragraph.\r
+ \else % ELSE center.\r
+ \hbox to\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}\par\r
+ \fi}\r
+\r
+%\r
+\r
+\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{\r
+ \vskip 10pt\r
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\textbf{#1: #2}}\r
+ \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize % IF longer than one line:\r
+ \textbf{#1: #2}\par % THEN set as ordinary paragraph.\r
+ \else % ELSE center.\r
+ \hbox to\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}\r
+ \fi}\r
+\r
+\@ifundefined{figure}{\newcounter {figure}} % this is for LaTeX2e\r
+\r
+\def\fps@figure{tbp}\r
+\def\ftype@figure{1}\r
+\def\ext@figure{lof}\r
+\def\fnum@figure{Figure \thefigure}\r
+\def\figure{\@float{figure}}\r
+\let\endfigure\end@float\r
+\@namedef{figure*}{\@dblfloat{figure}}\r
+\@namedef{endfigure*}{\end@dblfloat}\r
+\r
+\@ifundefined{table}{\newcounter {table}} % this is for LaTeX2e\r
+\r
+\def\fps@table{tbp}\r
+\def\ftype@table{2}\r
+\def\ext@table{lot}\r
+\def\fnum@table{Table \thetable}\r
+\def\table{\@float{table}}\r
+\let\endtable\end@float\r
+\@namedef{table*}{\@dblfloat{table}}\r
+\@namedef{endtable*}{\end@dblfloat}\r
+\r
+\newtoks\titleboxnotes\r
+\newcount\titleboxnoteflag\r
+\r
+\def\maketitle{\par\r
+ \begingroup\r
+ \def\thefootnote{\fnsymbol{footnote}}\r
+ \def\@makefnmark{\hbox\r
+ to 0pt{$^{\@thefnmark}$\hss}}\r
+ \twocolumn[\@maketitle]\r
+\@thanks\r
+ \endgroup\r
+ \setcounter{footnote}{0}\r
+ \let\maketitle\relax\r
+ \let\@maketitle\relax\r
+ \gdef\@thanks{}\gdef\@author{}\gdef\@title{}\gdef\@subtitle{}\let\thanks\relax\r
+ \@copyrightspace}\r
+\r
+%% CHANGES ON NEXT LINES\r
+\newif\if@ll % to record which version of LaTeX is in use\r
+\r
+\expandafter\ifx\csname LaTeXe\endcsname\relax % LaTeX2.09 is used\r
+\else% LaTeX2e is used, so set ll to true\r
+\global\@lltrue\r
+\fi\r
+\r
+\if@ll\r
+ \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}\r
+ \ProvidesClass{sig-alternate} [2007/06/07 - V2.3 - based on acmproc.cls V1.3 <Nov. 30 '99>]\r
+ \RequirePackage{latexsym}% QUERY: are these two really needed?\r
+ \let\dooptions\ProcessOptions\r
+\else\r
+ \let\dooptions\@options\r
+\fi\r
+%% END CHANGES\r
+\r
+\def\@height{height}\r
+\def\@width{width}\r
+\def\@minus{minus}\r
+\def\@plus{plus}\r
+\def\hb@xt@{\hbox to}\r
+\newif\if@faircopy\r
+\@faircopyfalse\r
+\def\ds@faircopy{\@faircopytrue}\r
+\r
+\def\ds@preprint{\@faircopyfalse}\r
+\r
+\@twosidetrue\r
+\@mparswitchtrue\r
+\def\ds@draft{\overfullrule 5\p@}\r
+%% CHANGE ON NEXT LINE\r
+\dooptions\r
+\r
+\lineskip \p@\r
+\normallineskip \p@\r
+\def\baselinestretch{1}\r
+\def\@ptsize{0} %needed for amssymbols.sty\r
+\r
+%% CHANGES ON NEXT LINES\r
+\if@ll% allow use of old-style font change commands in LaTeX2e\r
+\@maxdepth\maxdepth\r
+%\r
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\ninept\rmfamily}{\mathrm}\r
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf}\r
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt}\r
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\bf}{\normalfont\bfseries}{\mathbf}\r
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit}\r
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sl}{\normalfont\slshape}{\@nomath\sl}\r
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\@nomath\sc}\r
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\cal}{\@fontswitch{\relax}{\mathcal}}\r
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\mit}{\@fontswitch{\relax}{\mathnormal}}\r
+\fi\r
+%\r
+\if@ll\r
+ \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{cmr} % was 'ttm'\r
+% Note! I have also found 'mvr' to work ESPECIALLY well.\r
+% Gerry - October 1999\r
+% You may need to change your LV1times.fd file so that sc is\r
+% mapped to cmcsc - -for smallcaps -- that is if you decide\r
+% to change {cmr} to {times} above. (Not recommended)\r
+ \renewcommand{\@ptsize}{}\r
+ \renewcommand{\normalsize}{%\r
+ \@setfontsize\normalsize\@ixpt{10.5\p@}%\ninept%\r
+ \abovedisplayskip 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@\r
+ \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip\r
+ \abovedisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@minus 3\p@\r
+ \belowdisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@minus 3\p@\r
+ \let\@listi\@listI\r
+ }\r
+\else\r
+ \def\@normalsize{%changed next to 9 from 10\r
+ \@setsize\normalsize{9\p@}\ixpt\@ixpt\r
+ \abovedisplayskip 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@\r
+ \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip\r
+ \abovedisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@minus 3\p@\r
+ \belowdisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@minus 3\p@\r
+ \let\@listi\@listI\r
+ }%\r
+\fi\r
+\if@ll\r
+ \newcommand\scriptsize{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@viipt{8\p@}}\r
+ \newcommand\tiny{\@setfontsize\tiny\@vpt{6\p@}}\r
+ \newcommand\large{\@setfontsize\large\@xiipt{14\p@}}\r
+ \newcommand\Large{\@setfontsize\Large\@xivpt{18\p@}}\r
+ \newcommand\LARGE{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@xviipt{20\p@}}\r
+ \newcommand\huge{\@setfontsize\huge\@xxpt{25\p@}}\r
+ \newcommand\Huge{\@setfontsize\Huge\@xxvpt{30\p@}}\r
+\else\r
+ \def\scriptsize{\@setsize\scriptsize{8\p@}\viipt\@viipt}\r
+ \def\tiny{\@setsize\tiny{6\p@}\vpt\@vpt}\r
+ \def\large{\@setsize\large{14\p@}\xiipt\@xiipt}\r
+ \def\Large{\@setsize\Large{18\p@}\xivpt\@xivpt}\r
+ \def\LARGE{\@setsize\LARGE{20\p@}\xviipt\@xviipt}\r
+ \def\huge{\@setsize\huge{25\p@}\xxpt\@xxpt}\r
+ \def\Huge{\@setsize\Huge{30\p@}\xxvpt\@xxvpt}\r
+\fi\r
+\normalsize\r
+\r
+% make aubox hsize/number of authors up to 3, less gutter\r
+% then showbox gutter showbox gutter showbox -- GKMT Aug 99\r
+\newbox\@acmtitlebox\r
+\def\@maketitle{\newpage\r
+ \null\r
+ \setbox\@acmtitlebox\vbox{%\r
+\baselineskip 20pt\r
+\vskip 2em % Vertical space above title.\r
+ \begin{center}\r
+ {\ttlfnt \@title\par} % Title set in 18pt Helvetica (Arial) bold size.\r
+ \vskip 1.5em % Vertical space after title.\r
+%This should be the subtitle.\r
+{\subttlfnt \the\subtitletext\par}\vskip 1.25em%\fi\r
+ {\baselineskip 16pt\aufnt % each author set in \12 pt Arial, in a\r
+ \lineskip .5em % tabular environment\r
+ \begin{tabular}[t]{c}\@author\r
+ \end{tabular}\par}\r
+ \vskip 1.5em % Vertical space after author.\r
+ \end{center}}\r
+ \dimen0=\ht\@acmtitlebox\r
+ \advance\dimen0 by -12.75pc\relax % Increased space for title box -- KBT\r
+ \unvbox\@acmtitlebox\r
+ \ifdim\dimen0<0.0pt\relax\vskip-\dimen0\fi}\r
+\r
+\r
+\newcount\titlenotecount\r
+\global\titlenotecount=0\r
+\newtoks\tntoks\r
+\newtoks\tntokstwo\r
+\newtoks\tntoksthree\r
+\newtoks\tntoksfour\r
+\newtoks\tntoksfive\r
+\r
+\def\abstract{\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount>0 % was =1\r
+ \insert\footins{%\r
+ \reset@font\footnotesize\r
+ \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty\r
+ \splittopskip\footnotesep\r
+ \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM\r
+ \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore\r
+ \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%\r
+ }%\r
+ \color@begingroup\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=1\r
+ \@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\ast$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntoks\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\fi\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=2\r
+ \@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\ast$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntoks\par\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\dagger$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntokstwo\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\fi\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=3\r
+ \@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\ast$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntoks\par\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\dagger$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntokstwo\par\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\ddagger$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntoksthree\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\fi\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=4\r
+ \@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\ast$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntoks\par\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\dagger$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntokstwo\par\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\ddagger$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntoksthree\par\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\S$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntoksfour\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\fi\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=5\r
+ \@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\ast$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntoks\par\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\dagger$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntokstwo\par\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\ddagger$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntoksthree\par\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\S$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntoksfour\par\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\@maketntext{%\r
+ \raisebox{4pt}{$\P$}\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces\the\tntoksfive\@finalstrut\strutbox}%\r
+\fi\r
+ \color@endgroup} %g}\r
+\fi\r
+\setcounter{footnote}{0}\r
+\section*{ABSTRACT}\normalsize%\ninept\r
+}\r
+\r
+\def\endabstract{\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi}\r
+\r
+\def\keywords{\if@twocolumn\r
+\section*{Keywords}\r
+\else \small\r
+\quotation\r
+\fi}\r
+\r
+\def\terms{\if@twocolumn\r
+\section*{General Terms}\r
+\else \small\r
+\quotation\r
+\fi}\r
+\r
+% -- Classification needs to be a bit smart due to optionals - Gerry/Georgia November 2nd. 1999\r
+\newcount\catcount\r
+\global\catcount=1\r
+\r
+\def\category#1#2#3{%\r
+\ifnum\catcount=1\r
+\section*{Categories and Subject Descriptors}\r
+\advance\catcount by 1\else{\unskip; }\fi\r
+ \@ifnextchar [{\@category{#1}{#2}{#3}}{\@category{#1}{#2}{#3}[]}%\r
+}\r
+\r
+\def\@category#1#2#3[#4]{%\r
+ \begingroup\r
+ \let\and\relax\r
+ #1 [\textbf{#2}]%\r
+ \if!#4!%\r
+ \if!#3!\else : #3\fi\r
+ \else\r
+ :\space\r
+ \if!#3!\else #3\kern\z@---\hskip\z@\fi\r
+ \textit{#4}%\r
+ \fi\r
+ \endgroup\r
+}\r
+%\r
+\r
+%%% This section (written by KBT) handles the 1" box in the lower left\r
+%%% corner of the left column of the first page by creating a picture,\r
+%%% and inserting the predefined string at the bottom (with a negative\r
+%%% displacement to offset the space allocated for a non-existent\r
+%%% caption).\r
+%%%\r
+\newtoks\copyrightnotice\r
+\def\ftype@copyrightbox{8}\r
+\def\@copyrightspace{\r
+\@float{copyrightbox}[b]\r
+\begin{center}\r
+\setlength{\unitlength}{1pc}\r
+\begin{picture}(20,6) %Space for copyright notice\r
+\put(0,-0.95){\crnotice{\@toappear}}\r
+\end{picture}\r
+\end{center}\r
+\end@float}\r
+\r
+\def\@toappear{} % Default setting blank - commands below change this.\r
+\long\def\toappear#1{\def\@toappear{\parbox[b]{20pc}{\baselineskip 9pt#1}}}\r
+\def\toappearbox#1{\def\@toappear{\raisebox{5pt}{\framebox[20pc]{\parbox[b]{19pc}{#1}}}}}\r
+\r
+\newtoks\conf\r
+\newtoks\confinfo\r
+\def\conferenceinfo#1#2{\global\conf={#1}\global\confinfo{#2}}\r
+\r
+\r
+\def\marginpar{\@latexerr{The \marginpar command is not allowed in the\r
+ `acmconf' document style.}\@eha}\r
+\r
+\mark{{}{}} % Initializes TeX's marks\r
+\r
+\def\today{\ifcase\month\or\r
+ January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or\r
+ July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi\r
+ \space\number\day, \number\year}\r
+\r
+\def\@begintheorem#1#2{%\r
+ \parskip 0pt % GM July 2000 (for tighter spacing)\r
+ \trivlist\r
+ \item[%\r
+ \hskip 10\p@\r
+ \hskip \labelsep\r
+ {{\sc #1}\hskip 5\p@\relax#2.}%\r
+ ]\r
+ \it\r
+}\r
+\def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{%\r
+ \parskip 0pt % GM July 2000 (for tighter spacing)\r
+ \trivlist\r
+ \item[%\r
+ \hskip 10\p@\r
+ \hskip \labelsep\r
+ {\sc #1\ #2\ % This mod by Gerry to enumerate corollaries\r
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{(#3)} % and bracket the 'corollary title'\r
+ \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa>\z@ % and retain the correct numbering of e.g. theorems\r
+ \hskip 5\p@\relax % if they occur 'around' said corollaries.\r
+ \box\@tempboxa % Gerry - Nov. 1999.\r
+ \fi.}%\r
+ ]\r
+ \it\r
+}\r
+\newif\if@qeded\r
+\global\@qededfalse\r
+\r
+% -- original\r
+%\def\proof{%\r
+% \vspace{-\parskip} % GM July 2000 (for tighter spacing)\r
+% \global\@qededfalse\r
+% \@ifnextchar[{\@xproof}{\@proof}%\r
+%}\r
+% -- end of original\r
+\r
+% (JSS) Fix for vertical spacing bug - Gerry Murray July 30th. 2002\r
+\def\proof{%\r
+\vspace{-\lastskip}\vspace{-\parsep}\penalty-51%\r
+\global\@qededfalse\r
+\@ifnextchar[{\@xproof}{\@proof}%\r
+}\r
+\r
+\def\endproof{%\r
+ \if@qeded\else\qed\fi\r
+ \endtrivlist\r
+}\r
+\def\@proof{%\r
+ \trivlist\r
+ \item[%\r
+ \hskip 10\p@\r
+ \hskip \labelsep\r
+ {\sc Proof.}%\r
+ ]\r
+ \ignorespaces\r
+}\r
+\def\@xproof[#1]{%\r
+ \trivlist\r
+ \item[\hskip 10\p@\hskip \labelsep{\sc Proof #1.}]%\r
+ \ignorespaces\r
+}\r
+\def\qed{%\r
+ \unskip\r
+ \kern 10\p@\r
+ \begingroup\r
+ \unitlength\p@\r
+ \linethickness{.4\p@}%\r
+ \framebox(6,6){}%\r
+ \endgroup\r
+ \global\@qededtrue\r
+}\r
+\r
+\def\newdef#1#2{%\r
+ \expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname\r
+ {\@definecounter{#1}%\r
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{\@thmcounter{#1}}%\r
+ \global\@namedef{#1}{\@defthm{#1}{#2}}%\r
+ \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}%\r
+ }%\r
+}\r
+\def\@defthm#1#2{%\r
+ \refstepcounter{#1}%\r
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@ydefthm{#1}{#2}}{\@xdefthm{#1}{#2}}%\r
+}\r
+\def\@xdefthm#1#2{%\r
+ \@begindef{#2}{\csname the#1\endcsname}%\r
+ \ignorespaces\r
+}\r
+\def\@ydefthm#1#2[#3]{%\r
+ \trivlist\r
+ \item[%\r
+ \hskip 10\p@\r
+ \hskip \labelsep\r
+ {\it #2%\r
+ \savebox\@tempboxa{#3}%\r
+ \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa>\z@\r
+ \ \box\@tempboxa\r
+ \fi.%\r
+ }]%\r
+ \ignorespaces\r
+}\r
+\def\@begindef#1#2{%\r
+ \trivlist\r
+ \item[%\r
+ \hskip 10\p@\r
+ \hskip \labelsep\r
+ {\it #1\ \rm #2.}%\r
+ ]%\r
+}\r
+\def\theequation{\arabic{equation}}\r
+\r
+\newcounter{part}\r
+\newcounter{section}\r
+\newcounter{subsection}[section]\r
+\newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection]\r
+\newcounter{paragraph}[subsubsection]\r
+\def\thepart{\Roman{part}}\r
+\def\thesection{\arabic{section}}\r
+\def\thesubsection{\thesection.\arabic{subsection}}\r
+\def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection.\arabic{subsubsection}} %removed \subsecfnt 29 July 2002 gkmt\r
+\def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection.\arabic{paragraph}} %removed \subsecfnt 29 July 2002 gkmt\r
+\newif\if@uchead\r
+\@ucheadfalse\r
+\r
+%% CHANGES: NEW NOTE\r
+%% NOTE: OK to use old-style font commands below, since they were\r
+%% suitably redefined for LaTeX2e\r
+%% END CHANGES\r
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}\r
+\def\part{%\r
+ \@startsection{part}{9}{\z@}{-10\p@ \@plus -4\p@ \@minus -2\p@}\r
+ {4\p@}{\normalsize\@ucheadtrue}%\r
+}\r
+\def\section{%\r
+ \@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{-10\p@ \@plus -4\p@ \@minus -2\p@}% GM\r
+ {4\p@}{\baselineskip 14pt\secfnt\@ucheadtrue}%\r
+}\r
+\r
+\def\subsection{%\r
+ \@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{-8\p@ \@plus -2\p@ \@minus -\p@}\r
+ {4\p@}{\secfnt}%\r
+}\r
+\def\subsubsection{%\r
+ \@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{-8\p@ \@plus -2\p@ \@minus -\p@}%\r
+ {4\p@}{\subsecfnt}%\r
+}\r
+%\def\paragraph{%\r
+% \vskip 12pt\@startsection{paragraph}{3}{\z@}{6\p@ \@plus \p@}% original\r
+% {-5\p@}{\subsecfnt}%\r
+%}\r
+% If one wants sections, subsections and subsubsections numbered,\r
+% but not paragraphs, one usually sets secnumepth to 3.\r
+% For that, the "depth" of paragraphs must be given correctly\r
+% in the definition (``4'' instead of ``3'' as second argument\r
+% of @startsection):\r
+\def\paragraph{%\r
+ \vskip 12pt\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\z@}{6\p@ \@plus \p@}% % GM and Wolfgang May - 11/30/06\r
+ {-5\p@}{\subsecfnt}%\r
+}\r
+\let\@period=.\r
+\def\@startsection#1#2#3#4#5#6{%\r
+ \if@noskipsec %gkmt, 11 aug 99\r
+ \global\let\@period\@empty\r
+ \leavevmode\r
+ \global\let\@period.%\r
+ \fi\r
+ \par %\r
+ \@tempskipa #4\relax\r
+ \@afterindenttrue\r
+ \ifdim \@tempskipa <\z@\r
+ \@tempskipa -\@tempskipa\r
+ \@afterindentfalse\r
+ \fi\r
+ \if@nobreak\r
+ \everypar{}%\r
+ \else\r
+ \addpenalty\@secpenalty\r
+ \addvspace\@tempskipa\r
+ \fi\r
+\parskip=0pt % GM July 2000 (non numbered) section heads\r
+ \@ifstar\r
+ {\@ssect{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}\r
+ {\@dblarg{\@sect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}%\r
+}\r
+\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{%\r
+ \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\r
+ \let\@svsec\@empty\r
+ \else\r
+ \refstepcounter{#1}%\r
+ \edef\@svsec{%\r
+ \begingroup\r
+ %\ifnum#2>2 \noexpand\rm \fi % changed to next 29 July 2002 gkmt\r
+ \ifnum#2>2 \noexpand#6 \fi\r
+ \csname the#1\endcsname\r
+ \endgroup\r
+ \ifnum #2=1\relax .\fi\r
+ \hskip 1em\r
+ }%\r
+ \fi\r
+ \@tempskipa #5\relax\r
+ \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@\r
+ \begingroup\r
+ #6\relax\r
+ \@hangfrom{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}%\r
+ \begingroup\r
+ \interlinepenalty \@M\r
+ \if@uchead\r
+ \uppercase{#8}%\r
+ \else\r
+ #8%\r
+ \fi\r
+ \par\r
+ \endgroup\r
+ \endgroup\r
+ \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}%\r
+ \vskip -12pt %gkmt, 11 aug 99 and GM July 2000 (was -14) - numbered section head spacing\r
+\addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{%\r
+ \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else\r
+ \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%\r
+ \fi\r
+ #7%\r
+ }%\r
+ \else\r
+ \def\@svsechd{%\r
+ #6%\r
+ \hskip #3\relax\r
+ \@svsec\r
+ \if@uchead\r
+ \uppercase{#8}%\r
+ \else\r
+ #8%\r
+ \fi\r
+ \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}%\r
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{%\r
+ \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else\r
+ \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%\r
+ \fi\r
+ #7%\r
+ }%\r
+ }%\r
+ \fi\r
+ \@xsect{#5}\hskip 1pt\r
+ \par\r
+}\r
+\def\@xsect#1{%\r
+ \@tempskipa #1\relax\r
+ \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@\r
+ \par\r
+ \nobreak\r
+ \vskip \@tempskipa\r
+ \@afterheading\r
+ \else\r
+ \global\@nobreakfalse\r
+ \global\@noskipsectrue\r
+ \everypar{%\r
+ \if@noskipsec\r
+ \global\@noskipsecfalse\r
+ \clubpenalty\@M\r
+ \hskip -\parindent\r
+ \begingroup\r
+ \@svsechd\r
+ \@period\r
+ \endgroup\r
+ \unskip\r
+ \@tempskipa #1\relax\r
+ \hskip -\@tempskipa\r
+ \else\r
+ \clubpenalty \@clubpenalty\r
+ \everypar{}%\r
+ \fi\r
+ }%\r
+ \fi\r
+ \ignorespaces\r
+}\r
+\def\@trivlist{%\r
+ \@topsepadd\topsep\r
+ \if@noskipsec\r
+ \global\let\@period\@empty\r
+ \leavevmode\r
+ \global\let\@period.%\r
+ \fi\r
+ \ifvmode\r
+ \advance\@topsepadd\partopsep\r
+ \else\r
+ \unskip\r
+ \par\r
+ \fi\r
+ \if@inlabel\r
+ \@noparitemtrue\r
+ \@noparlisttrue\r
+ \else\r
+ \@noparlistfalse\r
+ \@topsep\@topsepadd\r
+ \fi\r
+ \advance\@topsep \parskip\r
+ \leftskip\z@skip\r
+ \rightskip\@rightskip\r
+ \parfillskip\@flushglue\r
+ \@setpar{\if@newlist\else{\@@par}\fi}\r
+ \global\@newlisttrue\r
+ \@outerparskip\parskip\r
+}\r
+\r
+%%% Actually, 'abbrev' works just fine as the default\r
+%%% Bibliography style.\r
+\r
+\typeout{Using 'Abbrev' bibliography style}\r
+\newcommand\bibyear[2]{%\r
+ \unskip\quad\ignorespaces#1\unskip\r
+ \if#2..\quad \else \quad#2 \fi\r
+}\r
+\newcommand{\bibemph}[1]{{\em#1}}\r
+\newcommand{\bibemphic}[1]{{\em#1\/}}\r
+\newcommand{\bibsc}[1]{{\sc#1}}\r
+\def\@normalcite{%\r
+ \def\@cite##1##2{[##1\if@tempswa , ##2\fi]}%\r
+}\r
+\def\@citeNB{%\r
+ \def\@cite##1##2{##1\if@tempswa , ##2\fi}%\r
+}\r
+\def\@citeRB{%\r
+ \def\@cite##1##2{##1\if@tempswa , ##2\fi]}%\r
+}\r
+\def\start@cite#1#2{%\r
+ \edef\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{%\r
+ ###1%\r
+ \ifnum#2=\z@ \else\ ###2\fi\r
+ }%\r
+ \ifnum#1=\thr@@\r
+ \let\@@cite\@citeyear\r
+ \else\r
+ \let\@@cite\@citenormal\r
+ \fi\r
+ \@ifstar{\@citeNB\@@cite}{\@normalcite\@@cite}%\r
+}\r
+\def\cite{\start@cite23}\r
+\def\citeNP{\cite*}\r
+\def\citeA{\start@cite10}\r
+\def\citeANP{\citeA*}\r
+\def\shortcite{\start@cite23}\r
+\def\shortciteNP{\shortcite*}\r
+\def\shortciteA{\start@cite20}\r
+\def\shortciteANP{\shortciteA*}\r
+\def\citeyear{\start@cite30}\r
+\def\citeyearNP{\citeyear*}\r
+\def\citeN{%\r
+ \@citeRB\r
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{##1\ [##3%\r
+ \def\reserved@a{##1}%\r
+ \def\citeauthoryear####1####2####3{%\r
+ \def\reserved@b{####1}%\r
+ \ifx\reserved@a\reserved@b\r
+ ####3%\r
+ \else\r
+ \errmessage{Package acmart Error: author mismatch\r
+ in \string\citeN^^J^^J%\r
+ See the acmart package documentation for explanation}%\r
+ \fi\r
+ }%\r
+ }%\r
+ \@ifstar\@citeyear\@citeyear\r
+}\r
+\def\shortciteN{%\r
+ \@citeRB\r
+ \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{##2\ [##3%\r
+ \def\reserved@a{##2}%\r
+ \def\citeauthoryear####1####2####3{%\r
+ \def\reserved@b{####2}%\r
+ \ifx\reserved@a\reserved@b\r
+ ####3%\r
+ \else\r
+ \errmessage{Package acmart Error: author mismatch\r
+ in \string\shortciteN^^J^^J%\r
+ See the acmart package documentation for explanation}%\r
+ \fi\r
+ }%\r
+ }%\r
+ \@ifstar\@citeyear\@citeyear % GM July 2000\r
+}\r
+\def\@citenormal{%\r
+ \@ifnextchar [{\@tempswatrue\@citex;}\r
+ {\@tempswafalse\@citex,[]}% % GM July 2000\r
+}\r
+\def\@citeyear{%\r
+ \@ifnextchar [{\@tempswatrue\@citex,}%\r
+ {\@tempswafalse\@citex,[]}%\r
+}\r
+\def\@citex#1[#2]#3{%\r
+ \let\@citea\@empty\r
+ \@cite{%\r
+ \@for\@citeb:=#3\do{%\r
+ \@citea\r
+ \def\@citea{#1 }%\r
+ \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@iden\@citeb}%\r
+ \if@filesw\r
+ \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{\@citeb}}%\r
+ \fi\r
+ \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb}{%\r
+ {\bf ?}%\r
+ \@warning{%\r
+ Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage\space undefined%\r
+ }%\r
+ }%\r
+ {\csname b@\@citeb\endcsname}%\r
+ }%\r
+ }{#2}%\r
+}\r
+\let\@biblabel\@gobble\r
+\newdimen\bibindent\r
+\setcounter{enumi}{1}\r
+\bibindent=0em\r
+\def\thebibliography#1{% \r
+\ifnum\addauflag=0\addauthorsection\global\addauflag=1\fi\r
+ \section[References]{% <=== OPTIONAL ARGUMENT ADDED HERE\r
+ {References} % was uppercased but this affects pdf bookmarks (SP/GM October 2004)\r
+ {\vskip -9pt plus 1pt} % GM Nov. 2006 / GM July 2000 (for somewhat tighter spacing) \r
+ \@mkboth{{\refname}}{{\refname}}%\r
+ }%\r
+ \list{[\arabic{enumi}]}{%\r
+ \settowidth\labelwidth{[#1]}%\r
+ \leftmargin\labelwidth\r
+ \advance\leftmargin\labelsep\r
+ \advance\leftmargin\bibindent\r
+ \parsep=0pt\itemsep=1pt % GM July 2000\r
+ \itemindent -\bibindent\r
+ \listparindent \itemindent\r
+ \usecounter{enumi}\r
+ }%\r
+ \let\newblock\@empty\r
+ \raggedright % GM July 2000\r
+ \sloppy\r
+ \sfcode`\.=1000\relax\r
+}\r
+\r
+\r
+\gdef\balancecolumns\r
+{\vfill\eject\r
+\global\@colht=\textheight\r
+\global\ht\@cclv=\textheight\r
+}\r
+\r
+\newcount\colcntr\r
+\global\colcntr=0\r
+\newbox\savebox\r
+\r
+\gdef \@makecol {%\r
+\global\advance\colcntr by 1\r
+\ifnum\colcntr>2 \global\colcntr=1\fi\r
+ \ifvoid\footins\r
+ \setbox\@outputbox \box\@cclv\r
+ \else\r
+ \setbox\@outputbox \vbox{%\r
+\boxmaxdepth \@maxdepth\r
+ \@tempdima\dp\@cclv\r
+ \unvbox \@cclv\r
+ \vskip-\@tempdima\r
+ \vskip \skip\footins\r
+ \color@begingroup\r
+ \normalcolor\r
+ \footnoterule\r
+ \unvbox \footins\r
+ \color@endgroup\r
+ }%\r
+ \fi\r
+ \xdef\@freelist{\@freelist\@midlist}%\r
+ \global \let \@midlist \@empty\r
+ \@combinefloats\r
+ \ifvbox\@kludgeins\r
+ \@makespecialcolbox\r
+ \else\r
+ \setbox\@outputbox \vbox to\@colht {%\r
+\@texttop\r
+ \dimen@ \dp\@outputbox\r
+ \unvbox \@outputbox\r
+ \vskip -\dimen@\r
+ \@textbottom\r
+ }%\r
+ \fi\r
+ \global \maxdepth \@maxdepth\r
+}\r
+\def\titlenote{\@ifnextchar[\@xtitlenote{\stepcounter\@mpfn\r
+\global\advance\titlenotecount by 1\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=1\r
+ \raisebox{9pt}{$\ast$}\r
+\fi\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=2\r
+ \raisebox{9pt}{$\dagger$}\r
+\fi\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=3\r
+ \raisebox{9pt}{$\ddagger$}\r
+\fi\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=4\r
+\raisebox{9pt}{$\S$}\r
+\fi\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=5\r
+\raisebox{9pt}{$\P$}\r
+\fi\r
+ \@titlenotetext\r
+}}\r
+\r
+\long\def\@titlenotetext#1{\insert\footins{%\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=1\global\tntoks={#1}\fi\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=2\global\tntokstwo={#1}\fi\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=3\global\tntoksthree={#1}\fi\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=4\global\tntoksfour={#1}\fi\r
+\ifnum\titlenotecount=5\global\tntoksfive={#1}\fi\r
+ \reset@font\footnotesize\r
+ \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty\r
+ \splittopskip\footnotesep\r
+ \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM\r
+ \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore\r
+ \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%\r
+ }%\r
+ \color@begingroup\r
+ \color@endgroup}}\r
+\r
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%\r
+\ps@plain\r
+\baselineskip=11pt\r
+\let\thepage\relax % For NO page numbers - GM Nov. 30th. 1999 and July 2000\r
+\def\setpagenumber#1{\global\setcounter{page}{#1}}\r
+%\pagenumbering{arabic} % Arabic page numbers GM July 2000\r
+\twocolumn % Double column.\r
+\flushbottom % Even bottom -- alas, does not balance columns at end of document\r
+\pagestyle{plain}\r
+\r
+% Need Copyright Year and Copyright Data to be user definable (in .tex file).\r
+% Gerry Nov. 30th. 1999\r
+\newtoks\copyrtyr\r
+\newtoks\acmcopyr\r
+\newtoks\boilerplate\r
+\global\acmcopyr={X-XXXXX-XX-X/XX/XX} % Default - 5/11/2001 *** Gerry\r
+\global\copyrtyr={200X} % Default - 3/3/2003 *** Gerry\r
+\def\CopyrightYear#1{\global\copyrtyr{#1}}\r
+\def\crdata#1{\global\acmcopyr{#1}}\r
+\def\permission#1{\global\boilerplate{#1}}\r
+%\r
+\global\boilerplate={Permission to make digital or hard copies of all or part of this work for personal or classroom use is granted without fee provided that copies are not made or distributed for profit or commercial advantage and that copies bear this notice and the full citation on the first page. To copy otherwise, to republish, to post on servers or to redistribute to lists, requires prior specific permission and/or a fee.}\r
+\newtoks\copyrightetc\r
+\global\copyrightetc{Copyright \the\copyrtyr\ ACM \the\acmcopyr\ ...\$5.00}\r
+\toappear{\the\boilerplate\par\r
+{\confname{\the\conf}} \the\confinfo\par \the\copyrightetc.}\r
+%\DeclareFixedFont{\altcrnotice}{OT1}{tmr}{m}{n}{8} % << patch needed for accenting e.g. Montreal - Gerry, May 2007\r
+%\DeclareFixedFont{\altconfname}{OT1}{tmr}{m}{it}{8} % << patch needed for accenting in italicized confname - Gerry, May 2007\r
+%\r
+%{\altconfname{{\the\conf}}} {\altcrnotice\the\confinfo\par} \the\copyrightetc.} % << Gerry, May 2007\r
+%\r
+% The following section (i.e. 3 .sty inclusions) was added in May 2007 so as to fix the problems that many\r
+% authors were having with accents. Sometimes accents would occur, but the letter-character would be of a different\r
+% font. Conversely the letter-character font would be correct but, e.g. a 'bar' would appear superimposed on the\r
+% character instead of, say, an unlaut/diaresis. Sometimes the letter-character would NOT appear at all.\r
+% Using [T1]{fontenc} outright was not an option as this caused 99% of the authors to 'produce' a Type-3 (bitmapped)\r
+% PDF file - useless for production. \r
+%\r
+% For proper (font) accenting we NEED these packages to be part of the .cls file i.e. 'ae', 'aecompl' and 'aeguil' \r
+% ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~\r
+%% This is file `ae.sty' \r
+\def\fileversion{1.3}\r
+\def\filedate{2001/02/12}\r
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}\r
+%\ProvidesPackage{ae}[\filedate\space\fileversion\space % GM\r
+% Almost European Computer Modern] % GM - keeping the log file clean(er)\r
+\newif\if@ae@slides \@ae@slidesfalse\r
+\DeclareOption{slides}{\@ae@slidestrue}\r
+\ProcessOptions\r
+\fontfamily{aer}\r
+\RequirePackage[T1]{fontenc}\r
+\if@ae@slides\r
+ \renewcommand{\sfdefault}{laess}\r
+ \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{laess} % no roman\r
+ \renewcommand{\ttdefault}{laett}\r
+\else\r
+ \renewcommand{\sfdefault}{aess}\r
+ \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{aer}\r
+ \renewcommand{\ttdefault}{aett}\r
+\fi\r
+\endinput\r
+%% \r
+%% End of file `ae.sty'.\r
+%\r
+%\r
+\def\fileversion{0.9}\r
+\def\filedate{1998/07/23}\r
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}\r
+%\ProvidesPackage{aecompl}[\filedate\space\fileversion\space % GM\r
+%T1 Complements for AE fonts (D. Roegel)] % GM -- keeping the log file clean(er)\r
+ \r
+\def\@ae@compl#1{{\fontencoding{T1}\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\symbol{#1}}}\r
+\def\guillemotleft{\@ae@compl{19}}\r
+\def\guillemotright{\@ae@compl{20}}\r
+\def\guilsinglleft{\@ae@compl{14}}\r
+\def\guilsinglright{\@ae@compl{15}}\r
+\def\TH{\@ae@compl{222}}\r
+\def\NG{\@ae@compl{141}}\r
+\def\ng{\@ae@compl{173}}\r
+\def\th{\@ae@compl{254}}\r
+\def\DJ{\@ae@compl{208}}\r
+\def\dj{\@ae@compl{158}}\r
+\def\DH{\@ae@compl{208}}\r
+\def\dh{\@ae@compl{240}}\r
+\def\@perthousandzero{\@ae@compl{24}}\r
+\def\textperthousand{\%\@perthousandzero}\r
+\def\textpertenthousand{\%\@perthousandzero\@perthousandzero}\r
+\endinput\r
+%\r
+%\r
+%% This is file `aeguill.sty' \r
+% This file gives french guillemets (and not guillemots!)\r
+% built with the Polish CMR fonts (default), WNCYR fonts, the LASY fonts \r
+% or with the EC fonts. \r
+% This is useful in conjunction with the ae package\r
+% (this package loads the ae package in case it has not been loaded)\r
+% and with or without the french(le) package.\r
+%\r
+% In order to get the guillemets, it is necessary to either type\r
+% \guillemotleft and \guillemotright, or to use an 8 bit encoding\r
+% (such as ISO-Latin1) which selects these two commands, \r
+% or, if you use the french package (but not the frenchle package), \r
+% to type << or >>.\r
+%\r
+% By default, you get the Polish CMR guillemets; if this package is loaded\r
+% with the `cm' option, you get the LASY guillemets; with `ec,' you\r
+% get the EC guillemets, and with `cyr,' you get the cyrillic guillemets.\r
+%\r
+% In verbatim mode, you always get the EC/TT guillemets.\r
+%\r
+% The default option is interesting in conjunction with PDF,\r
+% because there is a Type 1 version of the Polish CMR fonts\r
+% and these guillemets are very close in shape to the EC guillemets.\r
+% There are no free Type 1 versions of the EC fonts.\r
+%\r
+% Support for Polish CMR guillemets was kindly provided by \r
+% Rolf Niepraschk <niepraschk@ptb.de> in version 0.99 (2000/05/22).\r
+% Bernd Raichle provided extensive simplifications to the code\r
+% for version 1.00.\r
+%\r
+% This package is released under the LPPL.\r
+%\r
+% Changes:\r
+% Date version\r
+% 2001/04/12 1.01 the frenchle and french package are now distinguished.\r
+%\r
+\def\fileversion{1.01}\r
+\def\filedate{2001/04/12}\r
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}\r
+%\ProvidesPackage{aeguill}[2001/04/12 1.01 % % GM\r
+%AE fonts with french guillemets (D. Roegel)] % GM - keeping the log file clean(er)\r
+%\RequirePackage{ae} % GM May 2007 - already embedded here\r
+\r
+\newcommand{\@ae@switch}[4]{#4}\r
+\DeclareOption{ec}{\renewcommand\@ae@switch[4]{#1}}\r
+\DeclareOption{cm}{\renewcommand\@ae@switch[4]{#2}}\r
+\DeclareOption{cyr}{\renewcommand\@ae@switch[4]{#3}}\r
+\DeclareOption{pl}{\renewcommand\@ae@switch[4]{#4}}\r
+\ExecuteOptions{pl}\r
+\ProcessOptions\r
+\r
+%\r
+% Load necessary packages\r
+%\r
+\@ae@switch{% ec\r
+ % do nothing\r
+}{% cm\r
+ \RequirePackage{latexsym}% GM - May 2007 - already 'mentioned as required' up above\r
+}{% cyr\r
+ \RequirePackage[OT2,T1]{fontenc}%\r
+}{% pl\r
+ \RequirePackage[OT4,T1]{fontenc}%\r
+}\r
+\r
+% The following command will be compared to \frenchname,\r
+% as defined in french.sty and frenchle.sty.\r
+\def\aeguillfrenchdefault{french}%\r
+\r
+\let\guill@verbatim@font\verbatim@font\r
+\def\verbatim@font{\guill@verbatim@font\ecguills{cmtt}%\r
+ \let\guillemotleft\@oguills\let\guillemotright\@fguills}\r
+\r
+\begingroup \catcode`\<=13 \catcode`\>=13\r
+\def\x{\endgroup\r
+ \def\ae@lfguill{<<}%\r
+ \def\ae@rfguill{>>}%\r
+}\x\r
+\r
+\newcommand{\ecguills}[1]{%\r
+ \def\selectguillfont{\fontencoding{T1}\fontfamily{#1}\selectfont}%\r
+ \def\@oguills{{\selectguillfont\symbol{19}}}%\r
+ \def\@fguills{{\selectguillfont\symbol{20}}}%\r
+ } \r
+\r
+\newcommand{\aeguills}{%\r
+ \ae@guills\r
+ % We redefine \guillemotleft and \guillemotright\r
+ % in order to catch them when they are used \r
+ % with \DeclareInputText (in latin1.def for instance)\r
+ % We use \auxWARNINGi as a safe indicator that french.sty is used.\r
+ \gdef\guillemotleft{\ifx\auxWARNINGi\undefined\r
+ \@oguills % neither french.sty nor frenchle.sty\r
+ \else\r
+ \ifx\aeguillfrenchdefault\frenchname\r
+ \ae@lfguill % french.sty\r
+ \else\r
+ \@oguills % frenchle.sty\r
+ \fi\r
+ \fi}%\r
+ \gdef\guillemotright{\ifx\auxWARNINGi\undefined\r
+ \@fguills % neither french.sty nor frenchle.sty\r
+ \else\r
+ \ifx\aeguillfrenchdefault\frenchname\r
+ \ae@rfguill % french.sty\r
+ \else\r
+ \@fguills % frenchle.sty\r
+ \fi\r
+ \fi}%\r
+ }\r
+\r
+%\r
+% Depending on the class option\r
+% define the internal command \ae@guills\r
+\@ae@switch{% ec\r
+ \newcommand{\ae@guills}{%\r
+ \ecguills{cmr}}%\r
+}{% cm\r
+ \newcommand{\ae@guills}{%\r
+ \def\selectguillfont{\fontencoding{U}\fontfamily{lasy}%\r
+ \fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\selectfont}%\r
+ \def\@oguills{\leavevmode\nobreak\r
+ \hbox{\selectguillfont (\kern-.20em(\kern.20em}\nobreak}%\r
+ \def\@fguills{\leavevmode\nobreak\r
+ \hbox{\selectguillfont \kern.20em)\kern-.2em)}%\r
+ \ifdim\fontdimen\@ne\font>\z@\/\fi}}%\r
+}{% cyr\r
+ \newcommand{\ae@guills}{%\r
+ \def\selectguillfont{\fontencoding{OT2}\fontfamily{wncyr}\selectfont}%\r
+ \def\@oguills{{\selectguillfont\symbol{60}}}%\r
+ \def\@fguills{{\selectguillfont\symbol{62}}}}\r
+}{% pl\r
+ \newcommand{\ae@guills}{%\r
+ \def\selectguillfont{\fontencoding{OT4}\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont}%\r
+ \def\@oguills{{\selectguillfont\symbol{174}}}%\r
+ \def\@fguills{{\selectguillfont\symbol{175}}}}\r
+}\r
+\r
+\r
+\AtBeginDocument{%\r
+ \ifx\GOfrench\undefined\r
+ \aeguills\r
+ \else\r
+ \let\aeguill@GOfrench\GOfrench\r
+ \gdef\GOfrench{\aeguill@GOfrench \aeguills}%\r
+ \fi\r
+ }\r
+\r
+\endinput\r
+%\r
+%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~\r
+\r
--- /dev/null
+% This is "sig-alternate.tex" V1.8 June 2007\r
+% This file should be compiled with V2.3 of "sig-alternate.cls" June 2007\r
+%\r
+% This example file demonstrates the use of the 'sig-alternate.cls'\r
+% V2.3 LaTeX2e document class file. It is for those submitting\r
+% articles to ACM Conference Proceedings WHO DO NOT WISH TO\r
+% STRICTLY ADHERE TO THE SIGS (PUBS-BOARD-ENDORSED) STYLE.\r
+% The 'sig-alternate.cls' file will produce a similar-looking,\r
+% albeit, 'tighter' paper resulting in, invariably, fewer pages.\r
+%\r
+% ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------\r
+% This .tex file (and associated .cls V2.3) produces:\r
+% 1) The Permission Statement\r
+% 2) The Conference (location) Info information\r
+% 3) The Copyright Line with ACM data\r
+% 4) NO page numbers\r
+%\r
+% as against the acm_proc_article-sp.cls file which\r
+% DOES NOT produce 1) thru' 3) above.\r
+%\r
+% Using 'sig-alternate.cls' you have control, however, from within\r
+% the source .tex file, over both the CopyrightYear\r
+% (defaulted to 200X) and the ACM Copyright Data\r
+% (defaulted to X-XXXXX-XX-X/XX/XX).\r
+% e.g.\r
+% \CopyrightYear{2007} will cause 2007 to appear in the copyright line.\r
+% \crdata{0-12345-67-8/90/12} will cause 0-12345-67-8/90/12 to appear in the copyright line.\r
+%\r
+% ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------\r
+% This .tex source is an example which *does* use\r
+% the .bib file (from which the .bbl file % is produced).\r
+% REMEMBER HOWEVER: After having produced the .bbl file,\r
+% and prior to final submission, you *NEED* to 'insert'\r
+% your .bbl file into your source .tex file so as to provide\r
+% ONE 'self-contained' source file.\r
+%\r
+% ================= IF YOU HAVE QUESTIONS =======================\r
+% Questions regarding the SIGS styles, SIGS policies and\r
+% procedures, Conferences etc. should be sent to\r
+% Adrienne Griscti (griscti@acm.org)\r
+%\r
+% Technical questions _only_ to\r
+% Gerald Murray (murray@acm.org)\r
+% ===============================================================\r
+%\r
+% For tracking purposes - this is V1.8 - June 2007\r
+\r
+\documentclass{sig-alternate}\r
+\r
+\begin{document}\r
+%\r
+% --- Author Metadata here ---\r
+\conferenceinfo{WOODSTOCK}{'97 El Paso, Texas USA}\r
+%\CopyrightYear{2007} % Allows default copyright year (200X) to be over-ridden - IF NEED BE.\r
+%\crdata{0-12345-67-8/90/01} % Allows default copyright data (0-89791-88-6/97/05) to be over-ridden - IF NEED BE.\r
+% --- End of Author Metadata ---\r
+\r
+\title{Alternate {\ttlit ACM} SIG Proceedings Paper in LaTeX\r
+Format\titlenote{(Produces the permission block, and\r
+copyright information). For use with\r
+SIG-ALTERNATE.CLS. Supported by ACM.}}\r
+\subtitle{[Extended Abstract]\r
+\titlenote{A full version of this paper is available as\r
+\textit{Author's Guide to Preparing ACM SIG Proceedings Using\r
+\LaTeX$2_\epsilon$\ and BibTeX} at\r
+\texttt{www.acm.org/eaddress.htm}}}\r
+%\r
+% You need the command \numberofauthors to handle the 'placement\r
+% and alignment' of the authors beneath the title.\r
+%\r
+% For aesthetic reasons, we recommend 'three authors at a time'\r
+% i.e. three 'name/affiliation blocks' be placed beneath the title.\r
+%\r
+% NOTE: You are NOT restricted in how many 'rows' of\r
+% "name/affiliations" may appear. We just ask that you restrict\r
+% the number of 'columns' to three.\r
+%\r
+% Because of the available 'opening page real-estate'\r
+% we ask you to refrain from putting more than six authors\r
+% (two rows with three columns) beneath the article title.\r
+% More than six makes the first-page appear very cluttered indeed.\r
+%\r
+% Use the \alignauthor commands to handle the names\r
+% and affiliations for an 'aesthetic maximum' of six authors.\r
+% Add names, affiliations, addresses for\r
+% the seventh etc. author(s) as the argument for the\r
+% \additionalauthors command.\r
+% These 'additional authors' will be output/set for you\r
+% without further effort on your part as the last section in\r
+% the body of your article BEFORE References or any Appendices.\r
+\r
+\numberofauthors{8} % in this sample file, there are a *total*\r
+% of EIGHT authors. SIX appear on the 'first-page' (for formatting\r
+% reasons) and the remaining two appear in the \additionalauthors section.\r
+%\r
+\author{\r
+% You can go ahead and credit any number of authors here,\r
+% e.g. one 'row of three' or two rows (consisting of one row of three\r
+% and a second row of one, two or three).\r
+%\r
+% The command \alignauthor (no curly braces needed) should\r
+% precede each author name, affiliation/snail-mail address and\r
+% e-mail address. Additionally, tag each line of\r
+% affiliation/address with \affaddr, and tag the\r
+% e-mail address with \email.\r
+%\r
+% 1st. author\r
+\alignauthor\r
+Ben Trovato\titlenote{Dr.~Trovato insisted his name be first.}\\\r
+ \affaddr{Institute for Clarity in Documentation}\\\r
+ \affaddr{1932 Wallamaloo Lane}\\\r
+ \affaddr{Wallamaloo, New Zealand}\\\r
+ \email{trovato@corporation.com}\r
+% 2nd. author\r
+\alignauthor\r
+G.K.M. Tobin\titlenote{The secretary disavows\r
+any knowledge of this author's actions.}\\\r
+ \affaddr{Institute for Clarity in Documentation}\\\r
+ \affaddr{P.O. Box 1212}\\\r
+ \affaddr{Dublin, Ohio 43017-6221}\\\r
+ \email{webmaster@marysville-ohio.com}\r
+% 3rd. author\r
+\alignauthor Lars Th{\o}rv{\"a}ld\titlenote{This author is the\r
+one who did all the really hard work.}\\\r
+ \affaddr{The Th{\o}rv{\"a}ld Group}\\\r
+ \affaddr{1 Th{\o}rv{\"a}ld Circle}\\\r
+ \affaddr{Hekla, Iceland}\\\r
+ \email{larst@affiliation.org}\r
+\and % use '\and' if you need 'another row' of author names\r
+% 4th. author\r
+\alignauthor Lawrence P. Leipuner\\\r
+ \affaddr{Brookhaven Laboratories}\\\r
+ \affaddr{Brookhaven National Lab}\\\r
+ \affaddr{P.O. Box 5000}\\\r
+ \email{lleipuner@researchlabs.org}\r
+% 5th. author\r
+\alignauthor Sean Fogarty\\\r
+ \affaddr{NASA Ames Research Center}\\\r
+ \affaddr{Moffett Field}\\\r
+ \affaddr{California 94035}\\\r
+ \email{fogartys@amesres.org}\r
+% 6th. author\r
+\alignauthor Charles Palmer\\\r
+ \affaddr{Palmer Research Laboratories}\\\r
+ \affaddr{8600 Datapoint Drive}\\\r
+ \affaddr{San Antonio, Texas 78229}\\\r
+ \email{cpalmer@prl.com}\r
+}\r
+% There's nothing stopping you putting the seventh, eighth, etc.\r
+% author on the opening page (as the 'third row') but we ask,\r
+% for aesthetic reasons that you place these 'additional authors'\r
+% in the \additional authors block, viz.\r
+\additionalauthors{Additional authors: John Smith (The Th{\o}rv{\"a}ld Group,\r
+email: {\texttt{jsmith@affiliation.org}}) and Julius P.~Kumquat\r
+(The Kumquat Consortium, email: {\texttt{jpkumquat@consortium.net}}).}\r
+\date{30 July 1999}\r
+% Just remember to make sure that the TOTAL number of authors\r
+% is the number that will appear on the first page PLUS the\r
+% number that will appear in the \additionalauthors section.\r
+\r
+\maketitle\r
+\begin{abstract}\r
+This paper provides a sample of a \LaTeX\ document which conforms,\r
+somewhat loosely, to the formatting guidelines for\r
+ACM SIG Proceedings. It is an {\em alternate} style which produces\r
+a {\em tighter-looking} paper and was designed in response to\r
+concerns expressed, by authors, over page-budgets.\r
+It complements the document \textit{Author's (Alternate) Guide to\r
+Preparing ACM SIG Proceedings Using \LaTeX$2_\epsilon$\ and Bib\TeX}.\r
+This source file has been written with the intention of being\r
+compiled under \LaTeX$2_\epsilon$\ and BibTeX.\r
+\r
+The developers have tried to include every imaginable sort\r
+of ``bells and whistles", such as a subtitle, footnotes on\r
+title, subtitle and authors, as well as in the text, and\r
+every optional component (e.g. Acknowledgments, Additional\r
+Authors, Appendices), not to mention examples of\r
+equations, theorems, tables and figures.\r
+\r
+To make best use of this sample document, run it through \LaTeX\\r
+and BibTeX, and compare this source code with the printed\r
+output produced by the dvi file. A compiled PDF version\r
+is available on the web page to help you with the\r
+`look and feel'.\r
+\end{abstract}\r
+\r
+% A category with the (minimum) three required fields\r
+\category{H.4}{Information Systems Applications}{Miscellaneous}\r
+%A category including the fourth, optional field follows...\r
+\category{D.2.8}{Software Engineering}{Metrics}[complexity measures, performance measures]\r
+\r
+\terms{Delphi theory}\r
+\r
+\keywords{ACM proceedings, \LaTeX, text tagging}\r
+\r
+\section{Introduction}\r
+The \textit{proceedings} are the records of a conference.\r
+ACM seeks to give these conference by-products a uniform,\r
+high-quality appearance. To do this, ACM has some rigid\r
+requirements for the format of the proceedings documents: there\r
+is a specified format (balanced double columns), a specified\r
+set of fonts (Arial or Helvetica and Times Roman) in\r
+certain specified sizes (for instance, 9 point for body copy),\r
+a specified live area (18 $\times$ 23.5 cm [7" $\times$ 9.25"]) centered on\r
+the page, specified size of margins (2.54cm [1"] top and\r
+bottom and 1.9cm [.75"] left and right; specified column width\r
+(8.45cm [3.33"]) and gutter size (.083cm [.33"]).\r
+\r
+The good news is, with only a handful of manual\r
+settings\footnote{Two of these, the {\texttt{\char'134 numberofauthors}}\r
+and {\texttt{\char'134 alignauthor}} commands, you have\r
+already used; another, {\texttt{\char'134 balancecolumns}}, will\r
+be used in your very last run of \LaTeX\ to ensure\r
+balanced column heights on the last page.}, the \LaTeX\ document\r
+class file handles all of this for you.\r
+\r
+The remainder of this document is concerned with showing, in\r
+the context of an ``actual'' document, the \LaTeX\ commands\r
+specifically available for denoting the structure of a\r
+proceedings paper, rather than with giving rigorous descriptions\r
+or explanations of such commands.\r
+\r
+\section{The {\secit Body} of The Paper}\r
+Typically, the body of a paper is organized\r
+into a hierarchical structure, with numbered or unnumbered\r
+headings for sections, subsections, sub-subsections, and even\r
+smaller sections. The command \texttt{{\char'134}section} that\r
+precedes this paragraph is part of such a\r
+hierarchy.\footnote{This is the second footnote. It\r
+starts a series of three footnotes that add nothing\r
+informational, but just give an idea of how footnotes work\r
+and look. It is a wordy one, just so you see\r
+how a longish one plays out.} \LaTeX\ handles the numbering\r
+and placement of these headings for you, when you use\r
+the appropriate heading commands around the titles\r
+of the headings. If you want a sub-subsection or\r
+smaller part to be unnumbered in your output, simply append an\r
+asterisk to the command name. Examples of both\r
+numbered and unnumbered headings will appear throughout the\r
+balance of this sample document.\r
+\r
+Because the entire article is contained in\r
+the \textbf{document} environment, you can indicate the\r
+start of a new paragraph with a blank line in your\r
+input file; that is why this sentence forms a separate paragraph.\r
+\r
+\subsection{Type Changes and {\subsecit Special} Characters}\r
+We have already seen several typeface changes in this sample. You\r
+can indicate italicized words or phrases in your text with\r
+the command \texttt{{\char'134}textit}; emboldening with the\r
+command \texttt{{\char'134}textbf}\r
+and typewriter-style (for instance, for computer code) with\r
+\texttt{{\char'134}texttt}. But remember, you do not\r
+have to indicate typestyle changes when such changes are\r
+part of the \textit{structural} elements of your\r
+article; for instance, the heading of this subsection will\r
+be in a sans serif\footnote{A third footnote, here.\r
+Let's make this a rather short one to\r
+see how it looks.} typeface, but that is handled by the\r
+document class file. Take care with the use\r
+of\footnote{A fourth, and last, footnote.}\r
+the curly braces in typeface changes; they mark\r
+the beginning and end of\r
+the text that is to be in the different typeface.\r
+\r
+You can use whatever symbols, accented characters, or\r
+non-English characters you need anywhere in your document;\r
+you can find a complete list of what is\r
+available in the \textit{\LaTeX\\r
+User's Guide}\cite{Lamport:LaTeX}.\r
+\r
+\subsection{Math Equations}\r
+You may want to display math equations in three distinct styles:\r
+inline, numbered or non-numbered display. Each of\r
+the three are discussed in the next sections.\r
+\r
+\subsubsection{Inline (In-text) Equations}\r
+A formula that appears in the running text is called an\r
+inline or in-text formula. It is produced by the\r
+\textbf{math} environment, which can be\r
+invoked with the usual \texttt{{\char'134}begin. . .{\char'134}end}\r
+construction or with the short form \texttt{\$. . .\$}. You\r
+can use any of the symbols and structures,\r
+from $\alpha$ to $\omega$, available in\r
+\LaTeX\cite{Lamport:LaTeX}; this section will simply show a\r
+few examples of in-text equations in context. Notice how\r
+this equation: \begin{math}\lim_{n\rightarrow \infty}x=0\end{math},\r
+set here in in-line math style, looks slightly different when\r
+set in display style. (See next section).\r
+\r
+\subsubsection{Display Equations}\r
+A numbered display equation -- one set off by vertical space\r
+from the text and centered horizontally -- is produced\r
+by the \textbf{equation} environment. An unnumbered display\r
+equation is produced by the \textbf{displaymath} environment.\r
+\r
+Again, in either environment, you can use any of the symbols\r
+and structures available in \LaTeX; this section will just\r
+give a couple of examples of display equations in context.\r
+First, consider the equation, shown as an inline equation above:\r
+\begin{equation}\lim_{n\rightarrow \infty}x=0\end{equation}\r
+Notice how it is formatted somewhat differently in\r
+the \textbf{displaymath}\r
+environment. Now, we'll enter an unnumbered equation:\r
+\begin{displaymath}\sum_{i=0}^{\infty} x + 1\end{displaymath}\r
+and follow it with another numbered equation:\r
+\begin{equation}\sum_{i=0}^{\infty}x_i=\int_{0}^{\pi+2} f\end{equation}\r
+just to demonstrate \LaTeX's able handling of numbering.\r
+\r
+\subsection{Citations}\r
+Citations to articles \cite{bowman:reasoning,\r
+clark:pct, braams:babel, herlihy:methodology},\r
+conference proceedings \cite{clark:pct} or\r
+books \cite{salas:calculus, Lamport:LaTeX} listed\r
+in the Bibliography section of your\r
+article will occur throughout the text of your article.\r
+You should use BibTeX to automatically produce this bibliography;\r
+you simply need to insert one of several citation commands with\r
+a key of the item cited in the proper location in\r
+the \texttt{.tex} file \cite{Lamport:LaTeX}.\r
+The key is a short reference you invent to uniquely\r
+identify each work; in this sample document, the key is\r
+the first author's surname and a\r
+word from the title. This identifying key is included\r
+with each item in the \texttt{.bib} file for your article.\r
+\r
+The details of the construction of the \texttt{.bib} file\r
+are beyond the scope of this sample document, but more\r
+information can be found in the \textit{Author's Guide},\r
+and exhaustive details in the \textit{\LaTeX\ User's\r
+Guide}\cite{Lamport:LaTeX}.\r
+\r
+This article shows only the plainest form\r
+of the citation command, using \texttt{{\char'134}cite}.\r
+This is what is stipulated in the SIGS style specifications.\r
+No other citation format is endorsed or supported.\r
+\r
+\subsection{Tables}\r
+Because tables cannot be split across pages, the best\r
+placement for them is typically the top of the page\r
+nearest their initial cite. To\r
+ensure this proper ``floating'' placement of tables, use the\r
+environment \textbf{table} to enclose the table's contents and\r
+the table caption. The contents of the table itself must go\r
+in the \textbf{tabular} environment, to\r
+be aligned properly in rows and columns, with the desired\r
+horizontal and vertical rules. Again, detailed instructions\r
+on \textbf{tabular} material\r
+is found in the \textit{\LaTeX\ User's Guide}.\r
+\r
+Immediately following this sentence is the point at which\r
+Table 1 is included in the input file; compare the\r
+placement of the table here with the table in the printed\r
+dvi output of this document.\r
+\r
+\begin{table}\r
+\centering\r
+\caption{Frequency of Special Characters}\r
+\begin{tabular}{|c|c|l|} \hline\r
+Non-English or Math&Frequency&Comments\\ \hline\r
+\O & 1 in 1,000& For Swedish names\\ \hline\r
+$\pi$ & 1 in 5& Common in math\\ \hline\r
+\$ & 4 in 5 & Used in business\\ \hline\r
+$\Psi^2_1$ & 1 in 40,000& Unexplained usage\\\r
+\hline\end{tabular}\r
+\end{table}\r
+\r
+To set a wider table, which takes up the whole width of\r
+the page's live area, use the environment\r
+\textbf{table*} to enclose the table's contents and\r
+the table caption. As with a single-column table, this wide\r
+table will ``float" to a location deemed more desirable.\r
+Immediately following this sentence is the point at which\r
+Table 2 is included in the input file; again, it is\r
+instructive to compare the placement of the\r
+table here with the table in the printed dvi\r
+output of this document.\r
+\r
+\r
+\begin{table*}\r
+\centering\r
+\caption{Some Typical Commands}\r
+\begin{tabular}{|c|c|l|} \hline\r
+Command&A Number&Comments\\ \hline\r
+\texttt{{\char'134}alignauthor} & 100& Author alignment\\ \hline\r
+\texttt{{\char'134}numberofauthors}& 200& Author enumeration\\ \hline\r
+\texttt{{\char'134}table}& 300 & For tables\\ \hline\r
+\texttt{{\char'134}table*}& 400& For wider tables\\ \hline\end{tabular}\r
+\end{table*}\r
+% end the environment with {table*}, NOTE not {table}!\r
+\r
+\subsection{Figures}\r
+Like tables, figures cannot be split across pages; the\r
+best placement for them\r
+is typically the top or the bottom of the page nearest\r
+their initial cite. To ensure this proper ``floating'' placement\r
+of figures, use the environment\r
+\textbf{figure} to enclose the figure and its caption.\r
+\r
+This sample document contains examples of \textbf{.eps}\r
+and \textbf{.ps} files to be displayable with \LaTeX. More\r
+details on each of these is found in the \textit{Author's Guide}.\r
+\r
+\begin{figure}\r
+\centering\r
+\epsfig{file=fly.eps}\r
+\caption{A sample black and white graphic (.eps format).}\r
+\end{figure}\r
+\r
+\begin{figure}\r
+\centering\r
+\epsfig{file=fly.eps, height=1in, width=1in}\r
+\caption{A sample black and white graphic (.eps format)\r
+that has been resized with the \texttt{epsfig} command.}\r
+\end{figure}\r
+\r
+\r
+As was the case with tables, you may want a figure\r
+that spans two columns. To do this, and still to\r
+ensure proper ``floating'' placement of tables, use the environment\r
+\textbf{figure*} to enclose the figure and its caption.\r
+\begin{figure*}\r
+\centering\r
+\epsfig{file=flies.eps}\r
+\caption{A sample black and white graphic (.eps format)\r
+that needs to span two columns of text.}\r
+\end{figure*}\r
+and don't forget to end the environment with\r
+{figure*}, not {figure}!\r
+\r
+Note that either {\textbf{.ps}} or {\textbf{.eps}} formats are\r
+used; use\r
+the \texttt{{\char'134}epsfig} or \texttt{{\char'134}psfig}\r
+commands as appropriate for the different file types.\r
+\r
+\begin{figure}\r
+\centering\r
+\psfig{file=rosette.ps, height=1in, width=1in,}\r
+\caption{A sample black and white graphic (.ps format) that has\r
+been resized with the \texttt{psfig} command.}\r
+\vskip -6pt\r
+\end{figure}\r
+\r
+\subsection{Theorem-like Constructs}\r
+Other common constructs that may occur in your article are\r
+the forms for logical constructs like theorems, axioms,\r
+corollaries and proofs. There are\r
+two forms, one produced by the\r
+command \texttt{{\char'134}newtheorem} and the\r
+other by the command \texttt{{\char'134}newdef}; perhaps\r
+the clearest and easiest way to distinguish them is\r
+to compare the two in the output of this sample document:\r
+\r
+This uses the \textbf{theorem} environment, created by\r
+the\linebreak\texttt{{\char'134}newtheorem} command:\r
+\newtheorem{theorem}{Theorem}\r
+\begin{theorem}\r
+Let $f$ be continuous on $[a,b]$. If $G$ is\r
+an antiderivative for $f$ on $[a,b]$, then\r
+\begin{displaymath}\int^b_af(t)dt = G(b) - G(a).\end{displaymath}\r
+\end{theorem}\r
+\r
+The other uses the \textbf{definition} environment, created\r
+by the \texttt{{\char'134}newdef} command:\r
+\newdef{definition}{Definition}\r
+\begin{definition}\r
+If $z$ is irrational, then by $e^z$ we mean the\r
+unique number which has\r
+logarithm $z$: \begin{displaymath}{\log e^z = z}\end{displaymath}\r
+\end{definition}\r
+\r
+Two lists of constructs that use one of these\r
+forms is given in the\r
+\textit{Author's Guidelines}.\r
+ \r
+There is one other similar construct environment, which is\r
+already set up\r
+for you; i.e. you must \textit{not} use\r
+a \texttt{{\char'134}newdef} command to\r
+create it: the \textbf{proof} environment. Here\r
+is a example of its use:\r
+\begin{proof}\r
+Suppose on the contrary there exists a real number $L$ such that\r
+\begin{displaymath}\r
+\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty} \frac{f(x)}{g(x)} = L.\r
+\end{displaymath}\r
+Then\r
+\begin{displaymath}\r
+l=\lim_{x\rightarrow c} f(x)\r
+= \lim_{x\rightarrow c}\r
+\left[ g{x} \cdot \frac{f(x)}{g(x)} \right ]\r
+= \lim_{x\rightarrow c} g(x) \cdot \lim_{x\rightarrow c}\r
+\frac{f(x)}{g(x)} = 0\cdot L = 0,\r
+\end{displaymath}\r
+which contradicts our assumption that $l\neq 0$.\r
+\end{proof}\r
+\r
+Complete rules about using these environments and using the\r
+two different creation commands are in the\r
+\textit{Author's Guide}; please consult it for more\r
+detailed instructions. If you need to use another construct,\r
+not listed therein, which you want to have the same\r
+formatting as the Theorem\r
+or the Definition\cite{salas:calculus} shown above,\r
+use the \texttt{{\char'134}newtheorem} or the\r
+\texttt{{\char'134}newdef} command,\r
+respectively, to create it.\r
+\r
+\subsection*{A {\secit Caveat} for the \TeX\ Expert}\r
+Because you have just been given permission to\r
+use the \texttt{{\char'134}newdef} command to create a\r
+new form, you might think you can\r
+use \TeX's \texttt{{\char'134}def} to create a\r
+new command: \textit{Please refrain from doing this!}\r
+Remember that your \LaTeX\ source code is primarily intended\r
+to create camera-ready copy, but may be converted\r
+to other forms -- e.g. HTML. If you inadvertently omit\r
+some or all of the \texttt{{\char'134}def}s recompilation will\r
+be, to say the least, problematic.\r
+\r
+\section{Conclusions}\r
+This paragraph will end the body of this sample document.\r
+Remember that you might still have Acknowledgments or\r
+Appendices; brief samples of these\r
+follow. There is still the Bibliography to deal with; and\r
+we will make a disclaimer about that here: with the exception\r
+of the reference to the \LaTeX\ book, the citations in\r
+this paper are to articles which have nothing to\r
+do with the present subject and are used as\r
+examples only.\r
+%\end{document} % This is where a 'short' article might terminate\r
+\r
+%ACKNOWLEDGMENTS are optional\r
+\section{Acknowledgments}\r
+This section is optional; it is a location for you\r
+to acknowledge grants, funding, editing assistance and\r
+what have you. In the present case, for example, the\r
+authors would like to thank Gerald Murray of ACM for\r
+his help in codifying this \textit{Author's Guide}\r
+and the \textbf{.cls} and \textbf{.tex} files that it describes.\r
+\r
+%\r
+% The following two commands are all you need in the\r
+% initial runs of your .tex file to\r
+% produce the bibliography for the citations in your paper.\r
+\bibliographystyle{abbrv}\r
+\bibliography{sigproc} % sigproc.bib is the name of the Bibliography in this case\r
+% You must have a proper ".bib" file\r
+% and remember to run:\r
+% latex bibtex latex latex\r
+% to resolve all references\r
+%\r
+% ACM needs 'a single self-contained file'!\r
+%\r
+%APPENDICES are optional\r
+%\balancecolumns\r
+\appendix\r
+%Appendix A\r
+\section{Headings in Appendices}\r
+The rules about hierarchical headings discussed above for\r
+the body of the article are different in the appendices.\r
+In the \textbf{appendix} environment, the command\r
+\textbf{section} is used to\r
+indicate the start of each Appendix, with alphabetic order\r
+designation (i.e. the first is A, the second B, etc.) and\r
+a title (if you include one). So, if you need\r
+hierarchical structure\r
+\textit{within} an Appendix, start with \textbf{subsection} as the\r
+highest level. Here is an outline of the body of this\r
+document in Appendix-appropriate form:\r
+\subsection{Introduction}\r
+\subsection{The Body of the Paper}\r
+\subsubsection{Type Changes and Special Characters}\r
+\subsubsection{Math Equations}\r
+\paragraph{Inline (In-text) Equations}\r
+\paragraph{Display Equations}\r
+\subsubsection{Citations}\r
+\subsubsection{Tables}\r
+\subsubsection{Figures}\r
+\subsubsection{Theorem-like Constructs}\r
+\subsubsection*{A Caveat for the \TeX\ Expert}\r
+\subsection{Conclusions}\r
+\subsection{Acknowledgments}\r
+\subsection{Additional Authors}\r
+This section is inserted by \LaTeX; you do not insert it.\r
+You just add the names and information in the\r
+\texttt{{\char'134}additionalauthors} command at the start\r
+of the document.\r
+\subsection{References}\r
+Generated by bibtex from your ~.bib file. Run latex,\r
+then bibtex, then latex twice (to resolve references)\r
+to create the ~.bbl file. Insert that ~.bbl file into\r
+the .tex source file and comment out\r
+the command \texttt{{\char'134}thebibliography}.\r
+% This next section command marks the start of\r
+% Appendix B, and does not continue the present hierarchy\r
+\section{More Help for the Hardy}\r
+The sig-alternate.cls file itself is chock-full of succinct\r
+and helpful comments. If you consider yourself a moderately\r
+experienced to expert user of \LaTeX, you may find reading\r
+it useful but please remember not to change it.\r
+%\balancecolumns % GM June 2007\r
+% That's all folks!\r
+\end{document}\r
projects / quix0rs-apt-p2p.git / commitdiff